Red Hat Summit Red Hat SummitSupportKonsoleEntwicklerDemo startenKontakt

Dieser Inhalt ist in der von Ihnen ausgewählten Sprache nicht verfügbar.

Configuring and managing networking

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 8

Managing network interfaces, firewalls, and advanced networking features

Red Hat Customer Content Services

Abstract

Using the networking capabilities of Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL), you can configure your host to meet your organization's network and security requirements. For example:
  • You can configure bonds, VLANs, bridges, tunnels and other network types to connect the host to the network.
  • You can build performance-critical firewalls for the local host and the entire network. RHEL contains packet filtering software, such as the firewalld service, the nftables framework, and Express Data Path (XDP).
  • RHEL also supports advanced networking features, such as policy-based routing and Multipath TCP (MPTCP).

Providing feedback on Red Hat documentation
Link kopieren

We appreciate your feedback on our documentation. Let us know how we can improve it.

Submitting feedback through Jira (account required)

  1. Log in to the Jira website.
  2. Click Create in the top navigation bar.
  3. Enter a descriptive title in the Summary field.
  4. Enter your suggestion for improvement in the Description field. Include links to the relevant parts of the documentation.
  5. Click Create at the bottom of the dialogue.

Chapter 1. Implementing consistent network interface naming
Link kopieren

The udev device manager implements consistent device naming in Red Hat Enterprise Linux. The device manager supports different naming schemes and, by default, assigns fixed names based on firmware, topology, and location information.

Without consistent device naming, the Linux kernel assigns names to network interfaces by combining a fixed prefix and an index. The index increases as the kernel initializes the network devices. For example, eth0 represents the first Ethernet device being probed on start-up. If you add another network interface controller to the system, the assignment of the kernel device names is no longer fixed because, after a reboot, the devices can initialize in a different order. In that case, the kernel can name the devices differently.

To solve this problem, udev assigns consistent device names. This has the following advantages:

  • Device names are stable across reboots.
  • Device names stay fixed even if you add or remove hardware.
  • Defective hardware can be seamlessly replaced.
  • The network naming is stateless and does not require explicit configuration files.
Warning

Generally, Red Hat does not support systems where consistent device naming is disabled. For exceptions, see the Red Hat Knowledgebase solution Is it safe to set net.ifnames=0.

1.1. How the udev device manager renames network interfaces
Link kopieren

The udev device manager processes a set of rules to implement a consistent naming scheme for network interfaces.

Order of rule files:

  1. Optional: /usr/lib/udev/rules.d/60-net.rules

    The /usr/lib/udev/rules.d/60-net.rules file defines that the deprecated /usr/lib/udev/rename_device helper utility searches for the HWADDR parameter in /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-* files. If the value set in the variable matches the MAC address of an interface, the helper utility renames the interface to the name set in the DEVICE parameter of the ifcfg file.

    If the system uses only NetworkManager connection profiles in keyfile format, udev skips this step.

  2. Only on Dell systems: /usr/lib/udev/rules.d/71-biosdevname.rules

    This file exists only if the biosdevname package is installed, and the rules file defines that the biosdevname utility renames the interface according to its naming policy, if it was not renamed in the previous step.

    Note

    Install and use biosdevname only on Dell systems.

  3. /usr/lib/udev/rules.d/75-net-description.rules

    This file defines how udev examines the network interface and sets the properties in udev-internal variables. These variables are then processed in the next step by the /usr/lib/udev/rules.d/80-net-setup-link.rules file. Some of the properties can be undefined.

  4. /usr/lib/udev/rules.d/80-net-setup-link.rules

    This file calls the net_setup_link builtin of the udev service, and udev renames the interface based on the order of the policies in the NamePolicy parameter in the /usr/lib/systemd/network/99-default.link file. For further details, see Network interface naming policies.

    If none of the policies applies, udev does not rename the interface.

1.2. Network interface naming policies
Link kopieren

By default, the udev device manager uses the /usr/lib/systemd/network/99-default.link file to determine how it renames interfaces. The NamePolicy parameter in this file defines which naming policies udev applies and in what order.

Default order: 

NamePolicy=kernel database onboard slot path
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

The following table describes the different actions of udev based on which policy matches first as specified by the NamePolicy parameter:

Expand
PolicyDescriptionExample name

kernel

If the kernel indicates that a device name is predictable, udev does not rename this device.

lo

database

This policy assigns names based on mappings in the udev hardware database. For details, see the hwdb(7) man page on your system.

idrac

onboard

Device names incorporate firmware or BIOS-provided index numbers for onboard devices.

eno1

slot

Device names incorporate firmware or BIOS-provided PCI Express (PCIe) hot-plug slot-index numbers.

ens1

path

Device names incorporate the physical location of the connector of the hardware.

enp1s0

mac

Device names incorporate the MAC address. By default, Red Hat Enterprise Linux does not use this policy, but administrators can enable it.

enx525400d5e0fb

1.3. Network interface naming schemes
Link kopieren

The udev device manager uses certain stable interface attributes that device drivers provide to generate consistent device names.

If a new udev version changes how the service creates names for certain interfaces, Red Hat adds a new scheme version and documents the details in the systemd.net-naming-scheme(7) man page on your system. By default, Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) 8 uses the rhel-8.0 naming scheme, even if you install or update to a later minor version of RHEL.

If you want to use a scheme other than the default, you can switch the network interface naming scheme.

For further details about the naming schemes for different device types and platforms, see the systemd.net-naming-scheme(7) man page on your system.

1.4. Switching to a different network interface naming scheme
Link kopieren

By default, (RHEL) uses the rhel-8.0 naming scheme, even if you install or update to a later minor version of RHEL. While the default naming scheme fits in most scenarios, there might be reasons to switch to a different scheme version.

Examples when you must change the naming scheme:

  • A new scheme can help to better identify a device if it adds additional attributes, such as a slot number, to an interface name.
  • An new scheme can prevent udev from falling back to the kernel-assigned device names (eth*). This happens if the driver does not provide enough unique attributes for two or more interfaces to generate unique names for them.

Prerequisites

  • You have access to the console of the server.

Procedure

  1. List the network interfaces: 

    # ip link show
2: eno1: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 00:00:5e:00:53:1a brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Record the MAC addresses of the interfaces.

  2. Optional: Display the ID_NET_NAMING_SCHEME property of a network interface to identify the naming scheme that RHEL currently uses: 

    # udevadm info --query=property /sys/class/net/eno1 | grep "ID_NET_NAMING_SCHEME"
ID_NET_NAMING_SCHEME=rhel-8.0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that the property is not available on the lo loopback device.

  3. Append the net.naming-scheme=<scheme> option to the command line of all installed kernels, for example: 

    # grubby --update-kernel=ALL --args=net.naming-scheme=rhel-8.4
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Reboot the system. 

    # reboot
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Based on the MAC addresses you recorded, identify the new names of network interfaces that have changed due to the different naming scheme: 

    # ip link show
2: eno1np0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 00:00:5e:00:53:1a brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    After switching the scheme, udev names the device with the specified MAC address eno1np0, whereas it was named eno1 before.

  6. Identify which NetworkManager connection profile uses an interface with the previous name: 

    # nmcli -f device,name connection show
DEVICE  NAME
eno1  example_profile
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  7. Set the connection.interface-name property in the connection profile to the new interface name: 

    # nmcli connection modify example_profile connection.interface-name "eno1np0"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  8. Reactivate the connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection up example_profile
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Identify the naming scheme that RHEL now uses by displaying the ID_NET_NAMING_SCHEME property of a network interface: 

    # udevadm info --query=property /sys/class/net/eno1np0 | grep "ID_NET_NAMING_SCHEME"
ID_NET_NAMING_SCHEME=_rhel-8.4
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

1.5. Determining a predictable RoCE device name on the IBM Z platform
Link kopieren

On Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) 8.7 and later, the udev device manager sets names for RoCE interfaces on IBM Z as follows:

  • If the host enforces a unique identifier (UID) for a device, udev assigns a consistent device name that is based on the UID, for example eno<UID_in_decimal>.

  • If the host does not enforce a UID for a device, the behavior depends on your settings:

    • By default, udev uses unpredictable names for the device.
    • If you set the net.naming-scheme=rhel-8.7 kernel command line option, udev assigns a consistent device name that is based on the function identifier (FID) of the device, for example ens<FID_in_decimal>.

Manually configure predictable device name for RoCE interfaces on IBM Z in the following cases:

  • Your host runs RHEL 8.6 or earlier and enforces a UID for a device, and you plan to update to RHEL 8.7 or later.

    After an update to RHEL 8.7 or later, udev uses consistent interface names. However, if you used unpredictable device names before the update, NetworkManager connection profiles still use these names and fail to activate until you update the affected profiles.

  • Your host runs RHEL 8.7 or later and does not enforce a UID, and you plan to upgrade to RHEL 9.

Before you can use a udev rule or a systemd link file to rename an interface manually, you must determine a predictable device name.

Prerequisites

  • An RoCE controller is installed in the system.
  • The sysfsutils package is installed.

Procedure

  1. Display the available network devices, and note the names of the RoCE devices: 

    # ip link show
...
2: enP5165p0s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc mq state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the device path in the /sys/ file system: 

    # systool -c net -p
Class = "net"

  Class Device = "enP5165p0s0"
  Class Device path = "/sys/devices/pci142d:00/142d:00:00.0/net/enP5165p0s0"
    Device = "142d:00:00.0"
    Device path = "/sys/devices/pci142d:00/142d:00:00.0"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Use the path shown in the Device path field in the next steps.

  3. Display the value of the <device_path>/uid_id_unique file, for example: 

    # cat /sys/devices/pci142d:00/142d:00:00.0/uid_id_unique
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The displayed value indicates whether UID uniqueness is enforced or not, and you require this value in later steps.

  4. Determine a unique identifier:

    • If UID uniqueness is enforced (1), display the UID stored in the <device_path>/uid file, for example: 

      # cat /sys/devices/pci142d:00/142d:00:00.0/uid
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    • If UID uniqueness is not enforced (0), display the FID stored in the <device_path>/function_id file, for example: 

      # cat /sys/devices/pci142d:00/142d:00:00.0/function_id
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The outputs of the commands display the UID and FID values in hexadecimal.

  5. Convert the hexadecimal identifier to decimal, for example: 

    # printf "%d\n" 0x00001402
5122
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  6. To determine the predictable device name, append the identifier in decimal format to the corresponding prefix based on whether UID uniqueness is enforced or not:

    • If UID uniqueness is enforced, append the identifier to the eno prefix, for example eno5122.
    • If UID uniqueness is not enforced, append the identifier to the ens prefix, for example ens5122.

1.6. Customizing the prefix for Ethernet interfaces during installation
Link kopieren

If you do not want to use the default device-naming policy for Ethernet interfaces, you can set a custom device prefix during the Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) installation.

Important

Red Hat supports systems with customized Ethernet prefixes only if you set the prefix during the RHEL installation. Using the prefixdevname utility on already deployed systems is not supported.

If you set a device prefix during the installation, the udev service uses the <prefix><index> format for Ethernet interfaces after the installation. For example, if you set the prefix net, the service assigns the names net0, net1, and so on to the Ethernet interfaces.

The udev service appends the index to the custom prefix, and preserves the index values of known Ethernet interfaces. If you add an interface, udev assigns an index value that is one greater than the previously-assigned index value to the new interface.

Prerequisites

  • The prefix consists of ASCII characters.
  • The prefix is an alphanumeric string.
  • The prefix is shorter than 16 characters.
  • The prefix does not conflict with any other well-known network interface prefix, such as eth, eno, ens, and em.

Procedure

  1. Boot the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation media.

  2. In the boot manager, follow these steps:

    1. Select the Install Red Hat Enterprise Linux <version> entry.
    2. Press Tab to edit the entry.
    3. Append net.ifnames.prefix=<prefix> to the kernel options.
    4. Press Enter to start the installation program.
  3. Install Red Hat Enterprise Linux.

Verification

  • To verify the interface names, display the network interfaces: 

    # ip link show
...
2: net0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 00:00:5e:00:53:1a brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

You can use udev rules to implement custom network interface names that reflect your organization’s requirements.

Procedure

  1. Identify the network interface that you want to rename: 

    # ip link show
...
enp1s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 00:00:5e:00:53:1a brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Record the MAC address of the interface.

  2. Display the device type ID of the interface: 

    # cat /sys/class/net/enp1s0/type
1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Create the /etc/udev/rules.d/70-persistent-net.rules file, and add a rule for each interface that you want to rename: 

    SUBSYSTEM=="net",ACTION=="add",ATTR{address}=="<MAC_address>",ATTR{type}=="<device_type_id>",NAME="<new_interface_name>"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Important

    Use only 70-persistent-net.rules as a file name if you require consistent device names during the boot process. The dracut utility adds a file with this name to the initrd image if you regenerate the RAM disk image.

    For example, use the following rule to rename the interface with MAC address 00:00:5e:00:53:1a to provider0: 

    SUBSYSTEM=="net",ACTION=="add",ATTR{address}=="00:00:5e:00:53:1a",ATTR{type}=="1",NAME="provider0"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Optional: Regenerate the initrd RAM disk image: 

    # dracut -f
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    You require this step only if you need networking capabilities in the RAM disk. For example, this is the case if the root file system is stored on a network device, such as iSCSI.

  5. Identify which NetworkManager connection profile uses the interface that you want to rename: 

    # nmcli -f device,name connection show
DEVICE  NAME
enp1s0  example_profile
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  6. Unset the connection.interface-name property in the connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection modify example_profile connection.interface-name ""
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  7. Temporarily, configure the connection profile to match both the new and the previous interface name: 

    # nmcli connection modify example_profile match.interface-name "provider0 enp1s0"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  8. Reboot the system: 

    # reboot
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  9. Verify that the device with the MAC address that you specified in the link file has been renamed to provider0: 

    # ip link show
provider0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc mq state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 00:00:5e:00:53:1a brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  10. Configure the connection profile to match only the new interface name: 

    # nmcli connection modify example_profile match.interface-name "provider0"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    You have now removed the old interface name from the connection profile.

  11. Reactivate the connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection up example_profile
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 2. Configuring an Ethernet connection
Link kopieren

NetworkManager creates a connection profile for each Ethernet adapter that is installed in a host. By default, this profile uses DHCP for both IPv4 and IPv6 connections.

Modify this automatically-created profile or add a new one in the following cases:

  • The network requires custom settings, such as a static IP address configuration.
  • You require multiple profiles because the host roams among different networks.

Red Hat Enterprise Linux provides administrators different options to configure Ethernet connections. For example:

  • Use nmcli to configure connections on the command line.
  • Use nmtui to configure connections in a text-based user interface.
  • Use the GNOME Settings menu or nm-connection-editor application to configure connections in a graphical interface.
  • Use nmstatectl to configure connections through the nmstate API.
  • Use RHEL system roles to automate the configuration of connections on one or multiple hosts.
Note

If you want to manually configure Ethernet connections on hosts running in the Microsoft Azure cloud, disable the cloud-init service or configure it to ignore the network settings retrieved from the cloud environment. Otherwise, cloud-init will override on the next reboot the network settings that you have manually configured.

2.1. Configuring an Ethernet connection by using nmcli
Link kopieren

If you connect a host to the network over Ethernet, you can manage the connection’s settings on the command line by using the nmcli utility.

Prerequisites

  • A physical or virtual Ethernet Network Interface Controller (NIC) exists in the server’s configuration.

Procedure

  1. List the NetworkManager connection profiles: 

    # nmcli connection show
NAME                UUID                                  TYPE      DEVICE
Wired connection 1  a5eb6490-cc20-3668-81f8-0314a27f3f75  ethernet  enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    By default, NetworkManager creates a profile for each NIC in the host. If you plan to connect this NIC only to a specific network, adapt the automatically-created profile. If you plan to connect this NIC to networks with different settings, create individual profiles for each network.

  2. If you want to create an additional connection profile, enter: 

    # nmcli connection add con-name <connection-name> ifname <device-name> type ethernet
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Skip this step to modify an existing profile.

  3. Optional: Rename the connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection modify "Wired connection 1" connection.id "Internal-LAN"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    On hosts with multiple profiles, a meaningful name makes it easier to identify the purpose of a profile.

  4. Display the current settings of the connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection show Internal-LAN
...
connection.interface-name:     enp1s0
connection.autoconnect:        yes
ipv4.method:                   auto
ipv6.method:                   auto
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Configure the IPv4 settings:

    • To use DHCP, enter: 

      # nmcli connection modify Internal-LAN ipv4.method auto
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      Skip this step if ipv4.method is already set to auto (default).

    • To set a static IPv4 address, network mask, default gateway, DNS servers, and search domain, enter: 

      # nmcli connection modify Internal-LAN ipv4.method manual ipv4.addresses 192.0.2.1/24 ipv4.gateway 192.0.2.254 ipv4.dns 192.0.2.200 ipv4.dns-search example.com
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  6. Configure the IPv6 settings:

    • To use stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC), enter: 

      # nmcli connection modify Internal-LAN ipv6.method auto
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      Skip this step if ipv6.method is already set to auto (default).

    • To set a static IPv6 address, network mask, default gateway, DNS servers, and search domain, enter: 

      # nmcli connection modify Internal-LAN ipv6.method manual ipv6.addresses 2001:db8:1::fffe/64 ipv6.gateway 2001:db8:1::fffe ipv6.dns 2001:db8:1::ffbb ipv6.dns-search example.com
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  7. To customize other settings in the profile, use the following command: 

    # nmcli connection modify <connection-name> <setting> <value>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Enclose values with spaces or semicolons in quotes.

  8. Activate the profile: 

    # nmcli connection up Internal-LAN
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the IP settings of the NIC: 

    # ip address show enp1s0
2: enp1s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel state UP group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:17:b8:b6 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
    inet 192.0.2.1/24 brd 192.0.2.255 scope global noprefixroute enp1s0
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    inet6 2001:db8:1::fffe/64 scope global noprefixroute
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the IPv4 default gateway: 

    # ip route show default
default via 192.0.2.254 dev enp1s0 proto static metric 102
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Display the IPv6 default gateway: 

    # ip -6 route show default
default via 2001:db8:1::fffe dev enp1s0 proto static metric 102 pref medium
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Display the DNS settings: 

    # cat /etc/resolv.conf
search example.com
nameserver 192.0.2.200
nameserver 2001:db8:1::ffbb
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If multiple connection profiles are active at the same time, the order of nameserver entries depend on the DNS priority values in these profiles and the connection types.

  5. Use the ping utility to verify that this host can send packets to other hosts: 

    # ping <host-name-or-IP-address>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Troubleshooting

  • Verify that the network cable is plugged-in to the host and a switch.
  • Check whether the link failure exists only on this host or also on other hosts connected to the same switch.
  • Verify that the network cable and the network interface are working as expected. Perform hardware diagnosis steps and replace defective cables and network interface cards.
  • If the configuration on the disk does not match the configuration on the device, starting or restarting NetworkManager creates an in-memory connection that reflects the configuration of the device. For further details and how to avoid this problem, see the Red Hat Knowledgebase solution NetworkManager duplicates a connection after restart of NetworkManager service.

If you connect a host to the network over Ethernet, you can manage the connection’s settings on the command line by using the nmcli utility.

Prerequisites

  • A physical or virtual Ethernet Network Interface Controller (NIC) exists in the server’s configuration.

Procedure

  1. List the NetworkManager connection profiles: 

    # nmcli connection show
NAME                UUID                                  TYPE      DEVICE
Wired connection 1  a5eb6490-cc20-3668-81f8-0314a27f3f75  ethernet  enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    By default, NetworkManager creates a profile for each NIC in the host. If you plan to connect this NIC only to a specific network, adapt the automatically-created profile. If you plan to connect this NIC to networks with different settings, create individual profiles for each network.

  2. Start nmcli in interactive mode:

    • To create an additional connection profile, enter: 

      # nmcli connection edit type ethernet con-name "<connection-name>"
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    • To modify an existing connection profile, enter: 

      # nmcli connection edit con-name "<connection-name>"
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Optional: Rename the connection profile: 

    nmcli> set connection.id Internal-LAN
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    On hosts with multiple profiles, a meaningful name makes it easier to identify the purpose of a profile.

    Do not use quotes to set an ID that contains spaces to avoid that nmcli makes the quotes part of the name. For example, to set Example Connection as ID, enter set connection.id Example Connection.

  4. Display the current settings of the connection profile: 

    nmcli> print
...
connection.interface-name:     enp1s0
connection.autoconnect:        yes
ipv4.method:                   auto
ipv6.method:                   auto
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. If you create a new connection profile, set the network interface: 

    nmcli> set connection.interface-name enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  6. Configure the IPv4 settings:

    • To use DHCP, enter: 

      nmcli> set ipv4.method auto
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      Skip this step if ipv4.method is already set to auto (default).

    • To set a static IPv4 address, network mask, default gateway, DNS servers, and search domain, enter: 

      nmcli> ipv4.addresses 192.0.2.1/24
Do you also want to set 'ipv4.method' to 'manual'? [yes]: yes
nmcli> ipv4.gateway 192.0.2.254
nmcli> ipv4.dns 192.0.2.200
nmcli> ipv4.dns-search example.com
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  7. Configure the IPv6 settings:

    • To use stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC), enter: 

      nmcli> set ipv6.method auto
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      Skip this step if ipv6.method is already set to auto (default).

    • To set a static IPv6 address, network mask, default gateway, DNS servers, and search domain, enter: 

      nmcli> ipv6.addresses 2001:db8:1::fffe/64
Do you also want to set 'ipv6.method' to 'manual'? [yes]: yes
nmcli> ipv6.gateway 2001:db8:1::fffe
nmcli> ipv6.dns 2001:db8:1::ffbb
nmcli> ipv6.dns-search example.com
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  8. Save and activate the connection: 

    nmcli> save persistent
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  9. Leave the interactive mode: 

    nmcli> quit
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the IP settings of the NIC: 

    # ip address show enp1s0
2: enp1s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel state UP group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:17:b8:b6 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
    inet 192.0.2.1/24 brd 192.0.2.255 scope global noprefixroute enp1s0
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    inet6 2001:db8:1::fffe/64 scope global noprefixroute
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the IPv4 default gateway: 

    # ip route show default
default via 192.0.2.254 dev enp1s0 proto static metric 102
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Display the IPv6 default gateway: 

    # ip -6 route show default
default via 2001:db8:1::fffe dev enp1s0 proto static metric 102 pref medium
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Display the DNS settings: 

    # cat /etc/resolv.conf
search example.com
nameserver 192.0.2.200
nameserver 2001:db8:1::ffbb
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If multiple connection profiles are active at the same time, the order of nameserver entries depend on the DNS priority values in these profiles and the connection types.

  5. Use the ping utility to verify that this host can send packets to other hosts: 

    # ping <host-name-or-IP-address>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Troubleshooting

  • Verify that the network cable is plugged-in to the host and a switch.
  • Check whether the link failure exists only on this host or also on other hosts connected to the same switch.
  • Verify that the network cable and the network interface are working as expected. Perform hardware diagnosis steps and replace defective cables and network interface cards.
  • If the configuration on the disk does not match the configuration on the device, starting or restarting NetworkManager creates an in-memory connection that reflects the configuration of the device. For further details and how to avoid this problem, see the Red Hat Knowledgebase solution NetworkManager duplicates a connection after restart of NetworkManager service.

2.3. Configuring an Ethernet connection by using nmtui
Link kopieren

If you connect a host to an Ethernet network, you can manage the connection’s settings in a text-based user interface. Use the nmtui application to create new profiles and to update existing ones on a host without a graphical interface.

Note

In nmtui:

  • Navigate by using the cursor keys.
  • Press a button by selecting it and hitting Enter.
  • Select and clear checkboxes by using Space.
  • To return to the previous screen, use ESC.

Prerequisites

  • A physical or virtual Ethernet Network Interface Controller (NIC) exists in the server’s configuration.

Procedure

  1. If you do not know the network device name you want to use in the connection, display the available devices: 

    # nmcli device status
DEVICE     TYPE      STATE                   CONNECTION
enp1s0     ethernet  unavailable             --
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Start nmtui: 

    # nmtui
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  3. Select Edit a connection, and press Enter.

  4. Choose whether to add a new connection profile or to modify an existing one:

    • To create a new profile:

      1. Press Add.
      2. Select Ethernet from the list of network types, and press Enter.
    • To modify an existing profile, select the profile from the list, and press Enter.

  5. Optional: Update the name of the connection profile.

    On hosts with multiple profiles, a meaningful name makes it easier to identify the purpose of a profile.

  6. If you create a new connection profile, enter the network device name into the Device field.

  7. Depending on your environment, configure the IP address settings in the IPv4 configuration and IPv6 configuration areas accordingly. For this, press the button next to these areas, and select:

    • Disabled, if this connection does not require an IP address.
    • Automatic, if a DHCP server dynamically assigns an IP address to this NIC.

    • Manual, if the network requires static IP address settings. In this case, you must fill further fields:

      1. Press Show next to the protocol you want to configure to display additional fields.

      2. Press Add next to Addresses, and enter the IP address and the subnet mask in Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) format.

        If you do not specify a subnet mask, NetworkManager sets a /32 subnet mask for IPv4 addresses and /64 for IPv6 addresses.

      3. Enter the address of the default gateway.
      4. Press Add next to DNS servers, and enter the DNS server address.
      5. Press Add next to Search domains, and enter the DNS search domain.

    Figure 2.1. Example of an Ethernet connection with static IP address settings

    nmtui ethernet static IP
    View larger image
    nmtui ethernet static IP
  8. Press OK to create and automatically activate the new connection.
  9. Press Back to return to the main menu.
  10. Select Quit, and press Enter to close the nmtui application.

Verification

  1. Display the IP settings of the NIC: 

    # ip address show enp1s0
2: enp1s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel state UP group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:17:b8:b6 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
    inet 192.0.2.1/24 brd 192.0.2.255 scope global noprefixroute enp1s0
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    inet6 2001:db8:1::fffe/64 scope global noprefixroute
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the IPv4 default gateway: 

    # ip route show default
default via 192.0.2.254 dev enp1s0 proto static metric 102
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Display the IPv6 default gateway: 

    # ip -6 route show default
default via 2001:db8:1::fffe dev enp1s0 proto static metric 102 pref medium
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Display the DNS settings: 

    # cat /etc/resolv.conf
search example.com
nameserver 192.0.2.200
nameserver 2001:db8:1::ffbb
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If multiple connection profiles are active at the same time, the order of nameserver entries depend on the DNS priority values in these profiles and the connection types.

  5. Use the ping utility to verify that this host can send packets to other hosts: 

    # ping <host-name-or-IP-address>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Troubleshooting

  • Verify that the network cable is plugged-in to the host and a switch.
  • Check whether the link failure exists only on this host or also on other hosts connected to the same switch.
  • Verify that the network cable and the network interface are working as expected. Perform hardware diagnosis steps and replace defective cables and network interface cards.
  • If the configuration on the disk does not match the configuration on the device, starting or restarting NetworkManager creates an in-memory connection that reflects the configuration of the device. For further details and how to avoid this problem, see the Red Hat Knowledgebase solution NetworkManager duplicates a connection after restart of NetworkManager service.

2.4. Configuring an Ethernet connection by using control-center
Link kopieren

If you connect a host to the network over Ethernet, you can manage the connection’s settings with a graphical interface by using the GNOME Settings menu.

Note that control-center does not support as many configuration options as the nm-connection-editor application or the nmcli utility.

Prerequisites

  • A physical or virtual Ethernet Network Interface Controller (NIC) exists in the server’s configuration.
  • GNOME is installed.

Procedure

  1. Press the Super key, enter Settings, and press Enter.
  2. Select Network in the navigation on the left.

  3. Choose whether to add a new connection profile or to modify an existing one:

    • To create a new profile, click the + button next to the Ethernet entry.
    • To modify an existing profile, click the gear icon next to the profile entry.

  4. Optional: On the Identity tab, update the name of the connection profile.

    On hosts with multiple profiles, a meaningful name makes it easier to identify the purpose of a profile.

  5. Depending on your environment, configure the IP address settings on the IPv4 and IPv6 tabs accordingly:

    • To use DHCP or IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC), select Automatic (DHCP) as method (default).

    • To set a static IP address, network mask, default gateway, DNS servers, and search domain, select Manual as method, and fill the fields on the tabs:

      IP settings gnome settings
      View larger image
      IP settings gnome settings

  6. Depending on whether you add or modify a connection profile, click the Add or Apply button to save the connection.

    The GNOME control-center automatically activates the connection.

Verification

  1. Display the IP settings of the NIC: 

    # ip address show enp1s0
2: enp1s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel state UP group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:17:b8:b6 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
    inet 192.0.2.1/24 brd 192.0.2.255 scope global noprefixroute enp1s0
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    inet6 2001:db8:1::fffe/64 scope global noprefixroute
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the IPv4 default gateway: 

    # ip route show default
default via 192.0.2.254 dev enp1s0 proto static metric 102
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Display the IPv6 default gateway: 

    # ip -6 route show default
default via 2001:db8:1::fffe dev enp1s0 proto static metric 102 pref medium
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Display the DNS settings: 

    # cat /etc/resolv.conf
search example.com
nameserver 192.0.2.200
nameserver 2001:db8:1::ffbb
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If multiple connection profiles are active at the same time, the order of nameserver entries depend on the DNS priority values in these profiles and the connection types.

  5. Use the ping utility to verify that this host can send packets to other hosts: 

    # ping <host-name-or-IP-address>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Troubleshooting steps

  • Verify that the network cable is plugged-in to the host and a switch.
  • Check whether the link failure exists only on this host or also on other hosts connected to the same switch.
  • Verify that the network cable and the network interface are working as expected. Perform hardware diagnosis steps and replace defective cables and network interface cards.
  • If the configuration on the disk does not match the configuration on the device, starting or restarting NetworkManager creates an in-memory connection that reflects the configuration of the device. For further details and how to avoid this problem, see the Red Hat Knowledgebase solution NetworkManager duplicates a connection after restart of NetworkManager service.

2.5. Configuring an Ethernet connection by using nm-connection-editor
Link kopieren

If you connect a host to the network over Ethernet, you can manage the connection’s settings with a graphical interface by using the nm-connection-editor application.

Prerequisites

  • A physical or virtual Ethernet Network Interface Controller (NIC) exists in the server’s configuration.
  • GNOME is installed.

Procedure

  1. Open a terminal, and enter: 

    $ nm-connection-editor
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Choose whether to add a new connection profile or to modify an existing one:

    • To create a new profile:

      1. Click the + button
      2. Select Ethernet as connection type, and click Create.
    • To modify an existing profile, double-click the profile entry.

  3. Optional: Update the name of the profile in the Connection Name field.

    On hosts with multiple profiles, a meaningful name makes it easier to identify the purpose of a profile.

  4. If you create a new profile, select the device on the Ethernet tab:

    ethernet connection settings

  5. Depending on your environment, configure the IP address settings on the IPv4 Settings and IPv6 Settings tabs accordingly:

    • To use DHCP or IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC), select Automatic (DHCP) as method (default).

    • To set a static IP address, network mask, default gateway, DNS servers, and search domain, select Manual as method, and fill the fields on the tabs:

      IP settings nm connection editor
      View larger image
      IP settings nm connection editor
  6. Click Save.
  7. Close nm-connection-editor.

Verification

  1. Display the IP settings of the NIC: 

    # ip address show enp1s0
2: enp1s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel state UP group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:17:b8:b6 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
    inet 192.0.2.1/24 brd 192.0.2.255 scope global noprefixroute enp1s0
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    inet6 2001:db8:1::fffe/64 scope global noprefixroute
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the IPv4 default gateway: 

    # ip route show default
default via 192.0.2.254 dev enp1s0 proto static metric 102
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Display the IPv6 default gateway: 

    # ip -6 route show default
default via 2001:db8:1::fffe dev enp1s0 proto static metric 102 pref medium
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Display the DNS settings: 

    # cat /etc/resolv.conf
search example.com
nameserver 192.0.2.200
nameserver 2001:db8:1::ffbb
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If multiple connection profiles are active at the same time, the order of nameserver entries depend on the DNS priority values in these profiles and the connection types.

  5. Use the ping utility to verify that this host can send packets to other hosts: 

    # ping <host-name-or-IP-address>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Troubleshooting steps

  • Verify that the network cable is plugged-in to the host and a switch.
  • Check whether the link failure exists only on this host or also on other hosts connected to the same switch.
  • Verify that the network cable and the network interface are working as expected. Perform hardware diagnosis steps and replace defective cables and network interface cards.
  • If the configuration on the disk does not match the configuration on the device, starting or restarting NetworkManager creates an in-memory connection that reflects the configuration of the device. For further details and how to avoid this problem, see the Red Hat Knowledgebase solution NetworkManager duplicates a connection after restart of NetworkManager service.

You can use the declarative Nmstate API to configure an Ethernet connection with static IP addresses, gateways, and DNS settings, and assign them to a specified interface name. Nmstate ensures that the result matches the configuration file or rolls back the changes.

Prerequisites

  • A physical or virtual Ethernet Network Interface Controller (NIC) exists in the server’s configuration.
  • The nmstate package is installed.

Procedure

  1. Create a YAML file, for example ~/create-ethernet-profile.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
interfaces:
- name: enp1s0
  type: ethernet
  state: up
  ipv4:
    enabled: true
    address:
    - ip: 192.0.2.1
      prefix-length: 24
    dhcp: false
  ipv6:
    enabled: true
    address:
    - ip: 2001:db8:1::1
      prefix-length: 64
    autoconf: false
    dhcp: false
routes:
  config:
  - destination: 0.0.0.0/0
    next-hop-address: 192.0.2.254
    next-hop-interface: enp1s0
  - destination: ::/0
    next-hop-address: 2001:db8:1::fffe
    next-hop-interface: enp1s0
dns-resolver:
  config:
    search:
    - example.com
    server:
    - 192.0.2.200
    - 2001:db8:1::ffbb
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    These settings define an Ethernet connection profile for the enp1s0 device with the following settings:

    • A static IPv4 address - 192.0.2.1 with the /24 subnet mask
    • A static IPv6 address - 2001:db8:1::1 with the /64 subnet mask
    • An IPv4 default gateway - 192.0.2.254
    • An IPv6 default gateway - 2001:db8:1::fffe
    • An IPv4 DNS server - 192.0.2.200
    • An IPv6 DNS server - 2001:db8:1::ffbb
    • A DNS search domain - example.com

  2. Apply the settings to the system: 

    # nmstatectl apply ~/create-ethernet-profile.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the current state in YAML format: 

    # nmstatectl show enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the IP settings of the NIC: 

    # ip address show enp1s0
2: enp1s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel state UP group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:17:b8:b6 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
    inet 192.0.2.1/24 brd 192.0.2.255 scope global noprefixroute enp1s0
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    inet6 2001:db8:1::fffe/64 scope global noprefixroute
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Display the IPv4 default gateway: 

    # ip route show default
default via 192.0.2.254 dev enp1s0 proto static metric 102
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Display the IPv6 default gateway: 

    # ip -6 route show default
default via 2001:db8:1::fffe dev enp1s0 proto static metric 102 pref medium
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Display the DNS settings: 

    # cat /etc/resolv.conf
search example.com
nameserver 192.0.2.200
nameserver 2001:db8:1::ffbb
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If multiple connection profiles are active at the same time, the order of nameserver entries depend on the DNS priority values in these profiles and the connection types.

  6. Use the ping utility to verify that this host can send packets to other hosts: 

    # ping <host-name-or-IP-address>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

You can use the network RHEL system role to configure an Ethernet connection with static IP addresses, gateways, and DNS settings, and assign them to a specified interface name.

To connect a Red Hat Enterprise Linux host to an Ethernet network, create a NetworkManager connection profile for the network device. By using Ansible and the network RHEL system role, you can automate this process and remotely configure connection profiles on the hosts defined in a playbook.

Typically, administrators want to reuse a playbook and not maintain individual playbooks for each host to which Ansible should assign static IP addresses. In this case, you can use variables in the playbook and maintain the settings in the inventory. As a result, you need only one playbook to dynamically assign individual settings to multiple hosts.

Prerequisites

  • You have prepared the control node and the managed nodes.
  • You are logged in to the control node as a user who can run playbooks on the managed nodes.
  • The account you use to connect to the managed nodes has sudo permissions on them.
  • A physical or virtual Ethernet device exists in the server configuration.
  • The managed nodes use NetworkManager to configure the network.

Procedure

  1. Edit the ~/inventory file, and append the host-specific settings to the host entries: 

    managed-node-01.example.com interface=enp1s0 ip_v4=192.0.2.1/24 ip_v6=2001:db8:1::1/64 gateway_v4=192.0.2.254 gateway_v6=2001:db8:1::fffe

managed-node-02.example.com interface=enp1s0 ip_v4=192.0.2.2/24 ip_v6=2001:db8:1::2/64 gateway_v4=192.0.2.254 gateway_v6=2001:db8:1::fffe
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configure the network
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com,managed-node-02.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: Ethernet connection profile with static IP address settings
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.network
      vars:
        network_connections:
          - name: "{{ interface }}"
            interface_name: "{{ interface }}"
            type: ethernet
            autoconnect: yes
            ip:
              address:
                - "{{ ip_v4 }}"
                - "{{ ip_v6 }}"
              gateway4: "{{ gateway_v4 }}"
              gateway6: "{{ gateway_v6 }}"
              dns:
                - 192.0.2.200
                - 2001:db8:1::ffbb
              dns_search:
                - example.com
            state: up
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This playbook reads certain values dynamically for each host from the inventory file and uses static values in the playbook for settings which are the same for all hosts.

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.network/README.md file on the control node.

  3. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  4. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Query the Ansible facts of the managed node and verify the active network settings: 

    # ansible managed-node-01.example.com -m ansible.builtin.setup
...
        "ansible_default_ipv4": {
            "address": "192.0.2.1",
            "alias": "enp1s0",
            "broadcast": "192.0.2.255",
            "gateway": "192.0.2.254",
            "interface": "enp1s0",
            "macaddress": "52:54:00:17:b8:b6",
            "mtu": 1500,
            "netmask": "255.255.255.0",
            "network": "192.0.2.0",
            "prefix": "24",
            "type": "ether"
        },
        "ansible_default_ipv6": {
            "address": "2001:db8:1::1",
            "gateway": "2001:db8:1::fffe",
            "interface": "enp1s0",
            "macaddress": "52:54:00:17:b8:b6",
            "mtu": 1500,
            "prefix": "64",
            "scope": "global",
            "type": "ether"
        },
        ...
        "ansible_dns": {
            "nameservers": [
                "192.0.2.1",
                "2001:db8:1::ffbb"
            ],
            "search": [
                "example.com"
            ]
        },
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

You can use the network RHEL system role to configure an Ethernet connection with static IP addresses, gateways, and DNS settings, and assign them to a device based on its path instead of its name.

To connect a Red Hat Enterprise Linux host to an Ethernet network, create a NetworkManager connection profile for the network device. By using Ansible and the network RHEL system role, you can automate this process and remotely configure connection profiles on the hosts defined in a playbook.

Prerequisites

  • You have prepared the control node and the managed nodes.
  • You are logged in to the control node as a user who can run playbooks on the managed nodes.
  • The account you use to connect to the managed nodes has sudo permissions on them.
  • A physical or virtual Ethernet device exists in the server’s configuration.
  • The managed nodes use NetworkManager to configure the network.
  • You know the path of the device. You can display the device path by using the udevadm info /sys/class/net/<device_name> | grep ID_PATH= command.

Procedure

  1. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configure the network
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: Ethernet connection profile with static IP address settings
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.network
      vars:
        network_connections:
          - name: example
            match:
              path:
                - pci-0000:00:0[1-3].0
                - '&!pci-0000:00:02.0'
            type: ethernet
            autoconnect: yes
            ip:
              address:
                - 192.0.2.1/24
                - 2001:db8:1::1/64
              gateway4: 192.0.2.254
              gateway6: 2001:db8:1::fffe
              dns:
                - 192.0.2.200
                - 2001:db8:1::ffbb
              dns_search:
                - example.com
            state: up
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The settings specified in the example playbook include the following:

    match
    Defines that a condition must be met in order to apply the settings. You can only use this variable with the path option.
    path
    Defines the persistent path of a device. You can set it as a fixed path or an expression. Its value can contain modifiers and wildcards. The example applies the settings to devices that match PCI ID 0000:00:0[1-3].0, but not 0000:00:02.0.

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.network/README.md file on the control node.

  2. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  3. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Query the Ansible facts of the managed node and verify the active network settings: 

    # ansible managed-node-01.example.com -m ansible.builtin.setup
...
        "ansible_default_ipv4": {
            "address": "192.0.2.1",
            "alias": "enp1s0",
            "broadcast": "192.0.2.255",
            "gateway": "192.0.2.254",
            "interface": "enp1s0",
            "macaddress": "52:54:00:17:b8:b6",
            "mtu": 1500,
            "netmask": "255.255.255.0",
            "network": "192.0.2.0",
            "prefix": "24",
            "type": "ether"
        },
        "ansible_default_ipv6": {
            "address": "2001:db8:1::1",
            "gateway": "2001:db8:1::fffe",
            "interface": "enp1s0",
            "macaddress": "52:54:00:17:b8:b6",
            "mtu": 1500,
            "prefix": "64",
            "scope": "global",
            "type": "ether"
        },
        ...
        "ansible_dns": {
            "nameservers": [
                "192.0.2.1",
                "2001:db8:1::ffbb"
            ],
            "search": [
                "example.com"
            ]
        },
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

You can use the declarative Nmstate API to configure an Ethernet connection with static IP addresses, gateways, and DNS settings, and assign the configuration to a device based in its PCI address. Nmstate ensures that the result matches the configuration file or rolls back the changes.

Prerequisites

  • A physical or virtual Ethernet Network Interface Controller (NIC) exists in the server’s configuration.
  • A DHCP server is available in the network.
  • The nmstate package is installed.

Procedure

  1. Create a YAML file, for example ~/create-ethernet-profile.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
interfaces:
- name: enp1s0
  type: ethernet
  state: up
  ipv4:
    enabled: true
    auto-dns: true
    auto-gateway: true
    auto-routes: true
    dhcp: true
  ipv6:
    enabled: true
    auto-dns: true
    auto-gateway: true
    auto-routes: true
    autoconf: true
    dhcp: true
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    These settings define an Ethernet connection profile for the enp1s0 device. The connection retrieves IPv4 addresses, IPv6 addresses, default gateway, routes, DNS servers, and search domains from a DHCP server and IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC).

  2. Apply the settings to the system: 

    # nmstatectl apply ~/create-ethernet-profile.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the current state in YAML format: 

    # nmstatectl show enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the IP settings of the NIC: 

    # ip address show enp1s0
2: enp1s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel state UP group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:17:b8:b6 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
    inet 192.0.2.1/24 brd 192.0.2.255 scope global noprefixroute enp1s0
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    inet6 2001:db8:1::fffe/64 scope global noprefixroute
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Display the IPv4 default gateway: 

    # ip route show default
default via 192.0.2.254 dev enp1s0 proto static metric 102
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Display the IPv6 default gateway: 

    # ip -6 route show default
default via 2001:db8:1::fffe dev enp1s0 proto static metric 102 pref medium
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Display the DNS settings: 

    # cat /etc/resolv.conf
search example.com
nameserver 192.0.2.200
nameserver 2001:db8:1::ffbb
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If multiple connection profiles are active at the same time, the order of nameserver entries depend on the DNS priority values in these profiles and the connection types.

  6. Use the ping utility to verify that this host can send packets to other hosts: 

    # ping <host-name-or-IP-address>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

You can use the network RHEL system role to configure an Ethernet connection that retrieves its IP addresses, gateways, and DNS settings from a DHCP server and IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC). With this role you can assign the connection profile to the specified interface name.

To connect a Red Hat Enterprise Linux host to an Ethernet network, create a NetworkManager connection profile for the network device. By using Ansible and the network RHEL system role, you can automate this process and remotely configure connection profiles on the hosts defined in a playbook.

Prerequisites

  • You have prepared the control node and the managed nodes.
  • You are logged in to the control node as a user who can run playbooks on the managed nodes.
  • The account you use to connect to the managed nodes has sudo permissions on them.
  • A physical or virtual Ethernet device exists in the servers' configuration.
  • A DHCP server and SLAAC are available in the network.
  • The managed nodes use the NetworkManager service to configure the network.

Procedure

  1. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configure the network
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: Ethernet connection profile with dynamic IP address settings
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.network
      vars:
        network_connections:
          - name: enp1s0
            interface_name: enp1s0
            type: ethernet
            autoconnect: yes
            ip:
              dhcp4: yes
              auto6: yes
            state: up
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The settings specified in the example playbook include the following:

    dhcp4: yes
    Enables automatic IPv4 address assignment from DHCP, PPP, or similar services.
    auto6: yes
    Enables IPv6 auto-configuration. By default, NetworkManager uses Router Advertisements. If the router announces the managed flag, NetworkManager requests an IPv6 address and prefix from a DHCPv6 server.

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.network/README.md file on the control node.

  2. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  3. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Query the Ansible facts of the managed node and verify that the interface received IP addresses and DNS settings: 

    # ansible managed-node-01.example.com -m ansible.builtin.setup
...
        "ansible_default_ipv4": {
            "address": "192.0.2.1",
            "alias": "enp1s0",
            "broadcast": "192.0.2.255",
            "gateway": "192.0.2.254",
            "interface": "enp1s0",
            "macaddress": "52:54:00:17:b8:b6",
            "mtu": 1500,
            "netmask": "255.255.255.0",
            "network": "192.0.2.0",
            "prefix": "24",
            "type": "ether"
        },
        "ansible_default_ipv6": {
            "address": "2001:db8:1::1",
            "gateway": "2001:db8:1::fffe",
            "interface": "enp1s0",
            "macaddress": "52:54:00:17:b8:b6",
            "mtu": 1500,
            "prefix": "64",
            "scope": "global",
            "type": "ether"
        },
        ...
        "ansible_dns": {
            "nameservers": [
                "192.0.2.1",
                "2001:db8:1::ffbb"
            ],
            "search": [
                "example.com"
            ]
        },
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

By using the network RHEL system role, you can configure an Ethernet connection to retrieve its IP addresses, gateways, and DNS settings from a DHCP server and IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC). The role can assign the profile by the device’s path.

To connect a Red Hat Enterprise Linux host to an Ethernet network, create a NetworkManager connection profile for the network device. By using Ansible and the network RHEL system role, you can automate this process and remotely configure connection profiles on the hosts defined in a playbook.

Prerequisites

  • You have prepared the control node and the managed nodes.
  • You are logged in to the control node as a user who can run playbooks on the managed nodes.
  • The account you use to connect to the managed nodes has sudo permissions on them.
  • A physical or virtual Ethernet device exists in the server’s configuration.
  • A DHCP server and SLAAC are available in the network.
  • The managed hosts use NetworkManager to configure the network.
  • You know the path of the device. You can display the device path by using the udevadm info /sys/class/net/<device_name> | grep ID_PATH= command.

Procedure

  1. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configure the network
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: Ethernet connection profile with dynamic IP address settings
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.network
      vars:
        network_connections:
          - name: example
            match:
              path:
                - pci-0000:00:0[1-3].0
                - '&!pci-0000:00:02.0'
            type: ethernet
            autoconnect: yes
            ip:
              dhcp4: yes
              auto6: yes
            state: up
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The settings specified in the example playbook include the following:

    match: path
    Defines that a condition must be met in order to apply the settings. You can only use this variable with the path option.
    path: <path_and_expressions>
    Defines the persistent path of a device. You can set it as a fixed path or an expression. Its value can contain modifiers and wildcards. The example applies the settings to devices that match PCI ID 0000:00:0[1-3].0, but not 0000:00:02.0.
    dhcp4: yes
    Enables automatic IPv4 address assignment from DHCP, PPP, or similar services.
    auto6: yes
    Enables IPv6 auto-configuration. By default, NetworkManager uses Router Advertisements. If the router announces the managed flag, NetworkManager requests an IPv6 address and prefix from a DHCPv6 server.

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.network/README.md file on the control node.

  2. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  3. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Query the Ansible facts of the managed node and verify that the interface received IP addresses and DNS settings: 

    # ansible managed-node-01.example.com -m ansible.builtin.setup
...
        "ansible_default_ipv4": {
            "address": "192.0.2.1",
            "alias": "enp1s0",
            "broadcast": "192.0.2.255",
            "gateway": "192.0.2.254",
            "interface": "enp1s0",
            "macaddress": "52:54:00:17:b8:b6",
            "mtu": 1500,
            "netmask": "255.255.255.0",
            "network": "192.0.2.0",
            "prefix": "24",
            "type": "ether"
        },
        "ansible_default_ipv6": {
            "address": "2001:db8:1::1",
            "gateway": "2001:db8:1::fffe",
            "interface": "enp1s0",
            "macaddress": "52:54:00:17:b8:b6",
            "mtu": 1500,
            "prefix": "64",
            "scope": "global",
            "type": "ether"
        },
        ...
        "ansible_dns": {
            "nameservers": [
                "192.0.2.1",
                "2001:db8:1::ffbb"
            ],
            "search": [
                "example.com"
            ]
        },
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

NetworkManager supports using wildcards for interface names in connection profiles. This lets you create a single profile for multiple Ethernet interfaces, which is useful when a host roams between Ethernet networks with dynamic IP address assignment.

Prerequisites

  • Multiple physical or virtual Ethernet devices exist in the server’s configuration.
  • A DHCP server is available in the network.
  • No connection profile exists on the host.

Procedure

  1. Add a connection profile that applies to all interface names starting with enp: 

    # nmcli connection add con-name "Wired connection 1" connection.multi-connect multiple match.interface-name enp* type ethernet
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display all settings of the single connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection show "Wired connection 1"
connection.id:                      Wired connection 1
...
connection.multi-connect:           3 (multiple)
match.interface-name:               enp*
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    3 indicates that the interface can be active multiple times at a particular moment. The connection profile uses all devices that match the pattern in the match.interface-name parameter and, therefore, the connection profiles have the same Universally Unique Identifier (UUID).

  2. Display the status of the connections: 

    # nmcli connection show
NAME                UUID                                  TYPE      DEVICE
...
Wired connection 1  6f22402e-c0cc-49cf-b702-eaf0cd5ea7d1  ethernet  enp7s0
Wired connection 1  6f22402e-c0cc-49cf-b702-eaf0cd5ea7d1  ethernet  enp8s0
Wired connection 1  6f22402e-c0cc-49cf-b702-eaf0cd5ea7d1  ethernet  enp9s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

A PCI ID uniquely identifies devices on a system. A connection profile can add multiple devices by matching interfaces to a list of PCI IDs. With this feature, you can link multiple devices to one connection profile.

Prerequisites

  • Multiple physical or virtual Ethernet devices exist in the server’s configuration.
  • A DHCP server is available in the network.
  • No connection profile exists on the host.

Procedure

  1. Identify the device path. For example, to display the device paths of all interfaces starting with enp, enter : 

    # udevadm info /sys/class/net/enp* | grep ID_PATH=
...
E: ID_PATH=pci-0000:07:00.0
E: ID_PATH=pci-0000:08:00.0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Add a connection profile that applies to all PCI IDs matching the 0000:00:0[7-8].0 expression: 

    # nmcli connection add type ethernet connection.multi-connect multiple match.path "pci-0000:07:00.0 pci-0000:08:00.0" con-name "Wired connection 1"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the status of the connection: 

    # nmcli connection show
NAME                 UUID                                  TYPE      DEVICE
Wired connection 1   9cee0958-512f-4203-9d3d-b57af1d88466  ethernet  enp7s0
Wired connection 1   9cee0958-512f-4203-9d3d-b57af1d88466  ethernet  enp8s0
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. To display all settings of the connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection show "Wired connection 1"
connection.id:               Wired connection 1
...
connection.multi-connect:    3 (multiple)
match.path:                  pci-0000:07:00.0,pci-0000:08:00.0
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This connection profile uses all devices with a PCI ID which match the pattern in the match.path parameter and, therefore, the connection profiles have the same Universally Unique Identifier (UUID).

Chapter 3. Configuring a network bond
Link kopieren

A network bond aggregates physical and virtual network interfaces into a single logical one. The kernel exclusively handles all operations. You can create bonds on different device types, such as Ethernet or VLANs, for higher throughput or redundancy.

Red Hat Enterprise Linux provides administrators different options to configure bond devices. For example:

  • Use nmcli to configure bond connections using the command line.
  • Use the RHEL web console to configure bond connections using a web browser.
  • Use nmtui to configure bond connections in a text-based user interface.
  • Use the nm-connection-editor application to configure bond connections in a graphical interface.
  • Use nmstatectl to configure bond connections through the Nmstate API.
  • Use RHEL system roles to automate the bond configuration on one or multiple hosts.

Understanding the default behavior of NetworkManager when managing bond port interfaces helps you to troubleshoot problems more effectively.

Default behavior:

  • Starting the controller interface does not automatically start the port interfaces.
  • Starting a port interface always starts the controller interface.
  • Stopping the controller interface also stops the port interface.
  • A controller without ports can start static IP connections.
  • A controller without ports waits for ports when starting DHCP connections.
  • A controller with a DHCP connection waiting for ports completes when you add a port with a carrier.
  • A controller with a DHCP connection waiting for ports continues waiting when you add a port without a carrier.

3.2. Upstream switch configuration depending on the bonding modes
Link kopieren

Depending on the bonding mode you want to use, you must configure the ports on the switch.

Expand
Bonding modeConfiguration on the switch

0 - balance-rr

Requires static EtherChannel enabled, not Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)-negotiated.

1 - active-backup

No configuration required on the switch.

2 - balance-xor

Requires static EtherChannel enabled, not LACP-negotiated.

3 - broadcast

Requires static EtherChannel enabled, not LACP-negotiated.

4 - 802.3ad

Requires LACP-negotiated EtherChannel enabled.

5 - balance-tlb

No configuration required on the switch.

6 - balance-alb

No configuration required on the switch.

For details how to configure your switch, see the documentation of the switch.

Important

Certain network bonding features, such as the fail-over mechanism, do not support direct cable connections without a network switch. For further details, see the Red Hat Knowledgebase solution Is bonding supported with direct connection using crossover cables.

3.3. Configuring a network bond by using nmcli
Link kopieren

To configure a network bond on the command line, use the nmcli utility.

Prerequisites

Procedure

  1. Create a bond interface: 

    # nmcli connection add type bond con-name bond0 ifname bond0 bond.options "mode=active-backup"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This command creates a bond named bond0 that uses the active-backup mode.

    To additionally set a Media Independent Interface (MII) monitoring interval, add the miimon=interval option to the bond.options property, for example: 

    # nmcli connection add type bond con-name bond0 ifname bond0 bond.options "mode=active-backup,miimon=1000"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the network interfaces, and note names of interfaces you plan to add to the bond: 

    # nmcli device status
DEVICE   TYPE      STATE         CONNECTION
enp7s0   ethernet  disconnected  --
enp8s0   ethernet  disconnected  --
bridge0  bridge    connected     bridge0
bridge1  bridge    connected     bridge1
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    In this example:

    • enp7s0 and enp8s0 are not configured. To use these devices as ports, add connection profiles in the next step.
    • bridge0 and bridge1 have existing connection profiles. To use these devices as ports, modify their profiles in the next step.

  3. Assign interfaces to the bond:

    1. If the interfaces you want to assign to the bond are not configured, create new connection profiles for them: 

      # nmcli connection add type ethernet slave-type bond con-name bond0-port1 ifname enp7s0 master bond0
# nmcli connection add type ethernet slave-type bond con-name bond0-port2 ifname enp8s0 master bond0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      These commands create profiles for enp7s0 and enp8s0, and add them to the bond0 connection.

    2. To assign an existing connection profile to the bond:

      1. Set the master parameter of these connections to bond0: 

        # nmcli connection modify bridge0 master bond0
# nmcli connection modify bridge1 master bond0
        Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

        These commands assign the existing connection profiles named bridge0 and bridge1 to the bond0 connection.

      2. Reactivate the connections: 

        # nmcli connection up bridge0
# nmcli connection up bridge1
        Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Configure the IPv4 settings:

    • To set a static IPv4 address, network mask, default gateway, and DNS server to the bond0 connection, enter: 

      # nmcli connection modify bond0 ipv4.addresses '192.0.2.1/24' ipv4.gateway '192.0.2.254' ipv4.dns '192.0.2.253' ipv4.dns-search 'example.com' ipv4.method manual
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    • To use DHCP, no action is required.
    • If you plan to use this bond device as a port of other devices, no action is required.

  5. Configure the IPv6 settings:

    • To set a static IPv6 address, network mask, default gateway, and DNS server to the bond0 connection, enter: 

      # nmcli connection modify bond0 ipv6.addresses '2001:db8:1::1/64' ipv6.gateway '2001:db8:1::fffe' ipv6.dns '2001:db8:1::fffd' ipv6.dns-search 'example.com' ipv6.method manual
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    • To use stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC), no action is required.
    • If you plan to use this bond device as a port of other devices, no action is required.

  6. Optional: If you want to set any parameters on the bond ports, use the following command: 

    # nmcli connection modify bond0-port1 bond-port.<parameter> <value>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  7. Activate the connection: 

    # nmcli connection up bond0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  8. Verify that the ports are connected, and the CONNECTION column displays the port’s connection name: 

    # nmcli device
DEVICE   TYPE      STATE      CONNECTION
...
enp7s0   ethernet  connected  bond0-port1
enp8s0   ethernet  connected  bond0-port2
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    When you activate any port of the connection, NetworkManager also activates the bond, but not the other ports of it. You can configure that Red Hat Enterprise Linux enables all ports automatically when the bond is enabled:

    1. Enable the connection.autoconnect-slaves parameter of the bond’s connection: 

      # nmcli connection modify bond0 connection.autoconnect-slaves 1
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Reactivate the bridge: 

      # nmcli connection up bond0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Temporarily remove the network cable from one of the network devices and check if the other device in the bond is handling the traffic.

    Note that there is no method to properly test link failure events using software utilities. Tools that deactivate connections, such as nmcli, show only the bonding driver’s ability to handle port configuration changes and not actual link failure events.

  2. Display the status of the bond: 

    # cat /proc/net/bonding/bond0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

3.4. Configuring a network bond by using the RHEL web console
Link kopieren

Use the RHEL web console to configure a network bond if you prefer to manage network settings using a web browser-based interface.

Prerequisites

  • You have installed the RHEL 8 web console.
  • You have enabled the cockpit service.

  • Your user account is allowed to log in to the web console.

    For instructions, see Installing and enabling the web console.

Procedure

  1. Log in to the RHEL 8 web console.

    For details, see Logging in to the web console.

  2. Select the Networking tab in the navigation on the left side of the screen.
  3. Click Add bond in the Interfaces section.
  4. Enter the name of the bond device you want to create.
  5. Select the interfaces that should be members of the bond.

  6. Select the mode of the bond.

    If you select Active backup, the web console shows the additional field Primary in which you can select the preferred active device.

  7. Set the link monitoring mode. For example, when you use the Adaptive load balancing mode, set it to ARP.

  8. Optional: Adjust the monitoring interval, link up delay, and link down delay settings. Typically, you only change the defaults for troubleshooting purposes.

    bond settings
    View larger image
    bond settings
  9. Click Apply.

  10. By default, the bond uses a dynamic IP address. If you want to set a static IP address:

    1. Click the name of the bond in the Interfaces section.
    2. Click Edit next to the protocol you want to configure.
    3. Select Manual next to Addresses, and enter the IP address, prefix, and default gateway.
    4. In the DNS section, click the + button, and enter the IP address of the DNS server. Repeat this step to set multiple DNS servers.
    5. In the DNS search domains section, click the + button, and enter the search domain.

    6. If the interface requires static routes, configure them in the Routes section.

      bond team bridge vlan.ipv4
      View larger image
      bond team bridge vlan.ipv4
    7. Click Apply

Verification

  1. Select the Networking tab in the navigation on the left side of the screen, and check if there is incoming and outgoing traffic on the interface:

    bond verify
    View larger image
    bond verify

  2. Temporarily remove the network cable from one of the network devices and check if the other device in the bond is handling the traffic.

    Note that there is no method to properly test link failure events using software utilities. Tools that deactivate connections, such as the web console, show only the bonding driver’s ability to handle member configuration changes and not actual link failure events.

  3. Display the status of the bond: 

    # cat /proc/net/bonding/bond0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

3.5. Configuring a network bond by using nmtui
Link kopieren

The nmtui application provides a text-based user interface for NetworkManager. You can use nmtui to configure a network bond on a host without a graphical interface.

Note

In nmtui:

  • Navigate by using the cursor keys.
  • Press a button by selecting it and hitting Enter.
  • Select and clear checkboxes by using Space.
  • To return to the previous screen, use ESC.

Prerequisites

  • Two or more physical or virtual network devices are installed on the server.
  • To use Ethernet devices as ports of the bond, the physical or virtual Ethernet devices must be installed on the server.

Procedure

  1. If you do not know the network device names on which you want configure a network bond, display the available devices: 

    # nmcli device status
DEVICE     TYPE      STATE                   CONNECTION
enp7s0     ethernet  unavailable             --
enp8s0     ethernet  unavailable             --
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Start nmtui: 

    # nmtui
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  3. Select Edit a connection, and press Enter.
  4. Press Add.
  5. Select Bond from the list of network types, and press Enter.

  6. Optional: Enter a name for the NetworkManager profile to be created.

    On hosts with multiple profiles, a meaningful name makes it easier to identify the purpose of a profile.

  7. Enter the bond device name to be created into the Device field.

  8. Add ports to the bond to be created:

    1. Press Add next to the Slaves list.
    2. Select the type of the interface you want to add as port to the bond, for example, Ethernet.
    3. Optional: Enter a name for the NetworkManager profile to be created for this bond port.
    4. Enter the port’s device name into the Device field.

    5. Press OK to return to the window with the bond settings.

      Figure 3.1. Adding an Ethernet device as port to a bond

      nmtui bond add port
      View larger image
      nmtui bond add port
    6. Repeat these steps to add more ports to the bond.
  9. Set the bond mode. Depending on the value you set, nmtui displays additional fields for settings that are related to the selected mode.

  10. Depending on your environment, configure the IP address settings in the IPv4 configuration and IPv6 configuration areas accordingly. For this, press the button next to these areas, and select:

    • Disabled, if the bond does not require an IP address.
    • Automatic, if a DHCP server or stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC) dynamically assigns an IP address to the bond.

    • Manual, if the network requires static IP address settings. In this case, you must fill further fields:

      1. Press Show next to the protocol you want to configure to display additional fields.

      2. Press Add next to Addresses, and enter the IP address and the subnet mask in Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) format.

        If you do not specify a subnet mask, NetworkManager sets a /32 subnet mask for IPv4 addresses and /64 for IPv6 addresses.

      3. Enter the address of the default gateway.
      4. Press Add next to DNS servers, and enter the DNS server address.
      5. Press Add next to Search domains, and enter the DNS search domain.

    Figure 3.2. Example of a bond connection with static IP address settings

    nmtui bond static IP
    View larger image
    nmtui bond static IP
  11. Press OK to create and automatically activate the new connection.
  12. Press Back to return to the main menu.
  13. Select Quit, and press Enter to close the nmtui application.

Verification

  1. Temporarily remove the network cable from one of the network devices and check if the other device in the bond is handling the traffic.

    Note that there is no method to properly test link failure events using software utilities. Tools that deactivate connections, such as nmcli, show only the bonding driver’s ability to handle port configuration changes and not actual link failure events.

  2. Display the status of the bond: 

    # cat /proc/net/bonding/bond0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

3.6. Configuring a network bond by using nm-connection-editor
Link kopieren

If you use Red Hat Enterprise Linux with a graphical interface, you can configure network bonds using the nm-connection-editor application.

Note that nm-connection-editor can add only new ports to a bond. To use an existing connection profile as a port, create the bond by using the nmcli utility as described in Configuring a network bond by using nmcli.

Prerequisites

  • Two or more physical or virtual network devices are installed on the server.
  • To use Ethernet devices as ports of the bond, the physical or virtual Ethernet devices must be installed on the server.
  • To use team, bond, or VLAN devices as ports of the bond, ensure that these devices are not already configured.

Procedure

  1. Open a terminal, and enter nm-connection-editor: 

    $ nm-connection-editor
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  2. Click the + button to add a new connection.
  3. Select the Bond connection type, and click Create.

  4. On the Bond tab:

    1. Optional: Set the name of the bond interface in the Interface name field.

    2. Click the Add button to add a network interface as a port to the bond.

      1. Select the connection type of the interface. For example, select Ethernet for a wired connection.
      2. Optional: Set a connection name for the port.
      3. If you create a connection profile for an Ethernet device, open the Ethernet tab, and select in the Device field the network interface you want to add as a port to the bond. If you selected a different device type, configure it accordingly. Note that you can only use Ethernet interfaces in a bond that are not configured.
      4. Click Save.

    3. Repeat the previous step for each interface you want to add to the bond:

      add nic to bond in nm connection editor

    4. Optional: Set other options, such as the Media Independent Interface (MII) monitoring interval.

  5. Configure the IP address settings on both the IPv4 Settings and IPv6 Settings tabs:

    • If you plan to use this bridge device as a port of other devices, set the Method field to Disabled.
    • To use DHCP, leave the Method field at its default, Automatic (DHCP).

    • To use static IP settings, set the Method field to Manual and fill the fields accordingly:

      bond IP settings nm connection editor

  6. Click Save.
  7. Close nm-connection-editor.

Verification

  1. Temporarily remove the network cable from one of the network devices and check if the other device in the bond is handling the traffic.

    Note that there is no method to properly test link failure events using software utilities. Tools that deactivate connections, such as nmcli, show only the bonding driver’s ability to handle port configuration changes and not actual link failure events.

  2. Display the status of the bond: 

    # cat /proc/net/bonding/bond0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

3.7. Configuring a network bond by using nmstatectl
Link kopieren

You can use the declarative Nmstate API to configure a network bond. Nmstate ensures that the result matches the configuration file or rolls back the changes.

Depending on your environment, adjust the YAML file accordingly. For example, to use different devices than Ethernet adapters in the bond, adapt the base-iface attribute and type attributes of the ports you use in the bond.

Prerequisites

  • Two or more physical or virtual network devices are installed on the server.
  • To use Ethernet devices as ports in the bond, the physical or virtual Ethernet devices must be installed on the server.
  • To use team, bridge, or VLAN devices as ports in the bond, set the interface name in the port list, and define the corresponding interfaces.
  • The nmstate package is installed.

Procedure

  1. Create a YAML file, for example ~/create-bond.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
interfaces:
- name: bond0
  type: bond
  state: up
  ipv4:
    enabled: true
    address:
    - ip: 192.0.2.1
      prefix-length: 24
    dhcp: false
  ipv6:
    enabled: true
    address:
    - ip: 2001:db8:1::1
      prefix-length: 64
    autoconf: false
    dhcp: false
  link-aggregation:
    mode: active-backup
    port:
    - enp1s0
    - enp7s0
- name: enp1s0
  type: ethernet
  state: up
- name: enp7s0
  type: ethernet
  state: up

routes:
  config:
  - destination: 0.0.0.0/0
    next-hop-address: 192.0.2.254
    next-hop-interface: bond0
    metric: 300
  - destination: ::/0
    next-hop-address: 2001:db8:1::fffe
    next-hop-interface: bond0
    metric: 300

dns-resolver:
  config:
    search:
    - example.com
    server:
    - 192.0.2.200
    - 2001:db8:1::ffbb
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    These settings define a network bond with the following settings:

    • Network interfaces in the bond: enp1s0 and enp7s0
    • Mode: active-backup
    • Static IPv4 address: 192.0.2.1 with a /24 subnet mask
    • Static IPv6 address: 2001:db8:1::1 with a /64 subnet mask
    • IPv4 default gateway: 192.0.2.254
    • IPv6 default gateway: 2001:db8:1::fffe
    • IPv4 DNS server: 192.0.2.200
    • IPv6 DNS server: 2001:db8:1::ffbb
    • DNS search domain: example.com

  2. Apply the settings to the system: 

    # nmstatectl apply ~/create-bond.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the status of the devices and connections: 

    # nmcli device status
DEVICE      TYPE      STATE      CONNECTION
bond0       bond      connected  bond0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display all settings of the connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection show bond0
connection.id:              bond0
connection.uuid:            79cbc3bd-302e-4b1f-ad89-f12533b818ee
connection.stable-id:       --
connection.type:            bond
connection.interface-name:  bond0
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Display the connection settings in YAML format: 

    # nmstatectl show bond0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

3.8. Configuring a network bond by using the network RHEL system role
Link kopieren

You can use the network RHEL system role to configure a network bond and, if a connection profile for the bond’s parent device does not exist, the role can create it as well.

You can combine network interfaces in a bond to provide a logical interface with higher throughput or redundancy. To configure a bond, create a NetworkManager connection profile. By using Ansible and the network RHEL system role, you can automate this process and remotely configure connection profiles on the hosts defined in a playbook.

Prerequisites

  • You have prepared the control node and the managed nodes.
  • You are logged in to the control node as a user who can run playbooks on the managed nodes.
  • The account you use to connect to the managed nodes has sudo permissions on them.
  • Two or more physical or virtual network devices are installed on the server.

Procedure

  1. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configure the network
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: Bond connection profile with two Ethernet ports
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.network
      vars:
        network_connections:
          # Bond profile
          - name: bond0
            type: bond
            interface_name: bond0
            ip:
              dhcp4: yes
              auto6: yes
            bond:
              mode: active-backup
            state: up

          # Port profile for the 1st Ethernet device
          - name: bond0-port1
            interface_name: enp7s0
            type: ethernet
            controller: bond0
            state: up

          # Port profile for the 2nd Ethernet device
          - name: bond0-port2
            interface_name: enp8s0
            type: ethernet
            controller: bond0
            state: up
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The settings specified in the example playbook include the following:

    type: <profile_type>
    Sets the type of the profile to create. The example playbook creates three connection profiles: One for the bond and two for the Ethernet devices.
    dhcp4: yes
    Enables automatic IPv4 address assignment from DHCP, PPP, or similar services.
    auto6: yes
    Enables IPv6 auto-configuration. By default, NetworkManager uses Router Advertisements. If the router announces the managed flag, NetworkManager requests an IPv6 address and prefix from a DHCPv6 server.
    mode: <bond_mode>

    Sets the bonding mode. Possible values are:

    • balance-rr (default)
    • active-backup
    • balance-xor
    • broadcast
    • 802.3ad
    • balance-tlb
    • balance-alb.

    Depending on the mode you set, you need to set additional variables in the playbook.

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.network/README.md file on the control node.

  2. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  3. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Temporarily remove the network cable from one of the network devices and check if the other device in the bond is handling the traffic.

    Note that there is no method to properly test link failure events using software utilities. Tools that deactivate connections, such as nmcli, show only the bonding driver’s ability to handle port configuration changes and not actual link failure events.

Configure a network bond in active-backup mode to maintain uninterrupted VPN access when switching between Ethernet and Wi-Fi.

RHEL users who connect their workstation to their company’s network typically use a VPN to access remote resources. However, if the workstation switches between an Ethernet and Wi-Fi connection, for example, if you release a laptop from a docking station with an Ethernet connection, the VPN connection is interrupted. To avoid this problem, you can create a network bond that uses the Ethernet and Wi-Fi connection in active-backup mode.

Prerequisites

  • The host contains an Ethernet and a Wi-Fi device.

  • An Ethernet and Wi-Fi NetworkManager connection profile has been created and both connections work independently.

    This procedure uses the following connection profiles to create a network bond named bond0:

    • Docking_station associated with the enp11s0u1 Ethernet device
    • Wi-Fi associated with the wlp1s0 Wi-Fi device

Procedure

  1. Create a bond interface in active-backup mode: 

    # nmcli connection add type bond con-name bond0 ifname bond0 bond.options "mode=active-backup"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This command names both the interface and connection profile bond0.

  2. Configure the IPv4 settings of the bond:

    • If a DHCP server in your network assigns IPv4 addresses to hosts, no action is required.

    • If your local network requires static IPv4 addresses, set the address, network mask, default gateway, DNS server, and DNS search domain to the bond0 connection: 

      # nmcli connection modify bond0 ipv4.addresses '192.0.2.1/24'
# nmcli connection modify bond0 ipv4.gateway '192.0.2.254'
# nmcli connection modify bond0 ipv4.dns '192.0.2.253'
# nmcli connection modify bond0 ipv4.dns-search 'example.com'
# nmcli connection modify bond0 ipv4.method manual
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Configure the IPv6 settings of the bond:

    • If your router or a DHCP server in your network assigns IPv6 addresses to hosts, no action is required.

    • If your local network requires static IPv6 addresses, set the address, network mask, default gateway, DNS server, and DNS search domain to the bond0 connection: 

      # nmcli connection modify bond0 ipv6.addresses '2001:db8:1::1/64'
# nmcli connection modify bond0 ipv6.gateway '2001:db8:1::fffe'
# nmcli connection modify bond0 ipv6.dns '2001:db8:1::fffd'
# nmcli connection modify bond0 ipv6.dns-search 'example.com'
# nmcli connection modify bond0 ipv6.method manual
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Display the connection profiles: 

    # nmcli connection show
NAME             UUID                                  TYPE      DEVICE
Docking_station  256dd073-fecc-339d-91ae-9834a00407f9  ethernet  enp11s0u1
Wi-Fi            1f1531c7-8737-4c60-91af-2d21164417e8  wifi      wlp1s0
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    You require the names of the connection profiles and the Ethernet device name in the next steps.

  5. Assign the connection profile of the Ethernet connection to the bond: 

    # nmcli connection modify Docking_station master bond0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  6. Assign the connection profile of the Wi-Fi connection to the bond: 

    # nmcli connection modify Wi-Fi master bond0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  7. If your Wi-Fi network uses MAC filtering to allow only MAC addresses on a allow list to access the network, configure that NetworkManager dynamically assigns the MAC address of the active port to the bond: 

    # nmcli connection modify bond0 +bond.options fail_over_mac=1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    With this setting, you must set only the MAC address of the Wi-Fi device to the allow list instead of the MAC address of both the Ethernet and Wi-Fi device.

  8. Set the device associated with the Ethernet connection as primary device of the bond: 

    # nmcli con modify bond0 +bond.options "primary=enp11s0u1"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    With this setting, the bond always uses the Ethernet connection if it is available.

  9. Configure that NetworkManager automatically activates ports when the bond0 device is activated: 

    # nmcli connection modify bond0 connection.autoconnect-slaves 1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  10. Activate the bond0 connection: 

    # nmcli connection up bond0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Display the currently active device, the status of the bond and its ports: 

    # cat /proc/net/bonding/bond0
Ethernet Channel Bonding Driver: v3.7.1 (April 27, 2011)

Bonding Mode: fault-tolerance (active-backup) (fail_over_mac active)
Primary Slave: enp11s0u1 (primary_reselect always)
Currently Active Slave: enp11s0u1
MII Status: up
MII Polling Interval (ms): 1
Up Delay (ms): 0
Down Delay (ms): 0
Peer Notification Delay (ms): 0

Slave Interface: enp11s0u1
MII Status: up
Speed: 1000 Mbps
Duplex: full
Link Failure Count: 0
Permanent HW addr: 00:53:00:59:da:b7
Slave queue ID: 0

Slave Interface: wlp1s0
MII Status: up
Speed: Unknown
Duplex: Unknown
Link Failure Count: 2
Permanent HW addr: 00:53:00:b3:22:ba
Slave queue ID: 0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

3.10. The different network bonding modes
Link kopieren

Bonding aggregates multiple network interfaces into a single logical one. The behavior of a bonded interface depends on its bonding policy, also know as mode, which provides either load-balancing or hot standby services.

The Linux bonding driver supports the following modes:

Balance-rr (Mode 0)

Balance-rr uses the round-robin algorithm that sequentially transmits packets from the first available port to the last one. This mode provides load balancing and fault tolerance.

This mode requires switch configuration of a port aggregation group, also called EtherChannel or similar port grouping. An EtherChannel is a port link aggregation technology to group multiple physical Ethernet links to one logical Ethernet link.

The drawback of this mode is that it is not suitable for heavy workloads and if TCP throughput or ordered packet delivery is essential.

Active-backup (Mode 1)

Active-backup uses the policy that determines that only one port is active in the bond. This mode provides fault tolerance and does not require any switch configuration.

If the active port fails, an alternate port becomes active. The bond sends a gratuitous address resolution protocol (ARP) response to the network. The gratuitous ARP forces the receiver of the ARP frame to update their forwarding table. The Active-backup mode transmits a gratuitous ARP to announce the new path to maintain connectivity for the host.

The primary option defines the preferred port of the bonding interface.

Balance-xor (Mode 2)

Balance-xor uses the selected transmit hash policy to send the packets. This mode provides load balancing, fault tolerance, and requires switch configuration to set up an Etherchannel or similar port grouping.

To alter packet transmission and balance transmit, this mode uses the xmit_hash_policy option. Depending on the source or destination of traffic on the interface, the interface requires an additional load-balancing configuration. See description xmit_hash_policy bonding parameter.

Broadcast (Mode 3)

Broadcast uses a policy that transmits every packet on all interfaces. This mode provides fault tolerance and requires a switch configuration to set up an EtherChannel or similar port grouping.

The drawback of this mode is that it is not suitable for heavy workloads and if TCP throughput or ordered packet delivery is essential.

802.3ad (Mode 4)

802.3ad uses the same-named IEEE standard dynamic link aggregation policy. This mode provides fault tolerance. This mode requires switch configuration to set up a Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) port grouping.

This mode creates aggregation groups that share the same speed and duplex settings and utilizes all ports in the active aggregator. Depending on the source or destination of traffic on the interface, this mode requires an additional load-balancing configuration.

By default, the port selection for outgoing traffic depends on the transmit hash policy. Use the xmit_hash_policy option of the transmit hash policy to change the port selection and balance transmit.

The difference between the 802.3ad and the Balance-xor is compliance. The 802.3ad policy negotiates LACP between the port aggregation groups. See description xmit_hash_policy bonding parameter

Balance-tlb (Mode 5)

Balance-tlb uses the transmit load balancing policy. This mode provides fault tolerance, load balancing, and establishes channel bonding that does not require any switch support.

The active port receives the incoming traffic. In case of failure of the active port, another one takes over the MAC address of the failed port. To decide which interface processes the outgoing traffic, use one of the following modes:

  • Value 0: Uses the hash distribution policy to distribute traffic without load balancing

  • Value 1: Distributes traffic to each port by using load balancing

    With the bonding option tlb_dynamic_lb=0, this bonding mode uses the xmit_hash_policy bonding option to balance transmit. The primary option defines the preferred port of the bonding interface.

See description xmit_hash_policy bonding parameter.

Balance-alb (Mode 6)

Balance-alb uses an adaptive load balancing policy. This mode provides fault tolerance, load balancing, and does not require any special switch support.

This mode includes balance-transmit load balancing (balance-tlb) and receive-load balancing for IPv4 and IPv6 traffic. The bonding intercepts ARP replies sent by the local system and overwrites the source hardware address of one of the ports in the bond. ARP negotiation manages the receive-load balancing. Therefore, different ports use different hardware addresses for the server.

The primary option defines the preferred port of the bonding interface. With the bonding option tlb_dynamic_lb=0, this bonding mode uses the xmit_hash_policy bonding option to balance transmit. See description xmit_hash_policy bonding parameter.

3.11. The xmit_hash_policy bonding parameter
Link kopieren

The xmit_hash_policy load balancing parameter selects the transmit hash policy for a node selection in the balance-xor, 802.3ad, balance-alb, and balance-tlb modes. It is only applicable to mode 5 and 6 if the tlb_dynamic_lb parameter is 0.

The possible values of tlb_dynamic_lb are layer2, layer2+3, layer3+4, encap2+3, encap3+4, and vlan+srcmac.

Refer the table for details:

Expand

Policy or Network layers

Layer2

Layer2+3

Layer3+4

encap2+3

encap3+4

VLAN+srcmac

Uses

XOR of source and destination MAC addresses and Ethernet protocol type

XOR of source and destination MAC addresses and IP addresses

XOR of source and destination ports and IP addresses

XOR of source and destination MAC addresses and IP addresses inside a supported tunnel, for example, Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN). This mode relies on skb_flow_dissect() function to obtain the header fields

XOR of source and destination ports and IP addresses inside a supported tunnel, for example, VXLAN. This mode relies on skb_flow_dissect() function to obtain the header fields

XOR of VLAN ID and source MAC vendor and source MAC device

Placement of traffic

All traffic to a particular network peer on the same underlying network interface

All traffic to a particular IP address on the same underlying network interface

All traffic to a particular IP address and port on the same underlying network interface

   

Primary choice

If network traffic is between this system and multiple other systems in the same broadcast domain

If network traffic between this system and multiple other systems goes through a default gateway

If network traffic between this system and another system uses the same IP addresses but goes through multiple ports

The encapsulated traffic is between the source system and multiple other systems using multiple IP addresses

The encapsulated traffic is between the source system and other systems using multiple port numbers

If the bond carries network traffic, from multiple containers or virtual machines (VM), that expose their MAC address directly to the external network such as the bridge network, and you cannot configure a switch for Mode 2 or Mode 4

Secondary choice

If network traffic is mostly between this system and multiple other systems behind a default gateway

If network traffic is mostly between this system and another system

    

Compliant

802.3ad

802.3ad

Not 802.3ad

   

Default policy

This is the default policy if no configuration is provided

For non-IP traffic, the formula is the same as for the layer2 transmit policy

For non-IP traffic, the formula is the same as for the layer2 transmit policy

   

Chapter 4. Configuring a NIC team
Link kopieren

Network interface controller (NIC) teaming is a method to combine or aggregate physical and virtual network interfaces to provide a logical interface with higher throughput or redundancy. NIC teaming uses a small kernel module to implement fast handling of packet flows and a user-space service for other tasks. This way, NIC teaming is an easily extensible and scalable solution for load-balancing and redundancy requirements.

Red Hat Enterprise Linux provides administrators different options to configure team devices. For example:

  • Use nmcli to configure teams connections using the command line.
  • Use the RHEL web console to configure team connections using a web browser.
  • Use the nm-connection-editor application to configure team connections in a graphical interface.
Important

NIC teaming is deprecated in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9. If you plan to upgrade your server to a future version of RHEL, consider using the kernel bonding driver as an alternative. For details, see Configuring a network bond.

Understanding the default behavior of NetworkManager when managing bond port interfaces helps you to troubleshoot problems more effectively.

Default behavior:

  • Starting the controller interface does not automatically start the port interfaces.
  • Starting a port interface always starts the controller interface.
  • Stopping the controller interface also stops the port interface.
  • A controller without ports can start static IP connections.
  • A controller without ports waits for ports when starting DHCP connections.
  • A controller with a DHCP connection waiting for ports completes when you add a port with a carrier.
  • A controller with a DHCP connection waiting for ports continues waiting when you add a port without a carrier.

4.3. Configuring a NIC team by using nmcli
Link kopieren

To configure a network interface controller (NIC) team on the command line, use the nmcli utility.

Important

NIC teaming is deprecated in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9. If you plan to upgrade your server to a future version of RHEL, consider using the kernel bonding driver as an alternative. For details, see Configuring a network bond.

Prerequisites

Procedure

  1. Create a team interface: 

    # nmcli connection add type team con-name team0 ifname team0 team.runner activebackup
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This command creates a NIC team named team0 that uses the activebackup runner.

  2. Optional: Set a link watcher. For example, to set the ethtool link watcher in the team0 connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection modify team0 team.link-watchers "name=ethtool"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Link watchers support different parameters. To set parameters for a link watcher, specify them space-separated in the name property. Note that the name property must be surrounded by quotation marks. For example, to use the ethtool link watcher and set its delay-up parameter to 2500 milliseconds (2.5 seconds): 

    # nmcli connection modify team0 team.link-watchers "name=ethtool delay-up=2500"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    To set multiple link watchers and each of them with specific parameters, the link watchers must be separated by a comma. The following example sets the ethtool link watcher with the delay-up parameter and the arp_ping link watcher with the source-host and target-host parameter: 

    # nmcli connection modify team0 team.link-watchers "name=ethtool delay-up=2, name=arp_ping source-host=192.0.2.1 target-host=192.0.2.2"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Display the network interfaces, and note the names of the interfaces you want to add to the team: 

    # nmcli device status
DEVICE  TYPE      STATE         CONNECTION
enp7s0  ethernet  disconnected  --
enp8s0  ethernet  disconnected  --
bond0   bond      connected  bond0
bond1   bond      connected  bond1
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    In this example:

    • enp7s0 and enp8s0 are not configured. To use these devices as ports, add connection profiles in the next step. Note that you can only use Ethernet interfaces in a team that are not assigned to any connection.
    • bond0 and bond1 have existing connection profiles. To use these devices as ports, modify their profiles in the next step.

  4. Assign the port interfaces to the team:

    1. If the interfaces you want to assign to the team are not configured, create new connection profiles for them: 

      # nmcli connection add type ethernet slave-type team con-name team0-port1 ifname enp7s0 master team0
# nmcli connection add type ethernet slave--type team con-name team0-port2 ifname enp8s0 master team0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      These commands create profiles for enp7s0 and enp8s0, and add them to the team0 connection.

    2. To assign an existing connection profile to the team:

      1. Set the master parameter of these connections to team0: 

        # nmcli connection modify bond0 master team0
# nmcli connection modify bond1 master team0
        Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

        These commands assign the existing connection profiles named bond0 and bond1 to the team0 connection.

      2. Reactivate the connections: 

        # nmcli connection up bond0
# nmcli connection up bond1
        Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Configure the IPv4 settings:

    • To set a static IPv4 address, network mask, default gateway, and DNS server to the team0 connection, enter: 

      # nmcli connection modify team0 ipv4.addresses '192.0.2.1/24' ipv4.gateway '192.0.2.254' ipv4.dns '192.0.2.253' ipv4.dns-search 'example.com' ipv4.method manual
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    • To use DHCP, no action is required.
    • If you plan to use this team device as a port of other devices, no action is required.

  6. Configure the IPv6 settings:

    • To set a static IPv6 address, network mask, default gateway, and DNS server to the team0 connection, enter: 

      # nmcli connection modify team0 ipv6.addresses '2001:db8:1::1/64' ipv6.gateway '2001:db8:1::fffe' ipv6.dns '2001:db8:1::fffd' ipv6.dns-search 'example.com' ipv6.method manual
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    • If you plan to use this team device as a port of other devices, no action is required.
    • To use stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC), no action is required.

  7. Activate the connection: 

    # nmcli connection up team0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Display the status of the team: 

    # teamdctl team0 state
setup:
  runner: activebackup
ports:
  enp7s0
    link watches:
      link summary: up
      instance[link_watch_0]:
        name: ethtool
        link: up
        down count: 0
  enp8s0
    link watches:
      link summary: up
      instance[link_watch_0]:
        name: ethtool
        link: up
        down count: 0
runner:
  active port: enp7s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    In this example, both ports are up.

4.4. Configuring a NIC team by using the RHEL web console
Link kopieren

Use the RHEL web console to configure a network interface controller (NIC) team if you prefer to manage network settings using a web browser-based interface.

Important

NIC teaming is deprecated in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9. If you plan to upgrade your server to a future version of RHEL, consider using the kernel bonding driver as an alternative. For details, see Configuring a network bond.

Prerequisites

  • You have installed the RHEL 8 web console.
  • You have enabled the cockpit service.

  • Your user account is allowed to log in to the web console.

    For instructions, see Installing and enabling the web console.

Procedure

  1. Log in to the RHEL 8 web console.

    For details, see Logging in to the web console.

  2. Select the Networking tab in the navigation on the left side of the screen.
  3. Click Add team in the Interfaces section.
  4. Enter the name of the team device you want to create.
  5. Select the interfaces that should be ports of the team.

  6. Select the runner of the team.

    If you select Load balancing or 802.3ad LACP, the web console shows the additional field Balancer.

  7. Set the link watcher:

    • If you select Ethtool, additionally, set a link up and link down delay.
    • If you set ARP ping or NSNA ping, additionally, set a ping interval and ping target.
    team settings
    View larger image
    team settings
  8. Click Apply.

  9. By default, the team uses a dynamic IP address. If you want to set a static IP address:

    1. Click the name of the team in the Interfaces section.
    2. Click Edit next to the protocol you want to configure.
    3. Select Manual next to Addresses, and enter the IP address, prefix, and default gateway.
    4. In the DNS section, click the + button, and enter the IP address of the DNS server. Repeat this step to set multiple DNS servers.
    5. In the DNS search domains section, click the + button, and enter the search domain.

    6. If the interface requires static routes, configure them in the Routes section.

      bond team bridge vlan.ipv4
      View larger image
      bond team bridge vlan.ipv4
    7. Click Apply

Verification

  1. Select the Networking tab in the navigation on the left side of the screen, and check if there is incoming and outgoing traffic on the interface.

    team verify
    View larger image
    team verify

  2. Display the status of the team: 

    # teamdctl team0 state
setup:
  runner: activebackup
ports:
  enp7s0
    link watches:
      link summary: up
      instance[link_watch_0]:
        name: ethtool
        link: up
        down count: 0
  enp8s0
    link watches:
      link summary: up
      instance[link_watch_0]:
        name: ethtool
        link: up
        down count: 0
runner:
  active port: enp7s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    In this example, both ports are up.

4.5. Configuring a NIC team by using nm-connection-editor
Link kopieren

If you use Red Hat Enterprise Linux with a graphical interface, you can configure network interface controller (NIC) teams using the nm-connection-editor application.

Note that nm-connection-editor can add only new ports to a team. To use an existing connection profile as a port, create the team using the nmcli utility as described in Configuring a NIC team by using nmcli.

Important

NIC teaming is deprecated in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9. If you plan to upgrade your server to a future version of RHEL, consider using the kernel bonding driver as an alternative. For details, see Configuring a network bond.

Prerequisites

  • The teamd and NetworkManager-team packages are installed.
  • Two or more physical or virtual network devices are installed on the server.
  • To use Ethernet devices as ports of the team, the physical or virtual Ethernet devices must be installed on the server.
  • To use team, bond, or VLAN devices as ports of the team, ensure that these devices are not already configured.

Procedure

  1. Open a terminal, and enter nm-connection-editor: 

    $ nm-connection-editor
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  2. Click the + button to add a new connection.
  3. Select the Team connection type, and click Create.

  4. On the Team tab:

    1. Optional: Set the name of the team interface in the Interface name field.

    2. Click the Add button to add a new connection profile for a network interface and adding the profile as a port to the team.

      1. Select the connection type of the interface. For example, select Ethernet for a wired connection.
      2. Optional: Set a connection name for the port.
      3. If you create a connection profile for an Ethernet device, open the Ethernet tab, and select in the Device field the network interface you want to add as a port to the team. If you selected a different device type, configure it accordingly. Note that you can only use Ethernet interfaces in a team that are not assigned to any connection.
      4. Click Save.

    3. Repeat the previous step for each interface you want to add to the team.

      add nic to team in nm connection editor

    4. Click the Advanced button to set advanced options to the team connection.

      1. On the Runner tab, select the runner.
      2. On the Link Watcher tab, set the link watcher and its optional settings.
      3. Click OK.

  5. Configure the IP address settings on both the IPv4 Settings and IPv6 Settings tabs:

    • If you plan to use this bridge device as a port of other devices, set the Method field to Disabled.
    • To use DHCP, leave the Method field at its default, Automatic (DHCP).

    • To use static IP settings, set the Method field to Manual and fill the fields accordingly:

      team IP settings nm connection editor

  6. Click Save.
  7. Close nm-connection-editor.

Verification

  • Display the status of the team: 

    # teamdctl team0 state
setup:
  runner: activebackup
ports:
  enp7s0
    link watches:
      link summary: up
      instance[link_watch_0]:
        name: ethtool
        link: up
        down count: 0
  enp8s0
    link watches:
      link summary: up
      instance[link_watch_0]:
        name: ethtool
        link: up
        down count: 0
runner:
  active port: enp7s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 5. Configuring VLAN tagging
Link kopieren

A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a logical network within a physical network. The VLAN interface tags packets with the VLAN ID as they pass through the interface, and removes tags of returning packets.

You create VLAN interfaces on top of another interface, such as Ethernet, bond, or bridge devices. These interfaces are called the parent interface.

Red Hat Enterprise Linux provides administrators different options to configure VLAN devices. For example:

  • Use nmcli to configure VLAN tagging using the command line.
  • Use the RHEL web console to configure VLAN tagging using a web browser.
  • Use nmtui to configure VLAN tagging in a text-based user interface.
  • Use the nm-connection-editor application to configure connections in a graphical interface.
  • Use nmstatectl to configure connections through the Nmstate API.
  • Use RHEL system roles to automate the VLAN configuration on one or multiple hosts.

5.1. Configuring VLAN tagging by using nmcli
Link kopieren

You can configure Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) tagging on the command line using the nmcli utility.

Prerequisites

  • The interface you plan to use as a parent to the virtual VLAN interface supports VLAN tags.

  • If you configure the VLAN on top of a bond interface:

    • The ports of the bond are up.
    • The bond is not configured with the fail_over_mac=follow option. A VLAN virtual device cannot change its MAC address to match the parent’s new MAC address. In such a case, the traffic would still be sent with the incorrect source MAC address.
    • The bond is usually not expected to get IP addresses from a DHCP server or IPv6 auto-configuration. Ensure it by setting the ipv4.method=disable and ipv6.method=ignore options while creating the bond. Otherwise, if DHCP or IPv6 auto-configuration fails after some time, the interface might be brought down.
  • The switch, the host is connected to, is configured to support VLAN tags. For details, see the documentation of your switch.

Procedure

  1. Display the network interfaces: 

    # nmcli device status
DEVICE   TYPE      STATE         CONNECTION
enp1s0   ethernet  disconnected  enp1s0
bridge0  bridge    connected     bridge0
bond0    bond      connected     bond0
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Create the VLAN interface. For example, to create a VLAN interface named vlan10 that uses enp1s0 as its parent interface and that tags packets with VLAN ID 10, enter: 

    # nmcli connection add type vlan con-name vlan10 ifname vlan10 vlan.parent enp1s0 vlan.id 10
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that the VLAN must be within the range from 0 to 4094.

  3. By default, the VLAN connection inherits the maximum transmission unit (MTU) from the parent interface. Optionally, set a different MTU value: 

    # nmcli connection modify vlan10 ethernet.mtu 2000
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Configure the IPv4 settings:

    • To set a static IPv4 address, network mask, default gateway, and DNS server to the vlan10 connection, enter: 

      # nmcli connection modify vlan10 ipv4.addresses '192.0.2.1/24' ipv4.gateway '192.0.2.254' ipv4.dns '192.0.2.253' ipv4.method manual
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    • To use DHCP, no action is required.
    • If you plan to use this VLAN device as a port of other devices, no action is required.

  5. Configure the IPv6 settings:

    • To set a static IPv6 address, network mask, default gateway, and DNS server to the vlan10 connection, enter: 

      # nmcli connection modify vlan10 ipv6.addresses '2001:db8:1::1/32' ipv6.gateway '2001:db8:1::fffe' ipv6.dns '2001:db8:1::fffd' ipv6.method manual
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    • To use stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC), no action is required.
    • If you plan to use this VLAN device as a port of other devices, no action is required.

  6. Activate the connection: 

    # nmcli connection up vlan10
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Verify the settings: 

    # ip -d addr show vlan10
4: vlan10@enp1s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc noqueue state UP group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:72:2f:6e brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff promiscuity 0
    vlan protocol 802.1Q id 10 <REORDER_HDR> numtxqueues 1 numrxqueues 1 gso_max_size 65536 gso_max_segs 65535
    inet 192.0.2.1/24 brd 192.0.2.255 scope global noprefixroute vlan10
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    inet6 2001:db8:1::1/32 scope global noprefixroute
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    inet6 fe80::8dd7:9030:6f8e:89e6/64 scope link noprefixroute
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

5.2. Configuring VLAN tagging by using the RHEL web console
Link kopieren

You can configure VLAN tagging if you prefer to manage network settings using a web browser-based interface in the RHEL web console.

Prerequisites

  • The interface you plan to use as a parent to the virtual VLAN interface supports VLAN tags.

  • If you configure the VLAN on top of a bond interface:

    • The ports of the bond are up.
    • The bond is not configured with the fail_over_mac=follow option. A VLAN virtual device cannot change its MAC address to match the parent’s new MAC address. In such a case, the traffic would still be sent with the incorrect source MAC address.
    • The bond is usually not expected to get IP addresses from a DHCP server or IPv6 auto-configuration. Ensure it by disabling the IPv4 and IPv6 protocol creating the bond. Otherwise, if DHCP or IPv6 auto-configuration fails after some time, the interface might be brought down.
  • The switch, the host is connected to, is configured to support VLAN tags. For details, see the documentation of your switch.
  • You have installed the RHEL 8 web console.
  • You have enabled the cockpit service.

  • Your user account is allowed to log in to the web console.

    For instructions, see Installing and enabling the web console.

Procedure

  1. Log in to the RHEL 8 web console.

    For details, see Logging in to the web console.

  2. Select the Networking tab in the navigation on the left side of the screen.
  3. Click Add VLAN in the Interfaces section.
  4. Select the parent device.
  5. Enter the VLAN ID.

  6. Enter the name of the VLAN device or keep the automatically-generated name.

    vlan settings
    View larger image
    vlan settings
  7. Click Apply.

  8. By default, the VLAN device uses a dynamic IP address. If you want to set a static IP address:

    1. Click the name of the VLAN device in the Interfaces section.
    2. Click Edit next to the protocol you want to configure.
    3. Select Manual next to Addresses, and enter the IP address, prefix, and default gateway.
    4. In the DNS section, click the + button, and enter the IP address of the DNS server. Repeat this step to set multiple DNS servers.
    5. In the DNS search domains section, click the + button, and enter the search domain.

    6. If the interface requires static routes, configure them in the Routes section.

      bond team bridge vlan.ipv4
      View larger image
      bond team bridge vlan.ipv4
    7. Click Apply

Verification

  • Select the Networking tab in the navigation on the left side of the screen, and check if there is incoming and outgoing traffic on the interface:

    vlan verify
    View larger image
    vlan verify

5.3. Configuring VLAN tagging by using nmtui
Link kopieren

The nmtui application provides a text-based user interface for NetworkManager. You can use nmtui to configure VLAN tagging on a host without a graphical interface.

Note

In nmtui:

  • Navigate by using the cursor keys.
  • Press a button by selecting it and hitting Enter.
  • Select and clear checkboxes by using Space.
  • To return to the previous screen, use ESC.

Prerequisites

  • The interface you plan to use as a parent to the virtual VLAN interface supports VLAN tags.

  • If you configure the VLAN on top of a bond interface:

    • The ports of the bond are up.
    • The bond is not configured with the fail_over_mac=follow option. A VLAN virtual device cannot change its MAC address to match the parent’s new MAC address. In such a case, the traffic would still be sent with the then incorrect source MAC address.
    • The bond is usually not expected to get IP addresses from a DHCP server or IPv6 auto-configuration. Ensure it by setting the ipv4.method=disable and ipv6.method=ignore options while creating the bond. Otherwise, if DHCP or IPv6 auto-configuration fails after some time, the interface might be brought down.
  • The switch the host is connected to is configured to support VLAN tags. For details, see the documentation of your switch.

Procedure

  1. If you do not know the network device name on which you want configure VLAN tagging, display the available devices: 

    # nmcli device status
DEVICE     TYPE      STATE                   CONNECTION
enp1s0     ethernet  unavailable             --
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Start nmtui: 

    # nmtui
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  3. Select Edit a connection, and press Enter.
  4. Press Add.
  5. Select VLAN from the list of network types, and press Enter.

  6. Optional: Enter a name for the NetworkManager profile to be created.

    On hosts with multiple profiles, a meaningful name makes it easier to identify the purpose of a profile.

  7. Enter the VLAN device name to be created into the Device field.
  8. Enter the name of the device on which you want to configure VLAN tagging into the Parent field.
  9. Enter the VLAN ID. The ID must be within the range from 0 to 4094.

  10. Depending on your environment, configure the IP address settings in the IPv4 configuration and IPv6 configuration areas accordingly. For this, press the button next to these areas, and select:

    • Disabled, if this VLAN device does not require an IP address or you want to use it as a port of other devices.
    • Automatic, if a DHCP server or stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC) dynamically assigns an IP address to the VLAN device.

    • Manual, if the network requires static IP address settings. In this case, you must fill further fields:

      1. Press Show next to the protocol you want to configure to display additional fields.

      2. Press Add next to Addresses, and enter the IP address and the subnet mask in Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) format.

        If you do not specify a subnet mask, NetworkManager sets a /32 subnet mask for IPv4 addresses and /64 for IPv6 addresses.

      3. Enter the address of the default gateway.
      4. Press Add next to DNS servers, and enter the DNS server address.
      5. Press Add next to Search domains, and enter the DNS search domain.

    Figure 5.1. Example of a VLAN connection with static IP address settings

    nmtui vlan static IP
    View larger image
    nmtui vlan static IP
  11. Press OK to create and automatically activate the new connection.
  12. Press Back to return to the main menu.
  13. Select Quit, and press Enter to close the nmtui application.

Verification

  • Verify the settings: 

    # ip -d addr show vlan10
4: vlan10@enp1s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc noqueue state UP group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:72:2f:6e brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff promiscuity 0
    vlan protocol 802.1Q id 10 <REORDER_HDR> numtxqueues 1 numrxqueues 1 gso_max_size 65536 gso_max_segs 65535
    inet 192.0.2.1/24 brd 192.0.2.255 scope global noprefixroute vlan10
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    inet6 2001:db8:1::1/32 scope global noprefixroute
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    inet6 fe80::8dd7:9030:6f8e:89e6/64 scope link noprefixroute
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

5.4. Configuring VLAN tagging by using nm-connection-editor
Link kopieren

You can configure Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) tagging in a graphical interface using the nm-connection-editor application.

Prerequisites

  • The interface you plan to use as a parent to the virtual VLAN interface supports VLAN tags.

  • If you configure the VLAN on top of a bond interface:

    • The ports of the bond are up.
    • The bond is not configured with the fail_over_mac=follow option. A VLAN virtual device cannot change its MAC address to match the parent’s new MAC address. In such a case, the traffic would still be sent with the incorrect source MAC address.
  • The switch, the host is connected, to is configured to support VLAN tags. For details, see the documentation of your switch.

Procedure

  1. Open a terminal, and enter nm-connection-editor: 

    $ nm-connection-editor
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  2. Click the + button to add a new connection.
  3. Select the VLAN connection type, and click Create.

  4. On the VLAN tab:

    1. Select the parent interface.
    2. Select the VLAN id. Note that the VLAN must be within the range from 0 to 4094.
    3. By default, the VLAN connection inherits the maximum transmission unit (MTU) from the parent interface. Optionally, set a different MTU value.

    4. Optional: Set the name of the VLAN interface and further VLAN-specific options.

      vlan settings nm connection editor

  5. Configure the IP address settings on both the IPv4 Settings and IPv6 Settings tabs:

    • If you plan to use this bridge device as a port of other devices, set the Method field to Disabled.
    • To use DHCP, leave the Method field at its default, Automatic (DHCP).

    • To use static IP settings, set the Method field to Manual and fill the fields accordingly:

      vlan IP settings nm connection editor

  6. Click Save.
  7. Close nm-connection-editor.

Verification

  1. Verify the settings: 

    # ip -d addr show vlan10
4: vlan10@enp1s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc noqueue state UP group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:d5:e0:fb brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff promiscuity 0
    vlan protocol 802.1Q id 10 <REORDER_HDR> numtxqueues 1 numrxqueues 1 gso_max_size 65536 gso_max_segs 65535
    inet 192.0.2.1/24 brd 192.0.2.255 scope global noprefixroute vlan10
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    inet6 2001:db8:1::1/32 scope global noprefixroute
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    inet6 fe80::8dd7:9030:6f8e:89e6/64 scope link noprefixroute
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

5.5. Configuring VLAN tagging by using nmstatectl
Link kopieren

You can use the declarative Nmstate API to configure a Virtual Local Area Network VLAN. Nmstate ensures that the result matches the configuration file or rolls back the changes.

Depending on your environment, adjust the YAML file accordingly. For example, to use different devices than Ethernet adapters in the VLAN, adapt the base-iface attribute and type attributes of the ports you use in the VLAN.

Prerequisites

  • To use Ethernet devices as ports in the VLAN, the physical or virtual Ethernet devices must be installed on the server.
  • The nmstate package is installed.

Procedure

  1. Create a YAML file, for example ~/create-vlan.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
interfaces:
- name: vlan10
  type: vlan
  state: up
  ipv4:
    enabled: true
    address:
    - ip: 192.0.2.1
      prefix-length: 24
    dhcp: false
  ipv6:
    enabled: true
    address:
    - ip: 2001:db8:1::1
      prefix-length: 64
    autoconf: false
    dhcp: false
  vlan:
    base-iface: enp1s0
    id: 10
- name: enp1s0
  type: ethernet
  state: up

routes:
  config:
  - destination: 0.0.0.0/0
    next-hop-address: 192.0.2.254
    next-hop-interface: vlan10
  - destination: ::/0
    next-hop-address: 2001:db8:1::fffe
    next-hop-interface: vlan10

dns-resolver:
  config:
    search:
    - example.com
    server:
    - 192.0.2.200
    - 2001:db8:1::ffbb
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    These settings define a VLAN with ID 10 that uses the enp1s0 device. As the child device, the VLAN connection has the following settings:

    • A static IPv4 address - 192.0.2.1 with the /24 subnet mask
    • A static IPv6 address - 2001:db8:1::1 with the /64 subnet mask
    • An IPv4 default gateway - 192.0.2.254
    • An IPv6 default gateway - 2001:db8:1::fffe
    • An IPv4 DNS server - 192.0.2.200
    • An IPv6 DNS server - 2001:db8:1::ffbb
    • A DNS search domain - example.com

  2. Apply the settings to the system: 

    # nmstatectl apply ~/create-vlan.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the status of the devices and connections: 

    # nmcli device status
DEVICE      TYPE      STATE      CONNECTION
vlan10      vlan      connected  vlan10
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display all settings of the connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection show vlan10
connection.id:              vlan10
connection.uuid:            1722970f-788e-4f81-bd7d-a86bf21c9df5
connection.stable-id:       --
connection.type:            vlan
connection.interface-name:  vlan10
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Display the connection settings in YAML format: 

    # nmstatectl show vlan10
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

5.6. Configuring VLAN tagging by using the network RHEL system role
Link kopieren

You can use the network RHEL system role to configure VLAN tagging and, if a connection profile for the VLAN’s parent device does not exist, the role can create it as well.

If your network uses Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) to separate network traffic into logical networks, create a NetworkManager connection profile to configure VLAN tagging. By using Ansible and the network RHEL system role, you can automate this process and remotely configure connection profiles on the hosts defined in a playbook.

Note

If the VLAN device requires an IP address, default gateway, and DNS settings, configure them on the VLAN device and not on the parent device.

Prerequisites

Procedure

  1. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configure the network
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: VLAN connection profile with Ethernet port
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.network
      vars:
        network_connections:
          # Ethernet profile
          - name: enp1s0
            type: ethernet
            interface_name: enp1s0
            autoconnect: yes
            state: up
            ip:
              dhcp4: no
              auto6: no

          # VLAN profile
          - name: enp1s0.10
            type: vlan
            vlan:
              id: 10
            ip:
              dhcp4: yes
              auto6: yes
            parent: enp1s0
            state: up
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The settings specified in the example playbook include the following:

    type: <profile_type>
    Sets the type of the profile to create. The example playbook creates two connection profiles: One for the parent Ethernet device and one for the VLAN device.
    dhcp4: <value>
    If set to yes, automatic IPv4 address assignment from DHCP, PPP, or similar services is enabled. Disable the IP address configuration on the parent device.
    auto6: <value>
    If set to yes, IPv6 auto-configuration is enabled. In this case, by default, NetworkManager uses Router Advertisements and, if the router announces the managed flag, NetworkManager requests an IPv6 address and prefix from a DHCPv6 server. Disable the IP address configuration on the parent device.
    parent: <parent_device>
    Sets the parent device of the VLAN connection profile. In the example, the parent is the Ethernet interface.

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.network/README.md file on the control node.

  2. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  3. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Verify the VLAN settings: 

    # ansible managed-node-01.example.com -m command -a 'ip -d addr show enp1s0.10'
managed-node-01.example.com | CHANGED | rc=0 >>
4: vlan10@enp1s0.10: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc noqueue state UP group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:72:2f:6e brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff promiscuity 0
    vlan protocol 802.1Q id 10 <REORDER_HDR> numtxqueues 1 numrxqueues 1 gso_max_size 65536 gso_max_segs 65535
    ...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 6. Configuring a network bridge
Link kopieren

A network bridge is a link-layer device that forwards traffic between networks by using a MAC address table. For example, you can use a software bridge to connect virtual machines to the same network as the host.

A bridge requires a network device in each network the bridge should connect. When you configure a bridge, the bridge is called controller and the devices it uses ports.

You can create bridges on different types of devices, such as:

  • Physical and virtual Ethernet devices
  • Network bonds
  • Network teams
  • VLAN devices

Due to the IEEE 802.11 standard which specifies the use of 3-address frames in Wi-Fi for the efficient use of airtime, you cannot configure a bridge over Wi-Fi networks operating in Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure modes.

6.1. Configuring a network bridge by using nmcli
Link kopieren

To configure a network bridge on the command line, use the nmcli utility.

Prerequisites

Procedure

  1. Create a bridge interface: 

    # nmcli connection add type bridge con-name bridge0 ifname bridge0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This command creates a bridge named bridge0.

  2. Display the network interfaces, and note the names of the interfaces you want to add to the bridge: 

    # nmcli device status
DEVICE  TYPE      STATE         CONNECTION
enp7s0  ethernet  disconnected  --
enp8s0  ethernet  disconnected  --
bond0   bond      connected     bond0
bond1   bond      connected     bond1
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    In this example:

    • enp7s0 and enp8s0 are not configured. To use these devices as ports, add connection profiles in the next step.
    • bond0 and bond1 have existing connection profiles. To use these devices as ports, modify their profiles in the next step.

  3. Assign the interfaces to the bridge.

    1. If the interfaces you want to assign to the bridge are not configured, create new connection profiles for them: 

      # nmcli connection add type ethernet slave-type bridge con-name bridge0-port1 ifname enp7s0 master bridge0
# nmcli connection add type ethernet slave-type bridge con-name bridge0-port2 ifname enp8s0 master bridge0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      These commands create profiles for enp7s0 and enp8s0, and add them to the bridge0 connection.

    2. If you want to assign an existing connection profile to the bridge:

      1. Set the master parameter of these connections to bridge0: 

        # nmcli connection modify bond0 master bridge0
# nmcli connection modify bond1 master bridge0
        Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

        These commands assign the existing connection profiles named bond0 and bond1 to the bridge0 connection.

      2. Reactivate the connections: 

        # nmcli connection up bond0
# nmcli connection up bond1
        Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Configure the IPv4 settings:

    • To set a static IPv4 address, network mask, default gateway, and DNS server to the bridge0 connection, enter: 

      # nmcli connection modify bridge0 ipv4.addresses '192.0.2.1/24' ipv4.gateway '192.0.2.254' ipv4.dns '192.0.2.253' ipv4.dns-search 'example.com' ipv4.method manual
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    • To use DHCP, no action is required.
    • If you plan to use this bridge device as a port of other devices, no action is required.

  5. Configure the IPv6 settings:

    • To set a static IPv6 address, network mask, default gateway, and DNS server to the bridge0 connection, enter: 

      # nmcli connection modify bridge0 ipv6.addresses '2001:db8:1::1/64' ipv6.gateway '2001:db8:1::fffe' ipv6.dns '2001:db8:1::fffd' ipv6.dns-search 'example.com' ipv6.method manual
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    • To use stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC), no action is required.
    • If you plan to use this bridge device as a port of other devices, no action is required.

  6. Optional: Configure further properties of the bridge. For example, to set the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) priority of bridge0 to 16384, enter: 

    # nmcli connection modify bridge0 bridge.priority '16384'
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    By default, STP is enabled.

  7. Activate the connection: 

    # nmcli connection up bridge0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  8. Verify that the ports are connected, and the CONNECTION column displays the port’s connection name: 

    # nmcli device
DEVICE   TYPE      STATE      CONNECTION
...
enp7s0   ethernet  connected  bridge0-port1
enp8s0   ethernet  connected  bridge0-port2
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    When you activate any port of the connection, NetworkManager also activates the bridge, but not the other ports of it. You can configure that Red Hat Enterprise Linux enables all ports automatically when the bridge is enabled:

    1. Enable the connection.autoconnect-slaves parameter of the bridge connection: 

      # nmcli connection modify bridge0 connection.autoconnect-slaves 1
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Reactivate the bridge: 

      # nmcli connection up bridge0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Use the ip utility to display the link status of Ethernet devices that are ports of a specific bridge: 

    # ip link show master bridge0
3: enp7s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel master bridge0 state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:62:61:0e brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
4: enp8s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel master bridge0 state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:9e:f1:ce brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  • Use the bridge utility to display the status of Ethernet devices that are ports of any bridge device: 

    # bridge link show
3: enp7s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 master bridge0 state forwarding priority 32 cost 100
4: enp8s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 master bridge0 state listening priority 32 cost 100
5: enp9s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 master bridge1 state forwarding priority 32 cost 100
6: enp11s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 master bridge1 state blocking priority 32 cost 100
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    To display the status for a specific Ethernet device, use the bridge link show dev <ethernet_device_name> command.

6.2. Configuring a network bridge by using the RHEL web console
Link kopieren

Use the RHEL web console to configure a network bridge if you prefer to manage network settings using a web browser-based interface.

Prerequisites

  • You have installed the RHEL 8 web console.
  • You have enabled the cockpit service.

  • Your user account is allowed to log in to the web console.

    For instructions, see Installing and enabling the web console.

Procedure

  1. Log in to the RHEL 8 web console.

    For details, see Logging in to the web console.

  2. Select the Networking tab in the navigation on the left side of the screen.
  3. Click Add bridge in the Interfaces section.
  4. Enter the name of the bridge device you want to create.
  5. Select the interfaces that should be ports of the bridge.

  6. Optional: Enable the Spanning tree protocol (STP) feature to avoid bridge loops and broadcast radiation.

    bridge settings
    View larger image
    bridge settings
  7. Click Apply.

  8. By default, the bridge uses a dynamic IP address. If you want to set a static IP address:

    1. Click the name of the bridge in the Interfaces section.
    2. Click Edit next to the protocol you want to configure.
    3. Select Manual next to Addresses, and enter the IP address, prefix, and default gateway.
    4. In the DNS section, click the + button, and enter the IP address of the DNS server. Repeat this step to set multiple DNS servers.
    5. In the DNS search domains section, click the + button, and enter the search domain.

    6. If the interface requires static routes, configure them in the Routes section.

      bond team bridge vlan.ipv4
      View larger image
      bond team bridge vlan.ipv4
    7. Click Apply

Verification

  • Select the Networking tab in the navigation on the left side of the screen, and check if there is incoming and outgoing traffic on the interface:

    bridge verify
    View larger image
    bridge verify

6.3. Configuring a network bridge by using nmtui
Link kopieren

The nmtui application provides a text-based user interface for NetworkManager. You can use nmtui to configure a network bridge on a host without a graphical interface.

Note

In nmtui:

  • Navigate by using the cursor keys.
  • Press a button by selecting it and hitting Enter.
  • Select and clear checkboxes by using Space.
  • To return to the previous screen, use ESC.

Prerequisites

  • Two or more physical or virtual network devices are installed on the server.
  • To use Ethernet devices as ports of the bridge, the physical or virtual Ethernet devices must be installed on the server.

Procedure

  1. If you do not know the network device names on which you want configure a network bridge, display the available devices: 

    # nmcli device status
DEVICE     TYPE      STATE                   CONNECTION
enp7s0     ethernet  unavailable             --
enp8s0     ethernet  unavailable             --
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Start nmtui: 

    # nmtui
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  3. Select Edit a connection, and press Enter.
  4. Press Add.
  5. Select Bridge from the list of network types, and press Enter.

  6. Optional: Enter a name for the NetworkManager profile to be created.

    On hosts with multiple profiles, a meaningful name makes it easier to identify the purpose of a profile.

  7. Enter the bridge device name to be created into the Device field.

  8. Add ports to the bridge to be created:

    1. Press Add next to the Slaves list.
    2. Select the type of the interface you want to add as port to the bridge, for example, Ethernet.
    3. Optional: Enter a name for the NetworkManager profile to be created for this bridge port.
    4. Enter the port’s device name into the Device field.

    5. Press OK to return to the window with the bridge settings.

      Figure 6.1. Adding an Ethernet device as port to a bridge

      nmtui bridge add port
      View larger image
      nmtui bridge add port
    6. Repeat these steps to add more ports to the bridge.

  9. Depending on your environment, configure the IP address settings in the IPv4 configuration and IPv6 configuration areas accordingly. For this, press the button next to these areas, and select:

    • Disabled, if the bridge does not require an IP address.
    • Automatic, if a DHCP server or stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC) dynamically assigns an IP address to the bridge.

    • Manual, if the network requires static IP address settings. In this case, you must fill further fields:

      1. Press Show next to the protocol you want to configure to display additional fields.

      2. Press Add next to Addresses, and enter the IP address and the subnet mask in Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) format.

        If you do not specify a subnet mask, NetworkManager sets a /32 subnet mask for IPv4 addresses and /64 for IPv6 addresses.

      3. Enter the address of the default gateway.
      4. Press Add next to DNS servers, and enter the DNS server address.
      5. Press Add next to Search domains, and enter the DNS search domain.

    Figure 6.2. Example of a bridge connection without IP address settings

    nmtui bridge no IP
    View larger image
    nmtui bridge no IP
  10. Press OK to create and automatically activate the new connection.
  11. Press Back to return to the main menu.
  12. Select Quit, and press Enter to close the nmtui application.

Verification

  1. Use the ip utility to display the link status of Ethernet devices that are ports of a specific bridge: 

    # ip link show master bridge0
3: enp7s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel master bridge0 state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:62:61:0e brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
4: enp8s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel master bridge0 state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:9e:f1:ce brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Use the bridge utility to display the status of Ethernet devices that are ports of any bridge device: 

    # bridge link show
3: enp7s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 master bridge0 state forwarding priority 32 cost 100
4: enp8s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 master bridge0 state listening priority 32 cost 100
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    To display the status for a specific Ethernet device, use the bridge link show dev <ethernet_device_name> command.

6.4. Configuring a network bridge by using nm-connection-editor
Link kopieren

If you use Red Hat Enterprise Linux with a graphical interface, you can configure network bridges using the nm-connection-editor application.

Note that nm-connection-editor can add only new ports to a bridge. To use an existing connection profile as a port, create the bridge using the nmcli utility as described in Configuring a network bridge by using nmcli.

Prerequisites

  • Two or more physical or virtual network devices are installed on the server.
  • To use Ethernet devices as ports of the bridge, the physical or virtual Ethernet devices must be installed on the server.
  • To use team, bond, or VLAN devices as ports of the bridge, ensure that these devices are not already configured.

Procedure

  1. Open a terminal, and enter nm-connection-editor: 

    $ nm-connection-editor
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  2. Click the + button to add a new connection.
  3. Select the Bridge connection type, and click Create.

  4. On the Bridge tab:

    1. Optional: Set the name of the bridge interface in the Interface name field.

    2. Click the Add button to create a new connection profile for a network interface and adding the profile as a port to the bridge.

      1. Select the connection type of the interface. For example, select Ethernet for a wired connection.
      2. Optional: Set a connection name for the port device.
      3. If you create a connection profile for an Ethernet device, open the Ethernet tab, and select in the Device field the network interface you want to add as a port to the bridge. If you selected a different device type, configure it accordingly.
      4. Click Save.

    3. Repeat the previous step for each interface you want to add to the bridge.

      add nic to bridge in nm connection editor

  5. Optional: Configure further bridge settings, such as Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) options.

  6. Configure the IP address settings on both the IPv4 Settings and IPv6 Settings tabs:

    • If you plan to use this bridge device as a port of other devices, set the Method field to Disabled.
    • To use DHCP, leave the Method field at its default, Automatic (DHCP).

    • To use static IP settings, set the Method field to Manual and fill the fields accordingly:

      bridge IP settings nm connection editor

  7. Click Save.
  8. Close nm-connection-editor.

Verification

  • Use the ip utility to display the link status of Ethernet devices that are ports of a specific bridge. 

    # ip link show master bridge0
3: enp7s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel master bridge0 state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:62:61:0e brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
4: enp8s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel master bridge0 state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:9e:f1:ce brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  • Use the bridge utility to display the status of Ethernet devices that are ports in any bridge device: 

    # bridge link show
3: enp7s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 master bridge0 state forwarding priority 32 cost 100
4: enp8s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 master bridge0 state listening priority 32 cost 100
5: enp9s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 master bridge1 state forwarding priority 32 cost 100
6: enp11s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 master bridge1 state blocking priority 32 cost 100
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    To display the status for a specific Ethernet device, use the bridge link show dev ethernet_device_name command.

6.5. Configuring a network bridge by using nmstatectl
Link kopieren

You can use the declarative Nmstate API to configure a network bridge. Nmstate ensures that the result matches the configuration file or rolls back the changes.

Depending on your environment, adjust the YAML file accordingly. For example, to use different devices than Ethernet adapters in the bridge, adapt the base-iface attribute and type attributes of the ports you use in the bridge.

Prerequisites

  • Two or more physical or virtual network devices are installed on the server.
  • To use Ethernet devices as ports in the bridge, the physical or virtual Ethernet devices must be installed on the server.
  • To use team, bond, or VLAN devices as ports in the bridge, set the interface name in the port list, and define the corresponding interfaces.
  • The nmstate package is installed.

Procedure

  1. Create a YAML file, for example ~/create-bridge.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
interfaces:
- name: bridge0
  type: linux-bridge
  state: up
  ipv4:
    enabled: true
    address:
    - ip: 192.0.2.1
      prefix-length: 24
    dhcp: false
  ipv6:
    enabled: true
    address:
    - ip: 2001:db8:1::1
      prefix-length: 64
    autoconf: false
    dhcp: false
  bridge:
    options:
      stp:
        enabled: true
    port:
      - name: enp1s0
      - name: enp7s0
- name: enp1s0
  type: ethernet
  state: up
- name: enp7s0
  type: ethernet
  state: up

routes:
  config:
  - destination: 0.0.0.0/0
    next-hop-address: 192.0.2.254
    next-hop-interface: bridge0
  - destination: ::/0
    next-hop-address: 2001:db8:1::fffe
    next-hop-interface: bridge0
dns-resolver:
  config:
    search:
    - example.com
    server:
    - 192.0.2.200
    - 2001:db8:1::ffbb
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    These settings define a network bridge with the following settings:

    • Network interfaces in the bridge: enp1s0 and enp7s0
    • Spanning Tree Protocol (STP): Enabled
    • Static IPv4 address: 192.0.2.1 with the /24 subnet mask
    • Static IPv6 address: 2001:db8:1::1 with the /64 subnet mask
    • IPv4 default gateway: 192.0.2.254
    • IPv6 default gateway: 2001:db8:1::fffe
    • IPv4 DNS server: 192.0.2.200
    • IPv6 DNS server: 2001:db8:1::ffbb
    • DNS search domain: example.com

  2. Apply the settings to the system: 

    # nmstatectl apply ~/create-bridge.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the status of the devices and connections: 

    # nmcli device status
DEVICE      TYPE      STATE      CONNECTION
bridge0     bridge    connected  bridge0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display all settings of the connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection show bridge0
connection.id:              bridge0_
connection.uuid:            e2cc9206-75a2-4622-89cf-1252926060a9
connection.stable-id:       --
connection.type:            bridge
connection.interface-name:  bridge0
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Display the connection settings in YAML format: 

    # nmstatectl show bridge0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

You can use the network RHEL system role to configure a bridge and, if a connection profile for the bridge’s parent device does not exist, the role can create it as well.

You can connect multiple networks on layer 2 of the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model by creating a network bridge. To configure a bridge, create a connection profile in NetworkManager. By using Ansible and the network RHEL system role, you can automate this process and remotely configure connection profiles on the hosts defined in a playbook.

Note

If you want to assign IP addresses, gateways, and DNS settings to a bridge, configure them on the bridge and not on its ports.

Prerequisites

  • You have prepared the control node and the managed nodes.
  • You are logged in to the control node as a user who can run playbooks on the managed nodes.
  • The account you use to connect to the managed nodes has sudo permissions on them.
  • Two or more physical or virtual network devices are installed on the server.

Procedure

  1. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configure the network
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: Bridge connection profile with two Ethernet ports
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.network
      vars:
        network_connections:
          # Bridge profile
          - name: bridge0
            type: bridge
            interface_name: bridge0
            ip:
              dhcp4: yes
              auto6: yes
            state: up

          # Port profile for the 1st Ethernet device
          - name: bridge0-port1
            interface_name: enp7s0
            type: ethernet
            controller: bridge0
            port_type: bridge
            state: up

          # Port profile for the 2nd Ethernet device
          - name: bridge0-port2
            interface_name: enp8s0
            type: ethernet
            controller: bridge0
            port_type: bridge
            state: up
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The settings specified in the example playbook include the following:

    type: <profile_type>
    Sets the type of the profile to create. The example playbook creates three connection profiles: One for the bridge and two for the Ethernet devices.
    dhcp4: yes
    Enables automatic IPv4 address assignment from DHCP, PPP, or similar services.
    auto6: yes
    Enables IPv6 auto-configuration. By default, NetworkManager uses Router Advertisements. If the router announces the managed flag, NetworkManager requests an IPv6 address and prefix from a DHCPv6 server.

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.network/README.md file on the control node.

  2. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  3. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the link status of Ethernet devices that are ports of a specific bridge: 

    # ansible managed-node-01.example.com -m command -a 'ip link show master bridge0'
managed-node-01.example.com | CHANGED | rc=0 >>
3: enp7s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel master bridge0 state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:62:61:0e brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
4: enp8s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel master bridge0 state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:9e:f1:ce brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the status of Ethernet devices that are ports of any bridge device: 

    # ansible managed-node-01.example.com -m command -a 'bridge link show'
managed-node-01.example.com | CHANGED | rc=0 >>
3: enp7s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 master bridge0 state forwarding priority 32 cost 100
4: enp8s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 master bridge0 state listening priority 32 cost 100
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 7. Setting up an IPsec VPN
Link kopieren

Configure and manage a secure Virtual Private Network (VPN) by using the Libreswan implementation of the IPsec protocol suite to create encrypted tunnels for secure data transmission over the internet.

IPsec tunnels ensure the confidentiality and integrity of data in transit. Common use cases include connecting branch offices to headquarters or providing remote users with secure access to a corporate network.

RHEL provides different options to configure Libreswan:

  • Manually edit the Libreswan configuration files for granular control over advanced options.
  • Use the vpn RHEL system role to automate the process of creating Libreswan VPN configurations.

Libreswan does not use terms such as "client" and "server". Instead, IPsec refers to endpoints as "left" and "right". This design often enables you to use the same configuration on both hosts because Libreswan dynamically determines which role to adopt. As a convention, administrators typically use "left" for the local host and "right" for the remote host.

Note

Libreswan is the only supported VPN technology in RHEL.

IPsec relies on standardized protocols, such as Internet Key Exchange (IKE), to ensure that different systems can communicate effectively. However, in practice, minor differences in how vendors implement these standards can lead to compatibility problems. If you encounter such interoperability issues when connecting Libreswan to a third-party IPsec peer, contact Red Hat Support.

7.1. Libreswan as an IPsec VPN implementation
Link kopieren

In RHEL, you can configure a Virtual Private Network (VPN) by using the IPsec protocol, which is supported by the Libreswan application. Libreswan is a continuation of the Openswan application, and many examples from the Openswan documentation are interchangeable with Libreswan.

The IPsec protocol for a VPN is configured using the Internet Key Exchange (IKE) protocol. The terms IPsec and IKE are used interchangeably. An IPsec VPN is also called an IKE VPN, IKEv2 VPN, XAUTH VPN, Cisco VPN or IKE/IPsec VPN. A variant of an IPsec VPN that also uses the Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) is usually called an L2TP/IPsec VPN, which requires the xl2tpd package provided by the optional repository.

Libreswan is an open-source, user-space IKE implementation. IKE v1 and v2 are implemented as a user-level daemon. The IKE protocol is also encrypted. The IPsec protocol is implemented by the Linux kernel, and Libreswan configures the kernel to add and remove VPN tunnel configurations.

The IKE protocol uses UDP port 500 and 4500. The IPsec protocol consists of two protocols:

  • Encapsulated Security Payload (ESP), which has protocol number 50.
  • Authenticated Header (AH), which has protocol number 51.

The AH protocol is not recommended for use. Users of AH are recommended to migrate to ESP with null encryption.

The IPsec protocol provides two modes of operation:

  • Tunnel Mode (the default)
  • Transport Mode

You can configure the kernel with IPsec without IKE. This is called manual keying. You can also configure manual keying using the ip xfrm commands, however, this is strongly discouraged for security reasons. Libreswan communicates with the Linux kernel using the Netlink interface. The kernel performs packet encryption and decryption.

Libreswan uses the Network Security Services (NSS) cryptographic library. NSS is certified for use with the Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) Publication 140-2.

Important

IKE/IPsec VPNs, implemented by Libreswan and the Linux kernel, is the only VPN technology recommended for use in RHEL. Do not use any other VPN technology without understanding the risks of doing so.

In RHEL, Libreswan follows system-wide cryptographic policies by default. This ensures that Libreswan uses secure settings for current threat models including IKEv2 as a default protocol. See Using system-wide crypto policies for more information.

Libreswan does not use the terms "source" and "destination" or "server" and "client" because IKE/IPsec are peer to peer protocols. Instead, it uses the terms "left" and "right" to refer to end points (the hosts). This also allows you to use the same configuration on both end points in most cases. However, administrators usually choose to always use "left" for the local host and "right" for the remote host.

The leftid and rightid options serve as identification of the respective hosts in the authentication process. See the ipsec.conf(5) man page for more information.

7.2. Authentication methods in Libreswan
Link kopieren

Libreswan supports several authentication methods, each of which fits a different scenario.

Pre-Shared key (PSK)

Pre-Shared Key (PSK) is the simplest authentication method. For security reasons, do not use PSKs shorter than 64 random characters. In FIPS mode, PSKs must comply with a minimum-strength requirement depending on the integrity algorithm used. You can set PSK by using the authby=secret connection.

Raw RSA keys

Raw RSA keys are commonly used for static host-to-host or subnet-to-subnet IPsec configurations. Each host is manually configured with the public RSA keys of all other hosts, and Libreswan sets up an IPsec tunnel between each pair of hosts. This method does not scale well for large numbers of hosts.

You can generate a raw RSA key on a host using the ipsec newhostkey command. You can list generated keys by using the ipsec showhostkey command. The leftrsasigkey= line is required for connection configurations that use CKA ID keys. Use the authby=rsasig connection option for raw RSA keys.

X.509 certificates

X.509 certificates are commonly used for large-scale deployments with hosts that connect to a common IPsec gateway. A central certificate authority (CA) signs RSA certificates for hosts or users. This central CA is responsible for relaying trust, including the revocations of individual hosts or users.

For example, you can generate X.509 certificates using the openssl command and the NSS certutil command. Because Libreswan reads user certificates from the NSS database using the certificates' nickname in the leftcert= configuration option, provide a nickname when you create a certificate.

If you use a custom CA certificate, you must import it to the Network Security Services (NSS) database. You can import any certificate in the PKCS #12 format to the Libreswan NSS database by using the ipsec import command.

Warning

Libreswan requires an Internet Key Exchange (IKE) peer ID as a subject alternative name (SAN) for every peer certificate as described in section 3.1 of RFC 4945. Disabling this check by setting the require-id-on-certificate=no connection option can make the system vulnerable to man-in-the-middle attacks.

Use the authby=rsasig connection option for authentication based on X.509 certificates using RSA with SHA-1 and SHA-2. You can further limit it for ECDSA digital signatures using SHA-2 by setting authby= to ecdsa and RSA Probabilistic Signature Scheme (RSASSA-PSS) digital signatures based authentication with SHA-2 through authby=rsa-sha2. The default value is authby=rsasig,ecdsa.

The certificates and the authby= signature methods should match. This increases interoperability and preserves authentication in one digital signature system.

NULL authentication

NULL authentication is used to gain mesh encryption without authentication. It protects against passive attacks but not against active attacks. However, because IKEv2 allows asymmetric authentication methods, NULL authentication can also be used for internet-scale opportunistic IPsec. In this model, clients authenticate the server, but servers do not authenticate the client. This model is similar to secure websites using TLS. Use authby=null for NULL authentication.

Protection against quantum computers

In addition to the previously mentioned authentication methods, you can use the Post-quantum Pre-shared Key (PPK) method to protect against possible attacks by quantum computers. Individual clients or groups of clients can use their own PPK by specifying a PPK ID that corresponds to an out-of-band configured pre-shared key.

Using IKEv1 with pre-shared keys protects against quantum attackers. The redesign of IKEv2 does not offer this protection natively. Libreswan offers the use of a Post-quantum Pre-shared Key (PPK) to protect IKEv2 connections against quantum attacks.

To enable optional PPK support, add ppk=yes to the connection definition. To require PPK, add ppk=insist. Then, each client can be given a PPK ID with a secret value that is communicated out-of-band (and preferably quantum-safe). The PPK’s should be very strong in randomness and not based on dictionary words. The PPK ID and PPK data are stored in the ipsec.secrets file, for example: 

@west @east : PPKS "user1" "thestringismeanttobearandomstr"
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

The PPKS option refers to static PPKs. This experimental function uses one-time-pad-based Dynamic PPKs. Upon each connection, a new part of the one-time pad is used as the PPK. When used, that part of the dynamic PPK inside the file is overwritten with zeros to prevent re-use. If there is no more one-time-pad material left, the connection fails. See the ipsec.secrets(5) man page for more information.

Warning

The implementation of dynamic PPKs is provided as an unsupported Technology Preview. Use with caution.

7.3. Installing Libreswan
Link kopieren

Before you can set a VPN through the Libreswan IPsec/IKE implementation, you must install the corresponding packages, start the ipsec service, and allow the service in your firewall.

Prerequisites

  • The AppStream repository is enabled.

Procedure

  1. Install the libreswan packages: 

    # yum install libreswan
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. If you are re-installing Libreswan, remove its old database files and create a new database: 

    # systemctl stop ipsec
# rm /etc/ipsec.d/*db
# ipsec initnss
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Start the ipsec service, and enable the service to be started automatically on boot: 

    # systemctl enable ipsec --now
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Configure the firewall to allow 500 and 4500/UDP ports for the IKE, ESP, and AH protocols by adding the ipsec service: 

    # firewall-cmd --add-service="ipsec"
# firewall-cmd --runtime-to-permanent
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

7.4. Creating a host-to-host VPN
Link kopieren

You can configure Libreswan to create a host-to-host IPsec VPN between two hosts referred to as left and right using authentication by raw RSA keys.

Prerequisites

  • Libreswan is installed and the ipsec service is started on each node.

Procedure

  1. Generate a raw RSA key pair on each host: 

    # ipsec newhostkey
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. The previous step returned the generated key’s ckaid. Use that ckaid with the following command on left, for example: 

    # ipsec showhostkey --left --ckaid 2d3ea57b61c9419dfd6cf43a1eb6cb306c0e857d
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The output of the previous command generated the leftrsasigkey= line required for the configuration. Do the same on the second host (right): 

    # ipsec showhostkey --right --ckaid a9e1f6ce9ecd3608c24e8f701318383f41798f03
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. In the /etc/ipsec.d/ directory, create a new my_host-to-host.conf file. Write the RSA host keys from the output of the ipsec showhostkey commands in the previous step to the new file. For example: 

    conn mytunnel
    leftid=@west
    left=192.1.2.23
    leftrsasigkey=0sAQOrlo+hOafUZDlCQmXFrje/oZm [...] W2n417C/4urYHQkCvuIQ==
    rightid=@east
    right=192.1.2.45
    rightrsasigkey=0sAQO3fwC6nSSGgt64DWiYZzuHbc4 [...] D/v8t5YTQ==
    authby=rsasig
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. After importing keys, restart the ipsec service: 

    # systemctl restart ipsec
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Load the connection: 

    # ipsec auto --add mytunnel
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  6. Establish the tunnel: 

    # ipsec auto --up mytunnel
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  7. To automatically start the tunnel when the ipsec service is started, add the following line to the connection definition: 

    auto=start
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  8. If you use this host in a network with DHCP or Stateless Address Autoconfiguration (SLAAC), the connection can be vulnerable to being redirected. For details and mitigation steps, see Assigning a VPN connection to a dedicated routing table to prevent the connection from bypassing the tunnel.

7.5. Configuring a site-to-site VPN
Link kopieren

To create a site-to-site IPsec VPN, by joining two networks, an IPsec tunnel between the two hosts is created. The hosts thus act as the end points, which are configured to permit traffic from one or more subnets to pass through. Therefore you can think of the host as gateways to the remote portion of the network.

The configuration of the site-to-site VPN only differs from the host-to-host VPN in that one or more networks or subnets must be specified in the configuration file.

Prerequisites

Procedure

  1. Copy the file with the configuration of your host-to-host VPN to a new file, for example: 

    # cp /etc/ipsec.d/my_host-to-host.conf /etc/ipsec.d/my_site-to-site.conf
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Add the subnet configuration to the file created in the previous step, for example: 

    conn mysubnet
     also=mytunnel
     leftsubnet=192.0.1.0/24
     rightsubnet=192.0.2.0/24
     auto=start

conn mysubnet6
     also=mytunnel
     leftsubnet=2001:db8:0:1::/64
     rightsubnet=2001:db8:0:2::/64
     auto=start

# the following part of the configuration file is the same for both host-to-host and site-to-site connections:

conn mytunnel
    leftid=@west
    left=192.1.2.23
    leftrsasigkey=0sAQOrlo+hOafUZDlCQmXFrje/oZm [...] W2n417C/4urYHQkCvuIQ==
    rightid=@east
    right=192.1.2.45
    rightrsasigkey=0sAQO3fwC6nSSGgt64DWiYZzuHbc4 [...] D/v8t5YTQ==
    authby=rsasig
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  3. If you use this host in a network with DHCP or Stateless Address Autoconfiguration (SLAAC), the connection can be vulnerable to being redirected. For details and mitigation steps, see Assigning a VPN connection to a dedicated routing table to prevent the connection from bypassing the tunnel.

7.6. Configuring a remote access VPN
Link kopieren

Road warriors are traveling users with mobile clients and a dynamically assigned IP address. The mobile clients authenticate using X.509 certificates.

The following example shows configuration for IKEv2, and it avoids using the IKEv1 XAUTH protocol.

On the server: 

conn roadwarriors
    ikev2=insist
    # support (roaming) MOBIKE clients (RFC 4555)
    mobike=yes
    fragmentation=yes
    left=1.2.3.4
    # if access to the LAN is given, enable this, otherwise use 0.0.0.0/0
    # leftsubnet=10.10.0.0/16
    leftsubnet=0.0.0.0/0
    leftcert=gw.example.com
    leftid=%fromcert
    leftxauthserver=yes
    leftmodecfgserver=yes
    right=%any
    # trust our own Certificate Agency
    rightca=%same
    # pick an IP address pool to assign to remote users
    # 100.64.0.0/16 prevents RFC1918 clashes when remote users are behind NAT
    rightaddresspool=100.64.13.100-100.64.13.254
    # if you want remote clients to use some local DNS zones and servers
    modecfgdns="1.2.3.4, 5.6.7.8"
    modecfgdomains="internal.company.com, corp"
    rightxauthclient=yes
    rightmodecfgclient=yes
    authby=rsasig
    # optionally, run the client X.509 ID through pam to allow or deny client
    # pam-authorize=yes
    # load connection, do not initiate
    auto=add
    # kill vanished roadwarriors
    dpddelay=1m
    dpdtimeout=5m
    dpdaction=clear
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

On the mobile client, the road warrior’s device, use a slight variation of the previous configuration: 

conn to-vpn-server
    ikev2=insist
    # pick up our dynamic IP
    left=%defaultroute
    leftsubnet=0.0.0.0/0
    leftcert=myname.example.com
    leftid=%fromcert
    leftmodecfgclient=yes
    # right can also be a DNS hostname
    right=1.2.3.4
    # if access to the remote LAN is required, enable this, otherwise use 0.0.0.0/0
    # rightsubnet=10.10.0.0/16
    rightsubnet=0.0.0.0/0
    fragmentation=yes
    # trust our own Certificate Agency
    rightca=%same
    authby=rsasig
    # allow narrowing to the server’s suggested assigned IP and remote subnet
    narrowing=yes
    # support (roaming) MOBIKE clients (RFC 4555)
    mobike=yes
    # initiate connection
    auto=start
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
Note

If you use this host in a network with DHCP or Stateless Address Autoconfiguration (SLAAC), the connection can be vulnerable to being redirected. For details and mitigation steps, see Assigning a VPN connection to a dedicated routing table to prevent the connection from bypassing the tunnel.

7.7. Configuring a mesh VPN
Link kopieren

A mesh VPN network, which is also known as an any-to-any VPN, is a network where all nodes communicate using IPsec. The configuration allows for exceptions for nodes that cannot use IPsec. The mesh VPN network can be configured in two ways:

  • To require IPsec.
  • To prefer IPsec but allow a fallback to clear-text communication.

Authentication between the nodes can be based on X.509 certificates or on DNS Security Extensions (DNSSEC).

You can use any regular IKEv2 authentication method for opportunistic IPsec, because these connections are regular Libreswan configurations, except for the opportunistic IPsec that is defined by right=%opportunisticgroup entry. A common authentication method is for hosts to authenticate each other based on X.509 certificates using a commonly shared certification authority (CA). Cloud deployments typically issue certificates for each node in the cloud as part of the standard procedure.

Important

Do not use PreSharedKey (PSK) authentication because one compromised host would result in the group PSK secret being compromised as well.

You can use NULL authentication to deploy encryption between nodes without authentication, which protects only against passive attackers.

The following procedure uses X.509 certificates. You can generate these certificates by using any kind of CA management system, such as the Dogtag Certificate System. Dogtag assumes that the certificates for each node are available in the PKCS #12 format (.p12 files), which contain the private key, the node certificate, and the Root CA certificate used to validate other nodes' X.509 certificates.

Each node has an identical configuration with the exception of its X.509 certificate. This allows for adding new nodes without reconfiguring any of the existing nodes in the network. The PKCS #12 files require a "friendly name", for which we use the name "node" so that the configuration files referencing the friendly name can be identical for all nodes.

Prerequisites

  • Libreswan is installed, and the ipsec service is started on each node.

  • A new NSS database is initialized.

    1. If you already have an old NSS database, remove the old database files: 

      # systemctl stop ipsec
# rm /etc/ipsec.d/*db
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. You can initialize a new database with the following command: 

      # ipsec initnss
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Procedure

  1. On each node, import PKCS #12 files. This step requires the password used to generate the PKCS #12 files: 

    # ipsec import nodeXXX.p12
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Create the following three connection definitions for the IPsec required (private), IPsec optional (private-or-clear), and No IPsec (clear) profiles: 

    # cat /etc/ipsec.d/mesh.conf
conn clear
	auto=ondemand
	type=passthrough
	authby=never
	left=%defaultroute
	right=%group

conn private
	auto=ondemand
	type=transport
	authby=rsasig
	failureshunt=drop
	negotiationshunt=drop
	ikev2=insist
	left=%defaultroute
	leftcert=nodeXXXX
	leftid=%fromcert
	rightid=%fromcert
	right=%opportunisticgroup

conn private-or-clear
	auto=ondemand
	type=transport
	authby=rsasig
	failureshunt=passthrough
	negotiationshunt=passthrough
	# left
	left=%defaultroute
	leftcert=nodeXXXX
	leftid=%fromcert
	leftrsasigkey=%cert
	# right
	rightrsasigkey=%cert
	rightid=%fromcert
	right=%opportunisticgroup
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    where:

    auto=<option>

    Specifies how Libreswan handles connection initiation. Valid options:

    • ondemand: Initiates a connection automatically when the kernel receives the first packet that matches a trap XFRM policy. Use this option for opportunistic IPsec or for connections that do not need to be active continuously.
    • add: Prepares the connection and accepts incoming connection requests. To initiate the connection from the local peer, use the ipsec auto --up command.
    • start: Automatically activates the connection when the Libreswan service starts.
    leftid=%fromcert and rightid=%fromcert
    Configures Libreswan to retrieve the identity from the distinguished name (DN) field of the certificate.
    leftcert="<server_certificate_nickname>"
    Specifies the nickname of the server’s certificate used in the NSS database.

  3. Add the IP address of the network to the corresponding category. For example, if all nodes reside in the 10.15.0.0/16 network, and all nodes must use IPsec encryption: 

    # echo "10.15.0.0/16" >> /etc/ipsec.d/policies/private
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. To allow certain nodes, for example, 10.15.34.0/24, to work with and without IPsec, add those nodes to the private-or-clear group: 

    # echo "10.15.34.0/24" >> /etc/ipsec.d/policies/private-or-clear
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. To define a host, for example, 10.15.1.2, which is not capable of IPsec into the clear group, use: 

    # echo "10.15.1.2/32" >> /etc/ipsec.d/policies/clear
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    You can create the files in the /etc/ipsec.d/policies directory from a template for each new node, or you can provision them by using Puppet or Ansible.

    Note that every node has the same list of exceptions or different traffic flow expectations. Two nodes, therefore, might not be able to communicate because one requires IPsec and the other cannot use IPsec.

  6. Restart the node to add it to the configured mesh: 

    # systemctl restart ipsec
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  7. If you use this host in a network with DHCP or Stateless Address Autoconfiguration (SLAAC), the connection can be vulnerable to being redirected. For details and mitigation steps, see Assigning a VPN connection to a dedicated routing table to prevent the connection from bypassing the tunnel.

Verification

  1. Open an IPsec tunnel by using the ping command: 

    # ping <nodeYYY>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the NSS database with the imported certification: 

    # certutil -L -d sql:/etc/ipsec.d

Certificate Nickname    Trust Attributes
                        SSL,S/MIME,JAR/XPI

west                    u,u,u
ca                      CT,,
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. See which tunnels are open on the node: 

    # ipsec trafficstatus
006 #2: "private#10.15.0.0/16"[1] ...<nodeYYY>, type=ESP, add_time=1691399301, inBytes=512, outBytes=512, maxBytes=2^63B, id='C=US, ST=NC, O=Example Organization, CN=east'
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

7.8. Deploying a FIPS-compliant IPsec VPN
Link kopieren

You can deploy a FIPS-compliant IPsec VPN solution with Libreswan. To do so, you can identify which cryptographic algorithms are available and which are disabled for Libreswan in FIPS mode.

Prerequisites

  • The AppStream repository is enabled.

Procedure

  1. Install the libreswan packages: 

    # yum install libreswan
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. If you are re-installing Libreswan, remove its old NSS database: 

    # systemctl stop ipsec
# rm /etc/ipsec.d/*db
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Start the ipsec service, and enable the service to be started automatically on boot: 

    # systemctl enable ipsec --now
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Configure the firewall to allow 500 and 4500 UDP ports for the IKE, ESP, and AH protocols by adding the ipsec service: 

    # firewall-cmd --add-service="ipsec"
# firewall-cmd --runtime-to-permanent
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Switch the system to FIPS mode: 

    # fips-mode-setup --enable
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  6. Restart your system to allow the kernel to switch to FIPS mode: 

    # reboot
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Confirm Libreswan is running in FIPS mode: 

    # ipsec whack --fipsstatus
000 FIPS mode enabled
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Alternatively, check entries for the ipsec unit in the systemd journal: 

    $ journalctl -u ipsec
...
Jan 22 11:26:50 localhost.localdomain pluto[3076]: FIPS Product: YES
Jan 22 11:26:50 localhost.localdomain pluto[3076]: FIPS Kernel: YES
Jan 22 11:26:50 localhost.localdomain pluto[3076]: FIPS Mode: YES
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. To see the available algorithms in FIPS mode: 

    # ipsec pluto --selftest 2>&1 | head -11
FIPS Product: YES
FIPS Kernel: YES
FIPS Mode: YES
NSS DB directory: sql:/etc/ipsec.d
Initializing NSS
Opening NSS database "sql:/etc/ipsec.d" read-only
NSS initialized
NSS crypto library initialized
FIPS HMAC integrity support [enabled]
FIPS mode enabled for pluto daemon
NSS library is running in FIPS mode
FIPS HMAC integrity verification self-test passed
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. To query disabled algorithms in FIPS mode: 

    # ipsec pluto --selftest 2>&1 | grep disabled
Encryption algorithm CAMELLIA_CTR disabled; not FIPS compliant
Encryption algorithm CAMELLIA_CBC disabled; not FIPS compliant
Encryption algorithm SERPENT_CBC disabled; not FIPS compliant
Encryption algorithm TWOFISH_CBC disabled; not FIPS compliant
Encryption algorithm TWOFISH_SSH disabled; not FIPS compliant
Encryption algorithm NULL disabled; not FIPS compliant
Encryption algorithm CHACHA20_POLY1305 disabled; not FIPS compliant
Hash algorithm MD5 disabled; not FIPS compliant
PRF algorithm HMAC_MD5 disabled; not FIPS compliant
PRF algorithm AES_XCBC disabled; not FIPS compliant
Integrity algorithm HMAC_MD5_96 disabled; not FIPS compliant
Integrity algorithm HMAC_SHA2_256_TRUNCBUG disabled; not FIPS compliant
Integrity algorithm AES_XCBC_96 disabled; not FIPS compliant
DH algorithm MODP1024 disabled; not FIPS compliant
DH algorithm MODP1536 disabled; not FIPS compliant
DH algorithm DH31 disabled; not FIPS compliant
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. To list all allowed algorithms and ciphers in FIPS mode: 

    # ipsec pluto --selftest 2>&1 | grep ESP | grep FIPS | sed "s/^.*FIPS//"
{256,192,*128}  aes_ccm, aes_ccm_c
{256,192,*128}  aes_ccm_b
{256,192,*128}  aes_ccm_a
[*192]  3des
{256,192,*128}  aes_gcm, aes_gcm_c
{256,192,*128}  aes_gcm_b
{256,192,*128}  aes_gcm_a
{256,192,*128}  aesctr
{256,192,*128}  aes
{256,192,*128}  aes_gmac
sha, sha1, sha1_96, hmac_sha1
sha512, sha2_512, sha2_512_256, hmac_sha2_512
sha384, sha2_384, sha2_384_192, hmac_sha2_384
sha2, sha256, sha2_256, sha2_256_128, hmac_sha2_256
aes_cmac
null
null, dh0
dh14
dh15
dh16
dh17
dh18
ecp_256, ecp256
ecp_384, ecp384
ecp_521, ecp521
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

7.9. Protecting the IPsec NSS database by a password
Link kopieren

By default, the IPsec service creates its Network Security Services (NSS) database with an empty password during the first start. To enhance security, you can add password protection.

Note

In the previous releases of RHEL up to version 6.6, you had to protect the IPsec NSS database with a password to meet the FIPS 140-2 requirements because the NSS cryptographic libraries were certified for the FIPS 140-2 Level 2 standard. In RHEL 8, NIST certified NSS to Level 1 of this standard, and this status does not require password protection for the database.

Prerequisites

  • The /etc/ipsec.d/ directory contains NSS database files.

Procedure

  1. Enable password protection for the NSS database for Libreswan: 

    # certutil -N -d sql:/etc/ipsec.d
Enter Password or Pin for "NSS Certificate DB":
Enter a password which will be used to encrypt your keys.
The password should be at least 8 characters long,
and should contain at least one non-alphabetic character.

Enter new password:
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Create the /etc/ipsec.d/nsspassword file that contains the password you have set in the previous step, for example: 

    # cat /etc/ipsec.d/nsspassword
NSS Certificate DB:_<password>_
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The nsspassword file use the following syntax: 

    <token_1>:<password1>
<token_2>:<password2>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The default NSS software token is NSS Certificate DB. If your system is running in FIPS mode, the name of the token is NSS FIPS 140-2 Certificate DB.

  3. Depending on your scenario, either start or restart the ipsec service after you finish the nsspassword file: 

    # systemctl restart ipsec
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Check that the ipsec service is running after you have added a non-empty password to its NSS database: 

    # systemctl status ipsec
● ipsec.service - Internet Key Exchange (IKE) Protocol Daemon for IPsec
   Loaded: loaded (/usr/lib/systemd/system/ipsec.service; enabled; vendor preset: disable>
   Active: active (running)...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Check that the Journal log contains entries that confirm a successful initialization: 

    # journalctl -u ipsec
...
pluto[6214]: Initializing NSS using read-write database "sql:/etc/ipsec.d"
pluto[6214]: NSS Password from file "/etc/ipsec.d/nsspassword" for token "NSS Certificate DB" with length 20 passed to NSS
pluto[6214]: NSS crypto library initialized
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

7.10. Configuring an IPsec VPN to use TCP
Link kopieren

Libreswan supports TCP encapsulation of IKE and IPsec packets as described in RFC 8229. With this feature, you can establish IPsec VPNs on networks that prevent traffic transmitted via UDP and Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP). You can configure VPN servers and clients to use TCP either as a fallback or as the main VPN transport protocol. Because TCP encapsulation has bigger performance costs, use TCP as the main VPN protocol only if UDP is permanently blocked in your scenario.

Prerequisites

Procedure

  1. Add the following option to the /etc/ipsec.conf file in the config setup section: 

    listen-tcp=yes
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. To use TCP encapsulation as a fallback option when the first attempt over UDP fails, add the following two options to the client’s connection definition: 

    enable-tcp=fallback
tcp-remoteport=4500
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Alternatively, if you know that UDP is permanently blocked, use the following options in the client’s connection configuration: 

    enable-tcp=yes
tcp-remoteport=4500
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Offloading Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) to the hardware accelerates IPsec connections over Ethernet. By default, Libreswan detects if hardware supports this feature and, as a result, enables ESP hardware offload. In case that the feature was disabled or explicitly enabled, you can switch back to automatic detection.

Prerequisites

  • The network card supports ESP hardware offload.
  • The network driver supports ESP hardware offload.
  • The IPsec connection is configured and works.

Procedure

  1. Edit the Libreswan configuration file in the /etc/ipsec.d/ directory of the connection that should use automatic detection of ESP hardware offload support.
  2. Ensure the nic-offload parameter is not set in the connection’s settings.

  3. If you removed nic-offload, restart the ipsec service: 

    # systemctl restart ipsec
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the tx_ipsec and rx_ipsec counters of the Ethernet device the IPsec connection uses: 

    # ethtool -S enp1s0 | grep -E "_ipsec"
     tx_ipsec: 10
     rx_ipsec: 10
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Send traffic through the IPsec tunnel. For example, ping a remote IP address: 

    # ping -c 5 remote_ip_address
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Display the tx_ipsec and rx_ipsec counters of the Ethernet device again: 

    # ethtool -S enp1s0 | grep -E "_ipsec"
     tx_ipsec: 15
     rx_ipsec: 15
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If the counter values have increased, ESP hardware offload works.

Offloading Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) to the hardware accelerates IPsec connections. If you use a network bond for fail-over reasons, the requirements and the procedure to configure ESP hardware offload are different from those using a regular Ethernet device. For example, in this scenario, you enable the offload support on the bond, and the kernel applies the settings to the ports of the bond.

Prerequisites

  • All network cards in the bond support ESP hardware offload. Use the ethtool -k <interface_name> | grep "esp-hw-offload" command to verify whether each bond port supports this feature.
  • The bond is configured and works.
  • The bond uses the active-backup mode. The bonding driver does not support any other modes for this feature.
  • The IPsec connection is configured and works.

Procedure

  1. Enable ESP hardware offload support on the network bond: 

    # nmcli connection modify bond0 ethtool.feature-esp-hw-offload on
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This command enables ESP hardware offload support on the bond0 connection.

  2. Reactivate the bond0 connection: 

    # nmcli connection up bond0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Edit the Libreswan configuration file in the /etc/ipsec.d/ directory of the connection that should use ESP hardware offload, and append the nic-offload=yes statement to the connection entry: 

    conn example
    ...
    nic-offload=yes
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Restart the ipsec service: 

    # systemctl restart ipsec
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

The verification methods depend on various aspects, such as the kernel version and driver. For example, certain drivers provide counters, but their names can vary. See the documentation of your network driver for details.

The following verification steps work for the ixgbe driver on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 8:

  1. Display the active port of the bond: 

    # grep "Currently Active Slave" /proc/net/bonding/bond0
Currently Active Slave: enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the tx_ipsec and rx_ipsec counters of the active port: 

    # ethtool -S enp1s0 | grep -E "_ipsec"
     tx_ipsec: 10
     rx_ipsec: 10
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Send traffic through the IPsec tunnel. For example, ping a remote IP address: 

    # ping -c 5 remote_ip_address
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Display the tx_ipsec and rx_ipsec counters of the active port again: 

    # ethtool -S enp1s0 | grep -E "_ipsec"
     tx_ipsec: 15
     rx_ipsec: 15
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If the counter values have increased, ESP hardware offload works.

7.13. Configuring IPsec VPN connections by using RHEL system roles
Link kopieren

Configure IPsec VPN connections to establish encrypted tunnels over untrusted networks and ensure the integrity of data in transit. By using the RHEL system roles, you can automate the setup for use cases, such as connecting branch offices to headquarters.

Note

The vpn RHEL system role can only create VPN configurations that use pre-shared keys (PSKs) or certificates to authenticate peers to each other.

A host-to-host VPN establishes an encrypted connection between two devices, allowing applications to communicate safely over an insecure network. By using the vpn RHEL system role, you can automate the process of creating IPsec host-to-host connections.

For authentication, a pre-shared key (PSK) is a straightforward method that uses a single, shared secret known only to the two peers. This approach is simple to configure and ideal for basic setups where ease of deployment is a priority. However, you must keep the key strictly confidential. An attacker with access to the key can compromise the connection.

Prerequisites

Procedure

  1. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configuring VPN
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com, managed-node-02.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: IPsec VPN with PSK authentication
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.vpn
      vars:
        vpn_connections:
          - hosts:
              managed-node-01.example.com:
              managed-node-02.example.com:
            auth_method: psk
            auto: start
        vpn_manage_firewall: true
        vpn_manage_selinux: true
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The settings specified in the example playbook include the following:

    hosts: <list>

    Defines a YAML dictionary with the peers between which you want to configure a VPN. If an entry is not an Ansible managed node, you must specify its fully-qualified domain name (FQDN) or IP address in the hostname parameter, for example: 

              ...
          - hosts:
              ...
              external-host.example.com:
                hostname: 192.0.2.1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The role configures the VPN connection on each managed node. The connections are named <peer_A>-to-<peer_B>, for example, managed-node-01.example.com-to-managed-node-02.example.com. Note that the role cannot configure Libreswan on external (unmanaged) nodes. You must manually create the configuration on these peers.

    auth_method: psk
    Enables PSK authentication between the peers. The role uses openssl on the control node to create the PSK.
    auto: <startup_method>
    Specifies the startup method of the connection. Valid values are add, ondemand, start, and ignore. For details, see the ipsec.conf(5) man page on a system with Libreswan installed. The default value of this variable is null, which means no automatic startup operation.
    vpn_manage_firewall: true
    Defines that the role opens the required ports in the firewalld service on the managed nodes.
    vpn_manage_selinux: true
    Defines that the role sets the required SELinux port type on the IPsec ports.

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.vpn/README.md file on the control node.

  2. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  3. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Confirm that the connections are successfully started, for example: 

    # ansible managed-node-01.example.com -m shell -a 'ipsec trafficstatus | grep "managed-node-01.example.com-to-managed-node-02.example.com"'
...
006 #3: "managed-node-01.example.com-to-managed-node-02.example.com", type=ESP, add_time=1741857153, inBytes=38622, outBytes=324626, maxBytes=2^63B, id='@managed-node-02.example.com'
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only succeeds if the VPN connection is active. If you set the auto variable in the playbook to a value other than start, you might need to manually activate the connection on the managed nodes first.

Use the vpn RHEL system role to automate the process of creating an IPsec host-to-host VPN. To enhance security by minimizing the risk of control messages being intercepted or disrupted, configure separate connections for both the data traffic and the control traffic.

A host-to-host VPN establishes a direct, secure, and encrypted connection between two devices, allowing applications to communicate safely over an insecure network, such as the internet.

For authentication, a pre-shared key (PSK) is a straightforward method that uses a single, shared secret known only to the two peers. This approach is simple to configure and ideal for basic setups where ease of deployment is a priority. However, you must keep the key strictly confidential. An attacker with access to the key can compromise the connection.

Prerequisites

Procedure

  1. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configuring VPN
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com, managed-node-02.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: IPsec VPN with PSK authentication
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.vpn
      vars:
        vpn_connections:
          - name: control_plane_vpn
            hosts:
              managed-node-01.example.com:
                hostname: 203.0.113.1  # IP address for the control plane
              managed-node-02.example.com:
                hostname: 198.51.100.2 # IP address for the control plane
            auth_method: psk
            auto: start
          - name: data_plane_vpn
            hosts:
              managed-node-01.example.com:
                hostname: 10.0.0.1   # IP address for the data plane
              managed-node-02.example.com:
                hostname: 172.16.0.2 # IP address for the data plane
            auth_method: psk
            auto: start
        vpn_manage_firewall: true
        vpn_manage_selinux: true
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The settings specified in the example playbook include the following:

    hosts: <list>

    Defines a YAML dictionary with the hosts between which you want to configure a VPN. The connections are named <name>-<IP_address_A>-to-<IP_address_B>, for example control_plane_vpn-203.0.113.1-to-198.51.100.2.

    The role configures the VPN connection on each managed node. Note that the role cannot configure Libreswan on external (unmanaged) nodes. You must manually create the configuration on these hosts.

    auth_method: psk
    Enables PSK authentication between the hosts. The role uses openssl on the control node to create the pre-shared key.
    auto: <startup_method>
    Specifies the startup method of the connection. Valid values are add, ondemand, start, and ignore. For details, see the ipsec.conf(5) man page on a system with Libreswan installed. The default value of this variable is null, which means no automatic startup operation.
    vpn_manage_firewall: true
    Defines that the role opens the required ports in the firewalld service on the managed nodes.
    vpn_manage_selinux: true
    Defines that the role sets the required SELinux port type on the IPsec ports.

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.vpn/README.md file on the control node.

  2. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  3. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Confirm that the connections are successfully started, for example: 

    # ansible managed-node-01.example.com -m shell -a 'ipsec trafficstatus | grep "control_plane_vpn-203.0.113.1-to-198.51.100.2"'
...
006 #3: "control_plane_vpn-203.0.113.1-to-198.51.100.2", type=ESP, add_time=1741860073, inBytes=0, outBytes=0, maxBytes=2^63B, id='198.51.100.2'
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only succeeds if the VPN connection is active. If you set the auto variable in the playbook to a value other than start, you might need to manually activate the connection on the managed nodes first.

A site-to-site VPN establishes an encrypted tunnel between two distinct networks, seamlessly linking them across an insecure public network. By using the vpn RHEL system role, you can automate the process of creating IPsec site-to-site VPN connections.

A site-to-site VPN enables devices in a branch office to access resources at a corporate headquarters just as if they were all part of the same local network.

For authentication, a pre-shared key (PSK) is a straightforward method that uses a single, shared secret known only to the two peers. This approach is simple to configure and ideal for basic setups where ease of deployment is a priority. However, you must keep the key strictly confidential. An attacker with access to the key can compromise the connection.

Prerequisites

Procedure

  1. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configuring VPN
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com, managed-node-02.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: IPsec VPN with PSK authentication
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.vpn
      vars:
        vpn_connections:
          - hosts:
              managed-node-01.example.com:
                subnets:
                  - 192.0.2.0/24
              managed-node-02.example.com:
                subnets:
                  - 198.51.100.0/24
                  - 203.0.113.0/24
            auth_method: psk
            auto: start
        vpn_manage_firewall: true
        vpn_manage_selinux: true
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The settings specified in the example playbook include the following:

    hosts: <list>

    Defines a YAML dictionary with the gateways between which you want to configure a VPN. If an entry is not an Ansible-managed node, you must specify its fully-qualified domain name (FQDN) or IP address in the hostname parameter, for example: 

              ...
          - hosts:
              ...
              external-host.example.com:
                hostname: 192.0.2.1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The role configures the VPN connection on each managed node. The connections are named <gateway_A>-to-<gateway_B>, for example, managed-node-01.example.com-to-managed-node-02.example.com. Note that the role cannot configure Libreswan on external (unmanaged) nodes. You must manually create the configuration on these peers.

    subnets: <yaml_list_of_subnets>
    Defines subnets in classless inter-domain routing (CIDR) format that are connected through the tunnel.
    auth_method: psk
    Enables PSK authentication between the peers. The role uses openssl on the control node to create the PSK.
    auto: <startup_method>
    Specifies the startup method of the connection. Valid values are add, ondemand, start, and ignore. For details, see the ipsec.conf(5) man page on a system with Libreswan installed. The default value of this variable is null, which means no automatic startup operation.
    vpn_manage_firewall: true
    Defines that the role opens the required ports in the firewalld service on the managed nodes.
    vpn_manage_selinux: true
    Defines that the role sets the required SELinux port type on the IPsec ports.

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.vpn/README.md file on the control node.

  2. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  3. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Confirm that the connections are successfully started, for example: 

    # ansible managed-node-01.example.com -m shell -a 'ipsec trafficstatus | grep "managed-node-01.example.com-to-managed-node-02.example.com"'
...
006 #3: "managed-node-01.example.com-to-managed-node-02.example.com", type=ESP, add_time=1741857153, inBytes=38622, outBytes=324626, maxBytes=2^63B, id='@managed-node-02.example.com'
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only succeeds if the VPN connection is active. If you set the auto variable in the playbook to a value other than start, you might need to manually activate the connection on the managed nodes first.

An IPsec mesh creates a fully interconnected network where every server can communicate securely and directly with every other server. By using the vpn RHEL system role, you can automate configuring a VPN mesh with certificate-based authentication among managed nodes.

An IPsec mesh is ideal for distributed database clusters or high-availability environments that span multiple data centers or cloud providers. Establishing a direct, encrypted tunnel between each pair of servers ensures secure communication without a central bottleneck.

For authentication, using digital certificates managed by a Certificate Authority (CA) offers a highly secure and scalable solution. Each host in the mesh presents a certificate signed by a trusted CA. This method provides strong, verifiable authentication and simplifies user management. Access can be granted or revoked centrally at the CA, and Libreswan enforces this by checking each certificate against a certificate revocation list (CRL), denying access if a certificate appears on the list.

Prerequisites

  • You have prepared the control node and the managed nodes.
  • You are logged in to the control node as a user who can run playbooks on the managed nodes.
  • The account you use to connect to the managed nodes has sudo permissions on them.

  • You prepared a PKCS #12 file for each managed node:

    • Each file contains:

      • The private key of the server
      • The server certificate
      • The CA certificate
      • If required, intermediate certificates
    • The files are named <managed_node_name_as_in_the_inventory>.p12.
    • The files are stored in the same directory as the playbook.

    • The server certificate contains the following fields:

      • Extended Key Usage (EKU) is set to TLS Web Server Authentication.
      • Common Name (CN) or Subject Alternative Name (SAN) is set to the fully-qualified domain name (FQDN) of the host.
      • X509v3 CRL distribution points contains URLs to Certificate Revocation Lists (CRLs).

Procedure

  1. Edit the ~/inventory file, and append the cert_name variable: 

    managed-node-01.example.com cert_name=managed-node-01.example.com
managed-node-02.example.com cert_name=managed-node-02.example.com
managed-node-03.example.com cert_name=managed-node-03.example.com
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Set the cert_name variable to the value of the common name (CN) field used in the certificate for each host. Typically, the CN field is set to the fully-qualified domain name (FQDN).

  2. Store your sensitive variables in an encrypted file:

    1. Create the vault: 

      $ ansible-vault create ~/vault.yml
New Vault password: <vault_password>
Confirm New Vault password: <vault_password>
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. After the ansible-vault create command opens an editor, enter the sensitive data in the <key>: <value> format: 

      pkcs12_pwd: <password>
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    3. Save the changes, and close the editor. Ansible encrypts the data in the vault.

  3. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    - name: Configuring VPN
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com, managed-node-02.example.com, managed-node-03.example.com
  vars_files:
    - ~/vault.yml
  tasks:
    - name: Install LibreSwan
      ansible.builtin.package:
        name: libreswan
        state: present

    - name: Identify the path to IPsec NSS database
      ansible.builtin.set_fact:
        nss_db_dir: "{{ '/etc/ipsec.d/' if
          ansible_distribution in ['CentOS', 'RedHat']
          and ansible_distribution_major_version is version('8', '=')
          else '/var/lib/ipsec/nss/' }}"

    - name: Locate IPsec NSS database files
      ansible.builtin.find:
        paths: "{{ nss_db_dir }}"
        patterns: "*.db"
      register: db_files

    - name: Initialize IPsec NSS database if not initialized
      ansible.builtin.command:
        cmd: ipsec initnss
      when: db_files.matched == 0

    - name: Copy PKCS #12 file to the managed node
      ansible.builtin.copy:
        src: "~/{{ inventory_hostname }}.p12"
        dest: "/etc/ipsec.d/{{ inventory_hostname }}.p12"
        mode: 0600

    - name: Import PKCS #12 file in IPsec NSS database
      ansible.builtin.shell:
        cmd: 'pk12util -d {{ nss_db_dir }} -i /etc/ipsec.d/{{ inventory_hostname }}.p12 -W "{{ pkcs12_pwd }}"'

    - name: Remove PKCS #12 file
      ansible.builtin.file:
        path: "/etc/ipsec.d/{{ inventory_hostname }}.p12"
        state: absent

    - name: Opportunistic mesh IPsec VPN with certificate-based authentication
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.vpn
      vars:
        vpn_connections:
          - opportunistic: true
            auth_method: cert
            policies:
              - policy: private
                cidr: default
              - policy: private
                cidr: 192.0.2.0/24
              - policy: clear
                cidr: 192.0.2.1/32
        vpn_manage_firewall: true
        vpn_manage_selinux: true
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The settings specified in the example playbook include the following:

    opportunistic: true
    Enables an opportunistic mesh among multiple hosts. The policies variable defines for which subnets and hosts traffic must or can be encrypted and which of them should continue using plain text connections.
    auth_method: cert
    Enables certificate-based authentication. This requires that you specify the nickname of each managed node’s certificate in the inventory.
    policies: <list_of_policies>

    Defines the Libreswan policies in YAML list format.

    The default policy is private-or-clear. To change it to private, the above playbook contains an according policy for the default cidr entry.

    To prevent a loss of the SSH connection during the execution of the playbook if the Ansible control node is in the same IP subnet as the managed nodes, add a clear policy for the control node’s IP address. For example, if the mesh should be configured for the 192.0.2.0/24 subnet and the control node uses the IP address 192.0.2.1, you require a clear policy for 192.0.2.1/32 as shown in the playbook.

    For details about policies, see the ipsec.conf(5) man page on a system with Libreswan installed.

    vpn_manage_firewall: true
    Defines that the role opens the required ports in the firewalld service on the managed nodes.
    vpn_manage_selinux: true
    Defines that the role sets the required SELinux port type on the IPsec ports.

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.vpn/README.md file on the control node.

  4. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --ask-vault-pass --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  5. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook --ask-vault-pass ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. On a node in the mesh, ping another node to activate the connection: 

    [root@managed-node-01]# ping managed-node-02.example.com
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Confirm that the connection is active: 

    [root@managed-node-01]# ipsec trafficstatus
006 #2: "private#192.0.2.0/24"[1] ...192.0.2.2, type=ESP, add_time=1741938929, inBytes=372408, outBytes=545728, maxBytes=2^63B, id='CN=managed-node-02.example.com'
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Overriding system-wide crypto-policies for a connection

The RHEL system-wide cryptographic policies create a special connection called %default. This connection contains the default values for the ikev2, esp, and ike options. However, you can override the default values by specifying the mentioned option in the connection configuration file.

For example, the following configuration allows connections that use IKEv1 with AES and SHA-1 or SHA-2, and IPsec (ESP) with either AES-GCM or AES-CBC: 

conn MyExample
  ...
  ikev2=never
  ike=aes-sha2,aes-sha1;modp2048
  esp=aes_gcm,aes-sha2,aes-sha1
  ...
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Note that AES-GCM is available for IPsec (ESP) and for IKEv2, but not for IKEv1.

Disabling system-wide crypto policies for all connections

To disable system-wide crypto policies for all IPsec connections, comment out the following line in the /etc/ipsec.conf file: 

include /etc/crypto-policies/back-ends/libreswan.config
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Then add the ikev2=never option to your connection configuration file.

7.15. Troubleshooting IPsec configurations
Link kopieren

Diagnosing IPsec configuration failures can be challenging, because issues can be caused by mismatched settings, firewall rules, and kernel-level errors. The following information provides a systematic approach to resolving common problems with IPsec VPN connections.

7.15.1. Basic connection issues
Link kopieren

Problems with VPN connections often occur due to mismatched configurations between the endpoints.

To confirm that an IPsec connection is established, enter: 

# ipsec trafficstatus
006 #8: "vpn.example.com"[1] 192.0.2.1, type=ESP, add_time=1595296930, inBytes=5999, outBytes=3231, id='@vpn.example.com', lease=198.51.100.1/32
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

For a successful connection, the command shows an entry with the connection’s name and details. If the output is empty, the tunnel is not established.

7.15.3. Mismatched Configurations
Link kopieren

VPN connections fail if the endpoints are not configured with matching Internet Key Exchange (IKE) versions, algorithms, IP address ranges, or pre-shared keys (PSK). If you identify a mismatch, you must align the settings on both endpoints to resolve the issue.

Remote Peer Not Running IKE/IPsec

If the connection was refused, an ICMP error is displayed: 

# ipsec up vpn.example.com
...
000 "vpn.example.com"[1] 192.0.2.2 #16: ERROR: asynchronous network error report on wlp2s0 (192.0.2.2:500), complainant 198.51.100.1: Connection refused [errno 111, origin ICMP type 3 code 3 (not authenticated)]
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
Mismatched IKE Algorithms

The connection fails with a NO_PROPOSAL_CHOSEN notification during the initial setup: 

# ipsec up vpn.example.com
...
003 "vpn.example.com"[1] 193.110.157.148 #3: dropping unexpected IKE_SA_INIT message containing NO_PROPOSAL_CHOSEN notification; message payloads: N; missing payloads: SA,KE,Ni
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
Mismatched IPsec Algorithms

The connection fails with a NO_PROPOSAL_CHOSEN error after the initial exchange: 

# ipsec up vpn.example.com
...
182 "vpn.example.com"[1] 193.110.157.148 #5: STATE_PARENT_I2: sent v2I2, expected v2R2 {auth=IKEv2 cipher=AES_GCM_16_256 integ=n/a prf=HMAC_SHA2_256 group=MODP2048}
002 "vpn.example.com"[1] 193.110.157.148 #6: IKE_AUTH response contained the error notification NO_PROPOSAL_CHOSEN
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
Mismatched IP Address Ranges (IKEv2)

The remote peer responds with a TS_UNACCEPTABLE error: 

# ipsec up vpn.example.com
...
1v2 "vpn.example.com" #1: STATE_PARENT_I2: sent v2I2, expected v2R2 {auth=IKEv2 cipher=AES_GCM_16_256 integ=n/a prf=HMAC_SHA2_512 group=MODP2048}
002 "vpn.example.com" #2: IKE_AUTH response contained the error notification TS_UNACCEPTABLE
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
Mismatched IP Address Ranges (IKEv1)

The connection times out during quick mode, with a message indicating the peer did not accept the proposal: 

# ipsec up vpn.example.com
...
031 "vpn.example.com" #2: STATE_QUICK_I1: 60 second timeout exceeded after 0 retransmits.  No acceptable response to our first Quick Mode message: perhaps peer likes no proposal
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
Mismatched PSK (IKEv2)

The peer rejects the connection with an AUTHENTICATION_FAILED error: 

# ipsec up vpn.example.com
...
003 "vpn.example.com" #1: received Hash Payload does not match computed value
223 "vpn.example.com" #1: sending notification INVALID_HASH_INFORMATION to 192.0.2.23:500
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
Mismatched PSK (IKEv1)

The hash payload does not match, making the IKE message unreadable and resulting in an INVALID_HASH_INFORMATION error: 

# ipsec up vpn.example.com
...
002 "vpn.example.com" #1: IKE SA authentication request rejected by peer: AUTHENTICATION_FAILED
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

7.15.4. MTU issues
Link kopieren

Diagnose intermittent IPsec connection failures caused by Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) issues. Encryption increases packet size, leading to fragmentation and lost data when packets exceed the network’s MTU, often seen with larger data transfers.

A common symptom is that small packets, for example pings, work correctly, but larger packets, such as an SSH session, freeze after the login. To fix the problem, lower the MTU for the tunnel by adding the mtu=1400 option to the configuration file.

7.15.5. NAT conflicts
Link kopieren

Resolve NAT conflicts that occur when an IPsec host also acts as a NAT router. Incorrect NAT application can translate source IP addresses before encryption, causing packets to be sent unencrypted over the network.

For example, if the source IP address of the packet is translated by a masquerade rule before IPsec encryption is applied, the packet’s source no longer matches the IPsec policy, and Libreswan sends it unencrypted over the network.

To solve this problem, add a firewall rule that excludes traffic between the IPsec subnets from NAT. This rule should be inserted at the beginning of the POSTROUTING chain to ensure it is processed before the general NAT rule.

Example 7.1. Solution by using the nftables framework

The following example uses nftables to set up a basic NAT environment that excludes traffic between the 192.0.2.0/24 and 198.51.100.0/24 subnets from address translation: 

# nft add table ip nat
# nft add chain ip nat postrouting { type nat hook postrouting priority 100 \; }
# nft add rule ip nat postrouting ip saddr 192.0.2.0/24 ip daddr 198.51.100.0/24 return
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

7.15.6. Kernel-level IPsec issues
Link kopieren

Troubleshoot kernel-level IPsec issues when a VPN tunnel appears established but no traffic flows. In this case, inspect the kernel’s IPsec state to check if the tunnel policies and cryptographic keys were correctly installed.

This process involves checking two components:

  • The Security Policy Database (SPD): The rule that instructs the kernel what traffic to encrypt.
  • The Security Association Database (SAD): The keys that instruct the kernel how to encrypt that traffic.

First, check if the correct policy exists in the SPD: 

# ip xfrm policy
src 192.0.2.1/32 dst 10.0.0.0/8
	dir out priority 666 ptype main
	tmpl src 198.51.100.13 dst 203.0.113.22
		proto esp reqid 16417 mode tunnel
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

The output should contain the policies matching your leftsubnet and rightsubnet parameters with both in and out directions. If you do not see a policy for your traffic, Libreswan failed to create the kernel rule, and traffic is not encrypted.

If the policy exists, check if it has a corresponding set of keys in the SAD: 

# ip xfrm state
src 203.0.113.22 dst 198.51.100.13
	proto esp spi 0xa78b3fdb reqid 16417 mode tunnel
	auth-trunc hmac(sha1) 0x3763cd3b... 96
	enc cbc(aes) 0xd9dba399...
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
Warning

This command displays private cryptographic keys. Do not share this output, because attackers can use it to decrypt your VPN traffic.

If a policy exists but you see no corresponding state with the same reqid, it typically means the Internet Key Exchange (IKE) negotiation failed. The two VPN endpoints could not agree on a set of keys.

For more detailed diagnostics, use the -s option with either of the commands. This option adds traffic counters, which can help you identify if the kernel processes packets by a specific rule.

7.15.7. Kernel IPsec subsystem bugs
Link kopieren

Under rare conditions, a defect in the IPsec subsystem of the kernel can cause it to lose synchronization with the Internet Key Exchange (IKE) user-space daemon. This de-synchronization can result in discrepancies between negotiated security associations and the actual enforcement of IPsec policies within the kernel, potentially disrupting secure network communication. To check for kernel-level errors, display the transform (XFRM) statistics: 

# cat /proc/net/xfrm_stat
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

If any of the counters in the output, such as XfrmInError, show a nonzero value, it indicates a problem with the kernel subsystem. In this case, open a support case, and attach the output of the command along with the corresponding IKE logs.

7.15.8. Displaying Libreswan logs
Link kopieren

Display Libreswan logs to diagnose and troubleshoot IPsec service events and issues. Access the journal for the ipsec service to gain insights into connection status and potential problems.

To display the journal, enter: 

# journalctl -xeu ipsec
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

If the default logging level does not provide enough details, enable comprehensive debug logging by adding the following settings to the config setup section in the /etc/ipsec.conf file: 

plutodebug=all
logfile=/var/log/pluto.log
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Because debug logging can produce many entries, redirecting the messages to a dedicated log file can prevent the journald and systemd services from rate-limiting the messages.

7.16. Configuring a VPN connection with control-center
Link kopieren

If you use Red Hat Enterprise Linux with a graphical interface, you can configure a VPN connection in the GNOME control-center.

Prerequisites

  • The NetworkManager-libreswan-gnome package is installed.

Procedure

  1. Press the Super key, type Settings, and press Enter to open the control-center application.
  2. Select the Network entry on the left.
  3. Click the + icon.
  4. Select VPN.

  5. Select the Identity menu entry to see the basic configuration options:

    General

    Gateway - The name or IP address of the remote VPN gateway.

    Authentication

    Type

    • IKEv2 (Certificate)- client is authenticated by certificate. It is more secure (default).

    • IKEv1 (XAUTH) - client is authenticated by user name and password, or a pre-shared key (PSK).

      The following configuration settings are available under the Advanced section:

      Figure 7.1. Advanced options of a VPN connection

      networking vpn advanced options
      View larger image
      networking vpn advanced options
      Warning

      When configuring an IPsec-based VPN connection using the gnome-control-center application, the Advanced dialog displays the configuration, but it does not allow any changes. As a consequence, users cannot change any advanced IPsec options. Use the nm-connection-editor or nmcli tools instead to perform configuration of the advanced properties.

      Identification

    • Domain - If required, enter the Domain Name.

      Security

    • Phase1 Algorithms - corresponds to the ike Libreswan parameter - enter the algorithms to be used to authenticate and set up an encrypted channel.

    • Phase2 Algorithms - corresponds to the esp Libreswan parameter - enter the algorithms to be used for the IPsec negotiations.

      Check the Disable PFS field to turn off Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) to ensure compatibility with old servers that do not support PFS.

    • Phase1 Lifetime - corresponds to the ikelifetime Libreswan parameter - how long the key used to encrypt the traffic will be valid.

    • Phase2 Lifetime - corresponds to the salifetime Libreswan parameter - how long a particular instance of a connection should last before expiring.

      Note that the encryption key should be changed from time to time for security reasons.

    • Remote network - corresponds to the rightsubnet Libreswan parameter - the destination private remote network that should be reached through the VPN.

      Check the narrowing field to enable narrowing. Note that it is only effective in IKEv2 negotiation.

    • Enable fragmentation - corresponds to the fragmentation Libreswan parameter - whether or not to allow IKE fragmentation. Valid values are yes (default) or no.
    • Enable Mobike - corresponds to the mobike Libreswan parameter - whether or not to allow Mobility and Multihoming Protocol (MOBIKE, RFC 4555) to enable a connection to migrate its endpoint without needing to restart the connection from scratch. This is used on mobile devices that switch between wired, wireless, or mobile data connections. The values are no (default) or yes.

  6. Select the IPv4 menu entry:

    IPv4 Method

    • Automatic (DHCP) - Choose this option if the network you are connecting to uses a DHCP server to assign dynamic IP addresses.
    • Link-Local Only - Choose this option if the network you are connecting to does not have a DHCP server and you do not want to assign IP addresses manually. Random addresses will be assigned as per RFC 3927 with prefix 169.254/16.
    • Manual - Choose this option if you want to assign IP addresses manually.

    • Disable - IPv4 is disabled for this connection.

      DNS

      In the DNS section, when Automatic is ON, switch it to OFF to enter the IP address of a DNS server you want to use separating the IPs by comma.

      Routes

      Note that in the Routes section, when Automatic is ON, routes from DHCP are used, but you can also add additional static routes. When OFF, only static routes are used.

    • Address - Enter the IP address of a remote network or host.
    • Netmask - The netmask or prefix length of the IP address entered above.
    • Gateway - The IP address of the gateway leading to the remote network or host entered above.

    • Metric - A network cost, a preference value to give to this route. Lower values will be preferred over higher values.

      Use this connection only for resources on its network

      Select this check box to prevent the connection from becoming the default route. Selecting this option means that only traffic specifically destined for routes learned automatically over the connection or entered here manually is routed over the connection.

  7. To configure IPv6 settings in a VPN connection, select the IPv6 menu entry:

    IPv6 Method

    • Automatic - Choose this option to use IPv6 Stateless Address AutoConfiguration (SLAAC) to create an automatic, stateless configuration based on the hardware address and Router Advertisements (RA).
    • Automatic, DHCP only - Choose this option to not use RA, but request information from DHCPv6 directly to create a stateful configuration.
    • Link-Local Only - Choose this option if the network you are connecting to does not have a DHCP server and you do not want to assign IP addresses manually. Random addresses will be assigned as per RFC 4862 with prefix FE80::0.
    • Manual - Choose this option if you want to assign IP addresses manually.

    • Disable - IPv6 is disabled for this connection.

      Note that DNS, Routes, Use this connection only for resources on its network are common to IPv4 settings.

  8. Once you have finished editing the VPN connection, click the Add button to customize the configuration or the Apply button to save it for the existing one.
  9. Switch the profile to ON to activate the VPN connection.
  10. If you use this host in a network with DHCP or Stateless Address Autoconfiguration (SLAAC), the connection can be vulnerable to being redirected. For details and mitigation steps, see Assigning a VPN connection to a dedicated routing table to prevent the connection from bypassing the tunnel.

7.17. Configuring a VPN connection using nm-connection-editor
Link kopieren

If you use Red Hat Enterprise Linux with a graphical interface, you can configure a VPN connection in the nm-connection-editor application.

Prerequisites

  • The NetworkManager-libreswan-gnome package is installed.

  • If you configure an Internet Key Exchange version 2 (IKEv2) connection:

    • The certificate is imported into the IPsec network security services (NSS) database.
    • The nickname of the certificate in the NSS database is known.

Procedure

  1. Open a terminal, and enter: 

    $ nm-connection-editor
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  2. Click the + button to add a new connection.
  3. Select the IPsec based VPN connection type, and click Create.

  4. On the VPN tab:

    1. Enter the host name or IP address of the VPN gateway into the Gateway field, and select an authentication type. Based on the authentication type, you must enter different additional information:

      • IKEv2 (Certifiate) authenticates the client by using a certificate, which is more secure. This setting requires the nickname of the certificate in the IPsec NSS database

      • IKEv1 (XAUTH) authenticates the user by using a user name and password (pre-shared key). This setting requires that you enter the following values:

        • User name
        • Password
        • Group name
        • Secret

    2. If the remote server specifies a local identifier for the IKE exchange, enter the exact string in the Remote ID field. In the remote server runs Libreswan, this value is set in the server’s leftid parameter.

      nm connection editor vpn tab

    3. Optional: Configure additional settings by clicking the Advanced button. You can configure the following settings:

      • Identification

        • Domain - If required, enter the domain name.

      • Security

        • Phase1 Algorithms corresponds to the ike Libreswan parameter. Enter the algorithms to be used to authenticate and set up an encrypted channel.

        • Phase2 Algorithms corresponds to the esp Libreswan parameter. Enter the algorithms to be used for the IPsec negotiations.

          Check the Disable PFS field to turn off Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) to ensure compatibility with old servers that do not support PFS.

        • Phase1 Lifetime corresponds to the ikelifetime Libreswan parameter. This parameter defines how long the key used to encrypt the traffic is valid.
        • Phase2 Lifetime corresponds to the salifetime Libreswan parameter. This parameter defines how long a security association is valid.

      • Connectivity

        • Remote network corresponds to the rightsubnet Libreswan parameter and defines the destination private remote network that should be reached through the VPN.

          Check the narrowing field to enable narrowing. Note that it is only effective in the IKEv2 negotiation.

        • Enable fragmentation corresponds to the fragmentation Libreswan parameter and defines whether or not to allow IKE fragmentation. Valid values are yes (default) or no.
        • Enable Mobike corresponds to the mobike Libreswan parameter. The parameter defines whether or not to allow Mobility and Multihoming Protocol (MOBIKE) (RFC 4555) to enable a connection to migrate its endpoint without needing to restart the connection from scratch. This is used on mobile devices that switch between wired, wireless or mobile data connections. The values are no (default) or yes.

  5. On the IPv4 Settings tab, select the IP assignment method and, optionally, set additional static addresses, DNS servers, search domains, and routes.

    IPsec IPv4 tab

  6. Save the connection.
  7. Close nm-connection-editor.
  8. If you use this host in a network with DHCP or Stateless Address Autoconfiguration (SLAAC), the connection can be vulnerable to being redirected. For details and mitigation steps, see Assigning a VPN connection to a dedicated routing table to prevent the connection from bypassing the tunnel.
Note

When you add a new connection by clicking the + button, NetworkManager creates a new configuration file for that connection and then opens the same dialog that is used for editing an existing connection. The difference between these dialogs is that an existing connection profile has a Details menu entry.

To protect your VPN connection from traffic redirection attacks, assign it to a dedicated routing table. This prevents malicious network servers from bypassing the secure tunnel and compromising data integrity.

Both a DHCP server and Stateless Address Autoconfiguration (SLAAC) can add routes to a client’s routing table. For example, a malicious DHCP server can use this feature to force a host with VPN connection to redirect traffic through a physical interface instead of the VPN tunnel. This vulnerability is also known as TunnelVision and described in the CVE-2024-3661 vulnerability article.

To mitigate this vulnerability, you can assign the VPN connection to a dedicated routing table. This prevents the DHCP configuration or SLAAC from manipulating routing decisions for network packets intended for the VPN tunnel.

Follow the steps if at least one of the conditions applies to your environment:

  • At least one network interface uses DHCP or SLAAC.
  • Your network does not use mechanisms, such as DHCP snooping, that prevent a rogue DHCP server.
Important

Routing the entire traffic through the VPN prevents the host from accessing local network resources.

Prerequisites

  • You use NetworkManager 1.40.16-18 or later.

Procedure

  1. Decide which routing table you want to use. The following steps use table 75. By default, RHEL does not use the tables 1-254, and you can use any of them.

  2. Configure the VPN connection profile to place the VPN routes in a dedicated routing table: 

    # nmcli connection modify <vpn_connection_profile> ipv4.route-table 75 ipv6.route-table 75
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Set a low priority value for the table you used in the previous command: 

    # nmcli connection modify <vpn_connection_profile> ipv4.routing-rules "priority 32345 from all table 75" ipv6.routing-rules "priority 32345 from all table 75"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The priority value can be any value between 1 and 32766. The lower the value, the higher the priority.

  4. Reconnect the VPN connection: 

    # nmcli connection down <vpn_connection_profile>
# nmcli connection up <vpn_connection_profile>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the IPv4 routes in table 75: 

    # ip route show table 75
...
192.0.2.0/24 via 192.0.2.254 dev vpn_device proto static metric 50
default dev vpn_device proto static scope link metric 50
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The output confirms that both the route to the remote network and the default gateway are assigned to routing table 75 and, therefore, all traffic is routed through the tunnel. If you set ipv4.never-default true in the VPN connection profile, a default route is not created and, therefore, not visible in this output.

  2. Display the IPv6 routes in table 75: 

    # ip -6 route show table 75
...
2001:db8:1::/64 dev vpn_device proto kernel metric 50 pref medium
default dev vpn_device proto static metric 50 pref medium
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The output confirms that both the route to the remote network and the default gateway are assigned to routing table 75 and, therefore, all traffic is routed through the tunnel. If you set ipv6.never-default true in the VPN connection profile, a default route is not created and, therefore, not visible in this output.

Chapter 8. Configuring IP tunnels
Link kopieren

Similar to a VPN, an IP tunnel directly connects two networks over a third network, such as the internet. However, not all tunnel protocols support encryption.

The routers in both networks that establish the tunnel requires at least two interfaces:

  • One interface that is connected to the local network
  • One interface that is connected to the network through which the tunnel is established.

To establish the tunnel, you create a virtual interface on both routers with an IP address from the remote subnet.

NetworkManager supports the following IP tunnels:

  • Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE)
  • Generic Routing Encapsulation over IPv6 (IP6GRE)
  • Generic Routing Encapsulation Terminal Access Point (GRETAP)
  • Generic Routing Encapsulation Terminal Access Point over IPv6 (IP6GRETAP)
  • IPv4 over IPv4 (IPIP)
  • IPv4 over IPv6 (IPIP6)
  • IPv6 over IPv6 (IP6IP6)
  • Simple Internet Transition (SIT)

Depending on the type, these tunnels act either on layer 2 or 3 of the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model.

An IP over IP (IPIP) tunnel operates on OSI layer 3 and encapsulates IPv4 traffic in IPv4 packets as described in RFC 2003.

Important

Data sent through an IPIP tunnel is not encrypted. For security reasons, use the tunnel only for data that is already encrypted, for example, by other protocols, such as HTTPS.

Note that IPIP tunnels support only unicast packets. If you require an IPv4 tunnel that supports multicast, see Configuring a GRE tunnel to encapsulate layer-3 traffic in IPv4 packets.

For example, you can create an IPIP tunnel between two RHEL routers to connect two internal subnets over the internet as shown in the following diagram:

IPIP tunnel
View larger image
IPIP tunnel

Prerequisites

  • Each RHEL router has a network interface that is connected to its local subnet.
  • Each RHEL router has a network interface that is connected to the internet.
  • The traffic you want to send through the tunnel is IPv4 unicast.

Procedure

  1. On the RHEL router in network A:

    1. Create an IPIP tunnel interface named tun0: 

      # nmcli connection add type ip-tunnel ip-tunnel.mode ipip con-name tun0 ifname tun0 remote 198.51.100.5 local 203.0.113.10
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The remote and local parameters set the public IP addresses of the remote and the local routers.

    2. Set the IPv4 address to the tun0 device: 

      # nmcli connection modify tun0 ipv4.addresses '10.0.1.1/30'
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      Note that a /30 subnet with two usable IP addresses is sufficient for the tunnel.

    3. Configure the tun0 connection to use a manual IPv4 configuration: 

      # nmcli connection modify tun0 ipv4.method manual
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    4. Add a static route that routes traffic to the 172.16.0.0/24 network to the tunnel IP on router B: 

      # nmcli connection modify tun0 +ipv4.routes "172.16.0.0/24 10.0.1.2"
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    5. Enable the tun0 connection. 

      # nmcli connection up tun0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    6. Enable packet forwarding: 

      # echo "net.ipv4.ip_forward=1" > /etc/sysctl.d/95-IPv4-forwarding.conf
# sysctl -p /etc/sysctl.d/95-IPv4-forwarding.conf
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. On the RHEL router in network B:

    1. Create an IPIP tunnel interface named tun0: 

      # nmcli connection add type ip-tunnel ip-tunnel.mode ipip con-name tun0 ifname tun0 remote 203.0.113.10 local 198.51.100.5
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The remote and local parameters set the public IP addresses of the remote and local routers.

    2. Set the IPv4 address to the tun0 device: 

      # nmcli connection modify tun0 ipv4.addresses '10.0.1.2/30'
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    3. Configure the tun0 connection to use a manual IPv4 configuration: 

      # nmcli connection modify tun0 ipv4.method manual
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    4. Add a static route that routes traffic to the 192.0.2.0/24 network to the tunnel IP on router A: 

      # nmcli connection modify tun0 +ipv4.routes "192.0.2.0/24 10.0.1.1"
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    5. Enable the tun0 connection. 

      # nmcli connection up tun0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    6. Enable packet forwarding: 

      # echo "net.ipv4.ip_forward=1" > /etc/sysctl.d/95-IPv4-forwarding.conf
# sysctl -p /etc/sysctl.d/95-IPv4-forwarding.conf
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • From each RHEL router, ping the IP address of the internal interface of the other router:

    1. On Router A, ping 172.16.0.1: 

      # ping 172.16.0.1
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. On Router B, ping 192.0.2.1: 

      # ping 192.0.2.1
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

A Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) tunnel encapsulates layer-3 traffic in IPv4 packets as described in RFC 2784. A GRE tunnel can encapsulate any layer 3 protocol with a valid Ethernet type.

Important

Data sent through a GRE tunnel is not encrypted. For security reasons, use the tunnel only for data that is already encrypted, for example, by other protocols, such as HTTPS.

For example, you can create a GRE tunnel between two RHEL routers to connect two internal subnets over the internet as shown in the following diagram:

GRE tunnel
View larger image
GRE tunnel

Prerequisites

  • Each RHEL router has a network interface that is connected to its local subnet.
  • Each RHEL router has a network interface that is connected to the internet.

Procedure

  1. On the RHEL router in network A:

    1. Create a GRE tunnel interface named gre1: 

      # nmcli connection add type ip-tunnel ip-tunnel.mode gre con-name gre1 ifname gre1 remote 198.51.100.5 local 203.0.113.10
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The remote and local parameters set the public IP addresses of the remote and the local routers.

      Important

      The gre0 device name is reserved. Use gre1 or a different name for the device.

    2. Set the IPv4 address to the gre1 device: 

      # nmcli connection modify gre1 ipv4.addresses '10.0.1.1/30'
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      Note that a /30 subnet with two usable IP addresses is sufficient for the tunnel.

    3. Configure the gre1 connection to use a manual IPv4 configuration: 

      # nmcli connection modify gre1 ipv4.method manual
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    4. Add a static route that routes traffic to the 172.16.0.0/24 network to the tunnel IP on router B: 

      # nmcli connection modify gre1 +ipv4.routes "172.16.0.0/24 10.0.1.2"
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    5. Enable the gre1 connection. 

      # nmcli connection up gre1
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    6. Enable packet forwarding: 

      # echo "net.ipv4.ip_forward=1" > /etc/sysctl.d/95-IPv4-forwarding.conf
# sysctl -p /etc/sysctl.d/95-IPv4-forwarding.conf
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. On the RHEL router in network B:

    1. Create a GRE tunnel interface named gre1: 

      # nmcli connection add type ip-tunnel ip-tunnel.mode gre con-name gre1 ifname gre1 remote 203.0.113.10 local 198.51.100.5
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The remote and local parameters set the public IP addresses of the remote and the local routers.

    2. Set the IPv4 address to the gre1 device: 

      # nmcli connection modify gre1 ipv4.addresses '10.0.1.2/30'
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    3. Configure the gre1 connection to use a manual IPv4 configuration: 

      # nmcli connection modify gre1 ipv4.method manual
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    4. Add a static route that routes traffic to the 192.0.2.0/24 network to the tunnel IP on router A: 

      # nmcli connection modify gre1 +ipv4.routes "192.0.2.0/24 10.0.1.1"
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    5. Enable the gre1 connection. 

      # nmcli connection up gre1
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    6. Enable packet forwarding: 

      # echo "net.ipv4.ip_forward=1" > /etc/sysctl.d/95-IPv4-forwarding.conf
# sysctl -p /etc/sysctl.d/95-IPv4-forwarding.conf
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. From each RHEL router, ping the IP address of the internal interface of the other router:

    1. On Router A, ping 172.16.0.1: 

      # ping 172.16.0.1
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. On Router B, ping 192.0.2.1: 

      # ping 192.0.2.1
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

8.3. Configuring a GRETAP tunnel to transfer Ethernet frames over IPv4
Link kopieren

A Generic Routing Encapsulation Terminal Access Point (GRETAP) tunnel operates on OSI level 2 and encapsulates Ethernet traffic in IPv4 packets as described in RFC 2784.

Important

Data sent through a GRETAP tunnel is not encrypted. For security reasons, establish the tunnel over a VPN or a different encrypted connection.

For example, you can create a GRETAP tunnel between two RHEL routers to connect two networks using a bridge as shown in the following diagram:

GRETAP tunnel
View larger image
GRETAP tunnel

Prerequisites

  • Each RHEL router has a network interface that is connected to its local network, and the interface has no IP configuration assigned.
  • Each RHEL router has a network interface that is connected to the internet.

Procedure

  1. On the RHEL router in network A:

    1. Create a bridge interface named bridge0: 

      # nmcli connection add type bridge con-name bridge0 ifname bridge0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Configure the IP settings of the bridge: 

      # nmcli connection modify bridge0 ipv4.addresses '192.0.2.1/24'
# nmcli connection modify bridge0 ipv4.method manual
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    3. Add a new connection profile for the interface that is connected to local network to the bridge: 

      # nmcli connection add type ethernet slave-type bridge con-name bridge0-port1 ifname enp1s0 master bridge0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    4. Add a new connection profile for the GRETAP tunnel interface to the bridge: 

      # nmcli connection add type ip-tunnel ip-tunnel.mode gretap slave-type bridge con-name bridge0-port2 ifname gretap1 remote 198.51.100.5 local 203.0.113.10 master bridge0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The remote and local parameters set the public IP addresses of the remote and the local routers.

      Important

      The gretap0 device name is reserved. Use gretap1 or a different name for the device.

    5. Optional: Disable the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) if you do not need it: 

      # nmcli connection modify bridge0 bridge.stp no
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      By default, STP is enabled and causes a delay before you can use the connection.

    6. Configure that activating the bridge0 connection automatically activates the ports of the bridge: 

      # nmcli connection modify bridge0 connection.autoconnect-slaves 1
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    7. Active the bridge0 connection: 

      # nmcli connection up bridge0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. On the RHEL router in network B:

    1. Create a bridge interface named bridge0: 

      # nmcli connection add type bridge con-name bridge0 ifname bridge0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Configure the IP settings of the bridge: 

      # nmcli connection modify bridge0 ipv4.addresses '192.0.2.2/24'
# nmcli connection modify bridge0 ipv4.method manual
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    3. Add a new connection profile for the interface that is connected to local network to the bridge: 

      # nmcli connection add type ethernet slave-type bridge con-name bridge0-port1 ifname enp1s0 master bridge0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    4. Add a new connection profile for the GRETAP tunnel interface to the bridge: 

      # nmcli connection add type ip-tunnel ip-tunnel.mode gretap slave-type bridge con-name bridge0-port2 ifname gretap1 remote 203.0.113.10 local 198.51.100.5 master bridge0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The remote and local parameters set the public IP addresses of the remote and the local routers.

    5. Optional: Disable the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) if you do not need it: 

      # nmcli connection modify bridge0 bridge.stp no
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    6. Configure that activating the bridge0 connection automatically activates the ports of the bridge: 

      # nmcli connection modify bridge0 connection.autoconnect-slaves 1
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    7. Active the bridge0 connection: 

      # nmcli connection up bridge0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. On both routers, verify that the enp1s0 and gretap1 connections are connected and that the CONNECTION column displays the connection name of the port: 

    # nmcli device
nmcli device
DEVICE   TYPE      STATE      CONNECTION
...
bridge0  bridge    connected  bridge0
enp1s0   ethernet  connected  bridge0-port1
gretap1  iptunnel  connected  bridge0-port2
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. From each RHEL router, ping the IP address of the internal interface of the other router:

    1. On Router A, ping 192.0.2.2: 

      # ping 192.0.2.2
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. On Router B, ping 192.0.2.1: 

      # ping 192.0.2.1
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 9. Using a VXLAN to create a virtual layer-2 domain for VMs
Link kopieren

A virtual extensible LAN (VXLAN) is a networking protocol that tunnels layer-2 traffic over an IP network using the UDP protocol. For example, certain virtual machines (VMs), that are running on different hosts can communicate over a VXLAN tunnel. The hosts can be in different subnets or even in different data centers around the world. From the perspective of the VMs, other VMs in the same VXLAN are within the same layer-2 domain:

vxlan tunnel
View larger image
vxlan tunnel

In this example, RHEL-host-A and RHEL-host-B use a bridge, br0, to connect the virtual network of a VM on each host with a VXLAN named vxlan10. Due to this configuration, the VXLAN is invisible to the VMs, and the VMs do not require any special configuration. If you later connect more VMs to the same virtual network, the VMs are automatically members of the same virtual layer-2 domain.

Important

Just as normal layer-2 traffic, data in a VXLAN is not encrypted. For security reasons, use a VXLAN over a VPN or other types of encrypted connections.

9.1. Benefits of VXLANs
Link kopieren

A virtual extensible LAN (VXLAN) provides the following major benefits:

  • VXLANs use a 24-bit ID. Therefore, you can create up to 16,777,216 isolated networks. For example, a virtual LAN (VLAN), supports only 4,096 isolated networks.
  • VXLANs use the IP protocol. This enables you to route the traffic and virtually run systems in different networks and locations within the same layer-2 domain.
  • Unlike most tunnel protocols, a VXLAN is not only a point-to-point network. A VXLAN can learn the IP addresses of the other endpoints either dynamically or use statically-configured forwarding entries.
  • Certain network cards support UDP tunnel-related offload features.

9.2. Configuring the Ethernet interface on the hosts
Link kopieren

To connect a RHEL VM host to the Ethernet, create a network connection profile, configure the IP settings, and activate the profile.

Run this procedure on both RHEL hosts, and adjust the IP address configuration accordingly.

Prerequisites

  • The host is connected to the Ethernet.

Procedure

  1. Add a new Ethernet connection profile to NetworkManager: 

    # nmcli connection add con-name Example ifname enp1s0 type ethernet
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Configure the IPv4 settings: 

    # nmcli connection modify Example ipv4.addresses 198.51.100.2/24 ipv4.method manual ipv4.gateway 198.51.100.254 ipv4.dns 198.51.100.200 ipv4.dns-search example.com
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Skip this step if the network uses DHCP.

  3. Activate the Example connection: 

    # nmcli connection up Example
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the status of the devices and connections: 

    # nmcli device status
DEVICE      TYPE      STATE      CONNECTION
enp1s0      ethernet  connected  Example
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Ping a host in a remote network to verify the IP settings: 

    # ping RHEL-host-B.example.com
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that you cannot ping the other VM host before you have configured the network on that host as well.

9.3. Creating a network bridge with a VXLAN attached
Link kopieren

To make a virtual extensible LAN (VXLAN) invisible to virtual machines (VMs), create a bridge on a host, and attach the VXLAN to the bridge. Use NetworkManager to create both the bridge and the VXLAN. You do not add any traffic access point (TAP) devices of the VMs, typically named vnet* on the host, to the bridge. The libvirtd service adds them dynamically when the VMs start.

Run this procedure on both RHEL hosts, and adjust the IP addresses accordingly.

Procedure

  1. Create the bridge br0: 

    # nmcli connection add type bridge con-name br0 ifname br0 ipv4.method disabled ipv6.method disabled
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This command sets no IPv4 and IPv6 addresses on the bridge device, because this bridge works on layer 2.

  2. Create the VXLAN interface and attach it to br0: 

    # nmcli connection add type vxlan slave-type bridge con-name br0-vxlan10 ifname vxlan10 id 10 local 198.51.100.2 remote 203.0.113.1 master br0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This command uses the following settings:

    • id 10: Sets the VXLAN identifier.
    • local 198.51.100.2: Sets the source IP address of outgoing packets.
    • remote 203.0.113.1: Sets the unicast or multicast IP address to use in outgoing packets when the destination link layer address is not known in the VXLAN device forwarding database.
    • master br0: Sets this VXLAN connection to be created as a port in the br0 connection.
    • ipv4.method disabled and ipv6.method disabled: Disables IPv4 and IPv6 on the bridge.

    By default, NetworkManager uses 8472 as the destination port. If the destination port is different, additionally, pass the destination-port <port_number> option to the command.

  3. Activate the br0 connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection up br0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Open port 8472 for incoming UDP connections in the local firewall: 

    # firewall-cmd --permanent --add-port=8472/udp
# firewall-cmd --reload
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Display the forwarding table: 

    # bridge fdb show dev vxlan10
2a:53:bd:d5:b3:0a master br0 permanent
00:00:00:00:00:00 dst 203.0.113.1 self permanent
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

9.4. Creating a virtual network in libvirt with an existing bridge
Link kopieren

To enable virtual machines (VM) to use the br0 bridge with the attached virtual extensible LAN (VXLAN), first add a virtual network to the libvirtd service that uses this bridge.

Prerequisites

  • You installed the libvirt package.
  • You started and enabled the libvirtd service.
  • You configured the br0 device with the VXLAN on RHEL.

Procedure

  1. Create the ~/vxlan10-bridge.xml file with the following content: 

    <network>
 <name>vxlan10-bridge</name>
 <forward mode="bridge" />
 <bridge name="br0" />
</network>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Use the ~/vxlan10-bridge.xml file to create a new virtual network in libvirt: 

    # virsh net-define ~/vxlan10-bridge.xml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Remove the ~/vxlan10-bridge.xml file: 

    # rm ~/vxlan10-bridge.xml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Start the vxlan10-bridge virtual network: 

    # virsh net-start vxlan10-bridge
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Configure the vxlan10-bridge virtual network to start automatically when the libvirtd service starts: 

    # virsh net-autostart vxlan10-bridge
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Display the list of virtual networks: 

    # virsh net-list
 Name              State    Autostart   Persistent
----------------------------------------------------
 vxlan10-bridge    active   yes         yes
 ...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

9.5. Configuring virtual machines to use VXLAN
Link kopieren

To configure a VM to use a bridge device with an attached virtual extensible LAN (VXLAN) on the host, create a new VM that uses the vxlan10-bridge virtual network or update the settings of existing VMs to use this network.

Perform this procedure on the RHEL hosts.

Prerequisites

  • You configured the vxlan10-bridge virtual network in libvirtd.

Procedure

  • To create a new VM and configure it to use the vxlan10-bridge network, pass the --network network:vxlan10-bridge option to the virt-install command when you create the VM: 

    # virt-install ... --network network:vxlan10-bridge
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  • To change the network settings of an existing VM:

    1. Connect the VM’s network interface to the vxlan10-bridge virtual network: 

      # virt-xml VM_name --edit --network network=vxlan10-bridge
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Shut down the VM, and start it again: 

      # virsh shutdown VM_name
# virsh start VM_name
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the virtual network interfaces of the VM on the host: 

    # virsh domiflist VM_name
 Interface   Type     Source           Model    MAC
-------------------------------------------------------------------
 vnet1       bridge   vxlan10-bridge   virtio   52:54:00:c5:98:1c
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the interfaces attached to the vxlan10-bridge bridge: 

    # ip link show master vxlan10-bridge
18: vxlan10: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc noqueue master br0 state UNKNOWN mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 2a:53:bd:d5:b3:0a brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
19: vnet1: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc noqueue master br0 state UNKNOWN mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:c5:98:1c brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that the libvirtd service dynamically updates the bridge’s configuration. When you start a VM which uses the vxlan10-bridge network, the corresponding vnet* device on the host appears as a port of the bridge.

  3. Use address resolution protocol (ARP) requests to verify whether VMs are in the same VXLAN:

    1. Start two or more VMs in the same VXLAN.

    2. Send an ARP request from one VM to the other one: 

      # arping -c 1 192.0.2.2
ARPING 192.0.2.2 from 192.0.2.1 enp1s0
Unicast reply from 192.0.2.2 [52:54:00:c5:98:1c] 1.450ms
Sent 1 probe(s) (0 broadcast(s))
Received 1 response(s) (0 request(s), 0 broadcast(s))
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      If the command shows a reply, the VM is in the same layer-2 domain and, in this case in the same VXLAN.

      Install the iputils package to use the arping utility.

Chapter 10. Managing wifi connections
Link kopieren

If your host contains a wifi adapter, you can connect it to a wifi network.

  • Use the nmcli utility to configure connections by using the command line.
  • Use the nmtui application to configure connections in a text-based user interface.
  • Use the GNOME system menu to quickly connect to wifi networks that do not require any configuration.
  • Use the GNOME Settings application to configure connections by using the GNOME application.
  • Use the nm-connection-editor application to configure connections in a graphical user interface.
  • Use the network RHEL system role to automate the configuration of connections on one or multiple hosts.

10.1. Supported wifi security types
Link kopieren

Depending on the security type a wifi network supports, you can transmit data more or less securely.

Warning

Do not connect to wifi networks that do not use encryption or which support only the insecure WEP or WPA standards.

RHEL 8 supports the following wifi security types:

  • None: Encryption is disabled, and data is transferred in plain text over the network.
  • Enhanced Open: With opportunistic wireless encryption (OWE), devices negotiate unique pairwise master keys (PMK) to encrypt connections in wireless networks without authentication.
  • WEP 40/128-bit Key (Hex or ASCII): The Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) protocol in this mode uses pre-shared keys only in hex or ASCII format. WEP is deprecated and will be removed in RHEL 9.1.
  • WEP 128-bit Passphrase. The WEP protocol in this mode uses an MD5 hash of the passphrase to derive a WEP key. WEP is deprecated and will be removed in RHEL 9.1.
  • Dynamic WEP (802.1x): A combination of 802.1X and EAP that uses the WEP protocol with dynamic keys. WEP is deprecated and will be removed in RHEL 9.1.
  • LEAP: The Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol, which was developed by Cisco, is a proprietary version of the extensible authentication protocol (EAP).
  • WPA & WPA2 Personal: In personal mode, the Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) and Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 (WPA2) authentication methods use a pre-shared key.
  • WPA & WPA2 Enterprise: In enterprise mode, WPA and WPA2 use the EAP framework and authenticate users to a remote authentication dial-in user service (RADIUS) server.
  • WPA3 Personal: Wi-Fi Protected Access 3 (WPA3) Personal uses simultaneous authentication of equals (SAE) instead of pre-shared keys (PSK) to prevent dictionary attacks. WPA3 uses perfect forward secrecy (PFS).

10.2. Connecting to a wifi network by using nmcli
Link kopieren

When you first use the nmcli utility to connect to a wifi network, it automatically creates a NetworkManager connection profile. You can then modify this profile to add specific settings, such as a static IP address.

Prerequisites

  • A wifi device is installed on the host.
  • The wifi device is enabled. To verify, use the nmcli radio command.

Procedure

  1. If the wifi radio has been disabled in NetworkManager, enable this feature: 

    # nmcli radio wifi on
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Optional: Display the available wifi networks: 

    # nmcli device wifi list
IN-USE  BSSID              SSID          MODE   CHAN  RATE        SIGNAL  BARS  SECURITY
        00:53:00:2F:3B:08  Office        Infra  44    270 Mbit/s  57      ▂▄▆_  WPA2 WPA3
        00:53:00:15:03:BF  --            Infra  1     130 Mbit/s  48      ▂▄__  WPA2 WPA3
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The service set identifier (SSID) column contains the names of the networks. If the column shows --, the access point of this network does not broadcast an SSID.

  3. Connect to the wifi network: 

    # nmcli device wifi connect Office --ask
Password: wifi-password
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If you prefer to set the password in the command instead of entering it interactively, use the password <wifi_password> option in the command instead of --ask: 

    # nmcli device wifi connect Office password <wifi_password>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that, if the network requires static IP addresses, NetworkManager fails to activate the connection at this point. You can configure the IP addresses in later steps.

  4. If the network requires static IP addresses:

    1. Configure the IPv4 address settings, for example: 

      # nmcli connection modify Office ipv4.method manual ipv4.addresses 192.0.2.1/24 ipv4.gateway 192.0.2.254 ipv4.dns 192.0.2.200 ipv4.dns-search example.com
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Configure the IPv6 address settings, for example: 

      # nmcli connection modify Office ipv6.method manual ipv6.addresses 2001:db8:1::1/64 ipv6.gateway 2001:db8:1::fffe ipv6.dns 2001:db8:1::ffbb ipv6.dns-search example.com
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Re-activate the connection: 

    # nmcli connection up Office
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the active connections: 

    # nmcli connection show --active
NAME    ID                                    TYPE  DEVICE
Office  2501eb7e-7b16-4dc6-97ef-7cc460139a58  wifi  wlp0s20f3
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If the output lists the wifi connection you have created, the connection is active.

  2. Ping a hostname or IP address: 

    # ping -c 3 example.com
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

10.3. Connecting to a wifi network by using the GNOME system menu
Link kopieren

You can use the GNOME system menu to connect to a wifi network. When you connect to a network for the first time, GNOME creates a NetworkManager connection profile for it. If you configure the connection profile to not automatically connect, you can also use the GNOME system menu to manually connect to a wifi network with an existing NetworkManager connection profile.

Note

Using the GNOME system menu to establish a connection to a wifi network for the first time has certain limitations. For example, you cannot configure IP address settings. In this case first configure the connections:

Prerequisites

  • A wifi device is installed on the host.
  • The wifi device is enabled. To verify, use the nmcli radio command.

Procedure

  1. Open the system menu on the right side of the top bar.
  2. Expand the Wi-Fi Not Connected entry.

  3. Click Select Network:

    gnome select wifi
    View larger image
    gnome select wifi
  4. Select the wifi network you want to connect to.
  5. Click Connect.
  6. If this is the first time you connect to this network, enter the password for the network, and click Connect.

Verification

  1. Open the system menu on the right side of the top bar, and verify that the wifi network is connected:

    gnome wifi connected
    View larger image
    gnome wifi connected

    If the network appears in the list, it is connected.

  2. Ping a hostname or IP address: 

    # ping -c 3 example.com
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

10.4. Connecting to a wifi network by using GNOME Settings
Link kopieren

You can use the GNOME Settings application, also named gnome-control-center, to connect to a wifi network and configure the connection. When you connect to the network for the first time, GNOME creates a NetworkManager connection profile for it.

In GNOME Settings, you can configure wifi connections for all wifi network security types that RHEL supports.

Prerequisites

  • A wifi device is installed on the host.
  • The wifi device is enabled. To verify, use the nmcli radio command.

Procedure

  1. Press the Super key, type Wi-Fi, and press Enter.
  2. Click on the name of the wifi network you want to connect to.
  3. Enter the password for the network, and click Connect.

  4. If the network requires additional settings, such as static IP addresses or a security type other than WPA2 Personal:

    1. Click the gear icon next to the network’s name.

    2. Optional: Configure the network profile on the Details tab to not automatically connect.

      If you deactivate this feature, you must always manually connect to the network, for example, by using GNOME Settings or the GNOME system menu.

    3. Configure IPv4 settings on the IPv4 tab, and IPv6 settings on the IPv6 tab.

    4. On the Security tab, select the authentication of the network, such as WPA3 Personal, and enter the password.

      Depending on the selected security, the application shows additional fields. Fill them accordingly. For details, ask the administrator of the wifi network.

    5. Click Apply.

Verification

  1. Open the system menu on the right side of the top bar, and verify that the wifi network is connected:

    gnome wifi connected
    View larger image
    gnome wifi connected

    If the network appears in the list, it is connected.

  2. Ping a hostname or IP address: 

    # ping -c 3 example.com
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

10.5. Configuring a wifi connection by using nmtui
Link kopieren

The nmtui application provides a text-based user interface for NetworkManager. You can use nmtui to connect to a wifi network.

Note

In nmtui:

  • Navigate by using the cursor keys.
  • Press a button by selecting it and hitting Enter.
  • Select and clear checkboxes by using Space.
  • To return to the previous screen, use ESC.

Procedure

  1. Start nmtui: 

    # nmtui
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  2. Select Edit a connection, and press Enter.
  3. Press the Add button.
  4. Select Wi-Fi from the list of network types, and press Enter.

  5. Optional: Enter a name for the NetworkManager profile to be created.

    On hosts with multiple profiles, a meaningful name makes it easier to identify the purpose of a profile.

  6. Enter the name of the Wi-Fi network, the Service Set Identifier (SSID), into the SSID field.
  7. Leave the Mode field set to its default, Client.

  8. Select the Security field, press Enter, and set the authentication type of the network from the list.

    Depending on the authentication type you have selected, nmtui displays different fields.

  9. Fill the authentication type-related fields.

  10. If the Wi-Fi network requires static IP addresses:

    1. Press the Automatic button next to the protocol, and select Manual from the displayed list.
    2. Press the Show button next to the protocol you want to configure to display additional fields, and fill them.

  11. Press the OK button to create and automatically activate the new connection.

    nmtui wi fi dynamic IP
    View larger image
    nmtui wi fi dynamic IP
  12. Press the Back button to return to the main menu.
  13. Select Quit, and press Enter to close the nmtui application.

Verification

  1. Display the active connections: 

    # nmcli connection show --active
NAME    ID                                    TYPE  DEVICE
Office  2501eb7e-7b16-4dc6-97ef-7cc460139a58  wifi  wlp0s20f3
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If the output lists the wifi connection you have created, the connection is active.

  2. Ping a hostname or IP address: 

    # ping -c 3 example.com
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

10.6. Configuring a wifi connection by using nm-connection-editor
Link kopieren

You can use the nm-connection-editor application to create a connection profile for a wireless network. In this application you can configure all wifi network authentication types that RHEL supports.

By default, NetworkManager enables the auto-connect feature for connection profiles and automatically connects to a saved network if it is available.

Prerequisites

  • A wifi device is installed on the host.
  • The wifi device is enabled. To verify, use the nmcli radio command.

Procedure

  1. Open a terminal and enter: 

    # nm-connection-editor
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  2. Click the + button to add a new connection.
  3. Select the Wi-Fi connection type, and click Create.
  4. Optional: Set a name for the connection profile.

  5. Optional: Configure the network profile on the General tab to not automatically connect.

    If you deactivate this feature, you must always manually connect to the network, for example, by using GNOME Settings or the GNOME system menu.

  6. On the Wi-Fi tab, enter the service set identifier (SSID) in the SSID field.

  7. On the Wi-Fi Security tab, select the authentication type for the network, such as WPA3 Personal, and enter the password.

    Depending on the selected security, the application shows additional fields. Fill them accordingly. For details, ask the administrator of the wifi network.

  8. Configure IPv4 settings on the IPv4 tab, and IPv6 settings on the IPv6 tab.
  9. Click Save.
  10. Close the Network Connections window.

Verification

  1. Open the system menu on the right side of the top bar, and verify that the wifi network is connected:

    gnome wifi connected
    View larger image
    gnome wifi connected

    If the network appears in the list, it is connected.

  2. Ping a hostname or IP address: 

    # ping -c 3 example.com
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

You can use the nmcli utility to configure a client to authenticate itself to a network.

For example, you can configure Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP) authentication with Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol version 2 (MSCHAPv2) in an existing NetworkManager wifi profile.

Prerequisites

  • The network must have 802.1X network authentication.
  • The wifi connection profile exists in NetworkManager and has a valid IP configuration.
  • If the client is required to verify the certificate of the authenticator, the Certificate Authority (CA) certificate must be stored in the /etc/pki/ca-trust/source/anchors/ directory.
  • The wpa_supplicant package is installed.

Procedure

  1. Set the wifi security mode to wpa-eap, the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to peap, the inner authentication protocol to mschapv2, and the user name: 

    # nmcli connection modify wlp1s0 wireless-security.key-mgmt wpa-eap 802-1x.eap peap 802-1x.phase2-auth mschapv2 802-1x.identity user_name
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that you must set the wireless-security.key-mgmt, 802-1x.eap, 802-1x.phase2-auth, and 802-1x.identity parameters in a single command.

  2. Optional: Store the password in the configuration: 

    # nmcli connection modify wlp1s0 802-1x.password password
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Important

    By default, NetworkManager stores the password in plain text in the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/keys-connection_name file, which is readable only by the root user. However, plain text passwords in a configuration file can be a security risk.

    To increase the security, set the 802-1x.password-flags parameter to agent-owned. With this setting, on servers with the GNOME desktop environment or the nm-applet running, NetworkManager retrieves the password from these services, after you unlock the keyring first. In other cases, NetworkManager prompts for the password.

  3. If the client needs to verify the certificate of the authenticator, set the 802-1x.ca-cert parameter in the connection profile to the path of the CA certificate: 

    # nmcli connection modify wlp1s0 802-1x.ca-cert /etc/pki/ca-trust/source/anchors/ca.crt
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Note

    For security reasons, clients should validate the certiciate of the authenticator.

  4. Activate the connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection up wlp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Access resources on the network that require network authentication.

By using the network RHEL system role, you can automate setting up Network Access Control (NAC) on remote hosts. You can define authentication details for clients in a playbook to ensure only authorized clients can access the network.

You can use an Ansible playbook to copy a private key, a certificate, and the CA certificate to the client, and then use the network RHEL system role to configure a connection profile with 802.1X network authentication.

Prerequisites

  • You have prepared the control node and the managed nodes.
  • You are logged in to the control node as a user who can run playbooks on the managed nodes.
  • The account you use to connect to the managed nodes has sudo permissions on them.
  • The network supports 802.1X network authentication.
  • You installed the wpa_supplicant package on the managed node.
  • DHCP is available in the network of the managed node.

  • The following files required for TLS authentication exist on the control node:

    • The client key is stored in the /srv/data/client.key file.
    • The client certificate is stored in the /srv/data/client.crt file.
    • The CA certificate is stored in the /srv/data/ca.crt file.

Procedure

  1. Store your sensitive variables in an encrypted file:

    1. Create the vault: 

      $ ansible-vault create ~/vault.yml
New Vault password: <vault_password>
Confirm New Vault password: <vault_password>
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. After the ansible-vault create command opens an editor, enter the sensitive data in the <key>: <value> format: 

      pwd: <password>
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    3. Save the changes, and close the editor. Ansible encrypts the data in the vault.

  2. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configure a wifi connection with 802.1X authentication
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: Copy client key for 802.1X authentication
      ansible.builtin.copy:
        src: "/srv/data/client.key"
        dest: "/etc/pki/tls/private/client.key"
        mode: 0400

    - name: Copy client certificate for 802.1X authentication
      ansible.builtin.copy:
        src: "/srv/data/client.crt"
        dest: "/etc/pki/tls/certs/client.crt"

    - name: Copy CA certificate for 802.1X authentication
      ansible.builtin.copy:
        src: "/srv/data/ca.crt"
        dest: "/etc/pki/ca-trust/source/anchors/ca.crt"

    - name: Wifi connection profile with dynamic IP address settings and 802.1X
      ansible.builtin.import_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.network
      vars:
        network_connections:
          - name: Wifi connection profile with dynamic IP address settings and 802.1X
            interface_name: wlp1s0
            state: up
            type: wireless
            autoconnect: yes
            ip:
              dhcp4: true
              auto6: true
            wireless:
              ssid: "Example-wifi"
              key_mgmt: "wpa-eap"
            ieee802_1x:
              identity: <user_name>
              eap: tls
              private_key: "/etc/pki/tls/client.key"
              private_key_password: "{{ pwd }}"
              private_key_password_flags: none
              client_cert: "/etc/pki/tls/client.pem"
              ca_cert: "/etc/pki/tls/cacert.pem"
              domain_suffix_match: "example.com"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The settings specified in the example playbook include the following:

    ieee802_1x
    This variable contains the 802.1X-related settings.
    eap: tls
    Configures the profile to use the certificate-based TLS authentication method for the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP).

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.network/README.md file on the control node.

  3. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --ask-vault-pass --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  4. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook --ask-vault-pass ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

10.9. Manually setting the wireless regulatory domain
Link kopieren

On RHEL, a udev rule executes the setregdomain utility to set the wireless regulatory domain. The utility then provides this information to the kernel.

By default, setregdomain attempts to determine the country code automatically. If this fails, the wireless regulatory domain setting might be wrong. To work around this problem, you can manually set the country code.

Important

Manually setting the regulatory domain disables the automatic detection. Therefore, if you later use the computer in a different country, the previously configured setting might no longer be correct. In this case, remove the /etc/sysconfig/regdomain file to switch back to automatic detection or use this procedure to manually update the regulatory domain setting again.

Prerequisites

  • The driver of the wifi device supports changing the regulatory domain.

Procedure

  1. Optional: Display the current regulatory domain settings: 

    # iw reg get
global
country US: DFS-FCC
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Create the /etc/sysconfig/regdomain file with the following content: 

    COUNTRY=<country_code>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Set the COUNTRY variable to an ISO 3166-1 alpha2 country code, such as DE for Germany or US for the United States of America.

  3. Set the regulatory domain: 

    # setregdomain
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Display the regulatory domain settings: 

    # iw reg get
global
country DE: DFS-ETSI
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 11. Configuring RHEL as a WPA2 or WPA3 Personal access point
Link kopieren

On a host with a wifi device, you can use NetworkManager to configure this host as an access point. Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 (WPA2) and Wi-Fi Protected Access 3 (WPA3) Personal provide secure authentication methods, and wireless clients can use a pre-shared key (PSK) to connect to the access point and use services on the RHEL host and in the network.

When you configure an access point, NetworkManager automatically:

  • Configures the dnsmasq service to provide DHCP and DNS services for clients
  • Enables IP forwarding
  • Adds nftables firewall rules to masquerade traffic from the wifi device and configures IP forwarding

Prerequisites

  • The wifi device supports running in access point mode.
  • The wifi device is not in use.
  • The host has internet access.

Procedure

  1. List the wifi devices to identify the one that should provide the access point: 

    # nmcli device status | grep wifi
wlp0s20f3    wifi   disconnected    --
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Verify that the device supports the access point mode: 

    # nmcli -f WIFI-PROPERTIES.AP device show wlp0s20f3
WIFI-PROPERTIES.AP:     yes
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    To use a wifi device as an access point, the device must support this feature.

  3. Install the dnsmasq and NetworkManager-wifi packages: 

    # yum install dnsmasq NetworkManager-wifi
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    NetworkManager uses the dnsmasq service to provide DHCP and DNS services to clients of the access point.

  4. Create the initial access point configuration: 

    # nmcli device wifi hotspot ifname wlp0s20f3 con-name Example-Hotspot ssid Example-Hotspot password "password"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This command creates a connection profile for an access point on the wlp0s20f3 device that provides WPA2 and WPA3 Personal authentication. The name of the wireless network, the Service Set Identifier (SSID), is Example-Hotspot and uses the pre-shared key password.

  5. Optional: Configure the access point to support only WPA3: 

    # nmcli connection modify Example-Hotspot 802-11-wireless-security.key-mgmt sae
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  6. By default, NetworkManager uses the IP address 10.42.0.1 for the wifi device and assigns IP addresses from the remaining 10.42.0.0/24 subnet to clients. To configure a different subnet and IP address, enter: 

    # nmcli connection modify Example-Hotspot ipv4.addresses 192.0.2.254/24
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The IP address you set, in this case 192.0.2.254, is the one that NetworkManager assigns to the wifi device. Clients will use this IP address as default gateway and DNS server.

  7. Activate the connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection up Example-Hotspot
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. On the server:

    1. Verify that NetworkManager started the dnsmasq service and that the service listens on port 67 (DHCP) and 53 (DNS): 

      # ss -tulpn | grep -E ":53|:67"
udp   UNCONN 0  0   10.42.0.1:53    0.0.0.0:*    users:(("dnsmasq",pid=55905,fd=6))
udp   UNCONN 0  0     0.0.0.0:67    0.0.0.0:*    users:(("dnsmasq",pid=55905,fd=4))
tcp   LISTEN 0  32  10.42.0.1:53    0.0.0.0:*    users:(("dnsmasq",pid=55905,fd=7))
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Display the nftables rule set to ensure that NetworkManager enabled forwarding and masquerading for traffic from the 10.42.0.0/24 subnet: 

      # nft list ruleset
table ip nm-shared-wlp0s20f3 {
    chain nat_postrouting {
        type nat hook postrouting priority srcnat; policy accept;
        ip saddr 10.42.0.0/24 ip daddr != 10.42.0.0/24 masquerade
    }

    chain filter_forward {
        type filter hook forward priority filter; policy accept;
        ip daddr 10.42.0.0/24 oifname "wlp0s20f3" ct state { established, related } accept
        ip saddr 10.42.0.0/24 iifname "wlp0s20f3" accept
        iifname "wlp0s20f3" oifname "wlp0s20f3" accept
        iifname "wlp0s20f3" reject
        oifname "wlp0s20f3" reject
    }
}
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. On a client with a wifi adapter:

    1. Display the list of available networks: 

      # nmcli device wifi
IN-USE  BSSID              SSID             MODE   CHAN  RATE      SIGNAL  BARS  SECURITY
        00:53:00:88:29:04  Example-Hotspot  Infra  11    130 Mbit/s  62      ▂▄▆_  WPA3
...
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    2. Connect to the Example-Hotspot wireless network. See Managing Wi-Fi connections.

    3. Ping a host on the remote network or the internet to verify that the connection works: 

      # ping -c 3 www.redhat.com
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

MACsec secures point-to-point communication between devices. For example, you can configure MACsec on the two hosts connecting your branch and central offices over a Metro-Ethernet connection to increase security.

12.1. How MACsec increases security
Link kopieren

Media Access Control security (MACsec) is a layer-2 protocol that encrypts and authenticates all LAN traffic. It uses a pre-shared key to establish connections. To change this key, you must update the NetworkManager configuration on all hosts that use MACsec.

MACsec secures different traffic types over the Ethernet links, including:

  • Dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP)
  • address resolution protocol (ARP)
  • IPv4 and IPv6 traffic
  • Any traffic over IP such as TCP or UDP

A MACsec connection uses an Ethernet device, such as an Ethernet network card, VLAN, or tunnel device, as a parent. You can either set an IP configuration only on the MACsec device to communicate with other hosts only by using the encrypted connection, or you can also set an IP configuration on the parent device. In the latter case, you can use the parent device to communicate with other hosts using an unencrypted connection and the MACsec device for encrypted connections.

MACsec does not require any special hardware. For example, you can use any switch, except if you want to encrypt traffic only between a host and a switch. In this scenario, the switch must also support MACsec.

In other words, you can configure MACsec for two common scenarios:

  • Host-to-host
  • Host-to-switch and switch-to-other-hosts
Important

You can use MACsec only between hosts being in the same physical or virtual LAN.

Using the MACsec security standard for securing communication at the link layer, also known as layer 2 of the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model provides the following notable benefits:

  • Encryption at layer 2 eliminates the need for encrypting individual services at layer 7. This reduces the overhead associated with managing a large number of certificates for each endpoint on each host.
  • Point-to-point security between directly connected network devices such as routers and switches.
  • No changes needed for applications and higher-layer protocols.

12.2. Configuring a MACsec connection by using nmcli
Link kopieren

You can use the nmcli utility to configure Ethernet interfaces to use MACsec. For example, you can create a MACsec connection between two hosts that are connected over Ethernet.

Procedure

  1. On the first host on which you configure MACsec:

    • Create the connectivity association key (CAK) and connectivity-association key name (CKN) for the pre-shared key:

      1. Create a 16-byte hexadecimal CAK: 

        # dd if=/dev/urandom count=16 bs=1 2> /dev/null | hexdump -e '1/2 "%04x"'
50b71a8ef0bd5751ea76de6d6c98c03a
        Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      2. Create a 32-byte hexadecimal CKN: 

        # dd if=/dev/urandom count=32 bs=1 2> /dev/null | hexdump -e '1/2 "%04x"'
f2b4297d39da7330910a74abc0449feb45b5c0b9fc23df1430e1898fcf1c4550
        Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  2. On both hosts you want to connect over a MACsec connection:

  3. Create the MACsec connection: 

    # nmcli connection add type macsec con-name macsec0 ifname macsec0 connection.autoconnect yes macsec.parent enp1s0 macsec.mode psk macsec.mka-cak 50b71a8ef0bd5751ea76de6d6c98c03a macsec.mka-ckn f2b4297d39da7330910a74abc0449feb45b5c0b9fc23df1430e1898fcf1c4550
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Use the CAK and CKN generated in the previous step in the macsec.mka-cak and macsec.mka-ckn parameters. The values must be the same on every host in the MACsec-protected network.

  4. Configure the IP settings on the MACsec connection.

    1. Configure the IPv4 settings. For example, to set a static IPv4 address, network mask, default gateway, and DNS server to the macsec0 connection, enter: 

      # nmcli connection modify macsec0 ipv4.method manual ipv4.addresses '192.0.2.1/24' ipv4.gateway '192.0.2.254' ipv4.dns '192.0.2.253'
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Configure the IPv6 settings. For example, to set a static IPv6 address, network mask, default gateway, and DNS server to the macsec0 connection, enter: 

      # nmcli connection modify macsec0 ipv6.method manual ipv6.addresses '2001:db8:1::1/32' ipv6.gateway '2001:db8:1::fffe' ipv6.dns '2001:db8:1::fffd'
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Activate the connection: 

    # nmcli connection up macsec0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Verify that the traffic is encrypted: 

    # tcpdump -nn -i enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Optional: Display the unencrypted traffic: 

    # tcpdump -nn -i macsec0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Display MACsec statistics: 

    # ip macsec show
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Display individual counters for each type of protection: integrity-only (encrypt off) and encryption (encrypt on) 

    # ip -s macsec show
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 13. Getting started with IPVLAN
Link kopieren

IPVLAN is a driver for a virtual network device that can be used in container environment to access the host network. IPVLAN exposes a single MAC address to the external network regardless the number of IPVLAN device created inside the host network. This means that a user can have multiple IPVLAN devices in multiple containers and the corresponding switch reads a single MAC address. IPVLAN driver is useful when the local switch imposes constraints on the total number of MAC addresses that it can manage.

13.1. IPVLAN modes
Link kopieren

The following modes are available for IPVLAN:

  • L2 mode

    In IPVLAN L2 mode, virtual devices receive and respond to address resolution protocol (ARP) requests. The netfilter framework runs only inside the container that owns the virtual device. No netfilter chains are executed in the default namespace on the containerized traffic. Using L2 mode provides good performance, but less control on the network traffic.

  • L3 mode

    In L3 mode, virtual devices process only L3 traffic and above. Virtual devices do not respond to ARP request and users must configure the neighbour entries for the IPVLAN IP addresses on the relevant peers manually. The egress traffic of a relevant container is landed on the netfilter POSTROUTING and OUTPUT chains in the default namespace while the ingress traffic is threaded in the same way as L2 mode. Using L3 mode provides good control but decreases the network traffic performance.

  • L3S mode

    In L3S mode, virtual devices process the same way as in L3 mode, except that both egress and ingress traffics of a relevant container are landed on netfilter chain in the default namespace. L3S mode behaves in a similar way to L3 mode but provides greater control of the network.

Note

The IPVLAN virtual device does not receive broadcast and multicast traffic in case of L3 and L3S modes.

13.2. Comparison of IPVLAN and MACVLAN
Link kopieren

The following table shows the major differences between MACVLAN and IPVLAN:

Expand
MACVLANIPVLAN

Uses MAC address for each MACVLAN device.

Note that, if a switch reaches the maximum number of MAC addresses it can store in its MAC table, connectivity can be lost.

Uses single MAC address which does not limit the number of IPVLAN devices.

Netfilter rules for a global namespace cannot affect traffic to or from a MACVLAN device in a child namespace.

It is possible to control traffic to or from a IPVLAN device in L3 mode and L3S mode.

Both IPVLAN and MACVLAN do not require any level of encapsulation.

13.3. Creating and configuring the IPVLAN device using iproute2
Link kopieren

This procedure shows how to set up the IPVLAN device using iproute2.

Procedure

  1. To create an IPVLAN device, enter the following command: 

    # ip link add link real_NIC_device name IPVLAN_device type ipvlan mode l2
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that network interface controller (NIC) is a hardware component which connects a computer to a network.

    Example 13.1. Creating an IPVLAN device

    # ip link add link enp0s31f6 name my_ipvlan type ipvlan mode l2
# ip link
47: my_ipvlan@enp0s31f6: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST> mtu 1500 qdisc noop state DOWN mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000 link/ether e8:6a:6e:8a:a2:44 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. To assign an IPv4 or IPv6 address to the interface, enter the following command: 

    # ip addr add dev IPVLAN_device IP_address/subnet_mask_prefix
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. In case of configuring an IPVLAN device in L3 mode or L3S mode, make the following setups:

    1. Configure the neighbor setup for the remote peer on the remote host: 

      # ip neigh add dev peer_device IPVLAN_device_IP_address lladdr MAC_address
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      where MAC_address is the MAC address of the real NIC on which an IPVLAN device is based on.

    2. Configure an IPVLAN device for L3 mode with the following command: 

      # ip route add dev <real_NIC_device> <peer_IP_address/32>
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      For L3S mode: 

      # ip route add dev real_NIC_device peer_IP_address/32
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      where IP-address represents the address of the remote peer.

  4. To set an IPVLAN device active, enter the following command: 

    # ip link set dev IPVLAN_device up
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. To check if the IPVLAN device is active, execute the following command on the remote host: 

    # ping IP_address
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    where the IP_address uses the IP address of the IPVLAN device.

Chapter 14. Configuring NetworkManager to ignore certain devices
Link kopieren

By default, NetworkManager manages all devices except the ones described in the /usr/lib/udev/rules.d/85-nm-unmanaged.rules file. To ignore certain other devices, you can configure them in NetworkManager as unmanaged.

14.1. Permanently configuring a device as unmanaged in NetworkManager
Link kopieren

You can configure devices as unmanaged based on several criteria, such as the interface name or MAC address. If you use a device section in the configuration to set a device as unmanaged, NetworkManager does not manage the device until you start using it in a connection profile.

Procedure

  1. Optional: Display the list of devices to identify the device or MAC address you want to set as unmanaged: 

    # ip link show
...
2: enp1s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:74:79:56 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  2. Create a *.conf file in the /etc/NetworkManager/conf.d/ directory, for example, /etc/NetworkManager/conf.d/99-unmanaged-devices.conf.

  3. For each device you want to configure as unmanaged, add a section with a unique name to the file.

    Important

    The section name must begin with device-.

    • To configure a specific interface as unmanaged, add: 

      [device-enp1s0-unmanaged]
match-device=interface-name:enp1s0
managed=0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    • To configure a device with a specific MAC address as unmanaged, add: 

      [device-mac525400747956-unmanaged]
match-device=mac:52:54:00:74:79:56
managed=0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    • To configure all devices of a specific type as unmanaged, add: 

      [device-ethernet-unmanaged]
match-device=type:ethernet
managed=0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    • To set multiple devices as unmanaged, separate the entries in the unmanaged-devices parameter with a semicolon, for example: 

      [device-multiple-devices-unmanaged]
match-device=interface-name:enp1s0;interface-name:enp7s0
managed=0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      Alternatively, you can add separate sections for each device in this file or create additional *.conf files in the /etc/NetworkManager/conf.d/ directory.

  4. Restart the host system: 

    # reboot
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Display the list of devices: 

    # nmcli device status
DEVICE  TYPE      STATE      CONNECTION
enp1s0  ethernet  unmanaged  --
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The unmanaged state next to the enp1s0 device indicates that NetworkManager does not manage this device.

Troubleshooting

  • If the output of the nmcli device status command does not list the device as unmanaged, display the NetworkManager configuration: 

    # NetworkManager --print-config
...
[device-enp1s0-unmanaged]
match-device=interface-name:enp1s0
managed=0
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If the output does not match the settings that you configured, ensure that no configuration file with a higher priority overrides your settings. For details on how NetworkManager merges multiple configuration files, see the NetworkManager.conf(5) man page on your system.

14.2. Temporarily configuring a device as unmanaged in NetworkManager
Link kopieren

You can temporarily configure devices as unmanaged, for example, for testing purposes. This change persists a reload and restart of the NetworkManager systemd service, but not a system reboot.

Procedure

  1. Optional: Display the list of devices to identify the device you want to set as unmanaged: 

    # nmcli device status
DEVICE  TYPE      STATE         CONNECTION
enp1s0  ethernet  disconnected  --
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Set the enp1s0 device to the unmanaged state: 

    # nmcli device set enp1s0 managed no
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Display the list of devices: 

    # nmcli device status
DEVICE  TYPE      STATE      CONNECTION
enp1s0  ethernet  unmanaged  --
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The unmanaged state next to the enp1s0 device indicates that NetworkManager does not manage this device.

Chapter 15. Configuring the loopback interface by using nmcli
Link kopieren

By default, NetworkManager does not manage the loopback (lo) interface. After creating a connection profile for the lo interface, you can configure this device by using NetworkManager. Some of the examples are as follows:

  • Assign additional IP addresses to the lo interface
  • Define DNS addresses
  • Change the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size of the lo interface

Procedure

  1. Create a new connection of type loopback: 

    # nmcli connection add con-name example-loopback type loopback
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Configure custom connection settings, for example:

    1. To assign an additional IP address to the interface, enter: 

      # nmcli connection modify example-loopback +ipv4.addresses 192.0.2.1/24
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
      Note

      NetworkManager manages the lo interface by always assigning the IP addresses 127.0.0.1 and ::1 that are persistent across the reboots. You cannot override 127.0.0.1 and ::1. However, you can assign additional IP addresses to the interface.

    2. To set a custom Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU), enter: 

      # nmcli con mod example-loopback loopback.mtu 16384
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    3. To set an IP address to your DNS server, enter: 

      # nmcli connection modify example-loopback ipv4.dns 192.0.2.0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      If you set a DNS server in the loopback connection profile, this entry is always available in the /etc/resolv.conf file. The DNS server entry remains independent of whether or not the host roams between different networks.

  3. Activate the connection: 

    # nmcli connection up example-loopback
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the settings of the lo interface: 

    # ip address show lo

1: lo: <LOOPBACK,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 16384 qdisc noqueue state UNKNOWN group default qlen 1000

link/loopback 00:00:00:00:00:00 brd 00:00:00:00:00:00 inet 127.0.0.1/8 scope host lo valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever inet 192.0.2.1/24 brd 192.0.2.255 scope global lo valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever

inet6 ::1/128 scope host
valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Verify the DNS address: 

    # cat /etc/resolv.conf
...
nameserver 192.0.2.0
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 16. Creating a dummy interface
Link kopieren

As a Red Hat Enterprise Linux user, you can create and use dummy network interfaces for debugging and testing purposes. A dummy interface provides a device to route packets without actually transmitting them. It enables you to create additional loopback-like devices managed by NetworkManager and makes an inactive SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol) address look like a real address for local programs.

You can create a dummy interface with various settings, such as IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. After creating the interface, NetworkManager automatically assigns it to the default public firewalld zone.

Procedure

  • Create a dummy interface named dummy0 with static IPv4 and IPv6 addresses: 

    # nmcli connection add type dummy ifname dummy0 ipv4.method manual ipv4.addresses 192.0.2.1/24 ipv6.method manual ipv6.addresses 2001:db8:2::1/64
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Note

    To configure a dummy interface without IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, set both the ipv4.method and ipv6.method parameters to disabled. Otherwise, IP auto-configuration fails, and NetworkManager deactivates the connection and removes the device.

Verification

  • List the connection profiles: 

    # nmcli connection show
NAME            UUID                                  TYPE     DEVICE
dummy-dummy0    aaf6eb56-73e5-4746-9037-eed42caa8a65  dummy    dummy0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

On a system that uses NetworkManager to manage network interfaces, you can disable the IPv6 protocol if the network only uses IPv4. If you disable IPv6, NetworkManager automatically sets the corresponding sysctl values in the Kernel.

Note

If disabling IPv6 using kernel tunables or kernel boot parameters, additional consideration must be given to system configuration. For more information, see the Red Hat Knowledgebase solution How do I disable or enable the IPv6 protocol in RHEL.

17.1. Disabling IPv6 on a connection using nmcli
Link kopieren

You can use the nmcli utility to disable the IPv6 protocol on the command line.

Prerequisites

  • The system uses NetworkManager to manage network interfaces.

Procedure

  1. Optional: Display the list of network connections: 

    # nmcli connection show
NAME    UUID                                  TYPE      DEVICE
Example 7a7e0151-9c18-4e6f-89ee-65bb2d64d365  ethernet  enp1s0
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Set the ipv6.method parameter of the connection to disabled: 

    # nmcli connection modify Example ipv6.method "disabled"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Restart the network connection: 

    # nmcli connection up Example
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the IP settings of the device: 

    # ip address show enp1s0
2: enp1s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel state UP group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:6b:74:be brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
    inet 192.0.2.1/24 brd 192.10.2.255 scope global noprefixroute enp1s0
       valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If no inet6 entry is displayed, IPv6 is disabled on the device.

  2. Verify that the /proc/sys/net/ipv6/conf/enp1s0/disable_ipv6 file now contains the value 1: 

    # cat /proc/sys/net/ipv6/conf/enp1s0/disable_ipv6
1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The value 1 means that IPv6 is disabled for the device.

Chapter 18. Changing a hostname
Link kopieren

The hostname of a system is the name on the system itself. You can set the name when you install RHEL, and you can change it afterwards.

18.1. Changing a hostname by using nmcli
Link kopieren

You can use the nmcli utility to update the system hostname. Note that other utilities might use a different term, such as static or persistent hostname.

Procedure

  1. Optional: Display the current hostname setting: 

    # nmcli general hostname
old-hostname.example.com
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Set the new hostname: 

    # nmcli general hostname new-hostname.example.com
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. NetworkManager automatically restarts the systemd-hostnamed to activate the new name. For the changes to take effect, reboot the host: 

    # reboot
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Alternatively, if you know which services use the hostname:

    1. Restart all services that only read the hostname when the service starts: 

      # systemctl restart <service_name>
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    2. Active shell users must re-login for the changes to take effect.

Verification

  • Display the hostname: 

    # nmcli general hostname
new-hostname.example.com
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

18.2. Changing a hostname by using hostnamectl
Link kopieren

You can use the hostnamectl utility to update the hostname.

By default, hostnamectl sets the following hostname types:

  • Static hostname: Stored in the /etc/hostname file. Typically, services use this name as the hostname.
  • Pretty hostname: A descriptive name, such as Proxy server in data center A.
  • Transient hostname: A fall-back value that is typically received from the network configuration.

Procedure

  1. Optional: Display the current hostname setting: 

    # hostnamectl status --static
old-hostname.example.com
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Set the new hostname: 

    # hostnamectl set-hostname new-hostname.example.com
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This command sets the static and transient hostname to the new value. To set only a specific type, pass the --static, --pretty, or --transient option to the command.

  3. The hostnamectl utility automatically restarts the systemd-hostnamed to activate the new name. For the changes to take effect, reboot the host: 

    # reboot
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Alternatively, if you know which services use the hostname:

    1. Restart all services that only read the hostname when the service starts: 

      # systemctl restart <service_name>
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    2. Active shell users must re-login for the changes to take effect.

Verification

  • Display the hostname: 

    # hostnamectl status --static
new-hostname.example.com
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 19. Configuring NetworkManager DHCP settings
Link kopieren

NetworkManager provides different configuration options related to DHCP. For example, you can configure NetworkManager to use the build-in DHCP client (default) or an external client, and you can influence DHCP settings of individual profiles.

19.1. Changing the DHCP client of NetworkManager
Link kopieren

By default, NetworkManager uses its internal DHCP client. However, if you require a DHCP client with features that the built-in client does not provide, you can alternatively configure NetworkManager to use dhclient.

Note that RHEL does not provide dhcpcd and, therefore, NetworkManager cannot use this client.

Procedure

  1. Create the /etc/NetworkManager/conf.d/dhcp-client.conf file with the following content: 

    [main]
dhcp=dhclient
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    You can set the dhcp parameter to internal (default) or dhclient.

  2. If you set the dhcp parameter to dhclient, install the dhcp-client package: 

    # yum install dhcp-client
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Restart NetworkManager: 

    # systemctl restart NetworkManager
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that the restart temporarily interrupts all network connections.

Verification

  • Search in the /var/log/messages log file for an entry similar to the following: 

    Apr 26 09:54:19 server NetworkManager[27748]: <info>  [1650959659.8483] dhcp-init: Using DHCP client 'dhclient'
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This log entry confirms that NetworkManager uses dhclient as DHCP client.

In a connection profile that uses DHCP, NetworkManager waits, by default, 45 seconds for the DHCP request to complete. You can customize timeout-related settings, to adjust the connection profile to your environment.

Prerequisites

  • A connection that uses DHCP is configured on the host.

Procedure

  1. Optional: Set the ipv4.dhcp-timeout and ipv6.dhcp-timeout properties. For example, to set both options to 30 seconds, enter: 

    # nmcli connection modify <connection_name> ipv4.dhcp-timeout 30 ipv6.dhcp-timeout 30
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Alternatively, set the parameters to infinity to configure that NetworkManager does not stop trying to request and renew an IP address until it is successful.

  2. Optional: Configure the behavior if NetworkManager does not receive an IPv4 address before the timeout: 

    # nmcli connection modify <connection_name> ipv4.may-fail <value>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If you set the ipv4.may-fail option to:

    • yes, the status of the connection depends on the IPv6 configuration:

      • If the IPv6 configuration is enabled and successful, NetworkManager activates the IPv6 connection and no longer tries to activate the IPv4 connection.
      • If the IPv6 configuration is disabled or not configured, the connection fails.

    • no, the connection is deactivated. In this case:

      • If the autoconnect property of the connection is enabled, NetworkManager retries to activate the connection as many times as set in the autoconnect-retries property. The default is 4.
      • If the connection still cannot acquire a DHCP address, auto-activation fails. Note that after 5 minutes, the auto-connection process starts again to acquire an IP address from the DHCP server.

  3. Optional: Configure the behavior if NetworkManager does not receive an IPv6 address before the timeout: 

    # nmcli connection modify <connection_name> ipv6.may-fail <value>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

You can use a NetworkManager dispatcher script to execute dhclient exit hooks.

20.1. The concept of NetworkManager dispatcher scripts
Link kopieren

The NetworkManager-dispatcher service executes user-provided scripts in alphabetical order when network events happen. These scripts are typically shell scripts, but can be any executable script or application. You can use dispatcher scripts, for example, to adjust network-related settings that you cannot manage with NetworkManager.

You can store dispatcher scripts in the following directories:

  • /etc/NetworkManager/dispatcher.d/: The general location for dispatcher scripts the root user can edit.
  • /usr/lib/NetworkManager/dispatcher.d/: For pre-deployed immutable dispatcher scripts.

For security reasons, the NetworkManager-dispatcher service executes scripts only if the following conditions met:

  • The script is owned by the root user.
  • The script is only readable and writable by root.
  • The setuid bit is not set on the script.

The NetworkManager-dispatcher service runs each script with two arguments:

  1. The interface name of the device the operation happened on.
  2. The action, such as up, when the interface has been activated.

The Dispatcher scripts section in the NetworkManager(8) man page provides an overview of actions and environment variables you can use in scripts.

The NetworkManager-dispatcher service runs one script at a time, but asynchronously from the main NetworkManager process. Note that, if a script is queued, the service will always run it, even if a later event makes it obsolete. However, the NetworkManager-dispatcher service runs scripts that are symbolic links referring to files in /etc/NetworkManager/dispatcher.d/no-wait.d/ immediately, without waiting for the termination of previous scripts, and in parallel.

When a DHCP server assigns or updates an IPv4 address, NetworkManager can run a dispatcher script stored in the /etc/dhcp/dhclient-exit-hooks.d/ directory. This dispatcher script can then, for example, run dhclient exit hooks.

Prerequisites

  • The dhclient exit hooks are stored in the /etc/dhcp/dhclient-exit-hooks.d/ directory.

Procedure

  1. Create the /etc/NetworkManager/dispatcher.d/12-dhclient-down file with the following content: 

    #!/bin/bash
# Run dhclient.exit-hooks.d scripts

if [ -n "$DHCP4_DHCP_LEASE_TIME" ] ; then
  if [ "$2" = "dhcp4-change" ] || [ "$2" = "up" ] ; then
    if [ -d /etc/dhcp/dhclient-exit-hooks.d ] ; then
      for f in /etc/dhcp/dhclient-exit-hooks.d/*.sh ; do
        if [ -x "${f}" ]; then
          . "${f}"
        fi
      done
    fi
  fi
fi
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Set the root user as owner of the file: 

    # chown root:root /etc/NetworkManager/dispatcher.d/12-dhclient-down
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Set the permissions so that only the root user can execute it: 

    # chmod 0700 /etc/NetworkManager/dispatcher.d/12-dhclient-down
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Restore the SELinux context: 

    # restorecon /etc/NetworkManager/dispatcher.d/12-dhclient-down
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 21. Manually configuring the /etc/resolv.conf file
Link kopieren

By default, NetworkManager dynamically updates the /etc/resolv.conf file with the DNS settings from active NetworkManager connection profiles. However, you can disable this behavior and manually configure DNS settings in /etc/resolv.conf.

Note

Alternatively, if you require a specific order of DNS servers in /etc/resolv.conf, see Configuring the order of DNS servers.

21.1. Disabling DNS processing in the NetworkManager configuration
Link kopieren

By default, NetworkManager manages DNS settings in the /etc/resolv.conf file, and you can configure the order of DNS servers. Alternatively, you can disable DNS processing in NetworkManager if you prefer to manually configure DNS settings in /etc/resolv.conf.

Procedure

  1. As the root user, create the /etc/NetworkManager/conf.d/90-dns-none.conf file with the following content by using a text editor: 

    [main]
dns=none
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Reload the NetworkManager service: 

    # systemctl reload NetworkManager
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Note

    After you reload the service, NetworkManager no longer updates the /etc/resolv.conf file. However, the last contents of the file are preserved.

  3. Optional: Remove the Generated by NetworkManager comment from /etc/resolv.conf to avoid confusion.

Verification

  1. Edit the /etc/resolv.conf file and manually update the configuration.

  2. Reload the NetworkManager service: 

    # systemctl reload NetworkManager
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Display the /etc/resolv.conf file: 

    # cat /etc/resolv.conf
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If you successfully disabled DNS processing, NetworkManager did not override the manually configured settings.

Troubleshooting

  • Display the NetworkManager configuration to ensure that no other configuration file with a higher priority overrode the setting: 

    # NetworkManager --print-config
...
dns=none
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 22. Configuring the order of DNS servers
Link kopieren

The getaddrinfo() function of the glibc library sends all DNS requests to the first DNS server specified in the /etc/resolv.conf file. If this server does not reply, RHEL tries all other name servers. You can configure NetworkManager to influence the DNS server order in /etc/resolv.conf.

22.1. How NetworkManager orders DNS servers in /etc/resolv.conf
Link kopieren

NetworkManager orders DNS servers in the /etc/resolv.conf file by applying a specific set of rules.

The ordering depends on the following conditions:

  • If only one connection profile exists, NetworkManager uses the order of IPv4 and IPv6 DNS server specified in that connection.

  • If multiple connection profiles are activated, NetworkManager orders DNS servers based on a DNS priority value. If you set DNS priorities, the behavior of NetworkManager depends on the value set in the dns parameter. You can set this parameter in the [main] section in the /etc/NetworkManager/NetworkManager.conf file:

    • dns=default or if the dns parameter is not set:

      NetworkManager orders the DNS servers from different connections based on the ipv4.dns-priority and ipv6.dns-priority parameters in each connection.

      If you set no value or you set ipv4.dns-priority and ipv6.dns-priority to 0, NetworkManager uses the global default value. See Default values of DNS priority parameters.

    • dns=dnsmasq or dns=systemd-resolved:

      When you use one of these settings, NetworkManager sets either 127.0.0.1 for dnsmasq or 127.0.0.53 as nameserver entry in the /etc/resolv.conf file.

      Both the dnsmasq and systemd-resolved services forward queries for the search domain set in a NetworkManager connection to the DNS server specified in that connection, and forwards queries to other domains to the connection with the default route. When multiple connections have the same search domain set, dnsmasq and systemd-resolved forward queries for this domain to the DNS server set in the connection with the lowest priority value.

Default values of DNS priority parameters

NetworkManager uses the following default values for connections:

  • 50 for VPN connections
  • 100 for other connections
Valid DNS priority values:

You can set both the global default and connection-specific ipv4.dns-priority and ipv6.dns-priority parameters to a value between -2147483647 and 2147483647.

  • A lower value has a higher priority.
  • Negative values have the special effect of excluding other configurations with a greater value. For example, if at least one connection with a negative priority value exists, NetworkManager uses only the DNS servers specified in the connection profile with the lowest priority.

  • If multiple connections have the same DNS priority, NetworkManager prioritizes the DNS in the following order:

    1. VPN connections
    2. Connection with an active default route. The active default route is the default route with the lowest metric.

22.2. Setting a NetworkManager-wide default DNS server priority value
Link kopieren

You can override NetworkManager’s system-wide DNS server priority default values to set custom defaults for IPv4 and IPv6 DNS servers.

The default values are as follows:

  • 50 for VPN connections
  • 100 for other connections

Procedure

  1. Edit the /etc/NetworkManager/NetworkManager.conf file:

    1. Add the [connection] section, if it does not exist: 

      [connection]
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Add the custom default values to the [connection] section. For example, to set the new default for both IPv4 and IPv6 to 200, add: 

      ipv4.dns-priority=200
ipv6.dns-priority=200
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      You can set the parameters to a value between -2147483647 and 2147483647. Note that setting the parameters to 0 enables the built-in defaults (50 for VPN connections and 100 for other connections).

  2. Reload the NetworkManager service: 

    # systemctl reload NetworkManager
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

22.3. Setting the DNS priority of a NetworkManager connection
Link kopieren

If you require a specific order of DNS servers you can set priority values in connection profiles. NetworkManager uses these values to order the servers when the service creates or updates the /etc/resolv.conf file.

Note that setting DNS priorities makes only sense if you have multiple connections with different DNS servers configured. If you have only one connection with multiple DNS servers configured, manually set the DNS servers in the preferred order in the connection profile.

Prerequisites

  • The system has multiple NetworkManager connections configured.
  • The system either has no dns parameter set in the /etc/NetworkManager/NetworkManager.conf file or the parameter is set to default.

Procedure

  1. Optional: Display the available connections: 

    # nmcli connection show
NAME           UUID                                  TYPE      DEVICE
Example_con_1  d17ee488-4665-4de2-b28a-48befab0cd43  ethernet  enp1s0
Example_con_2  916e4f67-7145-3ffa-9f7b-e7cada8f6bf7  ethernet  enp7s0
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Set the ipv4.dns-priority and ipv6.dns-priority parameters. For example, to set both parameters to 10, enter: 

    # nmcli connection modify <connection_name> ipv4.dns-priority 10 ipv6.dns-priority 10
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  3. Optional: Repeat the previous step for other connections.

  4. Re-activate the connection you updated: 

    # nmcli connection up <connection_name>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Display the contents of the /etc/resolv.conf file to verify that the DNS server order is correct: 

    # cat /etc/resolv.conf
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 23. Using different DNS servers for different domains
Link kopieren

By default, Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) sends all DNS requests to the first DNS server specified in the /etc/resolv.conf file. If this server does not reply, RHEL tries the next server in this file until it finds a working one. In environments where one DNS server cannot resolve all domains, administrators can configure RHEL to send DNS requests for a specific domain to a selected DNS server.

For example, you connect a server to a Virtual Private Network (VPN), and hosts in the VPN use the example.com domain. In this case, you can configure RHEL to process DNS queries in the following way:

  • Send only DNS requests for example.com to the DNS server in the VPN network.
  • Send all other requests to the DNS server that is configured in the connection profile with the default gateway.

On hosts with multiple network interfaces and where one DNS server cannot resolve all domains, you can configure RHEL to send DNS requests for a specific domain to a selected DNS server.

You can configure NetworkManager to start an instance of dnsmasq. This DNS caching server then listens on port 53 on the loopback device. Consequently, this service is only reachable from the local system and not from the network.

With this configuration, NetworkManager adds the nameserver 127.0.0.1 entry to the /etc/resolv.conf file, and dnsmasq dynamically routes DNS requests to the corresponding DNS servers specified in the NetworkManager connection profiles.

Prerequisites

  • The system has multiple NetworkManager connections configured.

  • A DNS server and search domain are configured for the connection that is responsible for resolving a specific domain.

    For example, to ensure that the DNS server specified in a VPN connection resolves queries for the example.com domain, the following settings must be available:

    • A DNS server that can resolve example.com. A DHCP server can provide this information dynamically or you set the ipv4.dns and ipv6.dns parameters in the VPN connection profile.
    • A search domain set to example.com. A DHCP server can provide this information dynamically or you set the ipv4.dns-search and ipv6.dns-search parameters in the VPN connection profile.
  • The dnsmasq service is not running or configured to listen on a different interface than localhost.

Procedure

  1. Install the dnsmasq package: 

    # yum install dnsmasq
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Edit the /etc/NetworkManager/NetworkManager.conf file, and set the following entry in the [main] section: 

    dns=dnsmasq
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Reload the NetworkManager service: 

    # systemctl reload NetworkManager
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Search in the systemd journal of the NetworkManager unit for which domains the service uses a different DNS server: 

    # journalctl -xeu NetworkManager
...
Jun 02 13:30:17 <client_hostname>_ dnsmasq[5298]: using nameserver 198.51.100.7#53 for domain example.com
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Use the tcpdump packet sniffer to verify the correct route of DNS requests:

    1. Install the tcpdump package: 

      # yum install tcpdump
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. On one terminal, start tcpdump to capture DNS traffic on all interfaces: 

      # tcpdump -i any port 53
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    3. On a different terminal, resolve host names for a domain for which an exception exists and another domain, for example: 

      # host -t A www.example.com
# host -t A www.redhat.com
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    4. Verify in the tcpdump output that Red Hat Enterprise Linux sends only DNS queries for the example.com domain to the designated DNS server and through the corresponding interface: 

      ...
13:52:42.234533 IP server.43534 > 198.51.100.7.domain: 50121+ [1au] A? www.example.com. (33)
...
13:52:57.753235 IP server.40864 > 192.0.2.1.domain: 6906+ A? www.redhat.com. (33)
...
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      Red Hat Enterprise Linux sends the DNS query for www.example.com to the DNS server on 198.51.100.7 and the query for www.redhat.com to 192.0.2.1.

Troubleshooting

  1. Verify that the nameserver entry in the /etc/resolv.conf file refers to 127.0.0.1: 

    # cat /etc/resolv.conf
nameserver 127.0.0.1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If the entry is missing, check the dns parameter in the /etc/NetworkManager/NetworkManager.conf file.

  2. Verify that the dnsmasq service listens on port 53 on the loopback device: 

    # ss -tulpn | grep "127.0.0.1:53"
udp  UNCONN 0  0    127.0.0.1:53   0.0.0.0:*    users:(("dnsmasq",pid=7340,fd=18))
tcp  LISTEN 0  32   127.0.0.1:53   0.0.0.0:*    users:(("dnsmasq",pid=7340,fd=19))
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If the service does not listen on 127.0.0.1:53, check the journal entries of the NetworkManager unit: 

    # journalctl -u NetworkManager
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

On hosts with multiple network interfaces and where one DNS server cannot resolve all domains, you can configure RHEL to send DNS requests for a specific domain to a selected DNS server.

You can configure NetworkManager to start an instance of systemd-resolved. This DNS stub resolver then listens on port 53 on IP address 127.0.0.53. Consequently, this stub resolver is only reachable from the local system and not from the network.

With this configuration, NetworkManager adds the nameserver 127.0.0.53 entry to the /etc/resolv.conf file, and systemd-resolved dynamically routes DNS requests to the corresponding DNS servers specified in the NetworkManager connection profiles.

Important

The systemd-resolved service is provided as a Technology Preview only. Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production Service Level Agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend using them for production. These previews provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.

See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.

For a supported solution, see Using dnsmasq in NetworkManager to send DNS requests for a specific domain to a selected DNS server.

Prerequisites

  • The system has multiple NetworkManager connections configured.

  • A DNS server and search domain are configured for the connection that is responsible for resolving a specific domain.

    For example, to ensure that the DNS server specified in a VPN connection resolves queries for the example.com domain, the following settings must be available:

    • A DNS server that can resolve example.com. A DHCP server can provide this information dynamically or you set the ipv4.dns and ipv6.dns parameters in the VPN connection profile.
    • A search domain set to example.com. A DHCP server can provide this information dynamically or you set the ipv4.dns-search and ipv6.dns-search parameters in the VPN connection profile.

Procedure

  1. Install the systemd-resolved package: 

    # dnf install systemd-resolved
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Enable and start the systemd-resolved service: 

    # systemctl --now enable systemd-resolved
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Edit the /etc/NetworkManager/NetworkManager.conf file, and set the following entry in the [main] section: 

    dns=systemd-resolved
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Reload the NetworkManager service: 

    # systemctl reload NetworkManager
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the DNS servers systemd-resolved uses and for which domains the service uses a different DNS server: 

    # resolvectl
...
Link 2 (enp1s0)
    Current Scopes: DNS
         Protocols: +DefaultRoute ...
Current DNS Server: 192.0.2.1
       DNS Servers: 192.0.2.1

Link 3 (tun0)
    Current Scopes: DNS
         Protocols: -DefaultRoute ...
Current DNS Server: 198.51.100.7
       DNS Servers: 198.51.100.7 203.0.113.19
        DNS Domain: example.com
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The output confirms that systemd-resolved uses different DNS servers for the example.com domain.

  2. Use the tcpdump packet sniffer to verify the correct route of DNS requests:

    1. Install the tcpdump package: 

      # yum install tcpdump
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. On one terminal, start tcpdump to capture DNS traffic on all interfaces: 

      # tcpdump -i any port 53
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    3. On a different terminal, resolve host names for a domain for which an exception exists and another domain, for example: 

      # host -t A www.example.com
# host -t A www.redhat.com
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    4. Verify in the tcpdump output that Red Hat Enterprise Linux sends only DNS queries for the example.com domain to the designated DNS server and through the corresponding interface: 

      ...
13:52:42.234533 IP server.43534 > 198.51.100.7.domain: 50121+ [1au] A? www.example.com. (33)
...
13:52:57.753235 IP server.40864 > 192.0.2.1.domain: 6906+ A? www.redhat.com. (33)
...
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      Red Hat Enterprise Linux sends the DNS query for www.example.com to the DNS server on 198.51.100.7 and the query for www.redhat.com to 192.0.2.1.

Troubleshooting

  1. Verify that the nameserver entry in the /etc/resolv.conf file refers to 127.0.0.53: 

    # cat /etc/resolv.conf
nameserver 127.0.0.53
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If the entry is missing, check the dns parameter in the /etc/NetworkManager/NetworkManager.conf file.

  2. Verify that the systemd-resolved service listens on port 53 on the local IP address 127.0.0.53: 

    # ss -tulpn | grep "127.0.0.53"
udp  UNCONN 0  0      127.0.0.53%lo:53   0.0.0.0:*    users:(("systemd-resolve",pid=1050,fd=12))
tcp  LISTEN 0  4096   127.0.0.53%lo:53   0.0.0.0:*    users:(("systemd-resolve",pid=1050,fd=13))
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If the service does not listen on 127.0.0.53:53, check if the systemd-resolved service is running.

Chapter 24. Managing the default gateway setting
Link kopieren

The default gateway is a router that forwards network packets when no other route matches the destination of a packet. In a local network, the default gateway is typically the host that is one hop closer to the internet.

In most situations, administrators set the default gateway when they create a connection. However, you can also set or update the default gateway setting on a previously created connection by using the nmcli utility.

Prerequisites

  • At least one static IP address must be configured on the connection on which the default gateway will be set.
  • If the user is logged in on a physical console, user permissions are sufficient. Otherwise, the user must have root permissions.

Procedure

  1. Set the IP addresses of the default gateway:

    To set the IPv4 default gateway, enter: 

    # nmcli connection modify <connection_name> ipv4.gateway "<IPv4_gateway_address>"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    To set the IPv6 default gateway, enter: 

    # nmcli connection modify <connection_name> ipv6.gateway "<IPv6_gateway_address>"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Restart the network connection for changes to take effect: 

    # nmcli connection up <connection_name>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Warning

    All connections currently using this network connection are temporarily interrupted during the restart.

Verification

  • Verify that the route is active:

    1. To display the IPv4 default gateway, enter: 

      # ip -4 route
default via 192.0.2.1 dev example proto static metric 100
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. To display the IPv6 default gateway, enter: 

      # ip -6 route
default via 2001:db8:1::1 dev example proto static metric 100 pref medium
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

In most situations, administrators set the default gateway when they create a connection. However, you can also set or update the default gateway setting on a previously created connection by using the interactive mode of the nmcli utility.

Prerequisites

  • At least one static IP address must be configured on the connection on which the default gateway will be set.
  • If the user is logged in on a physical console, user permissions are sufficient. Otherwise, the user must have root permissions.

Procedure

  1. Open the nmcli interactive mode for the required connection: 

    # nmcli connection edit <connection_name>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Set the default gateway

    To set the IPv4 default gateway, enter: 

    nmcli> set ipv4.gateway "<IPv4_gateway_address>"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    To set the IPv6 default gateway, enter: 

    nmcli> set ipv6.gateway "<IPv6_gateway_address>"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Optional: Verify that the default gateway was set correctly: 

    nmcli> print
...
ipv4.gateway:            <IPv4_gateway_address>
...
ipv6.gateway:            <IPv6_gateway_address>
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Save the configuration: 

    nmcli> save persistent
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Restart the network connection for changes to take effect: 

    nmcli> activate <connection_name>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Warning

    All connections currently using this network connection are temporarily interrupted during the restart.

  6. Leave the nmcli interactive mode: 

    nmcli> quit
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Verify that the route is active:

    1. To display the IPv4 default gateway, enter: 

      # ip -4 route
default via 192.0.2.1 dev example proto static metric 100
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. To display the IPv6 default gateway, enter: 

      # ip -6 route
default via 2001:db8:1::1 dev example proto static metric 100 pref medium
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

In most situations, administrators set the default gateway when they create a connection. However, you can also set or update the default gateway setting on a previously created connection using the nm-connection-editor application.

Prerequisites

  • At least one static IP address must be configured on the connection on which the default gateway will be set.

Procedure

  1. Open a terminal, and enter nm-connection-editor: 

    # nm-connection-editor
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  2. Select the connection to modify, and click the gear wheel icon to edit the existing connection.

  3. Set the IPv4 default gateway. For example, to set the IPv4 address of the default gateway on the connection to 192.0.2.1:

    1. Open the IPv4 Settings tab.

    2. Enter the address in the gateway field next to the IP range the gateway’s address is within:

      set default gw in nm connection editor ipv4

  4. Set the IPv6 default gateway. For example, to set the IPv6 address of the default gateway on the connection to 2001:db8:1::1:

    1. Open the IPv6 tab.

    2. Enter the address in the gateway field next to the IP range the gateway’s address is within:

      set default gw in nm connection editor ipv6

  5. Click OK.
  6. Click Save.

  7. Restart the network connection for changes to take effect. For example, to restart the example connection using the command line: 

    # nmcli connection up example
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Warning

    All connections currently using this network connection are temporarily interrupted during the restart.

Verification

  • Verify that the route is active.

    To display the IPv4 default gateway: 

    # ip -4 route
default via 192.0.2.1 dev example proto static metric 100
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    To display the IPv6 default gateway: 

    # ip -6 route
default via 2001:db8:1::1 dev example proto static metric 100 pref medium
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

In most situations, administrators set the default gateway when they create a connection. However, you can also set or update the default gateway setting on a previously created connection using the control-center application.

Prerequisites

  • At least one static IP address must be configured on the connection on which the default gateway will be set.
  • The network configuration of the connection is open in the control-center application.

Procedure

  1. Set the IPv4 default gateway. For example, to set the IPv4 address of the default gateway on the connection to 192.0.2.1:

    1. Open the IPv4 tab.

    2. Enter the address in the gateway field next to the IP range the gateway’s address is within:

      set default gw in control center ipv4

  2. Set the IPv6 default gateway. For example, to set the IPv6 address of the default gateway on the connection to 2001:db8:1::1:

    1. Open the IPv6 tab.

    2. Enter the address in the gateway field next to the IP range the gateway’s address is within:

      set default gw in control center ipv6

  3. Click Apply.

  4. Back in the Network window, disable and re-enable the connection by switching the button for the connection to Off and back to On for changes to take effect.

    Warning

    All connections currently using this network connection are temporarily interrupted during the restart.

Verification

  • Verify that the route is active.

    To display the IPv4 default gateway: 

    $ ip -4 route
default via 192.0.2.1 dev example proto static metric 100
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    To display the IPv6 default gateway: 

    $ ip -6 route
default via 2001:db8:1::1 dev example proto static metric 100 pref medium
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

You can use the declarative Nmstate API to set or update the default gateway in a connection. Nmstate ensures that the result matches the configuration file or rolls back the changes.

Prerequisites

  • At least one static IP address must be configured on the connection on which the default gateway will be set.
  • The enp1s0 interface is configured, and the IP address of the default gateway is within the subnet of the IP configuration of this interface.
  • The nmstate package is installed.

Procedure

  1. Create a YAML file, for example ~/set-default-gateway.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
routes:
  config:
  - destination: 0.0.0.0/0
    next-hop-address: 192.0.2.1
    next-hop-interface: enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    These settings define 192.0.2.1 as the default gateway, and the default gateway is reachable through the enp1s0 interface.

  2. Apply the settings to the system: 

    # nmstatectl apply ~/set-default-gateway.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

By using the network RHEL system role, you can automate setting the default gateway in a NetworkManager connection profile. With this method, you can remotely configure the default gateway on hosts defined in a playbook.

In most situations, administrators set the default gateway when they create a connection. However, you can also set or update the default gateway setting on a previously-created connection.

Warning

You cannot use the network RHEL system role to update only specific values in an existing connection profile. The role ensures that a connection profile exactly matches the settings in a playbook. If a connection profile with the same name already exists, the role applies the settings from the playbook and resets all other settings in the profile to their defaults. To prevent resetting values, always specify the whole configuration of the network connection profile in the playbook, including the settings that you do not want to change.

Prerequisites

Procedure

  1. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configure the network
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: Ethernet connection profile with static IP address settings
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.network
      vars:
        network_connections:
          - name: enp1s0
            type: ethernet
            autoconnect: yes
            ip:
              address:
                - 198.51.100.20/24
                - 2001:db8:1::1/64
              gateway4: 198.51.100.254
              gateway6: 2001:db8:1::fffe
              dns:
                - 198.51.100.200
                - 2001:db8:1::ffbb
              dns_search:
                - example.com
            state: up
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.network/README.md file on the control node.

  2. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  3. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Query the Ansible facts of the managed node and verify the active network settings: 

    # ansible managed-node-01.example.com -m ansible.builtin.setup
...
        "ansible_default_ipv4": {
	    ...
            "gateway": "198.51.100.254",
            "interface": "enp1s0",
	    ...
        },
        "ansible_default_ipv6": {
	    ...
            "gateway": "2001:db8:1::fffe",
            "interface": "enp1s0",
	    ...
	}
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

In most situations, administrators set the default gateway when they create a connection. However, you can also set or update the default gateway setting on a previously created connection when you use the legacy network scripts.

Prerequisites

  • The NetworkManager package is not installed, or the NetworkManager service is disabled.
  • The network-scripts package is installed.

Procedure

  1. Set the GATEWAY parameter in the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-enp1s0 file to 192.0.2.1: 

    GATEWAY=192.0.2.1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Add the default entry in the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/route-enp0s1 file: 

    default via 192.0.2.1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Restart the network: 

    # systemctl restart network
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

24.8. How NetworkManager manages multiple default gateways
Link kopieren

In certain situations, for example for fallback reasons, you set multiple default gateways on a host. However, to avoid asynchronous routing issues, each default gateway of the same protocol requires a separate metric value.

Note that RHEL only uses the connection to the default gateway that has the lowest metric set.

You can set the metric for both the IPv4 and IPv6 gateway of a connection using the following command: 

# nmcli connection modify <connection_name> ipv4.route-metric <value> ipv6.route-metric <value>
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
Important

Do not set the same metric value for the same protocol in multiple connection profiles to avoid routing issues.

If you set a default gateway without a metric value, NetworkManager automatically sets the metric value based on the interface type. For that, NetworkManager assigns the default value of this network type to the first connection that is activated, and sets an incremented value to each other connection of the same type in the order they are activated. For example, if two Ethernet connections with a default gateway exist, NetworkManager sets a metric of 100 on the route to the default gateway of the connection that you activate first. For the second connection, NetworkManager sets 101.

The following is an overview of frequently-used network types and their default metrics:

Expand
Connection typeDefault metric value

VPN

50

Ethernet

100

MACsec

125

InfiniBand

150

Bond

300

Team

350

VLAN

400

Bridge

425

TUN

450

Wi-Fi

600

IP tunnel

675

In connection profiles that are not connected to the default gateway, you can configure that NetworkManager never uses this profile to provide the default gateway.

Prerequisites

  • The NetworkManager connection profile for the connection that is not connected to the default gateway exists.

Procedure

  1. If the connection uses a dynamic IP configuration, configure that NetworkManager does not use this connection as the default connection for the corresponding IP type, meaning that NetworkManager will never assign the default route to it: 

    # nmcli connection modify <connection_name> ipv4.never-default yes ipv6.never-default yes
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that setting ipv4.never-default and ipv6.never-default to yes, automatically removes the default gateway’s IP address for the corresponding protocol from the connection profile.

  2. Activate the connection: 

    # nmcli connection up <connection_name>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Use the ip -4 route and ip -6 route commands to verify that RHEL does not use the network interface for the default route for the IPv4 and IPv6 protocol.

For most hosts, you require only a single default gateway to prevent unexpected routing behavior and asynchronous routing issues. Multiple default gateways are typically needed only for specific scenarios, such as when using Multipath TCP.

Note

To route traffic to different internet providers, use policy-based routing instead of multiple default gateways.

Prerequisites

  • The host uses NetworkManager to manage network connections, which is the default.
  • The host has multiple network interfaces.
  • The host has multiple default gateways configured.

Procedure

  1. Display the routing table:

    • For IPv4, enter: 

      # ip -4 route
default via 192.0.2.1 dev enp1s0 proto dhcp metric 101
default via 198.51.100.1 dev enp7s0 proto dhcp metric 102
...
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    • For IPv6, enter: 

      # ip -6 route
default via 2001:db8:1::1 dev enp1s0 proto static ra 101 pref medium
default via 2001:db8:2::1 dev enp7s0 proto static ra 102 pref medium
...
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Entries starting with default indicate a default route. Note the interface names of these entries displayed next to dev.

  2. Use the following commands to display the NetworkManager connections that use the interfaces you identified in the previous step: 

    # nmcli -f GENERAL.CONNECTION,IP4.GATEWAY,IP6.GATEWAY device show enp1s0
GENERAL.CONNECTION:      Corporate-LAN
IP4.GATEWAY:             192.0.2.1
IP6.GATEWAY:             2001:db8:1::1

# nmcli -f GENERAL.CONNECTION,IP4.GATEWAY,IP6.GATEWAY device show enp7s0
GENERAL.CONNECTION:      Internet-Provider
IP4.GATEWAY:             198.51.100.1
IP6.GATEWAY:             2001:db8:2::1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    In these examples, the profiles named Corporate-LAN and Internet-Provider have the default gateways set. Because, in a local network, the default gateway is typically the host that is one hop closer to the internet, the rest of this procedure assumes that the default gateways in the Corporate-LAN are incorrect.

  3. Configure that NetworkManager does not use the Corporate-LAN connection as the default route for IPv4 and IPv6 connections: 

    # nmcli connection modify Corporate-LAN ipv4.never-default yes ipv6.never-default yes
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that setting ipv4.never-default and ipv6.never-default to yes, automatically removes the default gateway’s IP address for the corresponding protocol from the connection profile.

  4. Activate the Corporate-LAN connection: 

    # nmcli connection up Corporate-LAN
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Display the IPv4 and IPv6 routing tables and verify that only one default gateway is available for each protocol:

    • For IPv4, enter: 

      # ip -4 route
default via 198.51.100.1 dev enp7s0 proto dhcp metric 102
...
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    • For IPv6, enter: 

      # ip -6 route
default via 2001:db8:2::1 dev enp7s0 proto ra metric 102 pref medium
...
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 25. Configuring a static route
Link kopieren

Routing directs traffic between mutually-connected networks. In larger environments, administrators configure services so that routers dynamically learn about each other. In smaller ones, administrators often configure static routes to ensure traffic can reach its destination.

You need static routes to achieve a functioning communication among multiple networks if all of these conditions apply:

  • The traffic has to pass multiple networks.
  • The exclusive traffic flow through the default gateways is not sufficient.

The Example of a network that requires static routes section describes scenarios and how the traffic flows between different networks when you do not configure static routes.

25.1. Example of a network that requires static routes
Link kopieren

You require static routes in this example because not all IP networks are directly connected through one router. Without the static routes, some networks cannot communicate with each other. Additionally, traffic from some networks flows only in one direction.

Note

The network topology in this example is artificial and only used to explain the concept of static routing. It is not a recommended topology in production environments.

For a functioning communication among all networks in this example, configure a static route to Raleigh (198.51.100.0/24) with next the hop Router 2 (203.0.113.10). The IP address of the next hop is the one of Router 2 in the data center network (203.0.113.0/24).

You can configure the static route as follows:

  • For a simplified configuration, set this static route only on Router 1. However, this increases the traffic on Router 1 because hosts from the data center (203.0.113.0/24) send traffic to Raleigh (198.51.100.0/24) always through Router 1 to Router 2.
  • For a more complex configuration, configure this static route on all hosts in the data center (203.0.113.0/24). All hosts in this subnet then send traffic directly to Router 2 (203.0.113.10) that is closer to Raleigh (198.51.100.0/24).

For more details between which networks traffic flows or not, see the explanations below the diagram.

routing example
View larger image
routing example

In case that the required static routes are not configured, the following are the situations in which the communication works and when it does not:

  • Hosts in the Berlin network (192.0.2.0/24):

    • Can communicate with other hosts in the same subnet because they are directly connected.
    • Can communicate with the internet because Router 1 is in the Berlin network (192.0.2.0/24) and has a default gateway, which leads to the internet.
    • Can communicate with the data center network (203.0.113.0/24) because Router 1 has interfaces in both the Berlin (192.0.2.0/24) and the data center (203.0.113.0/24) networks.
    • Cannot communicate with the Raleigh network (198.51.100.0/24) because Router 1 has no interface in this network. Therefore, Router 1 sends the traffic to its own default gateway (internet).

  • Hosts in the data center network (203.0.113.0/24):

    • Can communicate with other hosts in the same subnet because they are directly connected.
    • Can communicate with the internet because they have their default gateway set to Router 1, and Router 1 has interfaces in both networks, the data center (203.0.113.0/24) and to the internet.
    • Can communicate with the Berlin network (192.0.2.0/24) because they have their default gateway set to Router 1, and Router 1 has interfaces in both the data center (203.0.113.0/24) and the Berlin (192.0.2.0/24) networks.
    • Cannot communicate with the Raleigh network (198.51.100.0/24) because the data center network has no interface in this network. Therefore, hosts in the data center (203.0.113.0/24) send traffic to their default gateway (Router 1). Router 1 also has no interface in the Raleigh network (198.51.100.0/24) and, as a result, Router 1 sends this traffic to its own default gateway (internet).

  • Hosts in the Raleigh network (198.51.100.0/24):

    • Can communicate with other hosts in the same subnet because they are directly connected.
    • Cannot communicate with hosts on the internet. Router 2 sends the traffic to Router 1 because of the default gateway settings. The actual behavior of Router 1 depends on the reverse path filter (rp_filter) system control (sysctl) setting. By default on RHEL, Router 1 drops the outgoing traffic instead of routing it to the internet. However, regardless of the configured behavior, communication is not possible without the static route.
    • Cannot communicate with the data center network (203.0.113.0/24). The outgoing traffic reaches the destination through Router 2 because of the default gateway setting. However, replies to packets do not reach the sender because hosts in the data center network (203.0.113.0/24) send replies to their default gateway (Router 1). Router 1 then sends the traffic to the internet.
    • Cannot communicate with the Berlin network (192.0.2.0/24). Router 2 sends the traffic to Router 1 because of the default gateway settings. The actual behavior of Router 1 depends on the sysctl setting rp_filter. By default on RHEL, Router 1 drops the outgoing traffic instead of sending it to the Berlin network (192.0.2.0/24). However, regardless of the configured behavior, communication is not possible without the static route.
Note

In addition to configuring the static routes, you must enable IP forwarding on both routers.

25.2. How to use the nmcli utility to configure a static route
Link kopieren

You can use the nmcli utility to configure a static route on the command line.

Use following syntax: 

$ nmcli connection modify connection_name ipv4.routes "ip[/prefix] [next_hop] [metric] [attribute=value] [attribute=value] ..."
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

The command supports the following route attributes:

  • cwnd=n: Sets the congestion window (CWND) size, defined in the number of packets.
  • lock-cwnd=true|false: Defines whether or not the kernel can update the CWND value.
  • lock-mtu=true|false: Defines whether or not the kernel can update the MTU to path MTU discovery.
  • lock-window=true|false: Defines whether or not the kernel can update the maximum window size for TCP packets.
  • mtu=<mtu_value>: Sets the maximum transfer unit (MTU) to use along the path to the destination.
  • onlink=true|false: Defines whether the next hop is directly attached to this link even if it does not match any interface prefix.
  • scope=<scope>: For an IPv4 route, this attribute sets the scope of the destinations covered by the route prefix. Set the value as an integer (0-255).
  • src=<source_address>: Sets the source address to prefer when sending traffic to the destinations covered by the route prefix.
  • table=<table_id>: Sets the ID of the table the route should be added to. If you omit this parameter, NetworkManager uses the main table.
  • tos=<type_of_service_key>: Sets the type of service (TOS) key. Set the value as an integer (0-255).
  • type=<route_type>: Sets the route type. NetworkManager supports the unicast, local, blackhole, unreachable, prohibit, and throw route types. The default is unicast.
  • window=<window_size>: Sets the maximal window size for TCP to advertise to these destinations, measured in bytes.
Important

If you use the ipv4.routes option without a preceding + sign, nmcli overrides all current settings of this parameter.

  • To create an additional route, enter: 

    $ nmcli connection modify connection_name +ipv4.routes "<route>"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  • To remove a specific route, enter: 

    $ nmcli connection modify connection_name -ipv4.routes "<route>"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

25.3. Configuring a static route by using nmcli
Link kopieren

You can add a static route to an existing NetworkManager connection profile using the nmcli connection modify command.

The procedure below configures the following routes:

  • An IPv4 route to the remote 198.51.100.0/24 network. The corresponding gateway with the IP address 192.0.2.10 is reachable through the LAN connection profile.
  • An IPv6 route to the remote 2001:db8:2::/64 network. The corresponding gateway with the IP address 2001:db8:1::10 is reachable through the LAN connection profile.

Prerequisites

  • The LAN connection profile exists and it configures this host to be in the same IP subnet as the gateways.

Procedure

  1. Add the static IPv4 route to the LAN connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection modify LAN +ipv4.routes "198.51.100.0/24 192.0.2.10"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    To set multiple routes in one step, pass the individual routes comma-separated to the command: 

    # nmcli connection modify <connection_profile> +ipv4.routes "<remote_network_1>/<subnet_mask_1> <gateway_1>, <remote_network_n>/<subnet_mask_n> <gateway_n>, ..."
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Add the static IPv6 route to the LAN connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection modify LAN +ipv6.routes "2001:db8:2::/64 2001:db8:1::10"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Re-activate the connection: 

    # nmcli connection up LAN
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the IPv4 routes: 

    # ip -4 route
...
198.51.100.0/24 via 192.0.2.10 dev enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the IPv6 routes: 

    # ip -6 route
...
2001:db8:2::/64 via 2001:db8:1::10 dev enp1s0 metric 1024 pref medium
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

25.4. Configuring a static route by using nmtui
Link kopieren

The nmtui application provides a text-based user interface for NetworkManager. You can use nmtui to configure static routes on a host without a graphical interface.

For example, the procedure below adds a route to the 192.0.2.0/24 network that uses the gateway running on 198.51.100.1, which is reachable through an existing connection profile.

Note

In nmtui:

  • Navigate by using the cursor keys.
  • Press a button by selecting it and hitting Enter.
  • Select and clear checkboxes by using Space.
  • To return to the previous screen, use ESC.

Prerequisites

  • The network is configured.
  • The gateway for the static route must be directly reachable on the interface.
  • If the user is logged in on a physical console, user permissions are sufficient. Otherwise, the command requires root permissions.

Procedure

  1. Start nmtui: 

    # nmtui
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  2. Select Edit a connection, and press Enter.
  3. Select the connection profile through which you can reach the next hop to the destination network, and press Enter.
  4. Depending on whether it is an IPv4 or IPv6 route, press the Show button next to the protocol’s configuration area.

  5. Press the Edit button next to Routing. This opens a new window where you configure static routes:

    1. Press the Add button and fill in:

      • The destination network, including the prefix in Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) format
      • The IP address of the next hop
      • A metric value, if you add multiple routes to the same network and want to prioritize the routes by efficiency
    2. Repeat the previous step for every route you want to add and that is reachable through this connection profile.

    3. Press the OK button to return to the window with the connection settings.

      Figure 25.1. Example of a static route without metric

      nmtui add static route
      View larger image
      nmtui add static route
  6. Press the OK button to return to the nmtui main menu.
  7. Select Activate a connection and press Enter.

  8. Select the connection profile that you edited, and press Enter twice to deactivate and activate it again.

    Important

    Skip this step if you run nmtui over a remote connection, such as SSH, that uses the connection profile you want to reactivate. In this case, if you deactivate it in nmtui, the connection is terminated and, consequently, you cannot activate it again. To avoid this problem, use the nmcli connection <connection_profile> up command to reactivate the connection in the mentioned scenario.

  9. Press the Back button to return to the main menu.
  10. Select Quit, and press Enter to close the nmtui application.

Verification

  • Verify that the route is active: 

    $ ip route
...
192.0.2.0/24 via 198.51.100.1 dev example proto static metric 100
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

25.5. Configuring a static route by using control-center
Link kopieren

You can use control-center in GNOME to add a static route to the configuration of a network connection.

The procedure below configures the following routes:

  • An IPv4 route to the remote 198.51.100.0/24 network. The corresponding gateway has the IP address 192.0.2.10.
  • An IPv6 route to the remote 2001:db8:2::/64 network. The corresponding gateway has the IP address 2001:db8:1::10.

Prerequisites

Procedure

  1. On the IPv4 tab:

    1. Optional: Disable automatic routes by clicking the On button in the Routes section of the IPv4 tab to use only static routes. If automatic routes are enabled, Red Hat Enterprise Linux uses static routes and routes received from a DHCP server.

    2. Enter the address, netmask, gateway, and optionally a metric value of the IPv4 route:

      IPv4 static route in control center

  2. On the IPv6 tab:

    1. Optional: Disable automatic routes by clicking the On button i the Routes section of the IPv4 tab to use only static routes.

    2. Enter the address, netmask, gateway, and optionally a metric value of the IPv6 route:

      IPv6 static route in control center

  3. Click Apply.

  4. Back in the Network window, disable and re-enable the connection by switching the button for the connection to Off and back to On for changes to take effect.

    Warning

    Restarting the connection briefly disrupts connectivity on that interface.

Verification

  1. Display the IPv4 routes: 

    # ip -4 route
...
198.51.100.0/24 via 192.0.2.10 dev enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the IPv6 routes: 

    # ip -6 route
...
2001:db8:2::/64 via 2001:db8:1::10 dev enp1s0 metric 1024 pref medium
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

25.6. Configuring a static route by using nm-connection-editor
Link kopieren

You can use the nm-connection-editor application to add a static route to the configuration of a network connection.

The procedure below configures the following routes:

  • An IPv4 route to the remote 198.51.100.0/24 network. The corresponding gateway with the IP address 192.0.2.10 is reachable through the example connection.
  • An IPv6 route to the remote 2001:db8:2::/64 network. The corresponding gateway with the IP address 2001:db8:1::10 is reachable through the example connection.

Prerequisites

  • The network is configured.
  • This host is in the same IP subnet as the gateways.

Procedure

  1. Open a terminal, and enter nm-connection-editor: 

    $ nm-connection-editor
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  2. Select the example connection profile, and click the gear wheel icon to edit the existing connection.

  3. On the IPv4 Settings tab:

    1. Click the Routes button.

    2. Click the Add button and enter the address, netmask, gateway, and optionally a metric value.

      IPv4 static route in nm connection editor

    3. Click OK.

  4. On the IPv6 Settings tab:

    1. Click the Routes button.

    2. Click the Add button and enter the address, netmask, gateway, and optionally a metric value.

      IPv6 static route in nm connection editor

    3. Click OK.
  5. Click Save.

  6. Restart the network connection for changes to take effect. For example, to restart the example connection using the command line: 

    # nmcli connection up example
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the IPv4 routes: 

    # ip -4 route
...
198.51.100.0/24 via 192.0.2.10 dev enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the IPv6 routes: 

    # ip -6 route
...
2001:db8:2::/64 via 2001:db8:1::10 dev enp1s0 metric 1024 pref medium
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

25.7. Configuring a static route by using the nmcli interactive mode
Link kopieren

You can use the interactive mode of the nmcli utility to add a static route to the configuration of a network connection.

The procedure below configures the following routes:

  • An IPv4 route to the remote 198.51.100.0/24 network. The corresponding gateway with the IP address 192.0.2.10 is reachable through the example connection.
  • An IPv6 route to the remote 2001:db8:2::/64 network. The corresponding gateway with the IP address 2001:db8:1::10 is reachable through the example connection.

Prerequisites

  • The example connection profile exists and it configures this host to be in the same IP subnet as the gateways.

Procedure

  1. Open the nmcli interactive mode for the example connection: 

    # nmcli connection edit example
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Add the static IPv4 route: 

    nmcli> set ipv4.routes 198.51.100.0/24 192.0.2.10
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Add the static IPv6 route: 

    nmcli> set ipv6.routes 2001:db8:2::/64 2001:db8:1::10
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Optional: Verify that the routes were added correctly to the configuration: 

    nmcli> print
...
ipv4.routes:    { ip = 198.51.100.0/24, nh = 192.0.2.10 }
...
ipv6.routes:    { ip = 2001:db8:2::/64, nh = 2001:db8:1::10 }
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The ip attribute displays the network to route and the nh attribute the gateway (next hop).

  5. Save the configuration: 

    nmcli> save persistent
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  6. Restart the network connection: 

    nmcli> activate example
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  7. Leave the nmcli interactive mode: 

    nmcli> quit
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the IPv4 routes: 

    # ip -4 route
...
198.51.100.0/24 via 192.0.2.10 dev enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the IPv6 routes: 

    # ip -6 route
...
2001:db8:2::/64 via 2001:db8:1::10 dev enp1s0 metric 1024 pref medium
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

25.8. Configuring a static route by using nmstatectl
Link kopieren

You can use the declarative Nmstate API to configure a static route. Nmstate ensures that the result matches the configuration file or rolls back the changes.

Prerequisites

  • The enp1s0 network interface is configured and is in the same IP subnet as the gateways.
  • The nmstate package is installed.

Procedure

  1. Create a YAML file, for example ~/add-static-route-to-enp1s0.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
routes:
  config:
  - destination: 198.51.100.0/24
    next-hop-address: 192.0.2.10
    next-hop-interface: enp1s0
  - destination: 2001:db8:2::/64
    next-hop-address: 2001:db8:1::10
    next-hop-interface: enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    These settings define the following static routes:

    • An IPv4 route to the remote 198.51.100.0/24 network. The corresponding gateway with the IP address 192.0.2.10 is reachable through the enp1s0 interface.
    • An IPv6 route to the remote 2001:db8:2::/64 network. The corresponding gateway with the IP address 2001:db8:1::10 is reachable through the enp1s0 interface.

  2. Apply the settings to the system: 

    # nmstatectl apply ~/add-static-route-to-enp1s0.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the IPv4 routes: 

    # ip -4 route
...
198.51.100.0/24 via 192.0.2.10 dev enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the IPv6 routes: 

    # ip -6 route
...
2001:db8:2::/64 via 2001:db8:1::10 dev enp1s0 metric 1024 pref medium
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

25.9. Configuring a static route by using the network RHEL system role
Link kopieren

You can use the network RHEL system role to configure static routes.

Important

When you run a play that uses the network RHEL system role and if the setting values do not match the values specified in the play, the role overrides the existing connection profile with the same name. To prevent resetting these values to their defaults, always specify the whole configuration of the network connection profile in the play, even if the configuration, for example the IP configuration, already exists.

Prerequisites

Procedure

  1. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configure the network
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: Ethernet connection profile with static IP address settings
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.network
      vars:
        network_connections:
          - name: enp7s0
            type: ethernet
            autoconnect: yes
            ip:
              address:
                - 192.0.2.1/24
                - 2001:db8:1::1/64
              gateway4: 192.0.2.254
              gateway6: 2001:db8:1::fffe
              dns:
                - 192.0.2.200
                - 2001:db8:1::ffbb
              dns_search:
                - example.com
              route:
                - network: 198.51.100.0
                  prefix: 24
                  gateway: 192.0.2.10
                - network: '2001:db8:2::'
                  prefix: 64
                  gateway: 2001:db8:1::10
            state: up
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.network/README.md file on the control node.

  2. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  3. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the IPv4 routes: 

    # ansible managed-node-01.example.com -m command -a 'ip -4 route'
managed-node-01.example.com | CHANGED | rc=0 >>
...
198.51.100.0/24 via 192.0.2.10 dev enp7s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the IPv6 routes: 

    # ansible managed-node-01.example.com -m command -a 'ip -6 route'
managed-node-01.example.com | CHANGED | rc=0 >>
...
2001:db8:2::/64 via 2001:db8:1::10 dev enp7s0 metric 1024 pref medium
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

The legacy network scripts support setting statics routes in key-value format.

The procedure below configures an IPv4 route to the remote 198.51.100.0/24 network. The corresponding gateway with the IP address 192.0.2.10 is reachable through the enp1s0 interface.

Note

The legacy network scripts support the key-value format only for static IPv4 routes. For IPv6 routes, use the ip-command format. See Creating static routes configuration files in ip-command format when using the legacy network scripts.

Prerequisites

  • The gateways for the static route must be directly reachable on the interface.
  • The NetworkManager package is not installed, or the NetworkManager service is disabled.
  • The network-scripts package is installed.
  • The network service is enabled.

Procedure

  1. Add the static IPv4 route to the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/route-enp0s1 file: 

    ADDRESS0=198.51.100.0
NETMASK0=255.255.255.0
GATEWAY0=192.0.2.10
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    • The ADDRESS0 variable defines the network of the first routing entry.
    • The NETMASK0 variable defines the netmask of the first routing entry.

    • The GATEWAY0 variable defines the IP address of the gateway to the remote network or host for the first routing entry.

      If you add multiple static routes, increase the number in the variable names. Note that the variables for each route must be numbered sequentially. For example, ADDRESS0, ADDRESS1, ADDRESS3, and so on.

  2. Restart the network: 

    # systemctl restart network
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Display the IPv4 routes: 

    # ip -4 route
...
198.51.100.0/24 via 192.0.2.10 dev enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Troubleshooting

  • Display the journal entries of the network unit: 

    # journalctl -u network
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The following are possible error messages and their causes:

    • Error: Nexthop has invalid gateway: You specified an IPv4 gateway address in the route-enp1s0 file that is not in the same subnet as this router.
    • RTNETLINK answers: No route to host: You specified an IPv6 gateway address in the route6-enp1s0 file that is not in the same subnet as this router.
    • Error: Invalid prefix for given prefix length: You specified the remote network in the route-enp1s0 file by using an IP address within the remote network rather than the network address.

The legacy network scripts support setting statics routes.

The procedure below configures the following routes:

  • An IPv4 route to the remote 198.51.100.0/24 network. The corresponding gateway with the IP address 192.0.2.10 is reachable through the enp1s0 interface.
  • An IPv6 route to the remote 2001:db8:2::/64 network. The corresponding gateway with the IP address 2001:db8:1::10 is reachable through the enp1s0 interface.
Important

IP addresses of the gateways (next hop) must be in the same IP subnet as the host on which you configure the static routes.

The examples in this procedure use configuration entries in ip-command format.

Prerequisites

  • The gateways for the static route must be directly reachable on the interface.
  • The NetworkManager package is not installed, or the NetworkManager service is disabled.
  • The network-scripts package is installed.
  • The network service is enabled.

Procedure

  1. Add the static IPv4 route to the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/route-enp1s0 file: 

    198.51.100.0/24 via 192.0.2.10 dev enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Always specify the network address of the remote network, such as 198.51.100.0. Setting an IP address within the remote network, such as 198.51.100.1 causes that the network scripts fail to add this route.

  2. Add the static IPv6 route to the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/route6-enp1s0 file: 

    2001:db8:2::/64 via 2001:db8:1::10 dev enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Restart the network service: 

    # systemctl restart network
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the IPv4 routes: 

    # ip -4 route
...
198.51.100.0/24 via 192.0.2.10 dev enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the IPv6 routes: 

    # ip -6 route
...
2001:db8:2::/64 via 2001:db8:1::10 dev enp1s0 metric 1024 pref medium
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Troubleshooting

  • Display the journal entries of the network unit: 

    # journalctl -u network
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The following are possible error messages and their causes:

    • Error: Nexthop has invalid gateway: You specified an IPv4 gateway address in the route-enp1s0 file that is not in the same subnet as this router.
    • RTNETLINK answers: No route to host: You specified an IPv6 gateway address in the route6-enp1s0 file that is not in the same subnet as this router.
    • Error: Invalid prefix for given prefix length: You specified the remote network in the route-enp1s0 file by using an IP address within the remote network rather than the network address.

By default, the RHEL kernel forwards network packets based on the destination address by using a routing table. With policy-based routing, you can configure complex scenarios to route packets based on various criteria, such as the source address.

You can use policy-based routing to configure a different default gateway for traffic from certain subnets.

For example, you can configure RHEL as a router that, by default, routes all traffic to internet provider A using the default route. However, traffic received from the internal workstations subnet is routed to provider B.

The procedure assumes the following network topology:

policy based routing

Prerequisites

  • The system uses NetworkManager to configure the network, which is the default.

  • The RHEL router you want to set up in the procedure has four network interfaces:

    • The enp7s0 interface is connected to the network of provider A. The gateway IP in the provider’s network is 198.51.100.2, and the network uses a /30 network mask.
    • The enp1s0 interface is connected to the network of provider B. The gateway IP in the provider’s network is 192.0.2.2, and the network uses a /30 network mask.
    • The enp8s0 interface is connected to the 10.0.0.0/24 subnet with internal workstations.
    • The enp9s0 interface is connected to the 203.0.113.0/24 subnet with the company’s servers.
  • Hosts in the internal workstations subnet use 10.0.0.1 as the default gateway. In the procedure, you assign this IP address to the enp8s0 network interface of the router.
  • Hosts in the server subnet use 203.0.113.1 as the default gateway. In the procedure, you assign this IP address to the enp9s0 network interface of the router.
  • The firewalld service is enabled and active.

Procedure

  1. Configure the network interface to provider A: 

    # nmcli connection add type ethernet con-name Provider-A ifname enp7s0 ipv4.method manual ipv4.addresses 198.51.100.1/30 ipv4.gateway 198.51.100.2 ipv4.dns 198.51.100.200 connection.zone external
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The nmcli connection add command creates a NetworkManager connection profile. The command uses the following options:

    • type ethernet: Defines that the connection type is Ethernet.
    • con-name <connection_name>: Sets the name of the profile. Use a meaningful name to avoid confusion.
    • ifname <network_device>: Sets the network interface.
    • ipv4.method manual: Enables to configure a static IP address.
    • ipv4.addresses <IP_address>/<subnet_mask>: Sets the IPv4 addresses and subnet mask.
    • ipv4.gateway <IP_address>: Sets the default gateway address.
    • ipv4.dns <IP_of_DNS_server>: Sets the IPv4 address of the DNS server.
    • connection.zone <firewalld_zone>: Assigns the network interface to the defined firewalld zone. Note that firewalld automatically enables masquerading for interfaces assigned to the external zone.

  2. Configure the network interface to provider B: 

    # nmcli connection add type ethernet con-name Provider-B ifname enp1s0 ipv4.method manual ipv4.addresses 192.0.2.1/30 ipv4.routes "0.0.0.0/0 192.0.2.2 table=5000" connection.zone external
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This command uses the ipv4.routes parameter instead of ipv4.gateway to set the default gateway. This is required to assign the default gateway for this connection to a different routing table (5000) than the default. NetworkManager automatically creates this new routing table when the connection is activated.

  3. Configure the network interface to the internal workstations subnet: 

    # nmcli connection add type ethernet con-name Internal-Workstations ifname enp8s0 ipv4.method manual ipv4.addresses 10.0.0.1/24 ipv4.routes "10.0.0.0/24 table=5000" ipv4.routing-rules "priority 5 from 10.0.0.0/24 table 5000" connection.zone trusted
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This command uses the ipv4.routes parameter to add a static route to the routing table with ID 5000. This static route for the 10.0.0.0/24 subnet uses the IP of the local network interface to provider B (192.0.2.1) as next hop.

    Additionally, the command uses the ipv4.routing-rules parameter to add a routing rule with priority 5 that routes traffic from the 10.0.0.0/24 subnet to table 5000. Low values have a high priority.

    Note that the syntax in the ipv4.routing-rules parameter is the same as in an ip rule add command, except that ipv4.routing-rules always requires specifying a priority.

  4. Configure the network interface to the server subnet: 

    # nmcli connection add type ethernet con-name Servers ifname enp9s0 ipv4.method manual ipv4.addresses 203.0.113.1/24 connection.zone trusted
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. On a RHEL host in the internal workstation subnet:

    1. Install the traceroute package: 

      # yum install traceroute
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Use the traceroute utility to display the route to a host on the internet: 

      # traceroute redhat.com
traceroute to redhat.com (209.132.183.105), 30 hops max, 60 byte packets
 1  10.0.0.1 (10.0.0.1)     0.337 ms  0.260 ms  0.223 ms
 2  192.0.2.2 (192.0.2.2)   0.884 ms  1.066 ms  1.248 ms
 ...
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The output of the command displays that the router sends packets over 192.0.2.1, which is the network of provider B.

  2. On a RHEL host in the server subnet:

    1. Install the traceroute package: 

      # yum install traceroute
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Use the traceroute utility to display the route to a host on the internet: 

      # traceroute redhat.com
traceroute to redhat.com (209.132.183.105), 30 hops max, 60 byte packets
 1  203.0.113.1 (203.0.113.1)    2.179 ms  2.073 ms  1.944 ms
 2  198.51.100.2 (198.51.100.2)  1.868 ms  1.798 ms  1.549 ms
 ...
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The output of the command displays that the router sends packets over 198.51.100.2, which is the network of provider A.

Troubleshooting steps

On the RHEL router:

  1. Display the rule list: 

    # ip rule list
0:	from all lookup local
5:	from 10.0.0.0/24 lookup 5000
32766:	from all lookup main
32767:	from all lookup default
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    By default, RHEL contains rules for the tables local, main, and default.

  2. Display the routes in table 5000: 

    # ip route list table 5000
0.0.0.0/0 via 192.0.2.2 dev enp1s0 proto static metric 100
10.0.0.0/24 dev enp8s0 proto static scope link src 192.0.2.1 metric 102
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Display the interfaces and firewall zones: 

    # firewall-cmd --get-active-zones
external
  interfaces: enp1s0 enp7s0
trusted
  interfaces: enp8s0 enp9s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Verify that the external zone has masquerading enabled: 

    # firewall-cmd --info-zone=external
external (active)
  target: default
  icmp-block-inversion: no
  interfaces: enp1s0 enp7s0
  sources:
  services: ssh
  ports:
  protocols:
  masquerade: yes
  ...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

You can use policy-based routing to configure a different default gateway for traffic from certain subnets. By using the network RHEL system role, you can automate the creation of the connection profiles, including routing tables and rules.

For example, you can configure RHEL as a router that, by default, routes all traffic to internet provider A using the default route. However, traffic received from the internal workstations subnet is routed to provider B. By using Ansible and the network RHEL system role, you can automate this process and remotely configure connection profiles on the hosts defined in a playbook.

This procedure assumes the following network topology:

policy based routing

Prerequisites

  • You have prepared the control node and the managed nodes.
  • You are logged in to the control node as a user who can run playbooks on the managed nodes.
  • The account you use to connect to the managed nodes has sudo permissions on them.
  • The managed nodes use NetworkManager and the firewalld service.

  • The managed nodes you want to configure has four network interfaces:

    • The enp7s0 interface is connected to the network of provider A. The gateway IP in the provider’s network is 198.51.100.2, and the network uses a /30 network mask.
    • The enp1s0 interface is connected to the network of provider B. The gateway IP in the provider’s network is 192.0.2.2, and the network uses a /30 network mask.
    • The enp8s0 interface is connected to the 10.0.0.0/24 subnet with internal workstations.
    • The enp9s0 interface is connected to the 203.0.113.0/24 subnet with the company’s servers.
  • Hosts in the internal workstations subnet use 10.0.0.1 as the default gateway. In the procedure, you assign this IP address to the enp8s0 network interface of the router.
  • Hosts in the server subnet use 203.0.113.1 as the default gateway. In the procedure, you assign this IP address to the enp9s0 network interface of the router.

Procedure

  1. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configuring policy-based routing
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: Routing traffic from a specific subnet to a different default gateway
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.network
      vars:
        network_connections:
          - name: Provider-A
            interface_name: enp7s0
            type: ethernet
            autoconnect: True
            ip:
              address:
                - 198.51.100.1/30
              gateway4: 198.51.100.2
              dns:
                - 198.51.100.200
            state: up
            zone: external

          - name: Provider-B
            interface_name: enp1s0
            type: ethernet
            autoconnect: True
            ip:
              address:
                - 192.0.2.1/30
              route:
                - network: 0.0.0.0
                  prefix: 0
                  gateway: 192.0.2.2
                  table: 5000
            state: up
            zone: external

          - name: Internal-Workstations
            interface_name: enp8s0
            type: ethernet
            autoconnect: True
            ip:
              address:
                - 10.0.0.1/24
              route:
                - network: 10.0.0.0
                  prefix: 24
                  table: 5000
              routing_rule:
                - priority: 5
                  from: 10.0.0.0/24
                  table: 5000
            state: up
            zone: trusted

          - name: Servers
            interface_name: enp9s0
            type: ethernet
            autoconnect: True
            ip:
              address:
                - 203.0.113.1/24
            state: up
            zone: trusted
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The settings specified in the example playbook include the following:

    table: <value>
    Assigns the route from the same list entry as the table variable to the specified routing table.
    routing_rule: <list>
    Defines the priority of the specified routing rule and from a connection profile to which routing table the rule is assigned.
    zone: <zone_name>
    Assigns the network interface from a connection profile to the specified firewalld zone.

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.network/README.md file on the control node.

  2. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  3. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. On a RHEL host in the internal workstation subnet:

    1. Install the traceroute package: 

      # yum install traceroute
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Use the traceroute utility to display the route to a host on the internet: 

      # traceroute redhat.com
traceroute to redhat.com (209.132.183.105), 30 hops max, 60 byte packets
 1  10.0.0.1 (10.0.0.1)     0.337 ms  0.260 ms  0.223 ms
 2  192.0.2.2 (192.0.2.2)   0.884 ms  1.066 ms  1.248 ms
 ...
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The output of the command displays that the router sends packets over 192.0.2.1, which is the network of provider B.

  2. On a RHEL host in the server subnet:

    1. Install the traceroute package: 

      # yum install traceroute
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Use the traceroute utility to display the route to a host on the internet: 

      # traceroute redhat.com
traceroute to redhat.com (209.132.183.105), 30 hops max, 60 byte packets
 1  203.0.113.1 (203.0.113.1)    2.179 ms  2.073 ms  1.944 ms
 2  198.51.100.2 (198.51.100.2)  1.868 ms  1.798 ms  1.549 ms
 ...
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The output of the command displays that the router sends packets over 198.51.100.2, which is the network of provider A.

  3. On the RHEL router that you configured using the RHEL system role:

    1. Display the rule list: 

      # ip rule list
0:      from all lookup local
5:    from 10.0.0.0/24 lookup 5000
32766:  from all lookup main
32767:  from all lookup default
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      By default, RHEL contains rules for the tables local, main, and default.

    2. Display the routes in table 5000: 

      # ip route list table 5000
0.0.0.0/0 via 192.0.2.2 dev enp1s0 proto static metric 100
10.0.0.0/24 dev enp8s0 proto static scope link src 192.0.2.1 metric 102
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    3. Display the interfaces and firewall zones: 

      # firewall-cmd --get-active-zones
external
  interfaces: enp1s0 enp7s0
trusted
  interfaces: enp8s0 enp9s0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    4. Verify that the external zone has masquerading enabled: 

      # firewall-cmd --info-zone=external
external (active)
  target: default
  icmp-block-inversion: no
  interfaces: enp1s0 enp7s0
  sources:
  services: ssh
  ports:
  protocols:
  masquerade: yes
  ...
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

If you use the legacy network scripts instead of NetworkManager to configure your network, you can also configure policy-based routing.

Note

Configuring the network using the legacy network scripts provided by the network-scripts package is deprecated in RHEL 8. Use NetworkManager to configure policy-based routing. For an example, see Routing traffic from a specific subnet to a different default gateway by using nmcli.

The following configuration files are involved in policy-based routing when you use the legacy network scripts:

  • /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/route-interface: This file defines the IPv4 routes. Use the table option to specify the routing table. For example: 

    192.0.2.0/24 via 198.51.100.1 table 1
203.0.113.0/24 via 198.51.100.2 table 2
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  • /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/route6-interface: This file defines the IPv6 routes.

  • /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/rule-interface: This file defines the rules for IPv4 source networks for which the kernel routes traffic to specific routing tables. For example: 

    from 192.0.2.0/24 lookup 1
from 203.0.113.0/24 lookup 2
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  • /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/rule6-interface: This file defines the rules for IPv6 source networks for which the kernel routes traffic to specific routing tables.

  • /etc/iproute2/rt_tables: This file defines the mappings if you want to use names instead of numbers to refer to specific routing tables. For example: 

    1     Provider_A
2     Provider_B
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

You can use policy-based routing to configure a different default gateway for traffic from certain subnets.

For example, you can configure RHEL as a router that, by default, routes all traffic to internet provider A using the default route. However, traffic received from the internal workstations subnet is routed to provider B.

Important

Configuring the network using the legacy network scripts provided by the network-scripts package is deprecated in RHEL 8. Follow the procedure only if you use the legacy network scripts instead of NetworkManager on your host. If you use NetworkManager to manage your network settings, see Routing traffic from a specific subnet to a different default gateway by using nmcli.

The procedure assumes the following network topology:

policy based routing

Note

The legacy network scripts process configuration files in alphabetical order. Therefore, you must name the configuration files in a way that ensures that an interface, that is used in rules and routes of other interfaces, are up when a depending interface requires it. To accomplish the correct order, this procedure uses numbers in the ifcfg-*, route-*, and rules-* files.

Prerequisites

  • The NetworkManager package is not installed, or the NetworkManager service is disabled.
  • The network-scripts package is installed.

  • The RHEL router you want to set up in the procedure has four network interfaces:

    • The enp7s0 interface is connected to the network of provider A. The gateway IP in the provider’s network is 198.51.100.2, and the network uses a /30 network mask.
    • The enp1s0 interface is connected to the network of provider B. The gateway IP in the provider’s network is 192.0.2.2, and the network uses a /30 network mask.
    • The enp8s0 interface is connected to the 10.0.0.0/24 subnet with internal workstations.
    • The enp9s0 interface is connected to the 203.0.113.0/24 subnet with the company’s servers.
  • Hosts in the internal workstations subnet use 10.0.0.1 as the default gateway. In the procedure, you assign this IP address to the enp8s0 network interface of the router.
  • Hosts in the server subnet use 203.0.113.1 as the default gateway. In the procedure, you assign this IP address to the enp9s0 network interface of the router.
  • The firewalld service is enabled and active.

Procedure

  1. Add the configuration for the network interface to provider A by creating the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-1_Provider-A file with the following content: 

    TYPE=Ethernet
IPADDR=198.51.100.1
PREFIX=30
GATEWAY=198.51.100.2
DNS1=198.51.100.200
DEFROUTE=yes
NAME=1_Provider-A
DEVICE=enp7s0
ONBOOT=yes
ZONE=external
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The configuration file uses the following parameters:

    • TYPE=Ethernet: Defines that the connection type is Ethernet.
    • IPADDR=IP_address: Sets the IPv4 address.
    • PREFIX=subnet_mask: Sets the subnet mask.
    • GATEWAY=IP_address: Sets the default gateway address.
    • DNS1=IP_of_DNS_server: Sets the IPv4 address of the DNS server.
    • DEFROUTE=yes|no: Defines whether the connection is a default route or not.
    • NAME=connection_name: Sets the name of the connection profile. Use a meaningful name to avoid confusion.
    • DEVICE=network_device: Sets the network interface.
    • ONBOOT=yes: Defines that RHEL starts this connection when the system boots.
    • ZONE=firewalld_zone: Assigns the network interface to the defined firewalld zone. Note that firewalld automatically enables masquerading for interfaces assigned to the external zone.

  2. Add the configuration for the network interface to provider B:

    1. Create the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-2_Provider-B file with the following content: 

      TYPE=Ethernet
IPADDR=192.0.2.1
PREFIX=30
DEFROUTE=no
NAME=2_Provider-B
DEVICE=enp1s0
ONBOOT=yes
ZONE=external
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      Note that the configuration file for this interface does not contain a default gateway setting.

    2. Assign the gateway for the 2_Provider-B connection to a separate routing table. Therefore, create the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/route-2_Provider-B file with the following content: 

      0.0.0.0/0 via 192.0.2.2 table 5000
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      This entry assigns the gateway and traffic from all subnets routed through this gateway to table 5000.

  3. Create the configuration for the network interface to the internal workstations subnet:

    1. Create the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-3_Internal-Workstations file with the following content: 

      TYPE=Ethernet
IPADDR=10.0.0.1
PREFIX=24
DEFROUTE=no
NAME=3_Internal-Workstations
DEVICE=enp8s0
ONBOOT=yes
ZONE=internal
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Add the routing rule configuration for the internal workstation subnet. Therefore, create the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/rule-3_Internal-Workstations file with the following content: 

      pri 5 from 10.0.0.0/24 table 5000
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      This configuration defines a routing rule with priority 5 that routes all traffic from the 10.0.0.0/24 subnet to table 5000. Low values have a high priority.

    3. Create the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/route-3_Internal-Workstations file with the following content to add a static route to the routing table with ID 5000: 

      10.0.0.0/24 via 192.0.2.1 table 5000
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      This static route defines that RHEL sends traffic from the 10.0.0.0/24 subnet to the IP of the local network interface to provider B (192.0.2.1). This interface is to routing table 5000 and used as the next hop.

  4. Add the configuration for the network interface to the server subnet by creating the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-4_Servers file with the following content: 

    TYPE=Ethernet
IPADDR=203.0.113.1
PREFIX=24
DEFROUTE=no
NAME=4_Servers
DEVICE=enp9s0
ONBOOT=yes
ZONE=internal
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Restart the network: 

    # systemctl restart network
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. On a RHEL host in the internal workstation subnet:

    1. Install the traceroute package: 

      # yum install traceroute
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Use the traceroute utility to display the route to a host on the internet: 

      # traceroute redhat.com
traceroute to redhat.com (209.132.183.105), 30 hops max, 60 byte packets
 1  10.0.0.1 (10.0.0.1)     0.337 ms  0.260 ms  0.223 ms
 2  192.0.2.2 (192.0.2.2)   0.884 ms  1.066 ms  1.248 ms
 ...
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The output of the command displays that the router sends packets over 192.0.2.1, which is the network of provider B.

  2. On a RHEL host in the server subnet:

    1. Install the traceroute package: 

      # yum install traceroute
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Use the traceroute utility to display the route to a host on the internet: 

      # traceroute redhat.com
traceroute to redhat.com (209.132.183.105), 30 hops max, 60 byte packets
 1  203.0.113.1 (203.0.113.1)    2.179 ms  2.073 ms  1.944 ms
 2  198.51.100.2 (198.51.100.2)  1.868 ms  1.798 ms  1.549 ms
 ...
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The output of the command displays that the router sends packets over 198.51.100.2, which is the network of provider A.

Troubleshooting steps

On the RHEL router:

  1. Display the rule list: 

    # ip rule list
0:      from all lookup local
5:      from 10.0.0.0/24 lookup 5000
32766:  from all lookup main
32767:  from all lookup default
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    By default, RHEL contains rules for the tables local, main, and default.

  2. Display the routes in table 5000: 

    # ip route list table 5000
default via 192.0.2.2 dev enp1s0
10.0.0.0/24 via 192.0.2.1 dev enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Display the interfaces and firewall zones: 

    # firewall-cmd --get-active-zones
external
  interfaces: enp1s0 enp7s0
internal
  interfaces: enp8s0 enp9s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Verify that the external zone has masquerading enabled: 

    # firewall-cmd --info-zone=external
external (active)
  target: default
  icmp-block-inversion: no
  interfaces: enp1s0 enp7s0
  sources:
  services: ssh
  ports:
  protocols:
  masquerade: yes
  ...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 26. Reusing the same IP address on different interfaces
Link kopieren

With Virtual routing and forwarding (VRF), administrators can use multiple routing tables simultaneously on the same host. For that, VRF partitions a network at layer 3. This enables the administrator to isolate traffic using separate and independent route tables per VRF domain. This technique is similar to virtual LANs (VLAN), which partitions a network at layer 2, where the operating system uses different VLAN tags to isolate traffic sharing the same physical medium.

One benefit of VRF over partitioning on layer 2 is that routing scales better considering the number of peers involved.

Red Hat Enterprise Linux uses a virtual vrt device for each VRF domain and adds routes to a VRF domain by adding existing network devices to a VRF device. Addresses and routes previously attached to the original device will be moved inside the VRF domain.

Note that each VRF domain is isolated from each other.

26.1. Permanently reusing the same IP address on different interfaces
Link kopieren

You can use the virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) feature to permanently use the same IP address on different interfaces in one server.

Important

To enable remote peers to contact both VRF interfaces while reusing the same IP address, the network interfaces must belong to different broadcasting domains. A broadcast domain in a network is a set of nodes, which receive broadcast traffic sent by any of them. In most configurations, all nodes connected to the same switch belong to the same broadcasting domain.

Prerequisites

  • You are logged in as the root user.
  • The network interfaces are not configured.

Procedure

  1. Create and configure the first VRF device:

    1. Create a connection for the VRF device and assign it to a routing table. For example, to create a VRF device named vrf0 that is assigned to the 1001 routing table: 

      # nmcli connection add type vrf ifname vrf0 con-name vrf0 table 1001 ipv4.method disabled ipv6.method disabled
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Enable the vrf0 device: 

      # nmcli connection up vrf0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    3. Assign a network device to the VRF just created. For example, to add the enp1s0 Ethernet device to the vrf0 VRF device and assign an IP address and the subnet mask to enp1s0, enter: 

      # nmcli connection add type ethernet con-name vrf.enp1s0 ifname enp1s0 master vrf0 ipv4.method manual ipv4.address 192.0.2.1/24
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    4. Activate the vrf.enp1s0 connection: 

      # nmcli connection up vrf.enp1s0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Create and configure the next VRF device:

    1. Create the VRF device and assign it to a routing table. For example, to create a VRF device named vrf1 that is assigned to the 1002 routing table, enter: 

      # nmcli connection add type vrf ifname vrf1 con-name vrf1 table 1002 ipv4.method disabled ipv6.method disabled
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Activate the vrf1 device: 

      # nmcli connection up vrf1
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    3. Assign a network device to the VRF just created. For example, to add the enp7s0 Ethernet device to the vrf1 VRF device and assign an IP address and the subnet mask to enp7s0, enter: 

      # nmcli connection add type ethernet con-name vrf.enp7s0 ifname enp7s0 master vrf1 ipv4.method manual ipv4.address 192.0.2.1/24
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    4. Activate the vrf.enp7s0 device: 

      # nmcli connection up vrf.enp7s0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

26.2. Temporarily reusing the same IP address on different interfaces
Link kopieren

You can use the virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) feature to temporarily use the same IP address on different interfaces in one server. Use this procedure only for testing purposes, because the configuration is temporary and lost after you reboot the system.

Important

To enable remote peers to contact both VRF interfaces while reusing the same IP address, the network interfaces must belong to different broadcasting domains. A broadcast domain in a network is a set of nodes which receive broadcast traffic sent by any of them. In most configurations, all nodes connected to the same switch belong to the same broadcasting domain.

Prerequisites

  • You are logged in as the root user.
  • The network interfaces are not configured.

Procedure

  1. Create and configure the first VRF device:

    1. Create the VRF device and assign it to a routing table. For example, to create a VRF device named blue that is assigned to the 1001 routing table: 

      # ip link add dev blue type vrf table 1001
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Enable the blue device: 

      # ip link set dev blue up
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    3. Assign a network device to the VRF device. For example, to add the enp1s0 Ethernet device to the blue VRF device: 

      # ip link set dev enp1s0 master blue
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    4. Enable the enp1s0 device: 

      # ip link set dev enp1s0 up
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    5. Assign an IP address and subnet mask to the enp1s0 device. For example, to set it to 192.0.2.1/24: 

      # ip addr add dev enp1s0 192.0.2.1/24
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Create and configure the next VRF device:

    1. Create the VRF device and assign it to a routing table. For example, to create a VRF device named red that is assigned to the 1002 routing table: 

      # ip link add dev red type vrf table 1002
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Enable the red device: 

      # ip link set dev red up
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    3. Assign a network device to the VRF device. For example, to add the enp7s0 Ethernet device to the red VRF device: 

      # ip link set dev enp7s0 master red
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    4. Enable the enp7s0 device: 

      # ip link set dev enp7s0 up
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    5. Assign the same IP address and subnet mask to the enp7s0 device as you used for enp1s0 in the blue VRF domain: 

      # ip addr add dev enp7s0 192.0.2.1/24
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  3. Optional: Create further VRF devices as described above.

Chapter 27. Starting a service within an isolated VRF network
Link kopieren

With virtual routing and forwarding (VRF), you can create isolated networks with a routing table that is different to the main routing table of the operating system. You can then start services and applications so that they have only access to the network defined in that routing table.

27.1. Configuring a VRF device
Link kopieren

To use virtual routing and forwarding (VRF), you create a VRF device and attach a physical or virtual network interface and routing information to it.

Warning

To prevent that you lock out yourself out remotely, perform this procedure on the local console or remotely over a network interface that you do not want to assign to the VRF device.

Prerequisites

  • You are logged in locally or using a network interface that is different to the one you want to assign to the VRF device.

Procedure

  1. Create the vrf0 connection with a same-named virtual device, and attach it to routing table 1000: 

    # nmcli connection add type vrf ifname vrf0 con-name vrf0 table 1000 ipv4.method disabled ipv6.method disabled
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Add the enp1s0 device to the vrf0 connection, and configure the IP settings: 

    # nmcli connection add type ethernet con-name enp1s0 ifname enp1s0 master vrf0 ipv4.method manual ipv4.address 192.0.2.1/24 ipv4.gateway 192.0.2.254
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This command creates the enp1s0 connection as a port of the vrf0 connection. Due to this configuration, the routing information are automatically assigned to the routing table 1000 that is associated with the vrf0 device.

  3. If you require static routes in the isolated network:

    1. Add the static routes: 

      # nmcli connection modify enp1s0 +ipv4.routes "198.51.100.0/24 192.0.2.2"
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      This adds a route to the 198.51.100.0/24 network that uses 192.0.2.2 as the router.

    2. Activate the connection: 

      # nmcli connection up enp1s0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the IP settings of the device that is associated with vrf0: 

    # ip -br addr show vrf vrf0
enp1s0    UP    192.0.2.1/24
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the VRF devices and their associated routing table: 

    # ip vrf show
Name              Table
-----------------------
vrf0              1000
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Display the main routing table: 

    # ip route show
default via 203.0.113.0/24 dev enp7s0 proto static metric 100
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The main routing table does not mention any routes associated with the device enp1s0 device or the 192.0.2.1/24 subnet.

  4. Display the routing table 1000: 

    # ip route show table 1000
default via 192.0.2.254 dev enp1s0 proto static metric 101
broadcast 192.0.2.0 dev enp1s0 proto kernel scope link src 192.0.2.1
192.0.2.0/24 dev enp1s0 proto kernel scope link src 192.0.2.1 metric 101
local 192.0.2.1 dev enp1s0 proto kernel scope host src 192.0.2.1
broadcast 192.0.2.255 dev enp1s0 proto kernel scope link src 192.0.2.1
198.51.100.0/24 via 192.0.2.2 dev enp1s0 proto static metric 101
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The default entry indicates that services that use this routing table, use 192.0.2.254 as their default gateway and not the default gateway in the main routing table.

  5. Execute the traceroute utility in the network associated with vrf0 to verify that the utility uses the route from table 1000: 

    # ip vrf exec vrf0 traceroute 203.0.113.1
traceroute to 203.0.113.1 (203.0.113.1), 30 hops max, 60 byte packets
 1  192.0.2.254 (192.0.2.254)  0.516 ms  0.459 ms  0.430 ms
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The first hop is the default gateway that is assigned to the routing table 1000 and not the default gateway from the system’s main routing table.

27.2. Starting a service within an isolated VRF network
Link kopieren

You can configure a service, such as the Apache HTTP Server, to start within an isolated virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) network.

Important

Services can only bind to local IP addresses that are in the same VRF network.

Prerequisites

  • You configured the vrf0 device.
  • You configured Apache HTTP Server to listen only on the IP address that is assigned to the interface associated with the vrf0 device.

Procedure

  1. Display the content of the httpd systemd service: 

    # systemctl cat httpd
...
[Service]
ExecStart=/usr/sbin/httpd $OPTIONS -DFOREGROUND
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    You require the content of the ExecStart parameter in a later step to run the same command within the isolated VRF network.

  2. Create the /etc/systemd/system/httpd.service.d/ directory: 

    # mkdir /etc/systemd/system/httpd.service.d/
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Create the /etc/systemd/system/httpd.service.d/override.conf file with the following content: 

    [Service]
ExecStart=
ExecStart=/usr/sbin/ip vrf exec vrf0 /usr/sbin/httpd $OPTIONS -DFOREGROUND
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    To override the ExecStart parameter, you first need to unset it and then set it to the new value as shown.

  4. Reload systemd. 

    # systemctl daemon-reload
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Restart the httpd service. 

    # systemctl restart httpd
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the process IDs (PID) of httpd processes: 

    # pidof -c httpd
1904 ...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the VRF association for the PIDs, for example: 

    # ip vrf identify 1904
vrf0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Display all PIDs associated with the vrf0 device: 

    # ip vrf pids vrf0
1904  httpd
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

NetworkManager can configure certain network driver and hardware settings persistently. Compared to using the ethtool utility to manage these settings, this has the benefit of not losing the settings after a reboot.

You can set the following ethtool settings in NetworkManager connection profiles:

Offload features
Network interface controllers can use the TCP offload engine (TOE) to offload processing certain operations to the network controller. This improves the network throughput.
Interrupt coalesce settings
By using interrupt coalescing, the system collects network packets and generates a single interrupt for multiple packets. This increases the amount of data sent to the kernel with one hardware interrupt, which reduces the interrupt load, and maximizes the throughput.
Ring buffers
These buffers store incoming and outgoing network packets. You can increase the ring buffer sizes to reduce a high packet drop rate.

28.1. Configuring an ethtool offload feature by using nmcli
Link kopieren

You can use NetworkManager to enable and disable ethtool offload features in a connection profile.

Procedure

  1. For example, to enable the RX offload feature and disable TX offload in the enp1s0 connection profile, enter: 

    # nmcli con modify enp1s0 ethtool.feature-rx on ethtool.feature-tx off
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This command explicitly enables RX offload and disables TX offload.

  2. To remove the setting of an offload feature that you previously enabled or disabled, set the feature’s parameter to a null value. For example, to remove the configuration for TX offload, enter: 

    # nmcli con modify enp1s0 ethtool.feature-tx ""
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Reactivate the network profile: 

    # nmcli connection up enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Use the ethtool -k command to display the current offload features of a network device: 

    # ethtool -k network_device
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

You can use the network RHEL system role to automate configuring TCP offload engine (TOE) to offload processing certain operations to the network controller. TOE improves the network throughput.

Warning

You cannot use the network RHEL system role to update only specific values in an existing connection profile. The role ensures that a connection profile exactly matches the settings in a playbook. If a connection profile with the same name already exists, the role applies the settings from the playbook and resets all other settings in the profile to their defaults. To prevent resetting values, always specify the whole configuration of the network connection profile in the playbook, including the settings that you do not want to change.

Prerequisites

Procedure

  1. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configure the network
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: Ethernet connection profile with dynamic IP address settings and offload features
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.network
      vars:
        network_connections:
          - name: enp1s0
            type: ethernet
            autoconnect: yes
            ip:
              dhcp4: yes
              auto6: yes
            ethtool:
              features:
                gro: no
                gso: yes
                tx_sctp_segmentation: no
            state: up
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The settings specified in the example playbook include the following:

    gro: no
    Disables Generic receive offload (GRO).
    gso: yes
    Enables Generic segmentation offload (GSO).
    tx_sctp_segmentation: no
    Disables TX stream control transmission protocol (SCTP) segmentation.

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.network/README.md file on the control node.

  2. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  3. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Query the Ansible facts of the managed node and verify the offload settings: 

    # ansible managed-node-01.example.com -m ansible.builtin.setup
...
        "ansible_enp1s0": {
            "active": true,
            "device": "enp1s0",
	    "features": {
	        ...
		"rx_gro_hw": "off,
	        ...
		"tx_gso_list": "on,
	        ...
		"tx_sctp_segmentation": "off",
		...
            }
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

28.3. Configuring an ethtool coalesce settings by using nmcli
Link kopieren

You can use NetworkManager to set ethtool coalesce settings in connection profiles.

Procedure

  1. For example, to set the maximum number of received packets to delay to 128 in the enp1s0 connection profile, enter: 

    # nmcli connection modify enp1s0 ethtool.coalesce-rx-frames 128
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. To remove a coalesce setting, set it to a null value. For example, to remove the ethtool.coalesce-rx-frames setting, enter: 

    # nmcli connection modify enp1s0 ethtool.coalesce-rx-frames ""
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. To reactivate the network profile: 

    # nmcli connection up enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Use the ethtool -c command to display the current offload features of a network device: 

    # ethtool -c network_device
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Interrupt coalescing collects network packets and generates a single interrupt for multiple packets. This reduces interrupt load and maximizes throughput. You can automate the configuration of these settings in the NetworkManager connection profile by using the network RHEL system role.

Warning

You cannot use the network RHEL system role to update only specific values in an existing connection profile. The role ensures that a connection profile exactly matches the settings in a playbook. If a connection profile with the same name already exists, the role applies the settings from the playbook and resets all other settings in the profile to their defaults. To prevent resetting values, always specify the whole configuration of the network connection profile in the playbook, including the settings that you do not want to change.

Prerequisites

Procedure

  1. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configure the network
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: Ethernet connection profile with dynamic IP address settings and coalesce settings
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.network
      vars:
        network_connections:
          - name: enp1s0
            type: ethernet
            autoconnect: yes
            ip:
              dhcp4: yes
              auto6: yes
            ethtool:
              coalesce:
                rx_frames: 128
                tx_frames: 128
            state: up
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The settings specified in the example playbook include the following:

    rx_frames: <value>
    Sets the number of RX frames.
    gso: <value>
    Sets the number of TX frames.

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.network/README.md file on the control node.

  2. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  3. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Display the current offload features of the network device: 

    # ansible managed-node-01.example.com -m command -a 'ethtool -c enp1s0'
managed-node-01.example.com | CHANGED | rc=0 >>
...
rx-frames:	128
...
tx-frames:	128
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Increase the size of an Ethernet device’s ring buffers if the packet drop rate causes applications to report a loss of data, timeouts, or other issues.

Receive ring buffers are shared between the device driver and network interface controller (NIC). The card assigns a transmit (TX) and receive (RX) ring buffer. As the name implies, the ring buffer is a circular buffer where an overflow overwrites existing data. There are two ways to move data from the NIC to the kernel, hardware interrupts and software interrupts, also called SoftIRQs.

The kernel uses the RX ring buffer to store incoming packets until the device driver can process them. The device driver drains the RX ring, typically by using SoftIRQs, which puts the incoming packets into a kernel data structure called an sk_buff or skb to begin its journey through the kernel and up to the application that owns the relevant socket.

The kernel uses the TX ring buffer to hold outgoing packets which should be sent to the network. These ring buffers reside at the bottom of the stack and are a crucial point at which packet drop can occur, which in turn will adversely affect network performance.

Procedure

  1. Display the packet drop statistics of the interface: 

    # ethtool -S enp1s0
    ...
    rx_queue_0_drops: 97326
    rx_queue_1_drops: 63783
    ...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that the output of the command depends on the network card and the driver.

    High values in discard or drop counters indicate that the available buffer fills up faster than the kernel can process the packets. Increasing the ring buffers can help to avoid such loss.

  2. Display the maximum ring buffer sizes: 

    # ethtool -g enp1s0
 Ring parameters for enp1s0:
 Pre-set maximums:
 RX:             4096
 RX Mini:        0
 RX Jumbo:       16320
 TX:             4096
 Current hardware settings:
 RX:             255
 RX Mini:        0
 RX Jumbo:       0
 TX:             255
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If the values in the Pre-set maximums section are higher than in the Current hardware settings section, you can change the settings in the next steps.

  3. Identify the NetworkManager connection profile that uses the interface: 

    # nmcli connection show
NAME                UUID                                  TYPE      DEVICE
Example-Connection  a5eb6490-cc20-3668-81f8-0314a27f3f75  ethernet  enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Update the connection profile, and increase the ring buffers:

    • To increase the RX ring buffer, enter: 

      # nmcli connection modify Example-Connection ethtool.ring-rx 4096
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    • To increase the TX ring buffer, enter: 

      # nmcli connection modify Example-Connection ethtool.ring-tx 4096
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Reload the NetworkManager connection: 

    # nmcli connection up Example-Connection
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Important

    Depending on the driver your NIC uses, changing in the ring buffer can shortly interrupt the network connection.

Increase the size of an Ethernet device’s ring buffers if the packet drop rate causes applications to report a loss of data, timeouts, or other issues.

Ring buffers are circular buffers where an overflow overwrites existing data. The network card assigns a transmit (TX) and receive (RX) ring buffer. Receive ring buffers are shared between the device driver and the network interface controller (NIC). Data can move from NIC to the kernel through either hardware interrupts or software interrupts, also called SoftIRQs.

The kernel uses the RX ring buffer to store incoming packets until the device driver can process them. The device driver drains the RX ring, typically by using SoftIRQs, which puts the incoming packets into a kernel data structure called an sk_buff or skb to begin its journey through the kernel and up to the application that owns the relevant socket.

The kernel uses the TX ring buffer to hold outgoing packets which should be sent to the network. These ring buffers reside at the bottom of the stack and are a crucial point at which packet drop can occur, which in turn will adversely affect network performance.

You configure ring buffer settings in the NetworkManager connection profiles. By using Ansible and the network RHEL system role, you can automate this process and remotely configure connection profiles on the hosts defined in a playbook.

Warning

You cannot use the network RHEL system role to update only specific values in an existing connection profile. The role ensures that a connection profile exactly matches the settings in a playbook. If a connection profile with the same name already exists, the role applies the settings from the playbook and resets all other settings in the profile to their defaults. To prevent resetting values, always specify the whole configuration of the network connection profile in the playbook, including the settings that you do not want to change.

Prerequisites

  • You have prepared the control node and the managed nodes.
  • You are logged in to the control node as a user who can run playbooks on the managed nodes.
  • The account you use to connect to the managed nodes has sudo permissions on them.
  • You know the maximum ring buffer sizes that the device supports.

Procedure

  1. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configure the network
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: Ethernet connection profile with dynamic IP address setting and increased ring buffer sizes
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.network
      vars:
        network_connections:
          - name: enp1s0
            type: ethernet
            autoconnect: yes
            ip:
              dhcp4: yes
              auto6: yes
            ethtool:
              ring:
                rx: 4096
                tx: 4096
            state: up
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The settings specified in the example playbook include the following:

    rx: <value>
    Sets the maximum number of received ring buffer entries.
    tx: <value>
    Sets the maximum number of transmitted ring buffer entries.

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.network/README.md file on the control node.

  2. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  3. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Display the maximum ring buffer sizes: 

    # ansible managed-node-01.example.com -m command -a 'ethtool -g enp1s0'
managed-node-01.example.com | CHANGED | rc=0 >>
...
Current hardware settings:
RX:             4096
RX Mini:        0
RX Jumbo:       0
TX:             4096
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 29. Introduction to NetworkManager Debugging
Link kopieren

Increasing the log levels for all or certain domains helps to log more details of the operations that NetworkManager performs. You can use this information to troubleshoot problems.

NetworkManager provides different levels and domains to produce logging information. The /etc/NetworkManager/NetworkManager.conf file is the main configuration file for NetworkManager. The logs are stored in the journal.

29.1. Introduction to NetworkManager reapply() method
Link kopieren

NetworkManager uses profiles to manage device connection settings, which can be created, modified, or deleted through the D-Bus API. When a profile is changed, D-Bus clones the settings. To apply these changes, you must reactivate the connection’s settings or use the reapply() method.

The reapply() method has the following features:

  1. Updating modified connection settings without deactivation or restart of a network interface.
  2. Removing pending changes from the modified connection settings. As NetworkManager does not revert the manual changes, you can reconfigure the device and revert external or manual parameters.
  3. Creating different modified connection settings than that of the existing connection settings.

Also, reapply() method supports the following attributes:

  • bridge.ageing-time
  • bridge.forward-delay
  • bridge.group-address
  • bridge.group-forward-mask
  • bridge.hello-time
  • bridge.max-age
  • bridge.multicast-hash-max
  • bridge.multicast-last-member-count
  • bridge.multicast-last-member-interval
  • bridge.multicast-membership-interval
  • bridge.multicast-querier
  • bridge.multicast-querier-interval
  • bridge.multicast-query-interval
  • bridge.multicast-query-response-interval
  • bridge.multicast-query-use-ifaddr
  • bridge.multicast-router
  • bridge.multicast-snooping
  • bridge.multicast-startup-query-count
  • bridge.multicast-startup-query-interval
  • bridge.priority
  • bridge.stp
  • bridge.VLAN-filtering
  • bridge.VLAN-protocol
  • bridge.VLANs
  • 802-3-ethernet.accept-all-mac-addresses
  • 802-3-ethernet.cloned-mac-address
  • IPv4.addresses
  • IPv4.dhcp-client-id
  • IPv4.dhcp-iaid
  • IPv4.dhcp-timeout
  • IPv4.DNS
  • IPv4.DNS-priority
  • IPv4.DNS-search
  • IPv4.gateway
  • IPv4.ignore-auto-DNS
  • IPv4.ignore-auto-routes
  • IPv4.may-fail
  • IPv4.method
  • IPv4.never-default
  • IPv4.route-table
  • IPv4.routes
  • IPv4.routing-rules
  • IPv6.addr-gen-mode
  • IPv6.addresses
  • IPv6.dhcp-duid
  • IPv6.dhcp-iaid
  • IPv6.dhcp-timeout
  • IPv6.DNS
  • IPv6.DNS-priority
  • IPv6.DNS-search
  • IPv6.gateway
  • IPv6.ignore-auto-DNS
  • IPv6.may-fail
  • IPv6.method
  • IPv6.never-default
  • IPv6.ra-timeout
  • IPv6.route-metric
  • IPv6.route-table
  • IPv6.routes
  • IPv6.routing-rules

29.2. Setting the NetworkManager log level
Link kopieren

By default, all the log domains are set to record the INFO log level. Disable rate-limiting before collecting debug logs. With rate-limiting, systemd-journald drops messages if there are too many of them in a short time. This can occur when the log level is TRACE.

This procedure disables rate-limiting and enables recording debug logs for the all (ALL) domains.

Procedure

  1. To disable rate-limiting, edit the /etc/systemd/journald.conf file, uncomment the RateLimitBurst parameter in the [Journal] section, and set its value as 0: 

    RateLimitBurst=0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Restart the systemd-journald service. 

    # systemctl restart systemd-journald
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Create the /etc/NetworkManager/conf.d/95-nm-debug.conf file with the following content: 

    [logging]
domains=ALL:TRACE
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The domains parameter can contain multiple comma-separated domain:level pairs.

  4. Restart the NetworkManager service. 

    # systemctl restart NetworkManager
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Query the systemd journal to display the journal entries of the NetworkManager unit: 

    # journalctl -u NetworkManager
...
Jun 30 15:24:32 server NetworkManager[164187]: <debug> [1656595472.4939] active-connection[0x5565143c80a0]: update activation type from assume to managed
Jun 30 15:24:32 server NetworkManager[164187]: <trace> [1656595472.4939] device[55b33c3bdb72840c] (enp1s0): sys-iface-state: assume -> managed
Jun 30 15:24:32 server NetworkManager[164187]: <trace> [1656595472.4939] l3cfg[4281fdf43e356454,ifindex=3]: commit type register (type "update", source "device", existing a369f23014b9ede3) -> a369f23014b9ede3
Jun 30 15:24:32 server NetworkManager[164187]: <info>  [1656595472.4940] manager: NetworkManager state is now CONNECTED_SITE
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

29.3. Temporarily setting log levels at run time using nmcli
Link kopieren

You can change the log level at run time using nmcli.

Procedure

  1. Optional: Display the current logging settings: 

    # nmcli general logging
  LEVEL  DOMAINS
  INFO   PLATFORM,RFKILL,ETHER,WIFI,BT,MB,DHCP4,DHCP6,PPP,WIFI_SCAN,IP4,IP6,A
UTOIP4,DNS,VPN,SHARING,SUPPLICANT,AGENTS,SETTINGS,SUSPEND,CORE,DEVICE,OLPC,
WIMAX,INFINIBAND,FIREWALL,ADSL,BOND,VLAN,BRIDGE,DBUS_PROPS,TEAM,CONCHECK,DC
B,DISPATCH
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. To modify the logging level and domains, use the following options:

    • To set the log level for all domains to the same LEVEL, enter: 

      # nmcli general logging level LEVEL domains ALL
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    • To change the level for specific domains, enter: 

      # nmcli general logging level LEVEL domains DOMAINS
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      Note that updating the logging level using this command disables logging for all the other domains.

    • To change the level of specific domains and preserve the level of all other domains, enter: 

      # nmcli general logging level KEEP domains DOMAIN:LEVEL,DOMAIN:LEVEL
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

29.4. Viewing NetworkManager logs
Link kopieren

You can view the NetworkManager logs for troubleshooting.

Procedure

  • To view the logs, enter: 

    # journalctl -u NetworkManager -b
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

29.5. Debugging levels and domains
Link kopieren

You can use the levels and domains parameters to manage the debugging for NetworkManager. The level defines the verbosity level, whereas the domains define the category of the messages to record the logs with given severity (level).

Expand
Log levelsDescription

OFF

Does not log any messages about NetworkManager

ERR

Logs only critical errors

WARN

Logs warnings that can reflect the operation

INFO

Logs various informational messages that are useful for tracking state and operations

DEBUG

Enables verbose logging for debugging purposes

TRACE

Enables more verbose logging than the DEBUG level

Note that subsequent levels log all messages from earlier levels. For example, setting the log level to INFO also logs messages contained in the ERR and WARN log level.

Chapter 30. Using LLDP to debug network configuration problems
Link kopieren

You can use the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) to debug network configuration problems in the topology. This means that, LLDP can report configuration inconsistencies with other hosts or routers and switches.

30.1. Debugging an incorrect VLAN configuration using LLDP information
Link kopieren

If you configured a switch port to use a certain VLAN and a host does not receive these VLAN packets, you can use the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) to debug the problem. Perform this procedure on the host that does not receive the packets.

Prerequisites

  • The nmstate package is installed.
  • The switch supports LLDP.
  • LLDP is enabled on neighbor devices.

Procedure

  1. Create the ~/enable-LLDP-enp1s0.yml file with the following content: 

    interfaces:
  - name: enp1s0
    type: ethernet
    lldp:
      enabled: true
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Use the ~/enable-LLDP-enp1s0.yml file to enable LLDP on interface enp1s0: 

    # nmstatectl apply ~/enable-LLDP-enp1s0.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Display the LLDP information: 

    # nmstatectl show enp1s0
- name: enp1s0
  type: ethernet
  state: up
  ipv4:
    enabled: false
    dhcp: false
  ipv6:
    enabled: false
    autoconf: false
    dhcp: false
  lldp:
    enabled: true
    neighbors:
    - - type: 5
        system-name: Summit300-48
      - type: 6
        system-description: Summit300-48 - Version 7.4e.1 (Build 5)
          05/27/05 04:53:11
      - type: 7
        system-capabilities:
        - MAC Bridge component
        - Router
      - type: 1
        _description: MAC address
        chassis-id: 00:01:30:F9:AD:A0
        chassis-id-type: 4
      - type: 2
        _description: Interface name
        port-id: 1/1
        port-id-type: 5
      - type: 127
        ieee-802-1-vlans:
        - name: v2-0488-03-0505
          vid: 488
        oui: 00:80:c2
        subtype: 3
      - type: 127
        ieee-802-3-mac-phy-conf:
          autoneg: true
          operational-mau-type: 16
          pmd-autoneg-cap: 27648
        oui: 00:12:0f
        subtype: 1
      - type: 127
        ieee-802-1-ppvids:
        - 0
        oui: 00:80:c2
        subtype: 2
      - type: 8
        management-addresses:
        - address: 00:01:30:F9:AD:A0
          address-subtype: MAC
          interface-number: 1001
          interface-number-subtype: 2
      - type: 127
        ieee-802-3-max-frame-size: 1522
        oui: 00:12:0f
        subtype: 4
  mac-address: 82:75:BE:6F:8C:7A
  mtu: 1500
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Verify the output to ensure that the settings match your expected configuration. For example, the LLDP information of the interface connected to the switch shows that the switch port this host is connected to uses VLAN ID 448: 

    - type: 127
        ieee-802-1-vlans:
        - name: v2-0488-03-0505
          vid: 488
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If the network configuration of the enp1s0 interface uses a different VLAN ID, change it accordingly.

Chapter 31. Linux traffic control
Link kopieren

Linux Traffic Control (TC) helps in policing, classifying, shaping, and scheduling network traffic. It uses queuing disciplines (qdisc) and filters to manage and manipulate packet transmission, including mangling packet content.

The scheduling mechanism arranges or rearranges the packets before they enter or exit different queues. The most common scheduler is the First-In-First-Out (FIFO) scheduler. You can do the qdiscs operations temporarily using the tc utility or permanently using NetworkManager.

In Red Hat Enterprise Linux, you can configure default queueing disciplines in various ways to manage the traffic on a network interface.

31.1. Overview of queuing disciplines
Link kopieren

Queuing disciplines (qdiscs) help with queuing up and, later, scheduling of traffic transmission by a network interface.

A qdisc has two operations;

  • enqueue requests so that a packet can be queued up for later transmission and
  • dequeue requests so that one of the queued-up packets can be chosen for immediate transmission.

Every qdisc has a 16-bit hexadecimal identification number called a handle, with an attached colon, such as 1: or abcd:. This number is called the qdisc major number. If a qdisc has classes, then the identifiers are formed as a pair of two numbers with the major number before the minor, <major>:<minor>, for example abcd:1. The numbering scheme for the minor numbers depends on the qdisc type. Sometimes the numbering is systematic, where the first-class has the ID <major>:1, the second one <major>:2, and so on. Some qdiscs allow the user to set class minor numbers arbitrarily when creating the class.

Classful qdiscs

Different types of qdiscs exist and help in the transfer of packets to and from a networking interface. You can configure qdiscs with root, parent, or child classes. The point where children can be attached are called classes. Classes in qdisc are flexible and can always contain either multiple children classes or a single child, qdisc. There is no prohibition against a class containing a classful qdisc itself, this facilitates complex traffic control scenarios.

Classful qdiscs do not store any packets themselves. Instead, they enqueue and dequeue requests down to one of their children according to criteria specific to the qdisc. Eventually, this recursive packet passing ends up where the packets are stored (or picked up from in the case of dequeuing).

Classless qdiscs
Some qdiscs contain no child classes and they are called classless qdiscs. Classless qdiscs require less customization compared to classful qdiscs. It is usually enough to attach them to an interface.

31.2. Inspecting qdiscs of a network interface using the tc utility
Link kopieren

By default, Red Hat Enterprise Linux systems use fq_codel qdisc. You can inspect the qdisc counters using the tc utility.

Procedure

  1. Optional: View your current qdisc: 

    # tc qdisc show dev enp0s1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Inspect the current qdisc counters: 

    # tc -s qdisc show dev enp0s1
qdisc fq_codel 0: root refcnt 2 limit 10240p flows 1024 quantum 1514 target 5.0ms interval 100.0ms memory_limit 32Mb ecn
Sent 1008193 bytes 5559 pkt (dropped 233, overlimits 55 requeues 77)
backlog 0b 0p requeues 0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    • dropped - the number of times a packet is dropped because all queues are full
    • overlimits - the number of times the configured link capacity is filled
    • sent - the number of dequeues

31.3. Updating the default qdisc
Link kopieren

If you observe networking packet losses with the current qdisc, you can change the qdisc based on your network-requirements.

Procedure

  1. View the current default qdisc: 

    # sysctl -a | grep qdisc
net.core.default_qdisc = fq_codel
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. View the qdisc of current Ethernet connection: 

    # tc -s qdisc show dev enp0s1
qdisc fq_codel 0: root refcnt 2 limit 10240p flows 1024 quantum 1514 target 5.0ms interval 100.0ms memory_limit 32Mb ecn
Sent 0 bytes 0 pkt (dropped 0, overlimits 0 requeues 0)
backlog 0b 0p requeues 0
maxpacket 0 drop_overlimit 0 new_flow_count 0 ecn_mark 0
new_flows_len 0 old_flows_len 0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Update the existing qdisc: 

    # sysctl -w net.core.default_qdisc=pfifo_fast
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. To apply the changes, reload the network driver: 

    # modprobe -r NETWORKDRIVERNAME
# modprobe NETWORKDRIVERNAME
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Start the network interface: 

    # ip link set enp0s1 up
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • View the qdisc of the Ethernet connection: 

    # tc -s qdisc show dev enp0s1
qdisc pfifo_fast 0: root refcnt 2 bands 3 priomap  1 2 2 2 1 2 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
 Sent 373186 bytes 5333 pkt (dropped 0, overlimits 0 requeues 0)
 backlog 0b 0p requeues 0
....
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Changing the current qdisc can optimize how the kernel handles packets as they pass through a network interface. For testing and benchmarking purposes, you can change the qdisc temporarily.

Procedure

  1. Optional: View the current qdisc: 

    # tc -s qdisc show dev enp0s1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Update the current qdisc: 

    # tc qdisc replace dev enp0s1 root htb
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • View the updated current qdisc: 

    # tc -s qdisc show dev enp0s1
qdisc htb 8001: root refcnt 2 r2q 10 default 0 direct_packets_stat 0 direct_qlen 1000
Sent 0 bytes 0 pkt (dropped 0, overlimits 0 requeues 0)
backlog 0b 0p requeues 0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Changing the current qdisc can optimize how the kernel handles packets as they pass through a network interface. If you identified the optimal qdisc for your scenario, set it permanently in the NetworkManager connection profile.

Procedure

  1. Optional: View the current qdisc: 

    # tc qdisc show dev enp0s1
  qdisc fq_codel 0: root refcnt 2
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Update the current qdisc: 

    # nmcli connection modify enp0s1 tc.qdiscs 'root pfifo_fast'
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Optional: To add another qdisc over the existing qdisc, use the +tc.qdisc option: 

    # nmcli connection modify enp0s1 +tc.qdisc 'ingress handle ffff:'
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Activate the changes: 

    # nmcli connection up enp0s1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • View current qdisc the network interface: 

    # tc qdisc show dev enp0s1
qdisc pfifo_fast 8001: root refcnt 2 bands 3 priomap  1 2 2 2 1 2 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
qdisc ingress ffff: parent ffff:fff1 ----------------
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

31.6. Available qdiscs in RHEL
Link kopieren

Each qdisc addresses unique networking-related issues. You can use any of them to shape network traffic based on your networking requirements.

These qdiscs are available in RHEL:

Expand
Table 31.1. Available schedulers in RHEL
qdisc nameIncluded inOffload support

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)

kernel-modules-extra

 

Credit-Based Shaper

kernel-modules-extra

Yes

CHOose and Keep for responsive flows, CHOose and Kill for unresponsive flows (CHOKE)

kernel-modules-extra

 

Controlled Delay (CoDel)

kernel-core

 

Enhanced Transmission Selection (ETS)

kernel-modules-extra

Yes

Fair Queue (FQ)

kernel-core

 

Fair Queuing Controlled Delay (FQ_CODel)

kernel-core

 

Generalized Random Early Detection (GRED)

kernel-modules-extra

 

Hierarchical Fair Service Curve (HSFC)

kernel-core

 

Heavy-Hitter Filter (HHF)

kernel-core

 

Hierarchy Token Bucket (HTB)

kernel-core

Yes

INGRESS

kernel-core

Yes

Multi Queue Priority (MQPRIO)

kernel-modules-extra

Yes

Multiqueue (MULTIQ)

kernel-modules-extra

Yes

Network Emulator (NETEM)

kernel-modules-extra

 

Proportional Integral-controller Enhanced (PIE)

kernel-core

 

PLUG

kernel-core

 

Quick Fair Queueing (QFQ)

kernel-modules-extra

 

Random Early Detection (RED)

kernel-modules-extra

Yes

Stochastic Fair Blue (SFB)

kernel-modules-extra

 

Stochastic Fairness Queueing (SFQ)

kernel-core

 

Token Bucket Filter (TBF)

kernel-core

Yes

Trivial Link Equalizer (TEQL)

kernel-modules-extra

 
Important

The qdisc offload requires hardware and driver support on NIC.

Port-based Network Access Control (NAC), based on the IEEE 802.1X standard, protects a network from unauthorized clients. If the network uses Extensible Authentication Protocol Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS), you require a certificate to authenticate the client.

You can use the nmcli utility to configure an Ethernet connection with 802.1X network authentication on the command line.

Prerequisites

  • The network supports 802.1X network authentication.
  • The Ethernet connection profile exists in NetworkManager and has a valid IP configuration.

  • The following files required for TLS authentication exist on the client:

    • The client key stored is in the /etc/pki/tls/private/client.key file, and the file is owned and only readable by the root user.
    • The client certificate is stored in the /etc/pki/tls/certs/client.crt file.
    • The Certificate Authority (CA) certificate is stored in the /etc/pki/tls/certs/ca.crt file.
  • The wpa_supplicant package is installed.

Procedure

  1. Set the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to tls and the paths to the client certificate and key file: 

    # nmcli connection modify enp1s0 802-1x.eap tls 802-1x.client-cert /etc/pki/tls/certs/client.crt 802-1x.private-key /etc/pki/tls/certs/certs/client.key
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that you must set the 802-1x.eap, 802-1x.client-cert, and 802-1x.private-key parameters in a single command.

  2. Set the path to the CA certificate: 

    # nmcli connection modify enp1s0 802-1x.ca-cert /etc/pki/tls/certs/ca.crt
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Set the identity of the user used in the certificate: 

    # nmcli connection modify enp1s0 802-1x.identity user@example.com
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Optional: Store the password in the configuration: 

    # nmcli connection modify enp1s0 802-1x.private-key-password password
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Important

    By default, NetworkManager stores the password in clear text in the connection profile on the disk, but the file is readable only by the root user. However, clear text passwords in a configuration file can be a security risk.

    To increase the security, set the 802-1x.password-flags parameter to agent-owned. With this setting, on servers with the GNOME desktop environment or the nm-applet running, NetworkManager retrieves the password from these services, after you unlock the keyring. In other cases, NetworkManager prompts for the password.

  5. Activate the connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection up enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Access resources on the network that require network authentication.

You can use the declarative Nmstate API to configure an Ethernet connection with 802.1X network authentication. Nmstate ensures that the result matches the configuration file or rolls back the changes.

Note

The nmstate library only supports the TLS Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) method.

Prerequisites

  • The network supports 802.1X network authentication.
  • The managed node uses NetworkManager.

  • The following files required for TLS authentication exist on the client:

    • The client key stored is in the /etc/pki/tls/private/client.key file, and the file is owned and only readable by the root user.
    • The client certificate is stored in the /etc/pki/tls/certs/client.crt file.
    • The Certificate Authority (CA) certificate is stored in the /etc/pki/tls/certs/ca.crt file.

Procedure

  1. Create a YAML file, for example ~/create-ethernet-profile.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
interfaces:
- name: enp1s0
  type: ethernet
  state: up
  ipv4:
    enabled: true
    address:
    - ip: 192.0.2.1
      prefix-length: 24
    dhcp: false
  ipv6:
    enabled: true
    address:
    - ip: 2001:db8:1::1
      prefix-length: 64
    autoconf: false
    dhcp: false
  802.1x:
    ca-cert: /etc/pki/tls/certs/ca.crt
    client-cert: /etc/pki/tls/certs/client.crt
    eap-methods:
      - tls
    identity: client.example.org
    private-key: /etc/pki/tls/private/client.key
    private-key-password: password
routes:
  config:
  - destination: 0.0.0.0/0
    next-hop-address: 192.0.2.254
    next-hop-interface: enp1s0
  - destination: ::/0
    next-hop-address: 2001:db8:1::fffe
    next-hop-interface: enp1s0
dns-resolver:
  config:
    search:
    - example.com
    server:
    - 192.0.2.200
    - 2001:db8:1::ffbb
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    These settings define an Ethernet connection profile for the enp1s0 device with the following settings:

    • A static IPv4 address - 192.0.2.1 with a /24 subnet mask
    • A static IPv6 address - 2001:db8:1::1 with a /64 subnet mask
    • An IPv4 default gateway - 192.0.2.254
    • An IPv6 default gateway - 2001:db8:1::fffe
    • An IPv4 DNS server - 192.0.2.200
    • An IPv6 DNS server - 2001:db8:1::ffbb
    • A DNS search domain - example.com
    • 802.1X network authentication using the TLS EAP protocol

  2. Apply the settings to the system: 

    # nmstatectl apply ~/create-ethernet-profile.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Access resources on the network that require network authentication.

By using the network RHEL system role, you can automate setting up Network Access Control (NAC) on remote hosts. You can define authentication details for clients in a playbook to ensure only authorized clients can access the network.

You can use an Ansible playbook to copy a private key, a certificate, and the CA certificate to the client, and then use the network RHEL system role to configure a connection profile with 802.1X network authentication.

Prerequisites

  • You have prepared the control node and the managed nodes.
  • You are logged in to the control node as a user who can run playbooks on the managed nodes.
  • The account you use to connect to the managed nodes has sudo permissions on them.
  • The network supports 802.1X network authentication.
  • The managed nodes use NetworkManager.

  • The following files required for the TLS authentication exist on the control node:

    • The client key is stored in the /srv/data/client.key file.
    • The client certificate is stored in the /srv/data/client.crt file.
    • The Certificate Authority (CA) certificate is stored in the /srv/data/ca.crt file.

Procedure

  1. Store your sensitive variables in an encrypted file:

    1. Create the vault: 

      $ ansible-vault create ~/vault.yml
New Vault password: <vault_password>
Confirm New Vault password: <vault_password>
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. After the ansible-vault create command opens an editor, enter the sensitive data in the <key>: <value> format: 

      pwd: <password>
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    3. Save the changes, and close the editor. Ansible encrypts the data in the vault.

  2. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configure an Ethernet connection with 802.1X authentication
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com
  vars_files:
    - ~/vault.yml
  tasks:
    - name: Copy client key for 802.1X authentication
      ansible.builtin.copy:
        src: "/srv/data/client.key"
        dest: "/etc/pki/tls/private/client.key"
        mode: 0600

    - name: Copy client certificate for 802.1X authentication
      ansible.builtin.copy:
        src: "/srv/data/client.crt"
        dest: "/etc/pki/tls/certs/client.crt"

    - name: Copy CA certificate for 802.1X authentication
      ansible.builtin.copy:
        src: "/srv/data/ca.crt"
        dest: "/etc/pki/ca-trust/source/anchors/ca.crt"

    - name: Ethernet connection profile with static IP address settings and 802.1X
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.network
      vars:
        network_connections:
          - name: enp1s0
            type: ethernet
            autoconnect: yes
            ip:
              address:
                - 192.0.2.1/24
                - 2001:db8:1::1/64
              gateway4: 192.0.2.254
              gateway6: 2001:db8:1::fffe
              dns:
                - 192.0.2.200
                - 2001:db8:1::ffbb
              dns_search:
                - example.com
            ieee802_1x:
              identity: <user_name>
              eap: tls
              private_key: "/etc/pki/tls/private/client.key"
              private_key_password: "{{ pwd }}"
              client_cert: "/etc/pki/tls/certs/client.crt"
              ca_cert: "/etc/pki/ca-trust/source/anchors/ca.crt"
              domain_suffix_match: example.com
            state: up
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The settings specified in the example playbook include the following:

    ieee802_1x
    This variable contains the 802.1X-related settings.
    eap: tls
    Configures the profile to use the certificate-based TLS authentication method for the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP).

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.network/README.md file on the control node.

  3. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --ask-vault-pass --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  4. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook --ask-vault-pass ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Access resources on the network that require network authentication.

The IEEE 802.1X standard defines secure authentication and authorization methods to protect networks from unauthorized clients. By using the hostapd service and FreeRADIUS, you can provide network access control (NAC) in your network.

Note

Red Hat supports only FreeRADIUS with Red Hat Identity Management (IdM) as the backend source of authentication.

In this documentation, the RHEL host acts as a bridge to connect different clients with an existing network. However, the RHEL host grants only authenticated clients access to the network.

rhel authenticator 802 1x
View larger image
rhel authenticator 802 1x

33.1. Prerequisites
Link kopieren

  • A clean installation of the freeradius and freeradius-ldap packages.

    If the packages are already installed, remove the /etc/raddb/ directory, uninstall and then install the packages again. Do not reinstall the packages by using the yum reinstall command, because the permissions and symbolic links in the /etc/raddb/ directory are then different.

  • The host on which you want to configure FreeRADIUS is a client in an IdM domain.

33.2. Setting up the bridge on the authenticator
Link kopieren

A network bridge is a link-layer device that forwards traffic between hosts and networks based on a table of MAC addresses. If you set up RHEL as an 802.1X authenticator, add both the interfaces on which to perform authentication and the LAN interface to the bridge.

Prerequisites

  • The server has multiple Ethernet interfaces.

Procedure

  1. If the bridge interface does not exist, create it: 

    # nmcli connection add type bridge con-name br0 ifname br0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Assign the Ethernet interfaces to the bridge: 

    # nmcli connection add type ethernet slave-type bridge con-name br0-port1 ifname enp1s0 master br0
# nmcli connection add type ethernet slave-type bridge con-name br0-port2 ifname enp7s0 master br0
# nmcli connection add type ethernet slave-type bridge con-name br0-port3 ifname enp8s0 master br0
# nmcli connection add type ethernet slave-type bridge con-name br0-port4 ifname enp9s0 master br0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Enable the bridge to forward extensible authentication protocol over LAN (EAPOL) packets: 

    # nmcli connection modify br0 group-forward-mask 8
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Disable the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) on the bridge device: 

    # *nmcli connection modify br0 stp off"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Configure the connection to automatically activate the ports: 

    # nmcli connection modify br0 connection.autoconnect-slaves 1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  6. Activate the connection: 

    # nmcli connection up br0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Display the link status of Ethernet devices that are ports of a specific bridge: 

    # ip link show master br0
3: enp1s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel master br0 state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 52:54:00:62:61:0e brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Verify if forwarding of EAPOL packets is enabled on the br0 device: 

    # cat /sys/class/net/br0/bridge/group_fwd_mask
0x8
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If the command returns 0x8, forwarding is enabled.

FreeRADIUS supports different methods of the Extensible authentication protocol (EAP). However, for a supported and secure scenario, use EAP-TTLS (tunneled transport layer security).

With EAP-TTLS, the clients use a secure TLS connection as the outer authentication protocol to set up the tunnel. The inner authentication then uses LDAP to authenticate to Identity Management. To use EAP-TTLS, you need a TLS server certificate.

Note

The default FreeRADIUS configuration files serve as documentation and describe all parameters and directives. If you want to disable certain features, comment them out instead of removing the corresponding parts in the configuration files. This enables you to preserve the structure of the configuration files and the included documentation.

Prerequisites

  • You installed the freeradius and freeradius-ldap packages.
  • The configuration files in the /etc/raddb/ directory are unchanged and as provided by the freeradius packages.
  • The host is enrolled in a Red Hat Enterprise Linux Identity Management (IdM) domain.

Procedure

  1. Create a private key and request a certificate from IdM: 

    # ipa-getcert request -w -k /etc/pki/tls/private/radius.key -f /etc/pki/tls/certs/radius.pem -o "root:radiusd" -m 640 -O "root:radiusd" -M 640 -T caIPAserviceCert -C 'systemctl restart radiusd.service' -N freeradius.idm.example.com -D freeradius.idm.example.com -K radius/freeradius.idm.example.com
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The certmonger service stores the private key in the /etc/pki/tls/private/radius.key file and the certificate in the /etc/pki/tls/certs/radius.pem file, and it sets secure permissions. Additionally, certmonger will monitor the certificate, renew it before it expires, and restart the radiusd service after the certificate was renewed.

  2. Verify that the CA successfully issued the certificate: 

    # ipa-getcert list -f /etc/pki/tls/certs/radius.pem
...
Number of certificates and requests being tracked: 1.
Request ID '20240918142211':
        status: MONITORING
        stuck: no
        key pair storage: type=FILE,location='/etc/pki/tls/private/radius.key'
        certificate: type=FILE,location='/etc/pki/tls/certs/radius.crt'
        ...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Create the /etc/raddb/certs/dh file with Diffie-Hellman (DH) parameters. For example, to create a DH file with a 2048 bits prime, enter: 

    # openssl dhparam -out /etc/raddb/certs/dh 2048
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    For security reasons, do not use a DH file with less than a 2048 bits prime. Depending on the number of bits, the creation of the file can take several minutes.

  4. Edit the /etc/raddb/mods-available/eap file:

    1. Configure the TLS-related settings in the tls-config tls-common directive: 

      eap {
    ...
    tls-config tls-common {
        ...
	private_key_file = /etc/pki/tls/private/radius.key
	certificate_file = /etc/pki/tls/certs/radius.pem
	ca_file = /etc/ipa/ca.crt
        ...
    }
}
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Set the default_eap_type parameter in the eap directive to ttls: 

      eap {
    ...
    default_eap_type = ttls
    ...
}
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    3. Comment out the md5 directives to disable the insecure EAP-MD5 authentication method: 

      eap {
    ...
    # md5 {
    # }
    ...
}
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      Note that, in the default configuration file, other insecure EAP authentication methods are commented out by default.

  5. Edit the /etc/raddb/sites-available/default file, and comment out all authentication methods other than eap: 

    authenticate {
    ...
    # Auth-Type PAP {
    #     pap
    # }

    # Auth-Type CHAP {
    #     chap
    # }

    # Auth-Type MS-CHAP {
    #     mschap
    # }

    # mschap

    # digest
    ...
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This leaves only EAP enabled for the outer authentication and disables plain-text authentication methods.

  6. Edit the /etc/raddb/sites-available/inner-tunnel file, and make the following changes:

    1. Comment out the -ldap entry and add the ldap module configuration to the authorize directive: 

      authorize {
    ...

    #-ldap
    ldap
    if ((ok || updated) && User-Password) {
        update {
            control:Auth-Type := ldap
        }
    }

    ...
}
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Uncomment the LDAP authentication type in the authenticate directive: 

      authenticate {
    Auth-Type LDAP {
        ldap
    }
}
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  7. Enable the ldap module: 

    # ln -s /etc/raddb/mods-available/ldap /etc/raddb/mods-enabled/ldap
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  8. Edit the /etc/raddb/mods-available/ldap file, and make the following changes:

    1. In the ldap directive, set the IdM LDAP server URL and the base distinguished name (DN): 

      ldap {
    ...
    server = 'ldaps://idm_server.idm.example.com'
    base_dn = 'cn=users,cn=accounts,dc=idm,dc=example,dc=com'
    ...
}
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      Specify the ldaps protocol in the server URL to use TLS-encrypted connections between the FreeRADIUS host and the IdM server.

    2. In the ldap directive, enable TLS certificate validation of the IdM LDAP server: 

      tls {
    ...
        require_cert = 'demand'
    ...
}
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  9. Edit the /etc/raddb/clients.conf file:

    1. Set a secure password in the localhost and localhost_ipv6 client directives: 

      client localhost {
    ipaddr = 127.0.0.1
    ...
    secret = localhost_client_password
    ...
}

client localhost_ipv6 {
    ipv6addr = ::1
    secret = localhost_client_password
}
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Add a client directive for the network authenticator: 

      client hostapd.example.org {
    ipaddr = 192.0.2.2/32
    secret = hostapd_client_password
}
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    3. Optional: If other hosts should also be able to access the FreeRADIUS service, add client directives for them as well, for example: 

      client <hostname_or_description> {
    ipaddr = <IP_address_or_range>
    secret = <client_password>
}
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The ipaddr parameter accepts IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, and you can use the optional classless inter-domain routing (CIDR) notation to specify ranges. However, you can set only one value in this parameter. For example, to grant access to both an IPv4 and IPv6 address, you must add two client directives.

      Use a descriptive name for the client directive, such as a hostname or a word that describes where the IP range is used.

  10. Verify the configuration files: 

    # radiusd -XC
...
Configuration appears to be OK
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  11. Open the RADIUS ports in the firewalld service: 

    # firewall-cmd --permanent --add-service=radius
# firewall-cmd --reload
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  12. Enable and start the radiusd service: 

    # systemctl enable --now radiusd
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

Troubleshooting

  • If the radiusd service fails to start, verify that you can resolve the IdM server host name: 

    # host -v idm_server.idm.example.com
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  • For other problems, run radiusd in debug mode:

    1. Stop the radiusd service: 

      # systemctl stop radiusd
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Start the service in debug mode: 

      # radiusd -X
...
Ready to process requests
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    3. Perform authentication tests on the FreeRADIUS host, as referenced in the Verification section.

Next steps

  • Disable no longer required authentication methods and other features you do not use.

33.4. Configuring hostapd as an authenticator in a wired network
Link kopieren

The host access point daemon (hostapd) service can act as an authenticator in a wired network to provide 802.1X authentication. For this, the hostapd service requires a RADIUS server that authenticates the clients.

The hostapd service provides an integrated RADIUS server. However, use the integrated RADIUS server only for testing purposes. For production environments, use FreeRADIUS server, which supports additional features, such as different authentication methods and access control.

Important

The hostapd service does not interact with the traffic plane. The service acts only as an authenticator. For example, use a script or service that uses the hostapd control interface to allow or deny traffic based on the result of authentication events.

Prerequisites

  • You installed the hostapd package.
  • The FreeRADIUS server has been configured, and it is ready to authenticate clients.

Procedure

  1. Create the /etc/hostapd/hostapd.conf file with the following content: 

    # General settings of hostapd
# ===========================

# Control interface settings
ctrl_interface=/var/run/hostapd
ctrl_interface_group=wheel

# Enable logging for all modules
logger_syslog=-1
logger_stdout=-1

# Log level
logger_syslog_level=2
logger_stdout_level=2


# Wired 802.1X authentication
# ===========================

# Driver interface type
driver=wired

# Enable IEEE 802.1X authorization
ieee8021x=1

# Use port access entry (PAE) group address
# (01:80:c2:00:00:03) when sending EAPOL frames
use_pae_group_addr=1


# Network interface for authentication requests
interface=br0


# RADIUS client configuration
# ===========================

# Local IP address used as NAS-IP-Address
own_ip_addr=192.0.2.2

# Unique NAS-Identifier within scope of RADIUS server
nas_identifier=hostapd.example.org

# RADIUS authentication server
auth_server_addr=192.0.2.1
auth_server_port=1812
auth_server_shared_secret=hostapd_client_password

# RADIUS accounting server
acct_server_addr=192.0.2.1
acct_server_port=1813
acct_server_shared_secret=hostapd_client_password
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    For further details about the parameters used in this configuration, see their descriptions in the /usr/share/doc/hostapd/hostapd.conf example configuration file.

  2. Enable and start the hostapd service: 

    # systemctl enable --now hostapd
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

Troubleshooting

  • If the hostapd service fails to start, verify that the bridge interface you use in the /etc/hostapd/hostapd.conf file is present on the system: 

    # ip link show br0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  • For other problems, run hostapd in debug mode:

    1. Stop the hostapd service: 

      # systemctl stop hostapd
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Start the service in debug mode: 

      # hostapd -d /etc/hostapd/hostapd.conf
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    3. Perform authentication tests on the FreeRADIUS host, as referenced in the Verification section.

After you set up the FreeRADIUS server and the hostapd service, test if authentication by using extensible authentication protocol (EAP) over tunneled transport layer security (EAP-TTLS) works as expected.

  • After you set up the FreeRADIUS server
  • After you set up the hostapd service as an authenticator for 802.1X network authentication.

The output of the test utilities used in this procedure provide additional information about the EAP communication and help you to debug problems.

Prerequisites

  • You set up the FreeRADIUS server.
  • You set up the hostapd service as an authenticator for 802.1X network authentication.

  • When you want to authenticate to:

    • A FreeRADIUS server:

      • The eapol_test utility, provided by the hostapd package, is installed.
      • The client, on which you run this procedure, has been authorized in the FreeRADIUS server’s client databases.
    • An authenticator, the wpa_supplicant utility, provided by the same-named package, is installed.
  • You stored the certificate authority (CA) certificate in the /etc/ipa/ca.cert file.

Procedure

  1. Optional: Create a user in Identity Management (IdM): 

    # ipa user-add --first "Test" --last "User" idm_user --password
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Create the /etc/wpa_supplicant/wpa_supplicant-TTLS.conf file with the following content: 

    ap_scan=0

network={
    eap=TTLS
    eapol_flags=0
    key_mgmt=IEEE8021X

    # Anonymous identity (sent in unencrypted phase 1)
    # Can be any string
    anonymous_identity="anonymous"

    # Inner authentication (sent in TLS-encrypted phase 2)
    phase2="auth=PAP"
    identity="idm_user"
    password="idm_user_password"

    # CA certificate to validate the RADIUS server's identity
    ca_cert="/etc/ipa/ca.crt"
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. To authenticate to:

    • A FreeRADIUS server, enter: 

      # eapol_test -c /etc/wpa_supplicant/wpa_supplicant-TTLS.conf -a 192.0.2.1 -s <client_password>
...
EAP: Status notification: remote certificate verification (param=success)
...
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-SUCCESS EAP authentication completed successfully
...
SUCCESS
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The -a option defines the IP address of the FreeRADIUS server, and the -s option specifies the password for the host on which you run the command in the FreeRADIUS server’s client configuration.

    • An authenticator, enter: 

      # wpa_supplicant -c /etc/wpa_supplicant/wpa_supplicant-TTLS.conf -D wired -i enp0s31f6
...
enp0s31f6: CTRL-EVENT-EAP-SUCCESS EAP authentication completed successfully
...
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The -i option specifies the network interface name on which wpa_supplicant sends out extended authentication protocol over LAN (EAPOL) packets.

      For more debugging information, pass the -d option to the command.

The hostapd service does not interact with the traffic plane. The service acts only as an authenticator. However, you can write a script to allow and deny traffic based on the result of authentication events.

Important

This procedure is not supported and is no enterprise-ready solution. It only demonstrates how to block or allow traffic by evaluating events retrieved by hostapd_cli.

When the 802-1x-tr-mgmt systemd service starts, RHEL blocks all traffic on the listen port of hostapd except extensible authentication protocol over LAN (EAPOL) packets and uses the hostapd_cli utility to connect to the hostapd control interface. The /usr/local/bin/802-1x-tr-mgmt script then evaluates events. Depending on the different events received by hostapd_cli, the script allows or blocks traffic for MAC addresses. Note that, when the 802-1x-tr-mgmt service stops, all traffic is automatically allowed again.

Perform this procedure on the hostapd server.

Prerequisites

  • The hostapd service has been configured, and the service is ready to authenticate clients.

Procedure

  1. Create the /usr/local/bin/802-1x-tr-mgmt file with the following content: 

    #!/bin/sh

TABLE="tr-mgmt-${1}"
read -r -d '' TABLE_DEF << EOF
table bridge ${TABLE} {
    set allowed_macs {
        type ether_addr
    }

    chain accesscontrol {
        ether saddr @allowed_macs accept
        ether daddr @allowed_macs accept
        drop
    }

    chain forward {
        type filter hook forward priority 0; policy accept;
        meta ibrname "$1" jump accesscontrol
    }
}
EOF

case ${2:-NOTANEVENT} in
    block_all)
        nft destroy table bridge "$TABLE"
        printf "$TABLE_DEF" | nft -f -
        echo "$1: All the bridge traffic blocked. Traffic for a client with a given MAC will be allowed after 802.1x authentication"
        ;;

    AP-STA-CONNECTED | CTRL-EVENT-EAP-SUCCESS | CTRL-EVENT-EAP-SUCCESS2)
        nft add element bridge tr-mgmt-br0 allowed_macs { $3 }
        echo "$1: Allowed traffic from $3"
        ;;

    AP-STA-DISCONNECTED | CTRL-EVENT-EAP-FAILURE)
        nft delete element bridge tr-mgmt-br0 allowed_macs { $3 }
        echo "$1: Denied traffic from $3"
        ;;

    allow_all)
        nft destroy table bridge "$TABLE"
        echo "$1: Allowed all bridge traffice again"
        ;;

    NOTANEVENT)
        echo "$0 was called incorrectly, usage: $0 interface event [mac_address]"
        ;;
esac
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Create the /etc/systemd/system/802-1x-tr-mgmt@.service systemd service file with the following content: 

    [Unit]
Description=Example 802.1x traffic management for hostapd
After=hostapd.service
After=sys-devices-virtual-net-%i.device

[Service]
Type=simple
ExecStartPre=bash -c '/usr/sbin/hostapd_cli ping | grep PONG'
ExecStartPre=/usr/local/bin/802-1x-tr-mgmt %i block_all
ExecStart=/usr/sbin/hostapd_cli -i %i -a /usr/local/bin/802-1x-tr-mgmt
ExecStopPost=/usr/local/bin/802-1x-tr-mgmt %i allow_all

[Install]
WantedBy=multi-user.target
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Reload systemd: 

    # systemctl daemon-reload
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Enable and start the 802-1x-tr-mgmt service with the interface name hostapd is listening on: 

    # systemctl enable --now 802-1x-tr-mgmt@br0.service
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

Chapter 34. Getting started with Multipath TCP
Link kopieren

Multipath TCP (MPTCP) is an extension to the original TCP protocol (single-path). MPTCP enables a transport connection to operate across multiple paths simultaneously, and brings network connection redundancy to user endpoint devices.

34.1. Understanding MPTCP
Link kopieren

The Multipath TCP (MPTCP) protocol provides simultaneous usage of multiple paths between connection endpoints. The protocol design improves connection stability and also brings other benefits compared to the single-path TCP.

Note

In MPTCP terminology, links are considered as paths.

The following are some of the advantages of using MPTCP:

  • It allows a connection to simultaneously use multiple network interfaces.
  • In case a connection is bound to a link speed, the usage of multiple links can increase the connection throughput. Note, that in case of the connection is bound to a CPU, the usage of multiple links causes the connection slowdown.
  • It increases the resilience to link failures.

34.2. Preparing RHEL to enable MPTCP support
Link kopieren

By default the MPTCP support is disabled in RHEL. Enable MPTCP so that applications that support this feature can use it. Additionally, you have to configure user space applications to force use MPTCP sockets if those applications have TCP sockets by default.

You can use the sysctl utility to enable MPTCP support and prepare RHEL for enabling MPTCP for applications system-wide using a SystemTap script.

Prerequisites

The following packages are installed:

  • systemtap
  • iperf3

Procedure

  1. Enable MPTCP sockets in the kernel: 

    # echo "net.mptcp.enabled=1" > /etc/sysctl.d/90-enable-MPTCP.conf
# sysctl -p /etc/sysctl.d/90-enable-MPTCP.conf
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Verify that MPTCP is enabled in the kernel: 

    # sysctl -a | grep mptcp.enabled
net.mptcp.enabled = 1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Create a mptcp-app.stap file with the following content: 

    #!/usr/bin/env stap

%{
#include <linux/in.h>
#include <linux/ip.h>
%}

/* RSI contains 'type' and RDX contains 'protocol'.
 */

function mptcpify () %{
    if (CONTEXT->kregs->si == SOCK_STREAM &&
        (CONTEXT->kregs->dx == IPPROTO_TCP ||
         CONTEXT->kregs->dx == 0)) {
                CONTEXT->kregs->dx = IPPROTO_MPTCP;
                STAP_RETVALUE = 1;
    } else {
           STAP_RETVALUE = 0;
    }
%}

probe kernel.function("__sys_socket") {
        if (mptcpify() == 1) {
                printf("command %16s mptcpified\n", execname());
        }
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Force user space applications to create MPTCP sockets instead of TCP ones: 

    # stap -vg mptcp-app.stap
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note: This operation affects all TCP sockets which are started after the command. The applications will continue using TCP sockets after you interrupt the command above with Ctrl+C.

  5. Alternatively, to allow MPTCP usage to only specific application, you can modify the mptcp-app.stap file with the following content: 

    #!/usr/bin/env stap

%{
#include <linux/in.h>
#include <linux/ip.h>
%}

/* according to [1], RSI contains 'type' and RDX
 * contains 'protocol'.
 * [1] https://github.com/torvalds/linux/blob/master/arch/x86/entry/entry_64.S#L79
 */

function mptcpify () %{
	if (CONTEXT->kregs->si == SOCK_STREAM &&
	    (CONTEXT->kregs->dx == IPPROTO_TCP ||
	     CONTEXT->kregs->dx == 0)) {
		CONTEXT->kregs->dx = IPPROTO_MPTCP;
		STAP_RETVALUE = 1;
	} else {
		STAP_RETVALUE = 0;
	}
%}

probe kernel.function("__sys_socket") {
	cur_proc = execname()
	if ((cur_proc == @1) && (mptcpify() == 1)) {
		printf("command %16s mptcpified\n", cur_proc);
	}
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  6. In case of alternative choice, assuming, you want to force the iperf3 tool to use MPTCP instead of TCP. To do so, enter the following command: 

    # stap -vg mptcp-app.stap iperf3
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  7. After the mptcp-app.stap script installs the kernel probe, the following warnings appear in the kernel dmesg output 

    # dmesg
...
[ 1752.694072] Kprobes globally unoptimized
[ 1752.730147] stap_1ade3b3356f3e68765322e26dec00c3d_1476: module_layout: kernel tainted.
[ 1752.732162] Disabling lock debugging due to kernel taint
[ 1752.733468] stap_1ade3b3356f3e68765322e26dec00c3d_1476: loading out-of-tree module taints kernel.
[ 1752.737219] stap_1ade3b3356f3e68765322e26dec00c3d_1476: module verification failed: signature and/or required key missing - tainting kernel
[ 1752.737219] stap_1ade3b3356f3e68765322e26dec00c3d_1476 (mptcp-app.stap): systemtap: 4.5/0.185, base: ffffffffc0550000, memory: 224data/32text/57ctx/65638net/367alloc kb, probes: 1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  8. Start the iperf3 server: 

    # iperf3 -s

Server listening on 5201
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  9. Connect the client to the server: 

    # iperf3 -c 127.0.0.1 -t 3
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  10. After the connection is established, verify the ss output to see the subflow-specific status: 

    # ss -nti '( dport :5201 )'

State Recv-Q Send-Q Local Address:Port Peer Address:Port Process
ESTAB 0      0      127.0.0.1:41842    127.0.0.1:5201
cubic wscale:7,7 rto:205 rtt:4.455/8.878 ato:40 mss:21888 pmtu:65535 rcvmss:536 advmss:65483 cwnd:10 bytes_sent:141 bytes_acked:142 bytes_received:4 segs_out:8 segs_in:7 data_segs_out:3 data_segs_in:3 send 393050505bps lastsnd:2813 lastrcv:2772 lastack:2772 pacing_rate 785946640bps delivery_rate 10944000000bps delivered:4 busy:41ms rcv_space:43690 rcv_ssthresh:43690 minrtt:0.008 tcp-ulp-mptcp flags:Mmec token:0000(id:0)/2ff053ec(id:0) seq:3e2cbea12d7673d4 sfseq:3 ssnoff:ad3d00f4 maplen:2
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  11. Verify MPTCP counters: 

    # nstat MPTcp*

#kernel
MPTcpExtMPCapableSYNRX          2                  0.0
MPTcpExtMPCapableSYNTX          2                  0.0
MPTcpExtMPCapableSYNACKRX       2                  0.0
MPTcpExtMPCapableACKRX          2                  0.0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Each MPTCP connection uses a single subflow similar to plain TCP. To get the MPTCP benefits, specify a higher limit for maximum number of subflows for each MPTCP connection. Then configure additional endpoints to create those subflows.

Important

The configuration in this procedure will not persist after rebooting your machine.

Note that MPTCP does not yet support mixed IPv6 and IPv4 endpoints for the same socket. Use endpoints belonging to the same address family.

Prerequisites

  • The iperf3 package is installed

  • Server network interface settings:

    • enp4s0: 192.0.2.1/24
    • enp1s0: 198.51.100.1/24

  • Client network interface settings:

    • enp4s0f0: 192.0.2.2/24
    • enp4s0f1: 198.51.100.2/24

Procedure

  1. Configure the client to accept up to 1 additional remote address, as provided by the server: 

    # ip mptcp limits set add_addr_accepted 1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Add IP address 198.51.100.1 as a new MPTCP endpoint on the server: 

    # ip mptcp endpoint add 198.51.100.1 dev enp1s0 signal
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The signal option ensures that the ADD_ADDR packet is sent after the three-way-handshake.

  3. Start the iperf3 server: 

    # iperf3 -s

Server listening on 5201
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Connect the client to the server: 

    # iperf3 -c 192.0.2.1 -t 3
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Verify the connection is established: 

    # ss -nti '( sport :5201 )'
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Verify the connection and IP address limit: 

    # ip mptcp limit show
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Verify the newly added endpoint: 

    # ip mptcp endpoint show
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Verify MPTCP counters by using the nstat MPTcp* command on a server: 

    # nstat MPTcp*

#kernel
MPTcpExtMPCapableSYNRX          2                  0.0
MPTcpExtMPCapableACKRX          2                  0.0
MPTcpExtMPJoinSynRx             2                  0.0
MPTcpExtMPJoinAckRx             2                  0.0
MPTcpExtEchoAdd                 2                  0.0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

34.4. Permanently configuring multiple paths for MPTCP applications
Link kopieren

You can configure MultiPath TCP (MPTCP) by using the nmcli command to permanently establish multiple subflows between a source and destination system.

The subflows can use different resources, different routes to the destination, and even different networks. Such as Ethernet, cellular, wifi, and so on. As a result, you achieve combined connections, which increase network resilience and throughput.

The server uses the following network interfaces in our example:

  • enp4s0: 192.0.2.1/24
  • enp1s0: 198.51.100.1/24
  • enp7s0: 192.0.2.3/24

The client uses the following network interfaces in our example:

  • enp4s0f0: 192.0.2.2/24
  • enp4s0f1: 198.51.100.2/24
  • enp6s0: 192.0.2.5/24

Prerequisites

  • You configured the default gateway on the relevant interfaces.

Procedure

  1. Enable MPTCP sockets in the kernel: 

    # echo "net.mptcp.enabled=1" > /etc/sysctl.d/90-enable-MPTCP.conf
# sysctl -p /etc/sysctl.d/90-enable-MPTCP.conf
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Optional: The RHEL kernel default for subflow limit is 2. If you require more:

    1. Create the /etc/systemd/system/set_mptcp_limit.service file with the following content: 

      [Unit]
Description=Set MPTCP subflow limit to 3
After=network.target

[Service]
ExecStart=ip mptcp limits set subflows 3
Type=oneshot

[Install]
WantedBy=multi-user.target
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The oneshot unit executes the ip mptcp limits set subflows 3 command after your network (network.target) is operational during every boot process.

      The ip mptcp limits set subflows 3 command sets the maximum number of additional subflows for each connection, so 4 in total. It is possible to add maximally 3 additional subflows.

    2. Enable the set_mptcp_limit service: 

      # systemctl enable --now set_mptcp_limit
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Enable MPTCP on all connection profiles that you want to use for connection aggregation: 

    # nmcli connection modify <profile_name> connection.mptcp-flags signal,subflow,also-without-default-route
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The connection.mptcp-flags parameter configures MPTCP endpoints and the IP address flags. If MPTCP is enabled in a NetworkManager connection profile, the setting will configure the IP addresses of the relevant network interface as MPTCP endpoints.

    By default, NetworkManager does not add MPTCP flags to IP addresses if there is no default gateway. If you want to bypass that check, you need to use the also-without-default-route flag.

Verification

  1. Verify that you enabled the MPTCP kernel parameter: 

    # sysctl net.mptcp.enabled
net.mptcp.enabled = 1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Verify that you set the subflow limit correctly, in case the default was not enough: 

    # ip mptcp limit show
add_addr_accepted 2 subflows 3
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Verify that you configured the per-address MPTCP setting correctly: 

    # ip mptcp endpoint show
192.0.2.1 id 1 subflow dev enp4s0
198.51.100.1 id 2 subflow dev enp1s0
192.0.2.3 id 3 subflow dev enp7s0
192.0.2.4 id 4 subflow dev enp3s0
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

34.5. Monitoring MPTCP sub-flows
Link kopieren

Monitoring MPTCP (Multipath TCP) subflows is crucial for optimizing performance, ensuring reliability, and maintaining control over multi-path network communication.

The life cycle of a multipath TCP (MPTCP) socket can be complex: The main MPTCP socket is created, the MPTCP path is validated, one or more sub-flows are created and eventually removed. Finally, the MPTCP socket is terminated.

The MPTCP protocol allows monitoring MPTCP-specific events related to socket and sub-flow creation and deletion, using the ip utility provided by the iproute package. This utility uses the netlink interface to monitor MPTCP events.

This procedure demonstrates how to monitor MPTCP events. For that, it simulates a MPTCP server application, and a client connects to this service. The involved clients in this example use the following interfaces and IP addresses:

  • Server: 192.0.2.1
  • Client (Ethernet connection): 192.0.2.2
  • Client (WiFi connection): 192.0.2.3

To simplify this example, all interfaces are within the same subnet. This is not a requirement. However, it is important that routing has been configured correctly, and the client can reach the server via both interfaces.

Prerequisites

  • A RHEL client with two network interfaces, such as a laptop with Ethernet and WiFi
  • The client can connect to the server via both interfaces
  • A RHEL server
  • Both the client and the server run RHEL 8.6 or later

Procedure

  1. Set the per connection additional subflow limits to 1 on both client and server: 

    # ip mptcp limits set add_addr_accepted 0 subflows 1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. On the server, to simulate a MPTCP server application, start netcat (nc) in listen mode with enforced MPTCP sockets instead of TCP sockets: 

    # nc -l -k -p 12345
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The -k option causes that nc does not close the listener after the first accepted connection. This is required to demonstrate the monitoring of sub-flows.

  3. On the client:

    1. Identify the interface with the lowest metric: 

      # ip -4 route
192.0.2.0/24 dev enp1s0 proto kernel scope link src 192.0.2.2 metric 100
192.0.2.0/24 dev wlp1s0 proto kernel scope link src 192.0.2.3 metric 600
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The enp1s0 interface has a lower metric than wlp1s0. Therefore, RHEL uses enp1s0 by default.

    2. On the first terminal, start the monitoring: 

      # ip mptcp monitor
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    3. On the second terminal, start a MPTCP connection to the server: 

      # nc 192.0.2.1 12345
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      RHEL uses the enp1s0 interface and its associated IP address as a source for this connection.

      On the monitoring terminal, the ip mptcp monitor command now logs: 

      [       CREATED] token=63c070d2 remid=0 locid=0 saddr4=192.0.2.2 daddr4=192.0.2.1 sport=36444 dport=12345
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The token identifies the MPTCP socket as an unique ID, and later it enables you to correlate MPTCP events on the same socket.

    4. On the terminal with the running nc connection to the server, press Enter. This first data packet fully establishes the connection. Note that, as long as no data has been sent, the connection is not established.

      On the monitoring terminal, ip mptcp monitor now logs: 

      [   ESTABLISHED] token=63c070d2 remid=0 locid=0 saddr4=192.0.2.2 daddr4=192.0.2.1 sport=36444 dport=12345
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    5. Optional: Display the connections to port 12345 on the server: 

      # ss -taunp | grep ":12345"
tcp ESTAB  0  0         192.0.2.2:36444 192.0.2.1:12345
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      At this point, only one connection to the server has been established.

    6. On a third terminal, create another endpoint: 

      # ip mptcp endpoint add dev wlp1s0 192.0.2.3 subflow
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      This command sets the name and IP address of the WiFi interface of the client in this command.

      On the monitoring terminal, ip mptcp monitor now logs: 

      [SF_ESTABLISHED] token=63c070d2 remid=0 locid=2 saddr4=192.0.2.3 daddr4=192.0.2.1 sport=53345 dport=12345 backup=0 ifindex=3
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The locid field displays the local address ID of the new sub-flow and identifies this sub-flow even if the connection uses network address translation (NAT). The saddr4 field matches the endpoint’s IP address from the ip mptcp endpoint add command.

    7. Optional: Display the connections to port 12345 on the server: 

      # ss -taunp | grep ":12345"
tcp ESTAB  0  0         192.0.2.2:36444 192.0.2.1:12345
tcp ESTAB  0  0  192.0.2.3%wlp1s0:53345 192.0.2.1:12345
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      The command now displays two connections:

      • The connection with source address 192.0.2.2 corresponds to the first MPTCP sub-flow that you established previously.
      • The connection from the sub-flow over the wlp1s0 interface with source address 192.0.2.3.

    8. On the third terminal, delete the endpoint: 

      # ip mptcp endpoint delete id 2
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      Use the ID from the locid field from the ip mptcp monitor output, or retrieve the endpoint ID using the ip mptcp endpoint show command.

      On the monitoring terminal, ip mptcp monitor now logs: 

      [     SF_CLOSED] token=63c070d2 remid=0 locid=2 saddr4=192.0.2.3 daddr4=192.0.2.1 sport=53345 dport=12345 backup=0 ifindex=3
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    9. On the first terminal with the nc client, press Ctrl+C to terminate the session.

      On the monitoring terminal, ip mptcp monitor now logs: 

      [        CLOSED] token=63c070d2
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

34.6. Disabling Multipath TCP in the kernel
Link kopieren

If you do not require MPTCP, you can explicitly disable the MPTCP option in the kernel.

Procedure

  • Disable the mptcp.enabled option. 

    # echo "net.mptcp.enabled=0" > /etc/sysctl.d/90-enable-MPTCP.conf
# sysctl -p /etc/sysctl.d/90-enable-MPTCP.conf
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Verify whether the mptcp.enabled is disabled in the kernel. 

    # sysctl -a | grep mptcp.enabled
net.mptcp.enabled = 0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 35. Legacy network scripts support in RHEL
Link kopieren

By default, RHEL uses NetworkManager to configure and manage network connections, and the /usr/sbin/ifup and /usr/sbin/ifdown scripts use NetworkManager to process ifcfg files in the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ directory.

Important

The legacy scripts are deprecated in RHEL 8 and will be removed in a future major version of RHEL. If you still use the legacy network scripts, for example, because you upgraded from an earlier version to RHEL 8, Red Hat recommends that you migrate your configuration to NetworkManager.

35.1. Installing the legacy network scripts
Link kopieren

If you require the deprecated network scripts that processes the network configuration without using NetworkManager, you can install them. In this case, the /usr/sbin/ifup and /usr/sbin/ifdown scripts link to the deprecated shell scripts that manage the network configuration.

Procedure

  • Install the network-scripts package: 

    # yum install network-scripts
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 36. Configuring ip networking with ifcfg files
Link kopieren

Interface configuration (ifcfg) files control the software interfaces for individual network devices. As the system boots, it uses these files to determine what interfaces to bring up and how to configure them. These files are named ifcfg-name_pass, where the suffix name refers to the name of the device that the configuration file controls. By convention, the ifcfg file’s suffix is the same as the string given by the DEVICE directive in the configuration file itself.

Important

NetworkManager supports profiles stored in the keyfile format. However, by default, NetworkManager uses the ifcfg format when you use the NetworkManager API to create or update profiles.

In a future major RHEL release, the keyfile format will be default. Consider using the keyfile format if you want to manually create and manage configuration files. For details, see NetworkManager connection profiles in keyfile format.

If you do not use the NetworkManager utilities and applications, you can manually configure a network interface by creating ifcfg files.

Procedure

  • To configure an interface with static network settings using ifcfg files, for an interface with the name enp1s0, create a file with the name ifcfg-enp1s0 in the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ directory that contains:

    • For IPv4 configuration: 

      DEVICE=enp1s0
BOOTPROTO=none
ONBOOT=yes
PREFIX=24
IPADDR=192.0.2.1
GATEWAY=192.0.2.254
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    • For IPv6 configuration: 

      DEVICE=enp1s0
BOOTPROTO=none
ONBOOT=yes
IPV6INIT=yes
IPV6ADDR=2001:db8:1::2/64
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

If you do not use the NetworkManager utilities and applications, you can manually configure a network interface by creating ifcfg files.

Procedure

  1. To configure an interface named em1 with dynamic network settings using ifcfg files, create a file with the name ifcfg-em1 in the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ directory that contains: 

    DEVICE=em1
BOOTPROTO=dhcp
ONBOOT=yes
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. To configure an interface to send:

    • A different host name to the DHCP server, add the following line to the ifcfg file: 

      DHCP_HOSTNAME=hostname
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    • A different fully qualified domain name (FQDN) to the DHCP server, add the following line to the ifcfg file: 

      DHCP_FQDN=fully.qualified.domain.name
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Note

    You can use only one of these settings. If you specify both DHCP_HOSTNAME and DHCP_FQDN, only DHCP_FQDN is used.

  3. To configure an interface to use particular DNS servers, add the following lines to the ifcfg file: 

    PEERDNS=no
DNS1=ip-address
DNS2=ip-address
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    where ip-address is the address of a DNS server. This will cause the network service to update /etc/resolv.conf with the specified DNS servers specified. Only one DNS server address is necessary, the other is optional.

By default, all users on a host can use the connections defined in ifcfg files. You can limit this behavior to specific users by adding the USERS parameter to the ifcfg file.

Prerequisites

  • The ifcfg file already exists.

Procedure

  1. Edit the ifcfg file in the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ directory that you want to limit to certain users, and add: 

    USERS="username1 username2 ..."
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Reactive the connection: 

    # nmcli connection up connection_name
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 37. NetworkManager connection profiles in keyfile format
Link kopieren

By default, NetworkManager stores connection profiles in ifcfg format, but you can also use profiles in keyfile format. Unlike the deprecated ifcfg format, the keyfile format supports all connection settings that NetworkManager provides.

In the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9, the keyfile format will be the default.

37.1. The keyfile format of NetworkManager profiles
Link kopieren

The keyfile format is an INI-like configuration for network connections.

For example, the following is an Ethernet connection profile in keyfile format: 

[connection]
id=example_connection
uuid=82c6272d-1ff7-4d56-9c7c-0eb27c300029
type=ethernet
autoconnect=true

[ipv4]
method=auto

[ipv6]
method=auto

[ethernet]
mac-address=00:53:00:8f:fa:66
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
Warning

Typos or incorrect placements of parameters can lead to unexpected behavior. Therefore, do not manually edit or create NetworkManager profiles.

Use the nmcli utility, the network RHEL system role, or the nmstate API to manage NetworkManager connections. For example, you can use the nmcli utility in offline mode to create connection profiles.

Each section corresponds to a NetworkManager setting name as described in the nm-settings(5) man page. Each key-value-pair in a section is one of the properties listed in the settings specification of the man page.

Most variables in NetworkManager keyfiles have a one-to-one mapping. This means that a NetworkManager property is stored in the keyfile as a variable of the same name and in the same format. However, there are exceptions, mainly to make the keyfile syntax easier to read. For a list of these exceptions, see the nm-settings-keyfile(5) man page on your system.

Important

For security reasons, because connection profiles can contain sensitive information, such as private keys and passphrases, NetworkManager uses only configuration files owned by the root user and that are only readable and writable by root.

Save the connection profile with a .nmconnection suffix in the /etc/NetworkManager/system-connections/ directory. This directrory contains persistent profiles. If you modify a persistent profile by using the NetworkManager API, NetworkManager writes and overwrites files in this directory.

NetworkManager does not automatically reload profiles from disk. When you create or update a connection profile in keyfile format, use the nmcli connection reload command to inform NetworkManager about the changes.

37.2. Using nmcli to create keyfile connection profiles in offline mode
Link kopieren

You can use the nmcli utility in offline mode to create and manage NetworkManager connection profiles. In this mode, nmcli operates without the NetworkManager service to produce keyfile connection profiles through standard output.

This feature can be useful in the following scenarios:

  • You want to create your connection profiles that need to be pre-deployed somewhere. For example in a container image, or as an RPM package.
  • You want to create your connection profiles in an environment where the NetworkManager service is not available, for example, when you want to use the chroot utility. Alternatively, when you want to create or modify the network configuration of the RHEL system to be installed through the Kickstart %post script.

Procedure

  1. Create a new connection profile in the keyfile format. For example, for a connection profile of an Ethernet device that does not use DHCP, run a similar nmcli command: 

    # nmcli --offline connection add type ethernet con-name Example-Connection ipv4.addresses 192.0.2.1/24 ipv4.dns 192.0.2.200 ipv4.method manual > /etc/NetworkManager/system-connections/example.nmconnection
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Note

    The connection name you specified with the con-name key is saved into the id variable of the generated profile. When you use the nmcli command to manage this connection later, specify the connection as follows:

    • When the id variable is not omitted, use the connection name, for example Example-Connection.
    • When the id variable is omitted, use the file name without the .nmconnection suffix, for example output.

  2. Set permissions to the configuration file so that only the root user can read and update it: 

    # chmod 600 /etc/NetworkManager/system-connections/example.nmconnection
# chown root:root /etc/NetworkManager/system-connections/example.nmconnection
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Start the NetworkManager service: 

    # systemctl start NetworkManager.service
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. If you set the autoconnect variable in the profile to false, activate the connection: 

    # nmcli connection up Example-Connection
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Verify that the NetworkManager service is running: 

    # systemctl status NetworkManager.service
● NetworkManager.service - Network Manager
   Loaded: loaded (/usr/lib/systemd/system/NetworkManager.service; enabled; vendor preset: enabled)
   Active: active (running) since Wed 2022-08-03 13:08:32 CEST; 1min 40s ago
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Verify that NetworkManager can read the profile from the configuration file: 

    # nmcli -f TYPE,FILENAME,NAME connection
TYPE      FILENAME                                                     NAME
ethernet /etc/NetworkManager/system-connections/examaple.nmconnection Example-Connection
ethernet  /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-enp1s0                  enp1s0
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If the output does not show the newly created connection, verify that the keyfile permissions and the syntax you used are correct.

  3. Display the connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection show Example-Connection
connection.id:                          Example-Connection
connection.uuid:                        232290ce-5225-422a-9228-cb83b22056b4
connection.stable-id:                   --
connection.type:                        802-3-ethernet
connection.interface-name:              --
connection.autoconnect:                 yes
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

37.3. Manually creating a NetworkManager profile in keyfile format
Link kopieren

You can manually create a NetworkManager connection profile in keyfile format. For example, this can be required if an external application generates the profiles.

Warning

Manually creating or updating the configuration files can result in an unexpected or non-functional network configuration. As an alternative, you can use nmcli in offline mode. See Using nmcli to create keyfile connection profiles in offline mode

Procedure

  1. Create a connection profile. For example, for a connection profile for the enp1s0 Ethernet device that uses DHCP, create the /etc/NetworkManager/system-connections/example.nmconnection file with the following content: 

    [connection]
id=Example-Connection
type=ethernet
autoconnect=true
interface-name=enp1s0

[ipv4]
method=auto

[ipv6]
method=auto
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Note

    You can use any file name with a .nmconnection suffix. However, when you later use nmcli commands to manage the connection, you must use the connection name set in the id variable when you refer to this connection. When you omit the id variable, use the file name without the .nmconnection to refer to this connection.

  2. Set permissions on the configuration file so that only the root user can read and update it: 

    # chown root:root /etc/NetworkManager/system-connections/example.nmconnection
# chmod 600 /etc/NetworkManager/system-connections/example.nmconnection
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Reload the connection profiles: 

    # nmcli connection reload
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Verify that NetworkManager read the profile from the configuration file: 

    # nmcli -f NAME,UUID,FILENAME connection
NAME                UUID                                  FILENAME
Example-Connection  86da2486-068d-4d05-9ac7-957ec118afba  /etc/NetworkManager/system-connections/example.nmconnection
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If the command does not show the newly added connection, verify that the file permissions and the syntax you used in the file are correct.

  5. If you set the autoconnect variable in the profile to false, activate the connection: 

    # nmcli connection up example_connection
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Display the connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection show example_connection
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

You can define custom network interface names, such as lan to make interface names more descriptive. In this case, the udev service renames the interfaces. The renaming process works differently depending on whether you use connection profiles in ifcfg or keyfile format.

The interface renaming process when using a profile in ifcfg format
  1. The udev rule file /usr/lib/udev/rules.d/60-net.rules calls the /lib/udev/rename_device helper utility.
  2. The helper utility searches for the HWADDR parameter in /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-* files.
  3. If the value set in the variable matches the MAC address of an interface, the helper utility renames the interface to the name set in the DEVICE parameter of the file.
The interface renaming process when using a profile in keyfile format
  1. Create a systemd link file or a udev rule to rename an interface.
  2. Use the custom interface name in the interface-name property of a NetworkManager connection profile.

37.5. Migrating NetworkManager profiles from ifcfg to keyfile format
Link kopieren

If you use connection profiles in ifcfg format, you can convert them to the keyfile format to have all profiles in the preferred format and in one location.

Note

If an ifcfg file contains the NM_CONTROLLED=no setting, NetworkManager does not control this profile and, consequently the migration process ignores it.

Prerequisites

  • You have connection profiles in ifcfg format in the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ directory.
  • If the connection profiles contain a DEVICE variable that is set to a custom device name, such as provider or lan, you created a systemd link file or a udev rule for each of the custom device names.

Procedure

  • Migrate the connection profiles: 

    # nmcli connection migrate
Connection 'enp1s0' (43ed18ab-f0c4-4934-af3d-2b3333948e45) successfully migrated.
Connection 'enp2s0' (883333e8-1b87-4947-8ceb-1f8812a80a9b) successfully migrated.
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Optionally, you can verify that you successfully migrated all your connection profiles: 

    # nmcli -f TYPE,FILENAME,NAME connection
TYPE      FILENAME                                                           NAME
ethernet  /etc/NetworkManager/system-connections/enp1s0.nmconnection         enp1s0
ethernet  /etc/NetworkManager/system-connections/enp2s0.nmconnection         enp2s0
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 38. Systemd network targets and services
Link kopieren

RHEL uses the network and network-online targets and the NetworkManager-wait-online service while applying network settings. Configure systemd services to start after the network is fully available if those services cannot react dynamically to a change in the network state.

38.1. Differences between the network and network-online systemd target
Link kopieren

The network target indicates that the network management stack has been started, and the network-online target is to actively wait until the network is up and a usable network connection is available.

Systemd maintains the network and network-online target units. The special units such as NetworkManager-wait-online.service, have WantedBy=network-online.target and Before=network-online.target parameters. If enabled, these units get started with network-online.target and delay the target to be reached until some form of network connectivity is established. They delay the network-online target until the network is connected.

The network-online target starts a service, which adds substantial delays to further execution. Systemd automatically adds dependencies with Wants and After parameters for this target unit to all the System V (SysV) init script service units with a Linux Standard Base (LSB) header referring to the $network facility. The LSB header is metadata for init scripts. You can use it to specify dependencies. This is similar to the systemd target.

The network target does not significantly delay the execution of the boot process. Reaching the network target means that the service that is responsible for setting up the network has started. However, it does not mean that a network device was configured. This target is important during the shutdown of the system. For example, if you have a service that was ordered after the network target during bootup, then this dependency is reversed during the shutdown. The network does not get disconnected until your service has been stopped. All mount units for remote network file systems automatically start the network-online target unit and order themselves after it.

Note

The network-online target unit is only useful during the system startup. After the system has completed booting up, this target does not track the online state of the network. Therefore, you cannot use network-online to monitor the network connection. This target provides a one-time system startup concept.

38.2. Overview of NetworkManager-wait-online
Link kopieren

The NetworkManager-wait-online service delays reaching the network-online target until NetworkManager reports that the startup is complete.

During boot, NetworkManager activates all profiles with the connection.autoconnect parameter set to yes. However, the activation of profiles is not complete as long as NetworkManager profiles are in an activating state. If activation fails, NetworkManager retries the activation depending on the value of the connection.autoconnect-retries.

When a device reaches the activated state depends on its configuration. For example, if a profiles contains both IPv4 and IPv6 configuration, by default, NetworkManager considers the device as fully activated when only one of the Address families is ready. The ipv4.may-fail and ipv6.may-fail parameters in a connection profile control this behavior.

For Ethernet devices, NetworkManager waits for the carrier with a timeout. Consequently, if the Ethernet cable is not connected, this can further delay NetworkManager-wait-online.service.

When the startup completes, either all profiles are in a disconnected state or are successfully activated. You can configure profiles to auto-connect. The following are a few examples of parameters that set timeouts or define when the connection is considered active:

  • connection.wait-device-timeout: Sets the timeout for the driver to detect the device.
  • ipv4.may-fail and ipv6.may-fail: Sets activation with one IP address family ready, or whether a particular address family must have completed configuration.
  • ipv4.gateway-ping-timeout: Delays network activation until NetworkManager receives a ping response from the IPv4 gateway. The system waits up to the specified number of seconds before proceeding.

RHEL installs systemd service files in the /usr/lib/systemd/system/ directory. You can create a drop-in snippet in /etc/systemd/system/<service_name>.service.d/ to start a service after the network is online.

This snippet’s settings override any conflicting settings in the original service file.

Procedure

  1. Open a service file in the editor: 

    # systemctl edit <service_name>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Enter the following, and save the changes: 

    [Unit]
After=network-online.target
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Reload the systemd service. 

    # systemctl daemon-reload
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 39. Introduction to Nmstate
Link kopieren

Nmstate is a declarative network manager API. When you use Nmstate, you describe the expected networking state by using YAML or JSON-formatted instructions.

Nmstate has many benefits. For example, it:

  • Provides a stable and extensible interface to manage RHEL network capabilities
  • Supports atomic and transactional operations at the host and cluster level
  • Supports partial editing of most properties and preserves existing settings that are not specified in the instructions
  • Provides plug-in support to enable administrators to use their own plug-ins

Nmstate consists of the following packages:

Expand
PackagesContents

nmstate

The nmstatectl command-line utility

python3-libnmstate

The libnmstate Python library

nmstate-libs

The Nmstate C library

nmstate-devel

The Nmstate C library headers

39.1. Using the libnmstate library in a Python application
Link kopieren

The libnmstate Python library enables developers to use Nmstate in their own application.

To use the library, import it in your source code: 

import libnmstate
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Note that you must install the nmstate and python3-libnmstate packages to use this library.

Example 39.1. Querying the network state by using the libnmstate library

The following Python code imports the libnmstate library and displays the available network interfaces and their state: 

import libnmstate
from libnmstate.schema import Interface

net_state = libnmstate.show()
for iface_state in net_state[Interface.KEY]:
    print(iface_state[Interface.NAME] + ": "
          + iface_state[Interface.STATE])
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

39.2. Updating the current network configuration by using nmstatectl
Link kopieren

You can use the nmstatectl utility to store the current network configuration of one or all interfaces in a file.

You can then use this file to:

  • Modify the configuration and apply it to the same system.
  • Copy the file to a different host and configure the host with the same or modified settings.

For example, you can export the settings of the enp1s0 interface to a file, modify the configuration, and apply the settings to the host.

Prerequisites

  • The nmstate package is installed.

Procedure

  1. Export the settings of the enp1s0 interface to the ~/network-config.yml file: 

    # nmstatectl show enp1s0 > ~/network-config.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This command stores the configuration of enp1s0 in YAML format. To store the output in JSON format, pass the --json option to the command.

    If you do not specify an interface name, nmstatectl exports the configuration of all interfaces.

  2. Modify the ~/network-config.yml file using a text editor to update the configuration.

  3. Apply the settings from the ~/network-config.yml file: 

    # nmstatectl apply ~/network-config.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If you exported the settings in JSON format, pass the --json option to the command.

39.3. Network states for the network RHEL system role
Link kopieren

The network RHEL system role supports state configurations in playbooks to configure the devices. For this, use the network_state variable followed by the state configurations.

Benefits of using the network_state variable in a playbook:

  • Using the declarative method with the state configurations, you can configure interfaces, and the NetworkManager creates a profile for these interfaces in the background.
  • With the network_state variable, you can specify the options that you require to change, and all the other options will remain the same as they are. However, with the network_connections variable, you must specify all settings to change the network connection profile.
Important

You can set only Nmstate YAML instructions in network_state. These instructions differ from the variables you can set in network_connections.

For example, to create an Ethernet connection with dynamic IP address settings, use the following vars block in your playbook:

Expand

Playbook with state configurations

Regular playbook 

vars:
  network_state:
    interfaces:
    - name: enp7s0
      type: ethernet
      state: up
      ipv4:
        enabled: true
        auto-dns: true
        auto-gateway: true
        auto-routes: true
        dhcp: true
      ipv6:
        enabled: true
        auto-dns: true
        auto-gateway: true
        auto-routes: true
        autoconf: true
        dhcp: true
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap 
vars:
  network_connections:
    - name: enp7s0
      interface_name: enp7s0
      type: ethernet
      autoconnect: yes
      ip:
        dhcp4: yes
        auto6: yes
      state: up
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

For example, to only change the connection status of dynamic IP address settings that you created as above, use the following vars block in your playbook:

Expand

Playbook with state configurations

Regular playbook 

vars:
  network_state:
    interfaces:
    - name: enp7s0
      type: ethernet
      state: down
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap 
vars:
  network_connections:
    - name: enp7s0
      interface_name: enp7s0
      type: ethernet
      autoconnect: yes
      ip:
        dhcp4: yes
        auto6: yes
      state: down
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 40. Using and configuring firewalld
Link kopieren

A firewall is a way to protect machines from any unwanted traffic from outside. It enables users to control incoming network traffic on host machines by defining a set of firewall rules. These rules are used to sort the incoming traffic and either block it or allow it through.

firewalld is a firewall service daemon that provides a dynamic, customizable firewall with a D-Bus interface. Being dynamic, it enables creating, changing, and deleting rules without the necessity of restarting the firewall daemon each time the rules are changed.

You can use firewalld to configure packet filtering required by the majority of typical cases. If firewalld does not cover your scenario, or you want to have complete control of rules, use the nftables framework.

firewalld uses the concepts of zones, policies, and services to simplify traffic management. Zones logically separate a network. Network interfaces and sources can be assigned to a zone. Policies are used to deny or allow traffic flowing between zones. Firewall services are predefined rules that cover all necessary settings to allow incoming traffic for a specific service, and they apply within a zone.

Services use one or more ports or addresses for network communication. Firewalls filter communication based on ports. To allow network traffic for a service, its ports must be open. firewalld blocks all traffic on ports that are not explicitly set as open. Some zones, such as trusted, allow all traffic by default.

firewalld maintains separate runtime and permanent configurations. This allows runtime-only changes. The runtime configuration does not persist after firewalld reload or restart. At startup, it is populated from the permanent configuration.

Note that firewalld with nftables back end does not support passing custom nftables rules to firewalld, using the --direct option.

40.1. When to use firewalld, nftables, or iptables
Link kopieren

On RHEL 8, you can use the following packet-filtering utilities depending on your scenario:

  • firewalld: The firewalld utility simplifies firewall configuration for common use cases.
  • nftables: Use the nftables utility to set up complex and performance-critical firewalls, such as for a whole network.
  • iptables: The iptables utility on Red Hat Enterprise Linux uses the nf_tables kernel API instead of the legacy back end. The nf_tables API provides backward compatibility so that scripts that use iptables commands still work on Red Hat Enterprise Linux. For new firewall scripts, use nftables.
Important

To prevent the different firewall-related services (firewalld, nftables, or iptables) from influencing each other, run only one of them on a RHEL host, and disable the other services.

40.2. Firewall zones
Link kopieren

You can use the ⁠firewalld utility to separate networks into different zones according to the level of trust that you have with the interfaces and traffic within that network. A connection can only be part of one zone, but you can use that zone for many network connections.

firewalld follows strict principles in regards to zones:

  1. Traffic ingresses only one zone.
  2. Traffic egresses only one zone.
  3. A zone defines a level of trust.
  4. Intrazone traffic (within the same zone) is allowed by default.
  5. Interzone traffic (from zone to zone) is denied by default.

Principles 4 and 5 are a consequence of principle 3.

Principle 4 is configurable through the zone option --remove-forward. Principle 5 is configurable by adding new policies.

NetworkManager notifies firewalld of the zone of an interface. You can assign zones to interfaces with the following utilities:

  • NetworkManager
  • firewall-config utility
  • firewall-cmd utility
  • The RHEL web console

The RHEL web console, firewall-config, and firewall-cmd can only edit the appropriate NetworkManager configuration files. If you change the zone of the interface using the web console, firewall-cmd, or firewall-config, the request is forwarded to NetworkManager and is not handled by ⁠firewalld.

The /usr/lib/firewalld/zones/ directory stores the predefined zones, and you can instantly apply them to any available network interface. These files are copied to the /etc/firewalld/zones/ directory only after they are modified. The default settings of the predefined zones are as follows:

block
  • Suitable for: Any incoming network connections are rejected with an icmp-host-prohibited message for IPv4 and icmp6-adm-prohibited for IPv6.
  • Accepts: Only network connections initiated from within the system.
dmz
  • Suitable for: Computers in your DMZ that are publicly-accessible with limited access to your internal network.
  • Accepts: Only selected incoming connections.
drop

Suitable for: Any incoming network packets are dropped without any notification.

  • Accepts: Only outgoing network connections.
external
  • Suitable for: External networks with masquerading enabled, especially for routers. Situations when you do not trust the other computers on the network.
  • Accepts: Only selected incoming connections.
home
  • Suitable for: Home environment where you mostly trust the other computers on the network.
  • Accepts: Only selected incoming connections.
internal
  • Suitable for: Internal networks where you mostly trust the other computers on the network.
  • Accepts: Only selected incoming connections.
public
  • Suitable for: Public areas where you do not trust other computers on the network.
  • Accepts: Only selected incoming connections.
trusted
  • Accepts: All network connections.
work

Suitable for: Work environment where you mostly trust the other computers on the network.

  • Accepts: Only selected incoming connections.

One of these zones is set as the default zone. When interface connections are added to NetworkManager, they are assigned to the default zone. On installation, the default zone in firewalld is the public zone. You can change the default zone.

Note

Make network zone names self-explanatory to help users understand them quickly.

To avoid any security problems, review the default zone configuration and disable any unnecessary services according to your needs and risk assessments.

40.3. Firewall policies
Link kopieren

The firewall policies specify the desired security state of your network. They outline rules and actions to take for different types of traffic.

Typically, the policies contain rules for the following types of traffic:

  • Incoming traffic
  • Outgoing traffic
  • Forward traffic
  • Specific services and applications
  • Network address translations (NAT)

Firewall policies use the concept of firewall zones. Each zone is associated with a specific set of firewall rules that determine the traffic allowed. Policies apply firewall rules in a stateful, unidirectional manner. This means you only consider one direction of the traffic. The traffic return path is implicitly allowed due to stateful filtering of firewalld.

Policies are associated with an ingress zone and an egress zone. The ingress zone is where the traffic originated (received). The egress zone is where the traffic leaves (sent).

The firewall rules defined in a policy can reference the firewall zones to apply consistent configurations across multiple network interfaces.

40.4. Firewall rules
Link kopieren

You can use the firewall rules to implement specific configurations for allowing or blocking network traffic. As a result, you can control the flow of network traffic to protect your system from security threats.

Firewall rules typically define certain criteria based on various attributes. The attributes can be as:

  • Source IP addresses
  • Destination IP addresses
  • Transfer Protocols (TCP, UDP, …​)
  • Ports
  • Network interfaces

The firewalld utility organizes the firewall rules into zones (such as public, internal, and others) and policies. Each zone has its own set of rules that determine the level of traffic freedom for network interfaces associated with a particular zone.

40.5. Firewall direct rules
Link kopieren

The firewalld service provides multiple ways with which to configure rules, including regular rules and direct rules.

One difference between these is how each method interacts with the underlying backend (iptables or nftables).

The direct rules are advanced, low-level rules that allow direct interaction with iptables. They bypass the structured zone-based management of firewalld to give you more control. You manually define the direct rules with the firewall-cmd command by using the raw iptables syntax. For example, firewall-cmd --direct --add-rule ipv4 filter INPUT 0 -s 198.51.100.1 -j DROP. This command adds an iptables rule to drop traffic from the 198.51.100.1 source IP address.

However, using the direct rules also has its drawbacks. Especially when nftables is your primary firewall backend. For example:

  • The direct rules are harder to maintain and can conflict with nftables based firewalld configurations.
  • The direct rules do not support advanced features that you can find in nftables such as raw expressions and stateful objects.
  • Direct rules are not future-proof. The iptables component is deprecated and will eventually be removed from RHEL.

For the previous reasons, you might consider replacing firewalld direct rules with nftables. Review the knowledgebase solution How to replace firewalld direct rules with nftables? to see more details.

40.6. Predefined firewalld services
Link kopieren

Predefined firewalld services offer an abstraction layer for low-level firewall rules. They map common network services, such as SSH or HTTP, to their specific ports and protocols, simplifying firewall management and reducing errors by using a named service instead of manual configuration.

  • To see available predefined services: 

    # firewall-cmd --get-services
RH-Satellite-6 RH-Satellite-6-capsule afp amanda-client amanda-k5-client amqp amqps apcupsd audit ausweisapp2 bacula bacula-client bareos-director bareos-filedaemon bareos-storage bb bgp bitcoin bitcoin-rpc bitcoin-testnet bitcoin-testnet-rpc bittorrent-lsd ceph ceph-exporter ceph-mon cfengine checkmk-agent cockpit collectd condor-collector cratedb ctdb dds...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  • To further inspect a particular predefined service: 

    # sudo firewall-cmd --info-service=RH-Satellite-6
RH-Satellite-6
  ports: 5000/tcp 5646-5647/tcp 5671/tcp 8000/tcp 8080/tcp 9090/tcp
  protocols:
  source-ports:
  modules:
  destination:
  includes: foreman
  helpers:
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The example output shows that the RH-Satellite-6 predefined service listens on ports 5000/tcp 5646-5647/tcp 5671/tcp 8000/tcp 8080/tcp 9090/tcp. Additionally, RH-Satellite-6 inherits rules from another predefined service. In this case foreman.

Each predefined service is stored as an XML file with the same name in the /usr/lib/firewalld/services/ directory.

40.7. Working with firewalld zones
Link kopieren

Zones represent a concept to manage incoming traffic more transparently. Network interfaces and source addresses are assigned to zones. You manage firewall rules for each zone independently, which enables you to define complex firewall settings and apply them to the traffic.

To strengthen network security, modify the firewalld settings by associating a specific network interface or connection with a particular firewall zone. By defining granular rules for a zone, you can control inbound and outbound traffic according to your security needs.

For example, you can achieve the following benefits:

  • Protection of sensitive data
  • Prevention of unauthorized access
  • Mitigation of potential network threats

Prerequisites

  • The firewalld service is running.

Procedure

  1. List the available firewall zones: 

    # firewall-cmd --get-zones
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The firewall-cmd --get-zones command displays all zones that are available on the system, but it does not show any details for particular zones. To see more detailed information for all zones, use the firewall-cmd --list-all-zones command.

  2. Choose the zone you want to use for this configuration.

  3. Modify firewall settings for the chosen zone. For example, to allow the SSH service and remove the ftp service: 

    # firewall-cmd --add-service=ssh --zone=<your_chosen_zone>
# firewall-cmd --remove-service=ftp --zone=<same_chosen_zone>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Assign a network interface to the firewall zone:

    1. List the available network interfaces: 

      # firewall-cmd --get-active-zones
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      Activity of a zone is determined by the presence of network interfaces or source address ranges that match its configuration. The default zone is active for unclassified traffic but is not always active if no traffic matches its rules.

    2. Assign a network interface to the chosen zone: 

      # firewall-cmd --zone=<your_chosen_zone> --change-interface=<interface_name> --permanent
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      Assigning a network interface to a zone is more suitable for applying consistent firewall settings to all traffic on a particular interface (physical or virtual).

      The firewall-cmd command, when used with the --permanent option, often involves updating NetworkManager connection profiles to make changes to the firewall configuration permanent. This integration between firewalld and NetworkManager ensures consistent network and firewall settings.

Verification

  1. Display the updated settings for your chosen zone: 

    # firewall-cmd --zone=<your_chosen_zone> --list-all
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The command output displays all zone settings including the assigned services, network interface, and network connections (sources).

40.7.2. Changing the default zone
Link kopieren

If an interface is not assigned to a specific zone, it is assigned to the default zone. After each restart of the firewalld service, firewalld loads the settings for the default zone and makes it active. Settings for all other zones are preserved and ready to be used.

Typically, zones are assigned to interfaces by NetworkManager according to the connection.zone setting in NetworkManager connection profiles. Also, after a reboot NetworkManager manages assignments for "activating" those zones.

Prerequisites

  • The firewalld service is running.

Procedure

To set up the default zone:

  1. Display the current default zone: 

    # firewall-cmd --get-default-zone
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Set the new default zone: 

    # firewall-cmd --set-default-zone <zone_name>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Note

    Following this procedure, the setting is a permanent setting, even without the --permanent option.

40.7.3. Assigning a network interface to a zone
Link kopieren

It is possible to define different sets of rules for different zones and then change the settings quickly by changing the zone for the interface that is being used. With multiple interfaces, a specific zone can be set for each of them to distinguish traffic that is coming through them.

Procedure

To assign the zone to a specific interface:

  1. List the active zones and the interfaces assigned to them: 

    # firewall-cmd --get-active-zones
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Assign the interface to a different zone: 

    # firewall-cmd --zone=zone_name --change-interface=interface_name --permanent
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

40.7.4. Adding a source
Link kopieren

To route incoming traffic into a specific zone, add the source to that zone. The source can be an IP address or an IP mask in the classless inter-domain routing (CIDR) notation.

Note

In case you add multiple zones with an overlapping network range, they are ordered alphanumerically by zone name and only the first one is considered.

  • To set the source in the current zone: 

    # firewall-cmd --add-source=<source>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  • To set the source IP address for a specific zone: 

    # firewall-cmd --zone=zone-name --add-source=<source>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

The following procedure allows all incoming traffic from 192.168.2.15 in the trusted zone:

Procedure

  1. List all available zones: 

    # firewall-cmd --get-zones
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Add the source IP to the trusted zone in the permanent mode: 

    # firewall-cmd --zone=trusted --add-source=192.168.2.15
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Make the new settings persistent: 

    # firewall-cmd --runtime-to-permanent
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

40.7.5. Removing a source
Link kopieren

When you remove a source from a firewalld zone, its traffic is no longer directed by that source’s rules. Instead, it falls back to the rules of the interface’s zone or the default zone.

Procedure

  1. List allowed sources for the required zone: 

    # firewall-cmd --zone=zone-name --list-sources
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Remove the source from the zone permanently: 

    # firewall-cmd --zone=zone-name --remove-source=<source>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Make the new settings persistent: 

    # firewall-cmd --runtime-to-permanent
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

40.7.6. Assigning a zone to a connection by using nmcli
Link kopieren

You can add a firewalld zone to a NetworkManager connection using the nmcli utility.

Procedure

  1. Assign the zone to the NetworkManager connection profile: 

    # nmcli connection modify profile connection.zone zone_name
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Activate the connection: 

    # nmcli connection up profile
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

When the connection is managed by NetworkManager, it must be aware of a zone that it uses. For every network connection profile, a zone can be specified, which provides the flexibility of various firewall settings according to the location of the computer with portable devices. Thus, zones and settings can be specified for different locations, such as company or home.

Procedure

  • To set a zone for a connection, edit the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-connection_name file and add a line that assigns a zone to this connection: 

    ZONE=zone_name
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

40.7.8. Creating a new zone
Link kopieren

To use custom zones, create a new zone and use it just like a predefined zone. New zones require the --permanent option, otherwise the command does not work.

Prerequisites

  • The firewalld service is running.

Procedure

  1. Create a new zone: 

    # firewall-cmd --permanent --new-zone=zone-name
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Make the new zone usable: 

    # firewall-cmd --reload
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The command applies recent changes to the firewall configuration without interrupting network services that are already running.

Verification

  • Check if the new zone is added to your permanent settings: 

    # firewall-cmd --get-zones --permanent
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

40.7.9. Enabling zones by using the web console
Link kopieren

You can apply predefined and existing firewall zones on a particular interface or a range of IP addresses through the RHEL web console.

Prerequisites

  • You have installed the RHEL 8 web console.
  • You have enabled the cockpit service.

  • Your user account is allowed to log in to the web console.

    For instructions, see Installing and enabling the web console.

  • You enabled administrative access in the web console.
  • The firewalld service is running.

Procedure

  1. Log in to the RHEL 8 web console.

    For details, see Logging in to the web console.

  2. Click Networking.

  3. Click the Edit rules and zones button.

    Edit firewall rules and zones in the web console
    View larger image
    Edit firewall rules and zones in the web console

    If you do not see the Edit rules and zones button, log in to the web console with the administrator privileges.

  4. In the Firewall section, click Add new zone.

  5. In the Add zone dialog box, select a zone from the Trust level options.

    The web console displays all zones predefined in the firewalld service.

  6. In the Interfaces part, select an interface or interfaces to which you want to apply the selected zone.

  7. In the Allowed Addresses part, you can select whether the zone is applied to:

    • the whole subnet

    • a range of IP addresses in the following format:

      • 192.168.1.0
      • 192.168.1.0/24
      • 192.168.1.0/24, 192.168.1.0

  8. Click the Add zone button.

    Add a firewall zone
    View larger image
    Add a firewall zone

Verification

40.7.10. Disabling zones by using the web console
Link kopieren

You can remove a firewall zone from your firewall configuration by using the web console.

Prerequisites

  • You have installed the RHEL 8 web console.
  • You have enabled the cockpit service.

  • Your user account is allowed to log in to the web console.

    For instructions, see Installing and enabling the web console.

  • You enabled administrative access in the web console.
  • The firewalld service is running.

Procedure

  1. Log in to the RHEL 8 web console.

    For details, see Logging in to the web console.

  2. Click Networking.

  3. Click the Edit rules and zones button.

    cockpit edit rules and zones
    View larger image
    cockpit edit rules and zones

    If you do not see the Edit rules and zones button, log in to the web console with the administrator privileges.

  4. Click the Options icon at the zone you want to remove.

    cockpit delete zone
    View larger image
    cockpit delete zone
  5. Click Delete.

For every zone, you can set a default behavior that handles incoming traffic that is not further specified. Such behavior is defined by setting the target of the zone.

  • ACCEPT: Accepts all incoming packets except those disallowed by specific rules.
  • REJECT: Rejects all incoming packets except those allowed by specific rules. When firewalld rejects packets, the source machine is informed about the rejection.
  • DROP: Drops all incoming packets except those allowed by specific rules. When firewalld drops packets, the source machine is not informed about the packet drop.
  • default: Similar behavior as for REJECT, but with special meanings in certain scenarios.

Prerequisites

  • The firewalld service is running.

Procedure

To set a target for a zone:

  1. List the information for the specific zone to see the default target: 

    # firewall-cmd --zone=zone-name --list-all
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Set a new target in the zone: 

    # firewall-cmd --permanent --zone=zone-name --set-target=<default|ACCEPT|REJECT|DROP>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

40.7.12. Configuring dynamic updates for allowlisting with IP sets
Link kopieren

You can make near real-time updates to flexibly allow specific IP addresses or ranges in the IP sets even in unpredictable conditions.

These updates can be triggered by various events, such as detection of security threats or changes in the network behavior. Typically, such a solution leverages automation to reduce manual effort and improve security by responding quickly to the situation.

Prerequisites

  • The firewalld service is running.

Procedure

  1. Create an IP set with a meaningful name: 

    # firewall-cmd --permanent --new-ipset=allowlist --type=hash:ip
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The new IP set called allowlist contains IP addresses that you want your firewall to allow.

  2. Add a dynamic update to the IP set: 

    # firewall-cmd --permanent --ipset=allowlist --add-entry=198.51.100.10
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This configuration updates the allowlist IP set with a newly added IP address that is allowed to pass network traffic by your firewall.

  3. Create a firewall rule that references the previously created IP set: 

    # firewall-cmd --permanent --zone=public --add-source=ipset:allowlist
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Without this rule, the IP set would not have any impact on network traffic. The default firewall policy would prevail.

  4. Reload the firewall configuration to apply the changes: 

    # firewall-cmd --reload
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. List all IP sets: 

    # firewall-cmd --get-ipsets
allowlist
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. List the active rules: 

    # firewall-cmd --list-all
public (active)
  target: default
  icmp-block-inversion: no
  interfaces: enp0s1
  sources: ipset:allowlist
  services: cockpit dhcpv6-client ssh
  ports:
  protocols:
  ...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The sources section of the command-line output provides insights to what origins of traffic (hostnames, interfaces, IP sets, subnets, and others) are permitted or denied access to a particular firewall zone. In this case, the IP addresses contained in the allowlist IP set are allowed to pass traffic through the firewall for the public zone.

  3. Explore the contents of your IP set: 

    # cat /etc/firewalld/ipsets/allowlist.xml
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
<ipset type="hash:ip">
  <entry>198.51.100.10</entry>
</ipset>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Next steps

  • Use a script or a security utility to fetch your threat intelligence feeds and update allowlist accordingly in an automated fashion.

40.8. Controlling network traffic using firewalld
Link kopieren

The firewalld package installs a large number of predefined service files and you can add more or customize them. You can then use these service definitions to open or close ports for services without knowing the protocol and port numbers they use.

40.8.1. Controlling traffic with predefined services using the CLI
Link kopieren

The most straightforward method to control traffic is to add a predefined service to firewalld. This opens all necessary ports and modifies other settings according to the service definition file.

Prerequisites

  • The firewalld service is running.

Procedure

  1. Check that the service in firewalld is not already allowed: 

    # firewall-cmd --list-services
ssh dhcpv6-client
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The command lists the services that are enabled in the default zone.

  2. List all predefined services in firewalld: 

    # firewall-cmd --get-services
RH-Satellite-6 amanda-client amanda-k5-client bacula bacula-client bitcoin bitcoin-rpc bitcoin-testnet bitcoin-testnet-rpc ceph ceph-mon cfengine condor-collector ctdb dhcp dhcpv6 dhcpv6-client dns docker-registry ...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The command displays a list of available services for the default zone.

  3. Add the service to the list of services that firewalld allows: 

    # firewall-cmd --add-service=<service_name>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The command adds the specified service to the default zone.

  4. Make the new settings persistent: 

    # firewall-cmd --runtime-to-permanent
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The command applies these runtime changes to the permanent configuration of the firewall. By default, it applies these changes to the configuration of the default zone.

Verification

  1. List all permanent firewall rules: 

    # firewall-cmd --list-all --permanent
public
  target: default
  icmp-block-inversion: no
  interfaces:
  sources:
  services: cockpit dhcpv6-client ssh
  ports:
  protocols:
  forward: no
  masquerade: no
  forward-ports:
  source-ports:
  icmp-blocks:
  rich rules:
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The command displays complete configuration with the permanent firewall rules of the default firewall zone (public).

  2. Check the validity of the permanent configuration of the firewalld service. 

    # firewall-cmd --check-config
success
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If the permanent configuration is invalid, the command returns an error with further details: 

    # firewall-cmd --check-config
Error: INVALID_PROTOCOL: 'public.xml': 'tcpx' not from {'tcp'|'udp'|'sctp'|'dccp'}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    You can also manually inspect the permanent configuration files to verify the settings. The main configuration file is /etc/firewalld/firewalld.conf. The zone-specific configuration files are in the /etc/firewalld/zones/ directory and the policies are in the /etc/firewalld/policies/ directory.

40.8.2. Enabling services on the firewall by using the web console
Link kopieren

By default, services are added to the default firewall zone. If you use more firewall zones on more network interfaces, you must select a zone first and then add the service with port.

The RHEL web console displays predefined firewalld services and you can add them to active firewall zones.

Important

The RHEL 8 web console configures the firewalld service.

The web console does not allow generic firewalld rules that are not listed in the web console.

Prerequisites

  • You have installed the RHEL 8 web console.
  • You have enabled the cockpit service.

  • Your user account is allowed to log in to the web console.

    For instructions, see Installing and enabling the web console.

  • You enabled administrative access in the web console.
  • The firewalld service is running.

Procedure

  1. Log in to the RHEL 8 web console.

    For details, see Logging in to the web console.

  2. Click Networking.

  3. Click the Edit rules and zones button.

    cockpit edit rules and zones
    View larger image
    cockpit edit rules and zones

    If you do not see the Edit rules and zones button, log in to the web console with the administrator privileges.

  4. In the Firewall section, select a zone for which you want to add the service and click Add Services.

    cockpit add services
    View larger image
    cockpit add services
  5. In the Add Services dialog box, find the service you want to enable in the firewall.

  6. Enable services according to your scenario:

    cockpit add service
    View larger image
    cockpit add service
  7. Click Add Services.

40.8.3. Configuring custom ports by using the web console
Link kopieren

You can add configure custom ports for services through the RHEL web console.

Prerequisites

  • You have installed the RHEL 8 web console.
  • You have enabled the cockpit service.

  • Your user account is allowed to log in to the web console.

    For instructions, see Installing and enabling the web console.

  • The firewalld service is running.

Procedure

  1. Log in to the RHEL 8 web console.

    For details, see Logging in to the web console.

  2. Click Networking.

  3. Click the Edit rules and zones button.

    cockpit edit rules and zones
    View larger image
    cockpit edit rules and zones

    If you do not see the Edit rules and zones button, log in to the web console with the administrative privileges.

  4. In the Firewall section, select a zone for which you want to configure a custom port and click Add Services.

    RHEL web console: Add services
    View larger image
    RHEL web console: Add services
  5. In the Add services dialog box, click the Custom Ports radio button.

  6. In the TCP and UDP fields, add ports according to examples. You can add ports in the following formats:

    • Port numbers such as 22
    • Range of port numbers such as 5900-5910
    • Aliases such as nfs, rsync
    Note

    You can add multiple values into each field. You must separate values with a comma and without a space, for example: 8080,8081,http

  7. After adding the port number in the TCP field, the UDP field, or both, verify the service name in the Name field.

    The Name field displays the name of the service for which is this port reserved. You can rewrite the name if you are sure that this port is free to use and no server requires to communicate on this port.

  8. In the Name field, add a name for the service including defined ports.

  9. Click the Add Ports button.

    RHEL web console: Add ports
    View larger image
    RHEL web console: Add ports

To verify the settings, go to the Firewall page and find the service in the list of zone’s Services.

RHEL web console: Active zones
View larger image
RHEL web console: Active zones

40.9. Filtering forwarded traffic between zones
Link kopieren

firewalld enables you to control the flow of network data between different firewalld zones. By defining rules and policies, you can manage how traffic is allowed or blocked when it moves between these zones.

The policy objects feature provides forward and output filtering in firewalld. You can use firewalld to filter traffic between different zones to allow access to locally hosted VMs to connect the host.

40.9.1. The relationship between policy objects and zones
Link kopieren

Policy objects allow the user to attach firewalld’s primitives such as services, ports, and rich rules to the policy. You can apply the policy objects to traffic that passes between zones in a stateful and unidirectional manner. 

# firewall-cmd --permanent --new-policy myOutputPolicy

# firewall-cmd --permanent --policy myOutputPolicy --add-ingress-zone HOST

# firewall-cmd --permanent --policy myOutputPolicy --add-egress-zone ANY
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

HOST and ANY are the symbolic zones used in the ingress and egress zone lists.

  • The HOST symbolic zone allows policies for the traffic originating from or has a destination to the host running firewalld.
  • The ANY symbolic zone applies policy to all the current and future zones. ANY symbolic zone acts as a wildcard for all zones.

40.9.2. Using priorities to sort policies
Link kopieren

Multiple policies can apply to the same set of traffic, therefore, priorities should be used to create an order of precedence for the policies that may be applied.

To set a priority to sort the policies: 

# firewall-cmd --permanent --policy mypolicy --set-priority -500
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

In the above example -500 is a lower priority value but has higher precedence. Thus, -500 will execute before -100.

Lower numerical priority values have higher precedence and are applied first.

The policy objects feature enables users to filter traffic between Podman and firewalld zones.

Note

Red Hat recommends blocking all traffic by default and opening the selective services needed for the Podman utility.

Procedure

  1. Create a new firewall policy: 

    # firewall-cmd --permanent --new-policy podmanToAny
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Block all traffic from Podman to other zones and allow only necessary services on Podman: 

    # firewall-cmd --permanent --policy podmanToAny --set-target REJECT
# firewall-cmd --permanent --policy podmanToAny --add-service dhcp
# firewall-cmd --permanent --policy podmanToAny --add-service dns
# firewall-cmd --permanent --policy podmanToAny --add-service https
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Create a new Podman zone: 

    # firewall-cmd --permanent --new-zone=podman
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Define the ingress zone for the policy: 

    # firewall-cmd --permanent --policy podmanToHost --add-ingress-zone podman
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Define the egress zone for all other zones: 

    # firewall-cmd --permanent --policy podmanToHost --add-egress-zone ANY
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Setting the egress zone to ANY means that you filter from Podman to other zones. If you want to filter to the host, then set the egress zone to HOST.

  6. Restart the firewalld service: 

    # systemctl restart firewalld
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Verify the Podman firewall policy to other zones: 

    # firewall-cmd --info-policy podmanToAny
podmanToAny (active)
  ...
  target: REJECT
  ingress-zones: podman
  egress-zones: ANY
  services: dhcp dns https
  ...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

40.9.4. Setting the default target of policy objects
Link kopieren

You can specify --set-target options for policies.

The following targets are available:

  • ACCEPT - accepts the packet
  • DROP - drops the unwanted packets
  • REJECT - rejects unwanted packets with an ICMP reply
  • CONTINUE (default) - packets will be subject to rules in following policies and zones.

Procedure

  • Set the default target: 

    # firewall-cmd --permanent --policy mypolicy --set-target CONTINUE
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Verify information about the policy 

    # firewall-cmd --info-policy mypolicy
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

40.10. Configuring NAT by using firewalld
Link kopieren

With firewalld, you can configure the masquerading, destination NAT (DNAT), and redirect NAT types. With NAT, you can modify the source or destination IP address.

40.10.1. Network address translation types
Link kopieren

If you require network address translation (NAT) in your network, it is important to understand the NAT types.

These are the different NAT types:

Masquerading

Use this NAT type to change the source IP address of packets. For example, Internet Service Providers (ISPs) do not route private IP ranges, such as 10.0.0.0/8. If you use private IP ranges in your network and users should be able to reach servers on the internet, map the source IP address of packets from these ranges to a public IP address.

Masquerading automatically uses the IP address of the outgoing interface. Therefore, use masquerading if the outgoing interface uses a dynamic IP address.

Destination NAT (DNAT)
Use this NAT type to rewrite the destination address and port of incoming packets. For example, if your web server uses an IP address from a private IP range and is, therefore, not directly accessible from the internet, you can set a DNAT rule on the router to redirect incoming traffic to this server.
Redirect
This type is a special case of DNAT that redirects packets to a different port on the local machine. For example, if a service runs on a different port than its standard port, you can redirect incoming traffic from the standard port to this specific port.

40.10.2. Configuring IP address masquerading
Link kopieren

You can enable IP masquerading on your system. IP masquerading hides individual machines behind a gateway when accessing the internet.

Procedure

  1. To check if IP masquerading is enabled (for example, for the external zone), enter the following command as root: 

    # firewall-cmd --zone=external --query-masquerade
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The command prints yes with exit status 0 if enabled. It prints no with exit status 1 otherwise. If zone is omitted, the default zone will be used.

  2. To enable IP masquerading, enter the following command as root: 

    # firewall-cmd --zone=external --add-masquerade
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  3. To make this setting persistent, pass the --permanent option to the command.

  4. To disable IP masquerading, enter the following command as root: 

    # firewall-cmd --zone=external --remove-masquerade
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    To make this setting permanent, pass the --permanent option to the command.

40.10.3. Using DNAT to forward incoming HTTP traffic
Link kopieren

You can use destination network address translation (DNAT) to direct incoming traffic from one destination address and port to another. Typically, this is useful for redirecting incoming requests from an external network interface to specific internal servers or services.

Prerequisites

  • The firewalld service is running.

Procedure

  1. Forward incoming HTTP traffic: 

    # firewall-cmd --zone=public --add-forward-port=port=80:proto=tcp:toaddr=198.51.100.10:toport=8080 --permanent
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The previous command defines a DNAT rule with the following settings:

    • --zone=public - The firewall zone for which you configure the DNAT rule. You can adjust this to whatever zone you need.
    • --add-forward-port - The option that indicates you are adding a port-forwarding rule.
    • port=80 - The external destination port.
    • proto=tcp - The protocol indicating that you forward TCP traffic.
    • toaddr=198.51.100.10 - The destination IP address.
    • toport=8080 - The destination port of the internal server.
    • --permanent - The option that makes the DNAT rule persistent across reboots.

  2. Reload the firewall configuration to apply the changes: 

    # firewall-cmd --reload
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Verify the DNAT rule for the firewall zone that you used: 

    # firewall-cmd --list-forward-ports --zone=public
port=80:proto=tcp:toport=8080:toaddr=198.51.100.10
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Alternatively, view the corresponding XML configuration file: 

    # cat /etc/firewalld/zones/public.xml
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
<zone>
  <short>Public</short>
  <description>For use in public areas. You do not trust the other computers on networks to not harm your computer. Only selected incoming connections are accepted.</description>
  <service name="ssh"/>
  <service name="dhcpv6-client"/>
  <service name="cockpit"/>
  <forward-port port="80" protocol="tcp" to-port="8080" to-addr="198.51.100.10"/>
  <forward/>
</zone>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

You can use the redirect mechanism to make the web service that internally runs on a non-standard port accessible without requiring users to specify the port in the URL.

If you use redirect, the URLs are simpler and provide better browsing experience, while a non-standard port is still used internally or for specific requirements.

Prerequisites

  • The firewalld service is running.

Procedure

  1. Create the NAT redirect rule: 

    # firewall-cmd --zone=public --add-forward-port=port=<standard_port>:proto=tcp:toport=<non_standard_port> --permanent
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The previous command defines the NAT redirect rule with the following settings:

    • --zone=public - The firewall zone, for which you configure the rule. You can adjust this to whatever zone you need.
    • --add-forward-port=port=<non_standard_port> - The option that indicates you are adding a port-forwarding (redirecting) rule with source port on which you initially receive the incoming traffic.
    • proto=tcp - The protocol indicating that you redirect TCP traffic.
    • toport=<standard_port> - The destination port, to which the incoming traffic should be redirected after being received on the source port.
    • --permanent - The option that makes the rule persist across reboots.

  2. Reload the firewall configuration to apply the changes: 

    # firewall-cmd --reload
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Verify the redirect rule for the firewall zone that you used: 

    # firewall-cmd --list-forward-ports
port=8080:proto=tcp:toport=80:toaddr=
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Alternatively, view the corresponding XML configuration file: 

    # cat /etc/firewalld/zones/public.xml
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
<zone>
  <short>Public</short>
  <description>For use in public areas. You do not trust the other computers on networks to not harm your computer. Only selected incoming connections are accepted.</description>
  <service name="ssh"/>
  <service name="dhcpv6-client"/>
  <service name="cockpit"/>
  <forward-port port="8080" protocol="tcp" to-port="80"/>
  <forward/>
</zone>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

40.11. Prioritizing rich rules
Link kopieren

Rich rules provide a more advanced and flexible way to define firewall rules. Rich rules are particularly useful where services, ports, and so on are not enough to express complex firewall rules.

Concepts behind rich rules:

granularity and flexibility
You can define detailed conditions for network traffic based on more specific criteria.
rule structure

A rich rule consists of a family (IPv4 or IPv6), followed by conditions and actions. 

rule family="ipv4|ipv6" [conditions] [actions]
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
conditions
They allow rich rules to apply only when certain criteria are met.
actions
You can define what happens to network traffic that matches the conditions.
combining multiple conditions
You can create more specific and complex filtering.
hierarchical control and reusability
You can combine rich rules with other firewall mechanisms such as zones or services.

By default, rich rules are organized based on their rule action. For example, deny rules have precedence over allow rules. The priority parameter in rich rules provides administrators fine-grained control over rich rules and their execution order. When using the priority parameter, rules are sorted first by their priority values in ascending order. When more rules have the same priority, their order is determined by the rule action, and if the action is also the same, the order may be undefined.

You can set the priority parameter in a rich rule to any number between -32768 and 32767, and lower numerical values have higher precedence.

The firewalld service organizes rules based on their priority value into different chains:

  • Priority lower than 0: the rule is redirected into a chain with the _pre suffix.
  • Priority higher than 0: the rule is redirected into a chain with the _post suffix.
  • Priority equals 0: based on the action, the rule is redirected into a chain with the _log, _deny, or _allow the action.

Inside these sub-chains, firewalld sorts the rules based on their priority value.

40.11.2. Setting the priority of a rich rule
Link kopieren

You can use the priority parameter to log all traffic that is not allowed or denied by other rules. For example, you can use this feature to flag unexpected traffic.

Procedure

  • Add a rich rule with a very low precedence to log all traffic that has not been matched by other rules: 

    # firewall-cmd --add-rich-rule='rule priority=32767 log prefix="UNEXPECTED: " limit value="5/m"'
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The command additionally limits the number of log entries to 5 per minute.

Verification

  • Display the nftables rule that the command in the previous step created: 

    # nft list chain inet firewalld filter_IN_public_post
table inet firewalld {
  chain filter_IN_public_post {
    log prefix "UNEXPECTED: " limit rate 5/minute
  }
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Intra-zone forwarding is a firewalld feature that enables traffic forwarding between interfaces or sources within a firewalld zone.

With intra-zone forwarding enabled, the traffic within a single firewalld zone can flow from one interface or source to another interface or source. The zone specifies the trust level of interfaces and sources. If the trust level is the same, the traffic stays inside the same zone.

Note

Enabling intra-zone forwarding in the default zone of firewalld, applies only to the interfaces and sources added to the current default zone.

firewalld uses different zones to manage incoming and outgoing traffic. Each zone has its own set of rules and behaviors. For example, the trusted zone, allows all forwarded traffic by default.

Other zones can have different default behaviors. In standard zones, forwarded traffic is typically dropped by default when the target of the zone is set to default.

To control how the traffic is forwarded between different interfaces or sources within a zone, make sure you understand and configure the target of the zone accordingly.

You can use intra-zone forwarding to forward traffic between interfaces and sources within the same firewalld zone.

This feature brings the following benefits:

  • Seamless connectivity between wired and wireless devices (you can forward traffic between an Ethernet network connected to enp1s0 and a Wi-Fi network connected to wlp0s20)
  • Support for flexible work environments
  • Shared resources that are accessible and used by multiple devices or users within a network (such as printers, databases, network-attached storage, and others)
  • Efficient internal networking (such as smooth communication, reduced latency, resource accessibility, and others)

You can enable this functionality for individual firewalld zones.

Procedure

  1. Enable packet forwarding in the kernel: 

    # echo "net.ipv4.ip_forward=1" > /etc/sysctl.d/95-IPv4-forwarding.conf
# sysctl -p /etc/sysctl.d/95-IPv4-forwarding.conf
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Ensure that interfaces between which you want to enable intra-zone forwarding are assigned only to the internal zone: 

    # firewall-cmd --get-active-zones
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. If the interface is currently assigned to a zone other than internal, reassign it: 

    # firewall-cmd --zone=internal --change-interface=interface_name --permanent
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Add the enp1s0 and wlp0s20 interfaces to the internal zone: 

    # firewall-cmd --zone=internal --add-interface=enp1s0 --add-interface=wlp0s20
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Enable intra-zone forwarding: 

    # firewall-cmd --zone=internal --add-forward
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

The following Verification require that the nmap-ncat package is installed on both hosts.

  1. Log in to a host that is on the same network as the enp1s0 interface of the host on which you enabled zone forwarding.

  2. Start an echo service with ncat to test connectivity: 

    # ncat -e /usr/bin/cat -l 12345
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  3. Log in to a host that is in the same network as the wlp0s20 interface.

  4. Connect to the echo server running on the host that is in the same network as the enp1s0: 

    # ncat <other_host> 12345
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  5. Type something and press Enter. Verify the text is sent back.

40.13. Configuring firewalld by using RHEL system roles
Link kopieren

RHEL system roles is a set of contents for the Ansible automation utility. This content together with the Ansible automation utility provides a consistent configuration interface to remotely manage multiple systems at once.

The rhel-system-roles package contains the rhel-system-roles.firewall RHEL system role. This role was introduced for automated configurations of the firewalld service.

With the firewall RHEL system role you can configure many different firewalld parameters, for example:

  • Zones
  • The services for which packets should be allowed
  • Granting, rejection, or dropping of traffic access to ports
  • Forwarding of ports or port ranges for a zone

The firewall RHEL system role supports automating a reset of firewalld settings to their defaults. This efficiently removes insecure or unintentional firewall rules and simplifies management.

Prerequisites

Procedure

  1. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Reset firewalld example
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: Reset firewalld
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.firewall
      vars:
        firewall:
          - previous: replaced
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The settings specified in the example playbook include the following:

    previous: replaced

    Removes all existing user-defined settings and resets the firewalld settings to defaults. If you combine the previous:replaced parameter with other settings, the firewall role removes all existing settings before applying new ones.

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.firewall/README.md file on the control node.

  2. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  3. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Run this command on the control node to remotely check that all firewall configuration on your managed node was reset to its default values: 

    # ansible managed-node-01.example.com -m ansible.builtin.command -a 'firewall-cmd --list-all-zones'
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

You can use the firewall RHEL system role to remotely configure forwarding of incoming traffic from one local port to a different local port.

For example, if you have an environment where multiple services co-exist on the same machine and need the same default port, there are likely to become port conflicts. These conflicts can disrupt services and cause a downtime. With the firewall RHEL system role, you can efficiently forward traffic to alternative ports to ensure that your services can run simultaneously without modification to their configuration.

Prerequisites

Procedure

  1. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configure firewalld
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: Forward incoming traffic on port 8080 to 443
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.firewall
      vars:
        firewall:
          - forward_port: 8080/tcp;443;
            state: enabled
            runtime: true
            permanent: true
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The settings specified in the example playbook include the following:

    forward_port: 8080/tcp;443
    Traffic coming to the local port 8080 using the TCP protocol is forwarded to the port 443.
    runtime: true

    Enables changes in the runtime configuration. The default is set to true.

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.firewall/README.md file on the control node.

  2. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  3. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • On the control node, run the following command to remotely check the forwarded-ports on your managed node: 

    # ansible managed-node-01.example.com -m ansible.builtin.command -a 'firewall-cmd --list-forward-ports'
managed-node-01.example.com | CHANGED | rc=0 >>
port=8080:proto=tcp:toport=443:toaddr=
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

You can use the firewall RHEL system role to configure zone to allow certain traffic. For example, you can configure that the dmz zone with the enp1s0 interface allows HTTPS traffic to enable external users to access your web servers.

Prerequisites

Procedure

  1. Create a playbook file, for example, ~/playbook.yml, with the following content: 

    ---
- name: Configure firewalld
  hosts: managed-node-01.example.com
  tasks:
    - name: Creating a DMZ with access to HTTPS port and masquerading for hosts in DMZ
      ansible.builtin.include_role:
        name: redhat.rhel_system_roles.firewall
      vars:
        firewall:
          - zone: dmz
            interface: enp1s0
            service: https
            state: enabled
            runtime: true
            permanent: true
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    For details about all variables used in the playbook, see the /usr/share/ansible/roles/rhel-system-roles.firewall/README.md file on the control node.

  2. Validate the playbook syntax: 

    $ ansible-playbook --syntax-check ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that this command only validates the syntax and does not protect against a wrong but valid configuration.

  3. Run the playbook: 

    $ ansible-playbook ~/playbook.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • On the control node, run the following command to remotely check the information about the dmz zone on your managed node: 

    # ansible managed-node-01.example.com -m ansible.builtin.command -a 'firewall-cmd --zone=dmz --list-all'
managed-node-01.example.com | CHANGED | rc=0 >>
dmz (active)
  target: default
  icmp-block-inversion: no
  interfaces: enp1s0
  sources:
  services: https ssh
  ports:
  protocols:
  forward: no
  masquerade: no
  forward-ports:
  source-ports:
  icmp-blocks:
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 41. Getting started with nftables
Link kopieren

If your scenario does not fall under typical packet-filtering cases covered by firewalld, or you want to have complete control of rules, you can use the nftables framework.

The nftables framework classifies packets, and it is the successor to the iptables, ip6tables, arptables, ebtables, and ipset utilities. It offers numerous improvements in convenience, features, and performance over previous packet-filtering tools, most notably:

  • Built-in lookup tables instead of linear processing
  • A single framework for both the IPv4 and IPv6 protocols
  • Updating the kernel rule set in place through transactions instead of fetching, updating, and storing the entire rule set
  • Support for debugging and tracing in the rule set (nftrace) and monitoring trace events (in the nft tool)
  • More consistent and compact syntax, no protocol-specific extensions
  • A Netlink API for third-party applications

The nftables framework uses tables to store chains. The chains contain individual rules for performing actions. The nft utility replaces all tools from the previous packet-filtering frameworks. You can use the libnftables library for low-level interaction with nftables Netlink API through the libnftnl library.

To display the effect of rule set changes, use the nft list ruleset command. To clear the kernel rule set, use the nft flush ruleset command. Note that this may also affect the rule set installed by the iptables-nft command, as it utilizes the same kernel infrastructure.

41.1. Creating and managing nftables tables, chains, and rules
Link kopieren

You can display nftables rule sets and manage them.

41.1.1. Basics of nftables tables
Link kopieren

A table in nftables is a namespace that contains a collection of chains, rules, sets, and other objects.

Each table must have an address family assigned. The address family defines the packet types that this table processes. You can set one of the following address families when you create a table:

  • ip: Matches only IPv4 packets. This is the default if you do not specify an address family.
  • ip6: Matches only IPv6 packets.
  • inet: Matches both IPv4 and IPv6 packets.
  • arp: Matches IPv4 address resolution protocol (ARP) packets.
  • bridge: Matches packets that pass through a bridge device.
  • netdev: Matches packets from ingress.

If you want to add a table, the format to use depends on your firewall script:

  • In scripts in native syntax, use: 

    table <table_address_family> <table_name> {
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  • In shell scripts, use: 

    nft add table <table_address_family> <table_name>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

41.1.2. Basics of nftables chains
Link kopieren

Tables consist of chains which in turn are containers for rules. The following two rule types exists:

  • Base chain: You can use base chains as an entry point for packets from the networking stack.
  • Regular chain: You can use regular chains as a jump target to better organize rules.

If you want to add a base chain to a table, the format to use depends on your firewall script:

  • In scripts in native syntax, use: 

    table <table_address_family> <table_name> {
  chain <chain_name> {
    type <type> hook <hook> priority <priority>
    policy <policy> ;
  }
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  • In shell scripts, use: 

    nft add chain <table_address_family> <table_name> <chain_name> { type <type> hook <hook> priority <priority> \; policy <policy> \; }
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    To avoid that the shell interprets the semicolons as the end of the command, place the \ escape character in front of the semicolons.

Both examples create base chains. To create a regular chain, do not set any parameters in the curly brackets.

Chain types

The following are the chain types and an overview with which address families and hooks you can use them:

Expand
TypeAddress familiesHooksDescription

filter

all

all

Standard chain type

nat

ip, ip6, inet

prerouting, input, output, postrouting

Chains of this type perform native address translation based on connection tracking entries. Only the first packet traverses this chain type.

route

ip, ip6

output

Accepted packets that traverse this chain type cause a new route lookup if relevant parts of the IP header have changed.

Chain priorities

The priority parameter specifies the order in which packets traverse chains with the same hook value. You can set this parameter to an integer value or use a standard priority name.

The following matrix is an overview of the standard priority names and their numeric values, and with which address families and hooks you can use them:

Expand
Textual valueNumeric valueAddress familiesHooks

raw

-300

ip, ip6, inet

all

mangle

-150

ip, ip6, inet

all

dstnat

-100

ip, ip6, inet

prerouting

-300

bridge

prerouting

filter

0

ip, ip6, inet, arp, netdev

all

-200

bridge

all

security

50

ip, ip6, inet

all

srcnat

100

ip, ip6, inet

postrouting

300

bridge

postrouting

out

100

bridge

output

Chain policies

The chain policy defines whether nftables should accept or drop packets if rules in this chain do not specify any action. You can set one of the following policies in a chain:

  • accept (default)
  • drop

41.1.3. Basics of nftables rules
Link kopieren

Rules define actions to perform on packets that pass a chain that contains this rule. If the rule also contains matching expressions, nftables performs the actions only if all previous expressions apply.

If you want to add a rule to a chain, the format to use depends on your firewall script:

  • In scripts in native syntax, use: 

    table <table_address_family> <table_name> {
  chain <chain_name> {
    type <type> hook <hook> priority <priority> ; policy <policy> ;
      <rule>
  }
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  • In shell scripts, use: 

    nft add rule <table_address_family> <table_name> <chain_name> <rule>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This shell command appends the new rule at the end of the chain. If you prefer to add a rule at the beginning of the chain, use the nft insert command instead of nft add.

41.1.4. Managing tables, chains, and rules by using nft commands
Link kopieren

To manage an nftables firewall on the command line or in shell scripts, use the nft utility.

Important

The commands in this procedure do not represent a typical workflow and are not optimized. This procedure only demonstrates how to use nft commands to manage tables, chains, and rules in general.

Procedure

  1. Create a table named nftables_svc with the inet address family so that the table can process both IPv4 and IPv6 packets: 

    # nft add table inet nftables_svc
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Add a base chain named INPUT, that processes incoming network traffic, to the inet nftables_svc table: 

    # nft add chain inet nftables_svc INPUT { type filter hook input priority filter \; policy accept \; }
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    To avoid that the shell interprets the semicolons as the end of the command, escape the semicolons using the \ character.

  3. Add rules to the INPUT chain. For example, allow incoming TCP traffic on port 22 and 443, and, as the last rule of the INPUT chain, reject other incoming traffic with an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) port unreachable message: 

    # nft add rule inet nftables_svc INPUT tcp dport 22 accept
# nft add rule inet nftables_svc INPUT tcp dport 443 accept
# nft add rule inet nftables_svc INPUT reject with icmpx type port-unreachable
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If you enter the nft add rule commands as shown, nft adds the rules in the same order to the chain as you run the commands.

  4. Display the current rule set including handles: 

    # nft -a list table inet nftables_svc
table inet nftables_svc { # handle 13
  chain INPUT { # handle 1
    type filter hook input priority filter; policy accept;
    tcp dport 22 accept # handle 2
    tcp dport 443 accept # handle 3
    reject # handle 4
  }
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Insert a rule before the existing rule with handle 3. For example, to insert a rule that allows TCP traffic on port 636, enter: 

    # nft insert rule inet nftables_svc INPUT position 3 tcp dport 636 accept
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  6. Append a rule after the existing rule with handle 3. For example, to insert a rule that allows TCP traffic on port 80, enter: 

    # nft add rule inet nftables_svc INPUT position 3 tcp dport 80 accept
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  7. Display the rule set again with handles. Verify that the later added rules have been added to the specified positions: 

    # nft -a list table inet nftables_svc
table inet nftables_svc { # handle 13
  chain INPUT { # handle 1
    type filter hook input priority filter; policy accept;
    tcp dport 22 accept # handle 2
    tcp dport 636 accept # handle 5
    tcp dport 443 accept # handle 3
    tcp dport 80 accept # handle 6
    reject # handle 4
  }
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  8. Remove the rule with handle 6: 

    # nft delete rule inet nftables_svc INPUT handle 6
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    To remove a rule, you must specify the handle.

  9. Display the rule set, and verify that the removed rule is no longer present: 

    # nft -a list table inet nftables_svc
table inet nftables_svc { # handle 13
  chain INPUT { # handle 1
    type filter hook input priority filter; policy accept;
    tcp dport 22 accept # handle 2
    tcp dport 636 accept # handle 5
    tcp dport 443 accept # handle 3
    reject # handle 4
  }
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  10. Remove all remaining rules from the INPUT chain: 

    # nft flush chain inet nftables_svc INPUT
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  11. Display the rule set, and verify that the INPUT chain is empty: 

    # nft list table inet nftables_svc
table inet nftables_svc {
  chain INPUT {
    type filter hook input priority filter; policy accept
  }
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  12. Delete the INPUT chain: 

    # nft delete chain inet nftables_svc INPUT
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    You can also use this command to delete chains that still contain rules.

  13. Display the rule set, and verify that the INPUT chain has been deleted: 

    # nft list table inet nftables_svc
table inet nftables_svc {
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  14. Delete the nftables_svc table: 

    # nft delete table inet nftables_svc
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    You can also use this command to delete tables that still contain chains.

    Note

    To delete the entire rule set, use the nft flush ruleset command instead of manually deleting all rules, chains, and tables in separate commands.

41.2. Migrating from iptables to nftables
Link kopieren

If your firewall configuration still uses iptables rules, you can migrate your iptables rules to nftables.

41.2.1. When to use firewalld, nftables, or iptables
Link kopieren

On RHEL 8, you can use the following packet-filtering utilities depending on your scenario:

  • firewalld: The firewalld utility simplifies firewall configuration for common use cases.
  • nftables: Use the nftables utility to set up complex and performance-critical firewalls, such as for a whole network.
  • iptables: The iptables utility on Red Hat Enterprise Linux uses the nf_tables kernel API instead of the legacy back end. The nf_tables API provides backward compatibility so that scripts that use iptables commands still work on Red Hat Enterprise Linux. For new firewall scripts, use nftables.
Important

To prevent the different firewall-related services (firewalld, nftables, or iptables) from influencing each other, run only one of them on a RHEL host, and disable the other services.

41.2.2. Concepts in the nftables framework
Link kopieren

The nftables framework is a modern, efficient, and flexible alternative to iptables. It simplifies rule management and enhances performance, making it a better choice for complex, high-performance network environments.

Tables and namespaces
In nftables, tables represent organizational units or namespaces that group together related firewall chains, sets, flowtables, and other objects. In nftables, tables provide a more flexible way to structure firewall rules and related components. While in iptables, the tables were more rigidly defined with specific purposes.
Table families
Each table in nftables is associated with a specific family (ip, ip6, inet, arp, bridge, or netdev). This association determines which packets the table can process. For example, a table in the ip family handles only IPv4 packets. On the other hand, inet is a special case of table family. It offers a unified approach across protocols, because it can process both IPv4 and IPv6 packets. Another case of a special table family is netdev, because it is used for rules that apply directly to network devices, enabling filtering at the device level.
Base chains

Base chains in nftables are highly configurable entry-points in the packet processing pipeline that enable users to specify the following:

  • Type of chain, for example, "filter"
  • The hook point in the packet processing path, for example, "input", "output", "forward"
  • Priority of the chain

This flexibility enables precise control over when and how the rules are applied to packets as they pass through the network stack. A special case of a chain is the route chain, which is used to influence the routing decisions made by the kernel, based on packet headers.

Virtual machine for rule processing

The nftables framework uses an internal virtual machine to process rules. This virtual machine executes instructions that are similar to assembly language operations (loading data into registers, performing comparisons, and so on). Such a mechanism allows for highly flexible and efficient rule processing.

Enhancements in nftables can be introduced as new instructions for that virtual machine. This typically requires a new kernel module and updates to the libnftnl library and the nft command-line utility.

Alternatively, you can introduce new features by combining existing instructions in innovative ways without a need for kernel modifications. The syntax of nftables rules reflects the flexibility of the underlying virtual machine. For example, the rule meta mark set tcp dport map { 22: 1, 80: 2 } sets a packet’s firewall mark to 1 if the TCP destination port is 22, and to 2 if the port is 80. This demonstrates how complex logic can be expressed concisely.

Complex filtering and verdict maps

The nftables framework integrates and extends the functionality of the ipset utility, which is used in iptables for bulk matching on IP addresses, ports, other data types and, most importantly, combinations thereof. This integration makes it easier to manage large and dynamic sets of data directly within nftables. Next, nftables natively supports matching packets based on multiple values or ranges for any data type, which enhances its capability to handle complex filtering requirements. With nftables you can manipulate any field within a packet.

In nftables, sets can be either named or anonymous. The named sets can be referenced by multiple rules and modified dynamically. The anonymous sets are defined inline within a rule and are immutable. Sets can contain elements that are combinations of different types, for example IP address and port number pairs. This feature provides greater flexibility in matching complex criteria. To manage sets, the kernel can select the most appropriate backend based on the specific requirements (performance, memory efficiency, and others). Sets can also function as maps with key-value pairs. The value part can be used as data points (values to write into packet headers), or as verdicts or chains to jump to. This enables complex and dynamic rule behaviors, known as "verdict maps".

Flexible rule format

The structure of nftables rules is straightforward. The conditions and actions are applied sequentially from left to right. This intuitive format simplifies rule creating and troubleshooting.

Conditions in a rule are logically connected (with the AND operator) together, which means that all conditions must be evaluated as "true" for the rule to match. If any condition fails, the evaluation moves to the next rule.

Actions in nftables can be final, such as drop or accept, which stop further rule processing for the packet. Non-terminal actions, such as counter log meta mark set 0x3, perform specific tasks (counting packets, logging, setting a mark, and others), but allow subsequent rules to be evaluated.

41.2.3. Concepts in the deprecated iptables framework
Link kopieren

Similar to the actively-maintained nftables framework, the deprecated iptables framework enables you to perform a variety of packet filtering tasks, logging and auditing, NAT-related configuration tasks, and more.

The iptables framework is structured into multiple tables, where each table is designed for a specific purpose:

filter
The default table, ensures general packet filtering
nat
For Network Address Translation (NAT), includes altering the source and destination addresses of packets
mangle
For specific packet alteration, enables you to do modification of packet headers for advanced routing decisions
raw
For configurations that need to happen before connection tracking

These tables are implemented as separate kernel modules, where each table offers a fixed set of builtin chains such as INPUT, OUTPUT, and FORWARD. A chain is a sequence of rules that packets are evaluated against. These chains hook into specific points in the packet processing flow in the kernel. The chains have the same names across different tables, however their order of execution is determined by their respective hook priorities. The priorities are managed internally by the kernel to make sure that the rules are applied in the correct sequence.

Originally, iptables was designed to process IPv4 traffic. However, with the inception of the IPv6 protocol, the ip6tables utility needed to be introduced to provide comparable functionality (as iptables) and enable users to create and manage firewall rules for IPv6 packets. With the same logic, the arptables utility was created to process Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) and the ebtables utility was developed to handle Ethernet bridging frames. These tools ensure that you can apply the packet filtering abilities of iptables across various network protocols and provide comprehensive network coverage.

To enhance the functionality of iptables, the extensions started to be developed. The functionality extensions are typically implemented as kernel modules that are paired with user-space dynamic shared objects (DSOs). The extensions introduce "matches" and "targets" that you can use in firewall rules to perform more sophisticated operations. Extensions can enable complex matches and targets. For instance you can match on, or manipulate specific layer 4 protocol header values, perform rate-limiting, enforce quotas, and so on. Some extensions are designed to address limitations in the default iptables syntax, for example the "multiport" match extension. This extension allows a single rule to match multiple, non-consecutive ports to simplify rule definitions, and thereby reducing the number of individual rules required.

An ipset is a special kind of functionality extension to iptables. It is a kernel-level data structure that is used together with iptables to create collections of IP addresses, port numbers, and other network-related elements that you can match against packets. These sets significantly streamline, optimize, and accelerate the process of writing and managing firewall rules.

41.2.4. Converting iptables and ip6tables rule sets to nftables
Link kopieren

Use the iptables-restore-translate and ip6tables-restore-translate utilities to translate iptables and ip6tables rule sets to nftables.

Prerequisites

  • The nftables and iptables packages are installed.
  • The system has iptables and ip6tables rules configured.

Procedure

  1. Write the iptables and ip6tables rules to a file: 

    # iptables-save >/root/iptables.dump
# ip6tables-save >/root/ip6tables.dump
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Convert the dump files to nftables instructions: 

    # iptables-restore-translate -f /root/iptables.dump > /etc/nftables/ruleset-migrated-from-iptables.nft
# ip6tables-restore-translate -f /root/ip6tables.dump > /etc/nftables/ruleset-migrated-from-ip6tables.nft
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  3. Review and, if needed, manually update the generated nftables rules.

  4. To enable the nftables service to load the generated files, add the following to the /etc/sysconfig/nftables.conf file: 

    include "/etc/nftables/ruleset-migrated-from-iptables.nft"
include "/etc/nftables/ruleset-migrated-from-ip6tables.nft"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Stop and disable the iptables service: 

    # systemctl disable --now iptables
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If you used a custom script to load the iptables rules, ensure that the script no longer starts automatically and reboot to flush all tables.

  6. Enable and start the nftables service: 

    # systemctl enable --now nftables
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Display the nftables rule set: 

    # nft list ruleset
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

41.2.5. Converting single iptables and ip6tables rules to nftables
Link kopieren

Red Hat Enterprise Linux provides the iptables-translate and ip6tables-translate utilities to convert an iptables or ip6tables rule into the equivalent one for nftables.

Prerequisites

  • The nftables package is installed.

Procedure

  • Use the iptables-translate or ip6tables-translate utility instead of iptables or ip6tables to display the corresponding nftables rule, for example: 

    # iptables-translate -A INPUT -s 192.0.2.0/24 -j ACCEPT
nft add rule ip filter INPUT ip saddr 192.0.2.0/24 counter accept
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that some extensions lack translation support. In these cases, the utility prints the untranslated rule prefixed with the # sign, for example: 

    # iptables-translate -A INPUT -j CHECKSUM --checksum-fill
nft # -A INPUT -j CHECKSUM --checksum-fill
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

41.2.6. Comparison of common iptables and nftables commands
Link kopieren

The following is a comparison of common iptables and nftables commands:

  • Listing all rules:

    Expand
    iptablesnftables

    iptables-save

    nft list ruleset

  • Listing a certain table and chain:

    Expand
    iptablesnftables

    iptables -L

    nft list table ip filter

    iptables -L INPUT

    nft list chain ip filter INPUT

    iptables -t nat -L PREROUTING

    nft list chain ip nat PREROUTING

    The nft command does not pre-create tables and chains. They exist only if a user created them manually.

    Listing rules generated by firewalld: 

    # nft list table inet firewalld
# nft list table ip firewalld
# nft list table ip6 firewalld
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

41.3. Configuring NAT using nftables
Link kopieren

With nftables, you can configure the masquerading, source (SNAT), destination NAT (DNAT), and redirect types. With NAT, you can modify the source or destination IP address.

Important

You can only use real interface names in iifname and oifname parameters, and alternative names (altname) are not supported.

41.3.1. NAT types
Link kopieren

The nftables framework supports different network address translation (NAT) types.

Masquerading and source NAT (SNAT)

Use one of these NAT types to change the source IP address of packets. For example, Internet Service Providers (ISPs) do not route private IP ranges, such as 10.0.0.0/8. If you use private IP ranges in your network and users should be able to reach servers on the internet, map the source IP address of packets from these ranges to a public IP address.

Masquerading and SNAT are very similar to one another. The differences are:

  • Masquerading automatically uses the IP address of the outgoing interface. Therefore, use masquerading if the outgoing interface uses a dynamic IP address.
  • SNAT sets the source IP address of packets to a specified IP and does not dynamically look up the IP of the outgoing interface. Therefore, SNAT is faster than masquerading. Use SNAT if the outgoing interface uses a fixed IP address.
Destination NAT (DNAT)
Use this NAT type to rewrite the destination address and port of incoming packets. For example, if your web server uses an IP address from a private IP range and is, therefore, not directly accessible from the internet, you can set a DNAT rule on the router to redirect incoming traffic to this server.
Redirect
This type is a special case of DNAT that redirects packets to the local machine depending on the chain hook. For example, if a service runs on a different port than its standard port, you can redirect incoming traffic from the standard port to this specific port.

41.3.2. Configuring masquerading using nftables
Link kopieren

Masquerading enables a router to dynamically change the source IP of packets sent through an interface to the IP address of the interface. This means that if the interface gets a new IP assigned, nftables automatically uses the new IP when replacing the source IP.

Replace the source IP of packets leaving the host through the ens3 interface to the IP set on ens3.

Procedure

  1. Create a table: 

    # nft add table nat
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Add the prerouting and postrouting chains to the table: 

    # nft add chain nat postrouting { type nat hook postrouting priority 100 \; }
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Important

    Even if you do not add a rule to the prerouting chain, the nftables framework requires this chain to match incoming packet replies.

    Note that you must pass the -- option to the nft command to prevent the shell from interpreting the negative priority value as an option of the nft command.

  3. Add a rule to the postrouting chain that matches outgoing packets on the ens3 interface: 

    # nft add rule nat postrouting oifname "ens3" masquerade
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

41.3.3. Configuring source NAT using nftables
Link kopieren

On a router, Source NAT (SNAT) enables you to change the IP of packets sent through an interface to a specific IP address. The router then replaces the source IP of outgoing packets.

Procedure

  1. Create a table: 

    # nft add table nat
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Add the prerouting and postrouting chains to the table: 

    # nft add chain nat postrouting { type nat hook postrouting priority 100 \; }
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Important

    Even if you do not add a rule to the postrouting chain, the nftables framework requires this chain to match outgoing packet replies.

    Note that you must pass the -- option to the nft command to prevent the shell from interpreting the negative priority value as an option of the nft command.

  3. Add a rule to the postrouting chain that replaces the source IP of outgoing packets through ens3 with 192.0.2.1: 

    # nft add rule nat postrouting oifname "ens3" snat to 192.0.2.1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

41.3.4. Configuring destination NAT using nftables
Link kopieren

Destination NAT (DNAT) enables you to redirect traffic on a router to a host that is not directly accessible from the internet.

For example, with DNAT the router redirects incoming traffic sent to port 80 and 443 to a web server with the IP address 192.0.2.1.

Procedure

  1. Create a table: 

    # nft add table nat
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Add the prerouting and postrouting chains to the table: 

    # nft -- add chain nat prerouting { type nat hook prerouting priority -100 \; }
# nft add chain nat postrouting { type nat hook postrouting priority 100 \; }
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Important

    Even if you do not add a rule to the postrouting chain, the nftables framework requires this chain to match outgoing packet replies.

    Note that you must pass the -- option to the nft command to prevent the shell from interpreting the negative priority value as an option of the nft command.

  3. Add a rule to the prerouting chain that redirects incoming traffic to port 80 and 443 on the ens3 interface of the router to the web server with the IP address 192.0.2.1: 

    # nft add rule nat prerouting iifname ens3 tcp dport { 80, 443 } dnat to 192.0.2.1
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Depending on your environment, add either a SNAT or masquerading rule to change the source address for packets returning from the web server to the sender:

    1. If the ens3 interface uses a dynamic IP addresses, add a masquerading rule: 

      # nft add rule nat postrouting oifname "ens3" masquerade
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. If the ens3 interface uses a static IP address, add a SNAT rule. For example, if the ens3 uses the 198.51.100.1 IP address: 

      # nft add rule nat postrouting oifname "ens3" snat to 198.51.100.1
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Enable packet forwarding: 

    # echo "net.ipv4.ip_forward=1" > /etc/sysctl.d/95-IPv4-forwarding.conf
# sysctl -p /etc/sysctl.d/95-IPv4-forwarding.conf
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

41.3.5. Configuring a redirect using nftables
Link kopieren

The redirect feature is a special case of destination network address translation (DNAT) that redirects packets to the local machine depending on the chain hook.

For example, you can redirect incoming and forwarded traffic sent to port 22 of the local host to port 2222.

Procedure

  1. Create a table: 

    # nft add table nat
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Add the prerouting chain to the table: 

    # nft -- add chain nat prerouting { type nat hook prerouting priority -100 \; }
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Note that you must pass the -- option to the nft command to prevent the shell from interpreting the negative priority value as an option of the nft command.

  3. Add a rule to the prerouting chain that redirects incoming traffic on port 22 to port 2222: 

    # nft add rule nat prerouting tcp dport 22 redirect to 2222
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

41.4. Writing and executing nftables scripts
Link kopieren

The major benefit of using the nftables framework is that the execution of scripts is atomic. This means that the system either applies the whole script or prevents the execution if an error occurs. This guarantees that the firewall is always in a consistent state.

Additionally, with the nftables script environment, you can:

  • Add comments
  • Define variables
  • Include other rule-set files

When you install the nftables package, Red Hat Enterprise Linux automatically creates *.nft scripts in the /etc/nftables/ directory. These scripts contain commands that create tables and empty chains for different purposes.

41.4.1. Supported nftables script formats
Link kopieren

The nftables framework supports scripts in different formats.

You can use the following formats:

  • The same format as the nft list ruleset command displays the rule set: 

    #!/usr/sbin/nft -f

# Flush the rule set
flush ruleset

table inet example_table {
  chain example_chain {
    # Chain for incoming packets that drops all packets that
    # are not explicitly allowed by any rule in this chain
    type filter hook input priority 0; policy drop;

    # Accept connections to port 22 (ssh)
    tcp dport ssh accept
  }
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  • The same syntax as for nft commands: 

    #!/usr/sbin/nft -f

# Flush the rule set
flush ruleset

# Create a table
add table inet example_table

# Create a chain for incoming packets that drops all packets
# that are not explicitly allowed by any rule in this chain
add chain inet example_table example_chain { type filter hook input priority 0 ; policy drop ; }

# Add a rule that accepts connections to port 22 (ssh)
add rule inet example_table example_chain tcp dport ssh accept
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

41.4.2. Running nftables scripts
Link kopieren

You can run an nftables script either by passing it to the nft utility or by executing the script directly.

Procedure

  • To run an nftables script by passing it to the nft utility, enter: 

    # nft -f /etc/nftables/<example_firewall_script>.nft
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  • To run an nftables script directly:

    1. For the single time that you perform this:

      1. Ensure that the script starts with the following shebang sequence: 

        #!/usr/sbin/nft -f
        Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
        Important

        If you omit the -f parameter, the nft utility does not read the script and displays: Error: syntax error, unexpected newline, expecting string.

      2. Optional: Set the owner of the script to root: 

        # chown root /etc/nftables/<example_firewall_script>.nft
        Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      3. Make the script executable for the owner: 

        # chmod u+x /etc/nftables/<example_firewall_script>.nft
        Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Run the script: 

      # /etc/nftables/<example_firewall_script>.nft
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      If no output is displayed, the system executed the script successfully.

Important

Even if nft executes the script successfully, incorrectly placed rules, missing parameters, or other problems in the script can cause that the firewall behaves not as expected.

41.4.3. Using comments in nftables scripts
Link kopieren

The nftables scripting environment interprets everything to the right of a # character to the end of a line as a comment.

Comments can start at the beginning of a line, or next to a command: 

...
# Flush the rule set
flush ruleset

add table inet example_table  # Create a table
...
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

41.4.4. Using variables in nftables script
Link kopieren

To define a variable in an nftables script, use the define keyword. You can store single values and anonymous sets in a variable. For more complex scenarios, use sets or verdict maps.

Variables with a single value

The following example defines a variable named INET_DEV with the value enp1s0: 

define INET_DEV = enp1s0
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

You can use the variable in the script by entering the $ sign followed by the variable name: 

...
add rule inet example_table example_chain iifname $INET_DEV tcp dport ssh accept
...
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
Variables that contain an anonymous set

The following example defines a variable that contains an anonymous set: 

define DNS_SERVERS = { 192.0.2.1, 192.0.2.2 }
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

You can use the variable in the script by writing the $ sign followed by the variable name: 

add rule inet example_table example_chain ip daddr $DNS_SERVERS accept
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
Note

Curly braces have special semantics when you use them in a rule because they indicate that the variable represents a set.

41.4.5. Including files in nftables scripts
Link kopieren

In the nftables scripting environment, you can include other scripts by using the include statement.

If you specify only a file name without an absolute or relative path, nftables includes files from the default search path, which is set to /etc on Red Hat Enterprise Linux.

Example 41.1. Including files from the default search directory

To include a file from the default search directory: 

include "example.nft"
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Example 41.2. Including all *.nft files from a directory

To include all files ending with *.nft that are stored in the /etc/nftables/rulesets/ directory: 

include "/etc/nftables/rulesets/*.nft"
Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Note that the include statement does not match files beginning with a dot.

41.4.6. Automatically loading nftables rules when the system boots
Link kopieren

The nftables systemd service loads firewall scripts that are included in the /etc/sysconfig/nftables.conf file.

Prerequisites

  • The nftables scripts are stored in the /etc/nftables/ directory.

Procedure

  1. Edit the /etc/sysconfig/nftables.conf file.

    • If you modified the *.nft scripts that were created in /etc/nftables/ with the installation of the nftables package, uncomment the include statement for these scripts.

    • If you wrote new scripts, add include statements to include these scripts. For example, to load the /etc/nftables/example.nft script when the nftables service starts, add: 

      include "/etc/nftables/_example_.nft"
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Optional: Start the nftables service to load the firewall rules without rebooting the system: 

    # systemctl start nftables
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Enable the nftables service. 

    # systemctl enable nftables
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

41.5. Using sets in nftables commands
Link kopieren

The nftables framework natively supports sets. You can use sets, for example, if a rule should match multiple IP addresses, port numbers, interfaces, or any other match criteria.

41.5.1. Using anonymous sets in nftables
Link kopieren

An anonymous set contains comma-separated values enclosed in curly brackets, such as { 22, 80, 443 }, that you use directly in a rule. You can use anonymous sets also for IP addresses and any other match criteria.

The drawback of anonymous sets is that if you want to change the set, you must replace the rule. For a dynamic solution, use named sets as described in Using named sets in nftables.

Prerequisites

  • The example_chain chain and the example_table table in the inet family exists.

Procedure

  1. For example, to add a rule to example_chain in example_table that allows incoming traffic to port 22, 80, and 443: 

    # nft add rule inet example_table example_chain tcp dport { 22, 80, 443 } accept
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Optional: Display all chains and their rules in example_table: 

    # nft list table inet example_table
table inet example_table {
  chain example_chain {
    type filter hook input priority filter; policy accept;
    tcp dport { ssh, http, https } accept
  }
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

41.5.2. Using named sets in nftables
Link kopieren

The nftables framework supports mutable named sets. A named set is a list of ranges that you can use in multiple rules within a table. Another benefit over anonymous sets is that you can update a named set without replacing the rules that use the set.

When you create a named set, you must specify the type of elements the set contains. You can set the following types:

  • ipv4_addr for a set that contains IPv4 addresses or ranges, such as 192.0.2.1 or 192.0.2.0/24.
  • ipv6_addr for a set that contains IPv6 addresses or ranges, such as 2001:db8:1::1 or 2001:db8:1::1/64.
  • ether_addr for a set that contains a list of media access control (MAC) addresses, such as 52:54:00:6b:66:42.
  • inet_proto for a set that contains a list of internet protocol types, such as tcp.
  • inet_service for a set that contains a list of internet services, such as ssh.
  • mark for a set that contains a list of packet marks. Packet marks can be any positive 32-bit integer value (0 to 2147483647).

Prerequisites

  • The example_chain chain and the example_table table exists.

Procedure

  1. Create an empty set. The following examples create a set for IPv4 addresses:

    • To create a set that can store multiple individual IPv4 addresses: 

      # nft add set inet example_table example_set { type ipv4_addr \; }
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    • To create a set that can store IPv4 address ranges: 

      # nft add set inet example_table example_set { type ipv4_addr \; flags interval \; }
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Important

    To prevent the shell from interpreting the semicolons as the end of the command, you must escape the semicolons with a backslash.

  2. Optional: Create rules that use the set. For example, the following command adds a rule to the example_chain in the example_table that will drop all packets from IPv4 addresses in example_set. 

    # nft add rule inet example_table example_chain ip saddr @example_set drop
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Because example_set is still empty, the rule has currently no effect.

  3. Add IPv4 addresses to example_set:

    • If you create a set that stores individual IPv4 addresses, enter: 

      # nft add element inet example_table example_set { 192.0.2.1, 192.0.2.2 }
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    • If you create a set that stores IPv4 ranges, enter: 

      # nft add element inet example_table example_set { 192.0.2.0-192.0.2.255 }
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      When you specify an IP address range, you can alternatively use the Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) notation, such as 192.0.2.0/24 in the above example.

41.5.3. Using dynamic sets to add entries from the packet path
Link kopieren

Dynamic sets in nftables automatically add elements, such as IP addresses, ports, and MAC addresses from packet data. This enables real-time collection of data to create dynamic deny or ban lists, instantly reacting to security threats.

Prerequisites

  • The example_chain chain and the example_table table in the inet family exist.

Procedure

  1. Create an empty set. The following examples create a set for IPv4 addresses:

    • To create a set that can store multiple individual IPv4 addresses: 

      # nft add set inet example_table example_set { type ipv4_addr \; }
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    • To create a set that can store IPv4 address ranges: 

      # nft add set inet example_table example_set { type ipv4_addr \; flags interval \; }
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
      Important

      To prevent the shell from interpreting the semicolons as the end of the command, you must escape the semicolons with a backslash.

  2. Create a rule for dynamically adding the source IPv4 addresses of incoming packets to the example_set set: 

    # nft add rule inet example_table example_chain set add ip saddr @example_set
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The command creates a new rule within the example_chain rule chain and the example_table to dynamically add the source IPv4 address of the packet to the example_set.

Verification

  • Ensure the rule was added: 

    # nft list ruleset
...
table ip example_table {
	set example_set {
		type ipv4_addr
		elements = { 192.0.2.250, 192.0.2.251 }
	}

	chain example_chain {
    type filter hook input priority 0
		add @example_set { ip saddr }
	}
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The command displays the entire ruleset currently loaded in nftables. It shows that IPs are actively triggering the rule, and example_set is being updated with the relevant addresses.

Next steps

Once you have a dynamic set of IPs, you can use it for various security, filtering, and traffic control purposes. For example:

  • block, limit, or log network traffic
  • combine with allow-listing to avoid banning trusted users
  • use automatic timeouts to prevent over-blocking

41.6. Using verdict maps in nftables commands
Link kopieren

Verdict maps, which are also known as dictionaries, enable nft to perform an action based on packet information by mapping match criteria to an action.

41.6.1. Using anonymous maps in nftables
Link kopieren

An anonymous map is a { match_criteria : action } statement that you use directly in a rule. The statement can contain multiple comma-separated mappings.

The drawback of an anonymous map is that if you want to change the map, you must replace the rule. For a dynamic solution, use named maps as described in Using named maps in nftables.

For example, you can use an anonymous map to route both TCP and UDP packets of the IPv4 and IPv6 protocol to different chains to count incoming TCP and UDP packets separately.

Procedure

  1. Create a new table: 

    # nft add table inet example_table
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Create the tcp_packets chain in example_table: 

    # nft add chain inet example_table tcp_packets
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Add a rule to tcp_packets that counts the traffic in this chain: 

    # nft add rule inet example_table tcp_packets counter
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Create the udp_packets chain in example_table 

    # nft add chain inet example_table udp_packets
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Add a rule to udp_packets that counts the traffic in this chain: 

    # nft add rule inet example_table udp_packets counter
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  6. Create a chain for incoming traffic. For example, to create a chain named incoming_traffic in example_table that filters incoming traffic: 

    # nft add chain inet example_table incoming_traffic { type filter hook input priority 0 \; }
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  7. Add a rule with an anonymous map to incoming_traffic: 

    # nft add rule inet example_table incoming_traffic ip protocol vmap { tcp : jump tcp_packets, udp : jump udp_packets }
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The anonymous map distinguishes the packets and sends them to the different counter chains based on their protocol.

  8. To list the traffic counters, display example_table: 

    # nft list table inet example_table
table inet example_table {
  chain tcp_packets {
    counter packets 36379 bytes 2103816
  }

  chain udp_packets {
    counter packets 10 bytes 1559
  }

  chain incoming_traffic {
    type filter hook input priority filter; policy accept;
    ip protocol vmap { tcp : jump tcp_packets, udp : jump udp_packets }
  }
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The counters in the tcp_packets and udp_packets chain display both the number of received packets and bytes.

41.6.2. Using named maps in nftables
Link kopieren

The nftables framework supports named maps. You can use these maps in multiple rules within a table. Another benefit over anonymous maps is that you can update a named map without replacing the rules that use it.

When you create a named map, you must specify the type of elements:

  • ipv4_addr for a map whose match part contains an IPv4 address, such as 192.0.2.1.
  • ipv6_addr for a map whose match part contains an IPv6 address, such as 2001:db8:1::1.
  • ether_addr for a map whose match part contains a media access control (MAC) address, such as 52:54:00:6b:66:42.
  • inet_proto for a map whose match part contains an internet protocol type, such as tcp.
  • inet_service for a map whose match part contains an internet services name port number, such as ssh or 22.
  • mark for a map whose match part contains a packet mark. A packet mark can be any positive 32-bit integer value (0 to 2147483647).
  • counter for a map whose match part contains a counter value. The counter value can be any positive 64-bit integer value.
  • quota for a map whose match part contains a quota value. The quota value can be any positive 64-bit integer value.

For example, you can allow or drop incoming packets based on their source IP address. Using a named map, you require only a single rule to configure this scenario while the IP addresses and actions are dynamically stored in the map.

Procedure

  1. Create a table. For example, to create a table named example_table that processes IPv4 packets: 

    # nft add table ip example_table
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Create a chain. For example, to create a chain named example_chain in example_table: 

    # nft add chain ip example_table example_chain { type filter hook input priority 0 \; }
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Important

    To prevent the shell from interpreting the semicolons as the end of the command, you must escape the semicolons with a backslash.

  3. Create an empty map. For example, to create a map for IPv4 addresses: 

    # nft add map ip example_table example_map { type ipv4_addr : verdict \; }
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Create rules that use the map. For example, the following command adds a rule to example_chain in example_table that applies actions to IPv4 addresses which are both defined in example_map: 

    # nft add rule example_table example_chain ip saddr vmap @example_map
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Add IPv4 addresses and corresponding actions to example_map: 

    # nft add element ip example_table example_map { 192.0.2.1 : accept, 192.0.2.2 : drop }
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This example defines the mappings of IPv4 addresses to actions. In combination with the rule created above, the firewall accepts packet from 192.0.2.1 and drops packets from 192.0.2.2.

  6. Optional: Enhance the map by adding another IP address and action statement: 

    # nft add element ip example_table example_map { 192.0.2.3 : accept }
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  7. Optional: Remove an entry from the map: 

    # nft delete element ip example_table example_map { 192.0.2.1 }
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  8. Optional: Display the rule set: 

    # nft list ruleset
table ip example_table {
  map example_map {
    type ipv4_addr : verdict
    elements = { 192.0.2.2 : drop, 192.0.2.3 : accept }
  }

  chain example_chain {
    type filter hook input priority filter; policy accept;
    ip saddr vmap @example_map
  }
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

41.7. Example: Protecting a LAN and DMZ using an nftables script
Link kopieren

Use the nftables framework on a RHEL router to write and install a firewall script that protects the network clients in an internal LAN and a web server in a DMZ from unauthorized access from the internet and from other networks.

Important

This example is only for demonstration purposes and describes a scenario with specific requirements.

Firewall scripts highly depend on the network infrastructure and security requirements. Use this example to learn the concepts of nftables firewalls when you write scripts for your own environment.

41.7.1. Network conditions
Link kopieren

The network in this example has the following conditions.

  • The router is connected to the following networks:

    • The internet through interface enp1s0
    • The internal LAN through interface enp7s0
    • The DMZ through enp8s0
  • The internet interface of the router has both a static IPv4 address (203.0.113.1) and IPv6 address (2001:db8:a::1) assigned.
  • The clients in the internal LAN use only private IPv4 addresses from the range 10.0.0.0/24. Consequently, traffic from the LAN to the internet requires source network address translation (SNAT).
  • The administrator PCs in the internal LAN use the IP addresses 10.0.0.100 and 10.0.0.200.
  • The DMZ uses public IP addresses from the ranges 198.51.100.0/24 and 2001:db8:b::/56.
  • The web server in the DMZ uses the IP addresses 198.51.100.5 and 2001:db8:b::5.
  • The router acts as a caching DNS server for hosts in the LAN and DMZ.

41.7.2. Security requirements to the firewall script
Link kopieren

The following are the requirements to the nftables firewall in the example network.

  • The router must be able to:

    • Recursively resolve DNS queries.
    • Perform all connections on the loopback interface.

  • Clients in the internal LAN must be able to:

    • Query the caching DNS server running on the router.
    • Access the HTTPS server in the DMZ.
    • Access any HTTPS server on the internet.
  • The PCs of the administrators must be able to access the router and every server in the DMZ using SSH.

  • The web server in the DMZ must be able to:

    • Query the caching DNS server running on the router.
    • Access HTTPS servers on the internet to download updates.

  • Hosts on the internet must be able to:

    • Access the HTTPS servers in the DMZ.

  • Additionally, the following security requirements exists:

    • Connection attempts that are not explicitly allowed should be dropped.
    • Dropped packets should be logged.

41.7.3. Configuring logging of dropped packets to a file
Link kopieren

By default, systemd logs kernel messages, such as for dropped packets, to the journal. Additionally, you can configure the rsyslog service to log such entries to a separate file. To ensure that the log file does not grow infinitely, configure a rotation policy.

Prerequisites

  • The rsyslog package is installed.
  • The rsyslog service is running.

Procedure

  1. Create the /etc/rsyslog.d/nftables.conf file with the following content: 

    :msg, startswith, "nft drop" -/var/log/nftables.log
& stop
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Using this configuration, the rsyslog service logs dropped packets to the /var/log/nftables.log file instead of /var/log/messages.

  2. Restart the rsyslog service: 

    # systemctl restart rsyslog
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Create the /etc/logrotate.d/nftables file with the following content to rotate /var/log/nftables.log if the size exceeds 10 MB: 

    /var/log/nftables.log {
  size +10M
  maxage 30
  sharedscripts
  postrotate
    /usr/bin/systemctl kill -s HUP rsyslog.service >/dev/null 2>&1 || true
  endscript
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The maxage 30 setting defines that logrotate removes rotated logs older than 30 days during the next rotation operation.

41.7.4. Writing and activating the nftables script
Link kopieren

This example is an nftables firewall script that runs on a RHEL router and protects the clients in an internal LAN and a web server in a DMZ.

For details about the network and the requirements for the firewall used in the example, see Network conditions and Security requirements to the firewall script.

Warning

This nftables firewall script is only for demonstration purposes. Do not use it without adapting it to your environments and security requirements.

Prerequisites

Procedure

  1. Create the /etc/nftables/firewall.nft script with the following content: 

    # Remove all rules
flush ruleset


# Table for both IPv4 and IPv6 rules
table inet nftables_svc {

  # Define variables for the interface name
  define INET_DEV = enp1s0
  define LAN_DEV  = enp7s0
  define DMZ_DEV  = enp8s0


  # Set with the IPv4 addresses of admin PCs
  set admin_pc_ipv4 {
    type ipv4_addr
    elements = { 10.0.0.100, 10.0.0.200 }
  }


  # Chain for incoming trafic. Default policy: drop
  chain INPUT {
    type filter hook input priority filter
    policy drop

    # Accept packets in established and related state, drop invalid packets
    ct state vmap { established:accept, related:accept, invalid:drop }

    # Accept incoming traffic on loopback interface
    iifname lo accept

    # Allow request from LAN and DMZ to local DNS server
    iifname { $LAN_DEV, $DMZ_DEV } meta l4proto { tcp, udp } th dport 53 accept

    # Allow admins PCs to access the router using SSH
    iifname $LAN_DEV ip saddr @admin_pc_ipv4 tcp dport 22 accept

    # Last action: Log blocked packets
    # (packets that were not accepted in previous rules in this chain)
    log prefix "nft drop IN : "
  }


  # Chain for outgoing traffic. Default policy: drop
  chain OUTPUT {
    type filter hook output priority filter
    policy drop

    # Accept packets in established and related state, drop invalid packets
    ct state vmap { established:accept, related:accept, invalid:drop }

    # Accept outgoing traffic on loopback interface
    oifname lo accept

    # Allow local DNS server to recursively resolve queries
    oifname $INET_DEV meta l4proto { tcp, udp } th dport 53 accept

    # Last action: Log blocked packets
    log prefix "nft drop OUT: "
  }


  # Chain for forwarding traffic. Default policy: drop
  chain FORWARD {
    type filter hook forward priority filter
    policy drop

    # Accept packets in established and related state, drop invalid packets
    ct state vmap { established:accept, related:accept, invalid:drop }

    # IPv4 access from LAN and internet to the HTTPS server in the DMZ
    iifname { $LAN_DEV, $INET_DEV } oifname $DMZ_DEV ip daddr 198.51.100.5 tcp dport 443 accept

    # IPv6 access from internet to the HTTPS server in the DMZ
    iifname $INET_DEV oifname $DMZ_DEV ip6 daddr 2001:db8:b::5 tcp dport 443 accept

    # Access from LAN and DMZ to HTTPS servers on the internet
    iifname { $LAN_DEV, $DMZ_DEV } oifname $INET_DEV tcp dport 443 accept

    # Last action: Log blocked packets
    log prefix "nft drop FWD: "
  }


  # Postrouting chain to handle SNAT
  chain postrouting {
    type nat hook postrouting priority srcnat; policy accept;

    # SNAT for IPv4 traffic from LAN to internet
    iifname $LAN_DEV oifname $INET_DEV snat ip to 203.0.113.1
  }
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Include the /etc/nftables/firewall.nft script in the /etc/sysconfig/nftables.conf file: 

    include "/etc/nftables/firewall.nft"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Enable IPv4 forwarding: 

    # echo "net.ipv4.ip_forward=1" > /etc/sysctl.d/95-IPv4-forwarding.conf
# sysctl -p /etc/sysctl.d/95-IPv4-forwarding.conf
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Enable and start the nftables service: 

    # systemctl enable --now nftables
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Optional: Verify the nftables rule set: 

    # nft list ruleset
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Try to perform an access that the firewall prevents. For example, try to access the router using SSH from the DMZ: 

    # ssh router.example.com
ssh: connect to host router.example.com port 22: Network is unreachable
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Depending on your logging settings, search:

    • The systemd journal for the blocked packets: 

      # journalctl -k -g "nft drop"
Oct 14 17:27:18 router kernel: nft drop IN : IN=enp8s0 OUT= MAC=... SRC=198.51.100.5 DST=198.51.100.1 ... PROTO=TCP SPT=40464 DPT=22 ... SYN ...
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    • The /var/log/nftables.log file for the blocked packets: 

      Oct 14 17:27:18 router kernel: nft drop IN : IN=enp8s0 OUT= MAC=... SRC=198.51.100.5 DST=198.51.100.1 ... PROTO=TCP SPT=40464 DPT=22 ... SYN ...
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

41.8. Using nftables to limit the amount of connections
Link kopieren

You can use nftables to limit the number of connections or to block IP addresses that attempt to establish a given amount of connections to prevent them from using too many system resources.

41.8.1. Limiting the number of connections by using nftables
Link kopieren

By using the ct count parameter of the nft utility, you can limit the number of simultaneous connections per IP address. For example, you can use this feature to configure that each source IP address can only establish two parallel SSH connections to a host.

Procedure

  1. Create the filter table with the inet address family: 

    # nft add table inet filter
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Add the input chain to the inet filter table: 

    # nft add chain inet filter input { type filter hook input priority 0 \; }
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Create a dynamic set for IPv4 addresses: 

    # nft add set inet filter limit-ssh { type ipv4_addr\; flags dynamic \;}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Add a rule to the input chain that allows only two simultaneous incoming connections to the SSH port (22) from an IPv4 address and rejects all further connections from the same IP: 

    # nft add rule inet filter input tcp dport ssh ct state new add @limit-ssh { ip saddr ct count over 2 } counter reject
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Establish more than two new simultaneous SSH connections from the same IP address to the host. Nftables refuses connections to the SSH port if two connections are already established.

  2. Display the limit-ssh dynamic set: 

    # nft list set inet filter limit-ssh
table inet filter {
  set limit-ssh {
    type ipv4_addr
    size 65535
    flags dynamic
    elements = { 192.0.2.1 ct count over 2 , 192.0.2.2 ct count over 2 }
  }
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The elements entry displays addresses that currently match the rule. In this example, elements lists IP addresses that have active connections to the SSH port. Note that the output does not display the number of active connections or if connections were rejected.

You can temporarily block hosts that are establishing more than ten IPv4 TCP connections within one minute.

Procedure

  1. Create the filter table with the ip address family: 

    # nft add table ip filter
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Add the input chain to the filter table: 

    # nft add chain ip filter input { type filter hook input priority 0 \; }
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Add a rule that drops all packets from source addresses that attempt to establish more than ten TCP connections within one minute: 

    # nft add rule ip filter input ip protocol tcp ct state new, untracked meter ratemeter { ip saddr timeout 5m limit rate over 10/minute } drop
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The timeout 5m parameter defines that nftables automatically removes entries after five minutes to prevent that the meter fills up with stale entries.

Verification

  • To display the meter’s content, enter: 

    # nft list meter ip filter ratemeter
table ip filter {
  meter ratemeter {
    type ipv4_addr
    size 65535
    flags dynamic,timeout
    elements = { 192.0.2.1 limit rate over 10/minute timeout 5m expires 4m58s224ms }
  }
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

41.9. Debugging nftables rules
Link kopieren

The nftables framework provides different options for administrators to debug rules and if packets match them.

41.9.1. Creating a rule with a counter
Link kopieren

To identify if a rule is matched, you can use a counter.

Prerequisites

  • The chain to which you want to add the rule exists.

Procedure

  1. Add a new rule with the counter parameter to the chain. The following example adds a rule with a counter that allows TCP traffic on port 22 and counts the packets and traffic that match this rule: 

    # nft add rule inet example_table example_chain tcp dport 22 counter accept
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. To display the counter values: 

    # nft list ruleset
table inet example_table {
  chain example_chain {
    type filter hook input priority filter; policy accept;
    tcp dport ssh counter packets 6872 bytes 105448565 accept
  }
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

41.9.2. Adding a counter to an existing rule
Link kopieren

To identify if a rule is matched, you can use a counter.

Prerequisites

  • The rule to which you want to add the counter exists.

Procedure

  1. Display the rules in the chain including their handles: 

    # nft --handle list chain inet example_table example_chain
table inet example_table {
  chain example_chain { # handle 1
    type filter hook input priority filter; policy accept;
    tcp dport ssh accept # handle 4
  }
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Add the counter by replacing the rule but with the counter parameter. The following example replaces the rule displayed in the previous step and adds a counter: 

    # nft replace rule inet example_table example_chain handle 4 tcp dport 22 counter accept
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. To display the counter values: 

    # nft list ruleset
table inet example_table {
  chain example_chain {
    type filter hook input priority filter; policy accept;
    tcp dport ssh counter packets 6872 bytes 105448565 accept
  }
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

41.9.3. Monitoring packets that match an existing rule
Link kopieren

The tracing feature in nftables in combination with the nft monitor command enables administrators to display packets that match a rule. You can enable tracing for a rule an use it to monitoring packets that match this rule.

Prerequisites

  • The rule to which you want to add the counter exists.

Procedure

  1. Display the rules in the chain including their handles: 

    # nft --handle list chain inet example_table example_chain
table inet example_table {
  chain example_chain { # handle 1
    type filter hook input priority filter; policy accept;
    tcp dport ssh accept # handle 4
  }
}
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Add the tracing feature by replacing the rule but with the meta nftrace set 1 parameters. The following example replaces the rule displayed in the previous step and enables tracing: 

    # nft replace rule inet example_table example_chain handle 4 tcp dport 22 meta nftrace set 1 accept
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Use the nft monitor command to display the tracing. The following example filters the output of the command to display only entries that contain inet example_table example_chain: 

    # nft monitor | grep "inet example_table example_chain"
trace id 3c5eb15e inet example_table example_chain packet: iif "enp1s0" ether saddr 52:54:00:17:ff:e4 ether daddr 52:54:00:72:2f:6e ip saddr 192.0.2.1 ip daddr 192.0.2.2 ip dscp cs0 ip ecn not-ect ip ttl 64 ip id 49710 ip protocol tcp ip length 60 tcp sport 56728 tcp dport ssh tcp flags == syn tcp window 64240
trace id 3c5eb15e inet example_table example_chain rule tcp dport ssh nftrace set 1 accept (verdict accept)
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Warning

    Depending on the number of rules with tracing enabled and the amount of matching traffic, the nft monitor command can display a lot of output. Use grep or other utilities to filter the output.

41.10. Backing up and restoring the nftables rule set
Link kopieren

You can backup nftables rules to a file and later restoring them. Also, administrators can use a file with the rules to, for example, transfer the rules to a different server.

41.10.1. Backing up the nftables rule set to a file
Link kopieren

You can use the nft utility to back up the nftables rule set to a file.

Procedure

  • To backup nftables rules:

    • In a format produced by nft list ruleset format: 

      # nft list ruleset > file.nft
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    • In JSON format: 

      # nft -j list ruleset > file.json
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

41.10.2. Restoring the nftables rule set from a file
Link kopieren

You can restore the nftables rule set from a file.

Procedure

  • To restore nftables rules:

    • If the file to restore is in the format produced by nft list ruleset or contains nft commands directly: 

      # nft -f file.nft
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    • If the file to restore is in JSON format: 

      # nft -j -f file.json
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

The xdp-filter utility uses XDP to drop packets directly at the network interface, making it faster than filters, such as nftables. It helps block traffic quickly during DDoS attacks and you can filter by IP, MAC address, or port.

For example, during testing, Red Hat dropped 26 million network packets per second on a single core, which is significantly higher than the drop rate of nftables on the same hardware.

The xdp-filter utility allows or drops incoming network packets using XDP. You can create rules to filter traffic to or from specific:

  • IP addresses
  • MAC addresses
  • Ports

Note that, even if xdp-filter has a significantly higher packet-processing rate, it does not have the same capabilities as, for example, nftables. Consider xdp-filter a conceptual utility to demonstrate packet filtering using XDP. Additionally, you can use the code of the utility for a better understanding of how to write your own XDP applications.

Important

On other architectures than AMD and Intel 64-bit, the xdp-filter utility is provided as a Technology Preview only. Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production Service Level Agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend using them for production. These previews provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.

See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.

42.1. Dropping network packets that match an xdp-filter rule
Link kopieren

The xdp-filter utility can use an allow policy that allows all traffic except packets that match specific rules, such as those from a particular source IP address, source MAC address, or to a specific destination port.

Prerequisites

  • The xdp-tools package is installed.
  • A network driver that supports XDP programs.

Procedure

  1. Load xdp-filter to process incoming packets on a certain interface, such as enp1s0: 

    # xdp-filter load enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    By default, xdp-filter uses the allow policy, and the utility drops only traffic that matches any rule.

    Optionally, use the -f feature option to enable only particular features, such as tcp, ipv4, or ethernet. Loading only the required features instead of all of them increases the speed of packet processing. To enable multiple features, separate them with a comma.

    If the command fails with an error, the network driver does not support XDP programs.

  2. Add rules to drop packets that match them. For example:

    • To drop incoming packets to port 22, enter: 

      # xdp-filter port 22
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      This command adds a rule that matches TCP and UDP traffic. To match only a particular protocol, use the -p protocol option.

    • To drop incoming packets from 192.0.2.1, enter: 

      # xdp-filter ip 192.0.2.1 -m src
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      Note that xdp-filter does not support IP ranges.

    • To drop incoming packets from MAC address 00:53:00:AA:07:BE, enter: 

      # xdp-filter ether 00:53:00:AA:07:BE -m src
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Use the following command to display statistics about dropped and allowed packets: 

    # xdp-filter status
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

The xdp-filter utility can use a deny policy that drops all traffic except packets that match specific rules, such as those from a particular source IP address, source MAC address, or to a specific destination port.

Warning

If you set the default policy to deny when you load xdp-filter on an interface, the kernel immediately drops all packets from this interface until you create rules that allow certain traffic. To avoid being locked out from the system, enter the commands locally or connect through a different network interface to the host.

Prerequisites

  • The xdp-tools package is installed.
  • You are logged in to the host either locally or using a network interface for which you do not plan to filter the traffic.
  • A network driver that supports XDP programs.

Procedure

  1. Load xdp-filter to process packets on a certain interface, such as enp1s0: 

    # xdp-filter load enp1s0 -p deny
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Optionally, use the -f feature option to enable only particular features, such as tcp, ipv4, or ethernet. Loading only the required features instead of all of them increases the speed of packet processing. To enable multiple features, separate them with a comma.

    If the command fails with an error, the network driver does not support XDP programs.

  2. Add rules to allow packets that match them. For example:

    • To allow packets to port 22, enter: 

      # xdp-filter port 22
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      This command adds a rule that matches TCP and UDP traffic. To match only a particular protocol, pass the -p protocol option to the command.

    • To allow packets to 192.0.2.1, enter: 

      # xdp-filter ip 192.0.2.1
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      Note that xdp-filter does not support IP ranges.

    • To allow packets to MAC address 00:53:00:AA:07:BE, enter: 

      # xdp-filter ether 00:53:00:AA:07:BE
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    Important

    The xdp-filter utility does not support stateful packet inspection. This requires that you either do not set a mode using the -m mode option or you add explicit rules to allow incoming traffic that the machine receives in reply to outgoing traffic.

Verification

  • Use the following command to display statistics about dropped and allowed packets: 

    # xdp-filter status
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 43. Capturing network packets
Link kopieren

To debug network issues and communications, you can capture network packets. The following sections provide instructions and additional information about capturing network packets.

The xdpdump utility captures network packets, including those dropped or modified by XDP programs. Unlike tcpdump, xdpdump uses an eBPF program, allowing it to capture packets that traditional user-space utilities cannot.

You can use xdpdump to debug XDP programs that are already attached to an interface. Therefore, the utility can capture packets before an XDP program is started and after it has finished. In the latter case, xdpdump also captures the XDP action. By default, xdpdump captures incoming packets at the entry of the XDP program.

Important

On other architectures than AMD and Intel 64-bit, the xdpdump utility is provided as a Technology Preview only. Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production Service Level Agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend using them for production. These previews provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.

See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.

Note that xdpdump has no packet filter or decode capabilities. However, you can use it in combination with tcpdump for packet decoding.

Prerequisites

  • A network driver that supports XDP programs.
  • An XDP program is loaded to the enp1s0 interface. If no program is loaded, xdpdump captures packets in a similar way tcpdump does, for backward compatibility.

Procedure

  1. To capture packets on the enp1s0 interface and write them to the /root/capture.pcap file, enter: 

    # xdpdump -i enp1s0 -w /root/capture.pcap
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  2. To stop capturing packets, press Ctrl+C.

Chapter 44. Understanding the eBPF networking features in RHEL 8
Link kopieren

The extended Berkeley Packet Filter (eBPF) is an in-kernel virtual machine that allows code execution in the kernel space. This code runs in a restricted sandbox environment with access only to a limited set of functions.

In networking, you can use eBPF to complement or replace kernel packet processing. Depending on the hook you use, eBPF programs have, for example:

  • Read and write access to packet data and metadata
  • Can look up sockets and routes
  • Can set socket options
  • Can redirect packets

44.1. Overview of networking eBPF features in RHEL 8
Link kopieren

You can attach extended Berkeley Packet Filter (eBPF) networking programs to the following hooks in RHEL:

  • eXpress Data Path (XDP): Provides early access to received packets before the kernel networking stack processes them.
  • tc eBPF classifier with direct-action flag: Provides powerful packet processing on ingress and egress.
  • Control Groups version 2 (cgroup v2): Enables filtering and overriding socket-based operations performed by programs in a control group.
  • Socket filtering: Enables filtering of packets received from sockets. This feature was also available in the classic Berkeley Packet Filter (cBPF), but has been extended to support eBPF programs.
  • Stream parser: Enables splitting up streams to individual messages, filtering, and redirecting them to sockets.
  • SO_REUSEPORT socket selection: Provides a programmable selection of a receiving socket from a reuseport socket group.
  • Flow dissector: Enables overriding the way the kernel parses packet headers in certain situations.
  • TCP congestion control callbacks: Enables implementing a custom TCP congestion control algorithm.
  • Routes with encapsulation: Enables creating custom tunnel encapsulation.

Note that Red Hat does not support all of the eBPF functionality that is available in RHEL and described here. For further details and the support status of the individual hooks, see the RHEL 8 Release Notes and the following overview.

XDP

You can attach programs of the BPF_PROG_TYPE_XDP type to a network interface. The kernel then executes the program on received packets before the kernel network stack starts processing them. This allows fast packet forwarding in certain situations, such as fast packet dropping to prevent distributed denial of service (DDoS) attacks and fast packet redirects for load balancing scenarios.

You can also use XDP for different forms of packet monitoring and sampling. The kernel allows XDP programs to modify packets and to pass them for further processing to the kernel network stack.

The following XDP modes are available:

  • Native (driver) XDP: The kernel executes the program from the earliest possible point during packet reception. At this moment, the kernel did not parse the packet and, therefore, no metadata provided by the kernel is available. This mode requires that the network interface driver supports XDP but not all drivers support this native mode.
  • Generic XDP: The kernel network stack executes the XDP program early in the processing. At that time, kernel data structures have been allocated, and the packet has been pre-processed. If a packet should be dropped or redirected, it requires a significant overhead compared to the native mode. However, the generic mode does not require network interface driver support and works with all network interfaces.
  • Offloaded XDP: The kernel executes the XDP program on the network interface instead of on the host CPU. Note that this requires specific hardware, and only certain eBPF features are available in this mode.

On RHEL, load all XDP programs using the libxdp library. This library enables system-controlled usage of XDP.

Note

Currently, there are some system configuration limitations for XDP programs. For example, you must disable certain hardware offload features on the receiving interface. Additionally, not all features are available with all drivers that support the native mode.

In RHEL 8.7, Red Hat supports the XDP feature only if all of the following conditions apply:

  • You load the XDP program on an AMD or Intel 64-bit architecture.
  • You use the libxdp library to load the program into the kernel.
  • The XDP program does not use the XDP hardware offloading.

Additionally, Red Hat provides the following usage of XDP features as unsupported Technology Preview:

  • Loading XDP programs on architectures other than AMD and Intel 64-bit. Note that the libxdp library is not available for architectures other than AMD and Intel 64-bit.
  • The XDP hardware offloading.
AF_XDP

Using an XDP program that filters and redirects packets to a given AF_XDP socket, you can use one or more sockets from the AF_XDP protocol family to quickly copy packets from the kernel to the user space.

In RHEL 8.7, Red Hat provides this feature as an unsupported Technology Preview.

Traffic Control

The Traffic Control (tc) subsystem offers the following types of eBPF programs:

  • BPF_PROG_TYPE_SCHED_CLS
  • BPF_PROG_TYPE_SCHED_ACT

These types enable you to write custom tc classifiers and tc actions in eBPF. Together with the parts of the tc ecosystem, this provides the ability for powerful packet processing and is the core part of several container networking orchestration solutions.

In most cases, only the classifier is used, as with the direct-action flag, the eBPF classifier can execute actions directly from the same eBPF program. The clsact Queueing Discipline (qdisc) has been designed to enable this on the ingress side.

Note that using a flow dissector eBPF program can influence operation of some other qdiscs and tc classifiers, such as flower.

The eBPF for tc feature is fully supported in RHEL 8.2 and later.

Socket filter

Several utilities use or have used the classic Berkeley Packet Filter (cBPF) for filtering packets received on a socket. For example, the tcpdump utility enables the user to specify expressions, which tcpdump then translates into cBPF code.

As an alternative to cBPF, the kernel allows eBPF programs of the BPF_PROG_TYPE_SOCKET_FILTER type for the same purpose.

In RHEL 8.7, Red Hat provides this feature as an unsupported Technology Preview.

Control Groups

In RHEL, you can use multiple types of eBPF programs that you can attach to a cgroup. The kernel executes these programs when a program in the given cgroup performs an operation. Note that you can use only cgroups version 2.

The following networking-related cgroup eBPF programs are available in RHEL:

  • BPF_PROG_TYPE_SOCK_OPS: The kernel calls this program on various TCP events. The program can adjust the behavior of the kernel TCP stack, including custom TCP header options, and so on.
  • BPF_PROG_TYPE_CGROUP_SOCK_ADDR: The kernel calls this program during connect, bind, sendto, recvmsg, getpeername, and getsockname operations. This program allows changing IP addresses and ports. This is useful when you implement socket-based network address translation (NAT) in eBPF.
  • BPF_PROG_TYPE_CGROUP_SOCKOPT: The kernel calls this program during setsockopt and getsockopt operations and allows changing the options.
  • BPF_PROG_TYPE_CGROUP_SOCK: The kernel calls this program during socket creation, socket releasing, and binding to addresses. You can use these programs to allow or deny the operation, or only to inspect socket creation for statistics.
  • BPF_PROG_TYPE_CGROUP_SKB: This program filters individual packets on ingress and egress, and can accept or reject packets.
  • BPF_CGROUP_INET4_GETPEERNAME, BPF_CGROUP_INET6_GETPEERNAME, BPF_CGROUP_INET4_GETSOCKNAME, and BPF_CGROUP_INET6_GETSOCKNAME: Using these programs, you can override the result of getsockname and getpeername system calls. This is useful when you implement socket-based network address translation (NAT) in eBPF.

In RHEL 8.7, Red Hat provides this feature as an unsupported Technology Preview.

Stream Parser

A stream parser operates on a group of sockets that are added to a special eBPF map. The eBPF program then processes packets that the kernel receives or sends on those sockets.

The following stream parser eBPF programs are available in RHEL:

  • BPF_PROG_TYPE_SK_SKB: An eBPF program parses packets received from the socket into individual messages, and instructs the kernel to drop those messages or send them to another socket in the group.
  • BPF_PROG_TYPE_SK_MSG: This program filters egress messages. An eBPF program parses the packets into individual messages and either approves or rejects them.

In RHEL 8.7, Red Hat provides this feature as an unsupported Technology Preview.

SO_REUSEPORT socket selection

Using this socket option, you can bind multiple sockets to the same IP address and port. Without eBPF, the kernel selects the receiving socket based on a connection hash. With the BPF_PROG_TYPE_SK_REUSEPORT program, the selection of the receiving socket is fully programmable.

In RHEL 8.7, Red Hat provides this feature as an unsupported Technology Preview.

Flow dissector

When the kernel needs to process packet headers without going through the full protocol decode, they are dissected. For example, this happens in the tc subsystem, in multipath routing, in bonding, or when calculating a packet hash. In this situation the kernel parses the packet headers and fills internal structures with the information from the packet headers. You can replace this internal parsing using the BPF_PROG_TYPE_FLOW_DISSECTOR program. Note that you can only dissect TCP and UDP over IPv4 and IPv6 in eBPF in RHEL.

In RHEL 8.7, Red Hat provides this feature as an unsupported Technology Preview.

TCP Congestion Control

You can write a custom TCP congestion control algorithm using a group of BPF_PROG_TYPE_STRUCT_OPS programs that implement struct tcp_congestion_oops callbacks. An algorithm that is implemented this way is available to the system alongside the built-in kernel algorithms.

In RHEL 8.7, Red Hat provides this feature as an unsupported Technology Preview.

Routes with encapsulation

You can attach one of the following eBPF program types to routes in the routing table as a tunnel encapsulation attribute:

  • BPF_PROG_TYPE_LWT_IN
  • BPF_PROG_TYPE_LWT_OUT
  • BPF_PROG_TYPE_LWT_XMIT

The functionality of such an eBPF program is limited to specific tunnel configurations and does not allow creating a generic encapsulation or decapsulation solution.

In RHEL 8.7, Red Hat provides this feature as an unsupported Technology Preview.

Socket lookup

To bypass limitations of the bind system call, use an eBPF program of the BPF_PROG_TYPE_SK_LOOKUP type. Such programs can select a listening socket for new incoming TCP connections or an unconnected socket for UDP packets.

In RHEL 8.7, Red Hat provides this feature as an unsupported Technology Preview.

44.2. Overview of XDP features in RHEL 8 by network cards
Link kopieren

The following is an overview of XDP-enabled network cards and the XDP features you can use with them:

Expand
Network cardDriverBasicRedirectTargetHW offloadZero-copy

Amazon Elastic Network Adapter

ena

yes

yes

yes [a]

no

no

Broadcom NetXtreme-C/E 10/25/40/50 gigabit Ethernet

bnxt_en

yes

yes

yes [a]

no

no

Cavium Thunder Virtual function

nicvf

yes

no

no

no

no

Google Virtual NIC (gVNIC) support

gve

yes

yes

yes

no

yes

Intel® 10GbE PCI Express Virtual Function Ethernet

ixgbevf

yes

no

no

no

no

Intel® 10GbE PCI Express adapters

ixgbe

yes

yes

yes [a]

no

yes

Intel® Ethernet Connection E800 Series

ice

yes

yes

yes [a]

no

yes

Intel® Ethernet Controller I225-LM/I225-V family

igc

yes

yes

yes

no

yes

Intel® Ethernet Controller XL710 Family

i40e

yes

yes

yes [a] [b]

no

yes

Intel® PCI Express Gigabit adapters

igb

yes

yes

yes [a]

no

no

Mellanox 5th generation network adapters (ConnectX series)

mlx5_core

yes

yes

yes [b]

no

yes

Mellanox Technologies 1/10/40Gbit Ethernet

mlx4_en

yes

yes

no

no

no

Microsoft Azure Network Adapter

mana

yes

yes

yes

no

no

Microsoft Hyper-V virtual network

hv_netvsc

yes

yes

yes

no

no

Netronome® NFP4000/NFP6000 NIC

nfp

yes

no

no

yes

no

QEMU Virtio network

virtio_net

yes

yes

yes [a]

no

no

QLogic QED 25/40/100Gb Ethernet NIC

qede

yes

yes

yes

no

no

Solarflare SFC9000/SFC9100/EF100-family

sfc

yes

yes

yes [b]

no

no

Universal TUN/TAP device

tun

yes

yes

yes

no

no

Virtual Ethernet pair device

veth

yes

yes

yes

no

no

[a] Only if an XDP program is loaded on the interface.
[b] Requires several XDP TX queues allocated that are larger or equal to the largest CPU index.

Legend:

  • Basic: Supports basic return codes: DROP, PASS, ABORTED, and TX.
  • Redirect: Supports the REDIRECT return code.
  • Target: Can be a target of a REDIRECT return code.
  • HW offload: Supports XDP hardware offload.
  • Zero-copy: Supports the zero-copy mode for the AF_XDP protocol family.

Chapter 45. Network tracing using the BPF compiler collection
Link kopieren

BPF Compiler Collection (BCC) is a library, which facilitates the creation of the extended Berkeley Packet Filter (eBPF) programs. The main utility of eBPF programs is analyzing the operating system performance and network performance without experiencing overhead or security issues.

BCC removes the need for users to know deep technical details of eBPF, and provides many out-of-the-box starting points, such as the bcc-tools package with pre-created eBPF programs.

Note

The eBPF programs are triggered on events, such as disk I/O, TCP connections, and process creations. It is unlikely that the programs should cause the kernel to crash, loop or become unresponsive because they run in a safe virtual machine in the kernel.

45.1. Installing the bcc-tools package
Link kopieren

Install the bcc-tools package, which also installs the BPF Compiler Collection (BCC) library as a dependency.

Procedure

  • Install bcc-tools. 

    # yum install bcc-tools
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The BCC tools are installed in the /usr/share/bcc/tools/ directory.

Verification

  • Inspect the installed tools: 

    # ls -l /usr/share/bcc/tools/
...
-rwxr-xr-x. 1 root root  4198 Dec 14 17:53 dcsnoop
-rwxr-xr-x. 1 root root  3931 Dec 14 17:53 dcstat
-rwxr-xr-x. 1 root root 20040 Dec 14 17:53 deadlock_detector
-rw-r--r--. 1 root root  7105 Dec 14 17:53 deadlock_detector.c
drwxr-xr-x. 3 root root  8192 Mar 11 10:28 doc
-rwxr-xr-x. 1 root root  7588 Dec 14 17:53 execsnoop
-rwxr-xr-x. 1 root root  6373 Dec 14 17:53 ext4dist
-rwxr-xr-x. 1 root root 10401 Dec 14 17:53 ext4slower
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The doc directory in the listing provides documentation for each tool.

45.2. Displaying TCP connections added to the Kernel’s accept queue
Link kopieren

By using the tcpaccept utility, you can monitor newly accepted connections by tracing the kernel’s accept() function.

After the kernel receives the ACK packet in a TCP 3-way handshake, the kernel moves the connection from the SYN queue to the accept queue after the connection’s state changes to ESTABLISHED. Therefore, only successful TCP connections are visible in this queue.

The tcpaccept utility uses eBPF features to display all connections the kernel adds to the accept queue. The utility is lightweight because it traces the accept() function of the kernel instead of capturing packets and filtering them. For example, use tcpaccept for general troubleshooting to display new connections the server has accepted.

Procedure

  1. Enter the following command to start the tracing the kernel accept queue: 

    # /usr/share/bcc/tools/tcpaccept
PID   COMM      IP RADDR         RPORT  LADDR    LPORT
843   sshd      4  192.0.2.17    50598  192.0.2.1  22
1107  ns-slapd  4  198.51.100.6  38772  192.0.2.1  389
1107  ns-slapd  4  203.0.113.85  38774  192.0.2.1  389
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Each time the kernel accepts a connection, tcpaccept displays the details of the connections.

  2. Press Ctrl+C to stop the tracing process.

45.3. Tracing outgoing TCP connection attempts
Link kopieren

The tcpconnect utility uses eBPF features to trace outgoing TCP connection attempts. The output of the utility also includes connections that failed.

The tcpconnect utility is lightweight because it traces, for example, the connect() function of the kernel instead of capturing packets and filtering them.

Procedure

  1. Enter the following command to start the tracing process that displays all outgoing connections: 

    # /usr/share/bcc/tools/tcpconnect
PID    COMM         IP SADDR      DADDR          DPORT
31346  curl         4  192.0.2.1  198.51.100.16  80
31348  telnet       4  192.0.2.1  203.0.113.231  23
31361  isc-worker00 4  192.0.2.1  192.0.2.254    53
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Each time the kernel processes an outgoing connection, tcpconnect displays the details of the connections.

  2. Press Ctrl+C to stop the tracing process.

45.4. Measuring the latency of outgoing TCP connections
Link kopieren

The tcpconnlat utility uses eBPF features to measure the time between a sent SYN packet and the received response packet.

The TCP connection latency is the time taken to establish a connection. This typically involves the kernel TCP/IP processing and network round trip time, and not the application runtime.

Procedure

  1. Start measuring the latency of outgoing connections: 

    # /usr/share/bcc/tools/tcpconnlat
PID    COMM         IP SADDR      DADDR          DPORT LAT(ms)
32151  isc-worker00 4  192.0.2.1  192.0.2.254    53    0.60
32155  ssh          4  192.0.2.1  203.0.113.190  22    26.34
32319  curl         4  192.0.2.1  198.51.100.59  443   188.96
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Each time the kernel processes an outgoing connection, tcpconnlat displays the details of the connection after the kernel receives the response packet.

  2. Press Ctrl+C to stop the tracing process.

The tcpdrop utility enables administrators to display details about TCP packets and segments that were dropped by the kernel. Use this utility to debug high rates of dropped packets that can cause the remote system to send timer-based retransmits.

High rates of dropped packets and segments can impact the performance of a server. Instead of capturing and filtering packets, which is resource-intensive, the tcpdrop utility uses eBPF features to retrieve the information directly from the kernel.

Procedure

  1. Enter the following command to start displaying details about dropped TCP packets and segments: 

    # /usr/share/bcc/tools/tcpdrop
TIME     PID    IP SADDR:SPORT       > DADDR:DPORT   STATE (FLAGS)
13:28:39 32253  4  192.0.2.85:51616  > 192.0.2.1:22  CLOSE_WAIT (FIN|ACK)
	b'tcp_drop+0x1'
	b'tcp_data_queue+0x2b9'
	...

13:28:39 1      4  192.0.2.85:51616  > 192.0.2.1:22   CLOSE (ACK)
	b'tcp_drop+0x1'
	b'tcp_rcv_state_process+0xe2'
	...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Each time the kernel drops TCP packets and segments, tcpdrop displays the details of the connection, including the kernel stack trace that led to the dropped package.

  2. Press Ctrl+C to stop the tracing process.

45.6. Tracing TCP sessions
Link kopieren

The tcplife utility uses eBPF to trace TCP sessions that open and close, and prints a line of output to summarize each one. Administrators can use tcplife to identify connections and the amount of transferred traffic.

For example, you can display connections to port 22 (SSH) to retrieve the following information:

  • The local process ID (PID)
  • The local process name
  • The local IP address and port number
  • The remote IP address and port number
  • The amount of received and transmitted traffic in KB.
  • The time in milliseconds the connection was active

Procedure

  1. Enter the following command to start the tracing of connections to the local port 22: 

    # /usr/share/bcc/tools/tcplife -L 22
PID   COMM    LADDR      LPORT RADDR       RPORT TX_KB  RX_KB      MS
19392 sshd    192.0.2.1  22    192.0.2.17  43892    53     52 6681.95
19431 sshd    192.0.2.1  22    192.0.2.245 43902    81 249381 7585.09
19487 sshd    192.0.2.1  22    192.0.2.121 43970  6998     7 16740.35
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Each time a connection is closed, tcplife displays the details of the connections.

  2. Press Ctrl+C to stop the tracing process.

45.7. Tracing TCP retransmissions
Link kopieren

The tcpretrans utility displays details about TCP retransmissions, such as the local and remote IP address and port number, as well as the TCP state at the time of the retransmissions.

The utility uses eBPF features and, therefore, has a very low overhead.

Procedure

  1. Use the following command to start displaying TCP retransmission details: 

    # /usr/share/bcc/tools/tcpretrans
TIME     PID  IP LADDR:LPORT   T> RADDR:RPORT         STATE
00:23:02 0    4  192.0.2.1:22  R> 198.51.100.0:26788  ESTABLISHED
00:23:02 0    4  192.0.2.1:22  R> 198.51.100.0:26788  ESTABLISHED
00:45:43 0    4  192.0.2.1:22  R> 198.51.100.0:17634  ESTABLISHED
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Each time the kernel calls the TCP retransmit function, tcpretrans displays the details of the connection.

  2. Press Ctrl+C to stop the tracing process.

45.8. Displaying TCP state change information
Link kopieren

During a TCP session, the TCP state changes. The tcpstates utility uses eBPF functions to trace these state changes, and prints details including the duration in each state. For example, use tcpstates to identify if connections spend too much time in the initialization state.

Procedure

  1. Use the following command to start tracing TCP state changes: 

    # /usr/share/bcc/tools/tcpstates
SKADDR           C-PID C-COMM     LADDR     LPORT RADDR       RPORT OLDSTATE    -> NEWSTATE    MS
ffff9cd377b3af80 0     swapper/1  0.0.0.0   22    0.0.0.0     0     LISTEN      -> SYN_RECV    0.000
ffff9cd377b3af80 0     swapper/1  192.0.2.1 22    192.0.2.45  53152 SYN_RECV    -> ESTABLISHED 0.067
ffff9cd377b3af80 818   sssd_nss   192.0.2.1 22    192.0.2.45  53152 ESTABLISHED -> CLOSE_WAIT  65636.773
ffff9cd377b3af80 1432  sshd       192.0.2.1 22    192.0.2.45  53152 CLOSE_WAIT  -> LAST_ACK    24.409
ffff9cd377b3af80 1267  pulseaudio 192.0.2.1 22    192.0.2.45  53152 LAST_ACK    -> CLOSE       0.376
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Each time a connection changes its state, tcpstates displays a new line with updated connection details.

    If multiple connections change their state at the same time, use the socket address in the first column (SKADDR) to determine which entries belong to the same connection.

  2. Press Ctrl+C to stop the tracing process.

45.9. Summarizing and aggregating TCP traffic sent to specific subnets
Link kopieren

The tcpsubnet utility summarizes and aggregates IPv4 TCP traffic that the local host sends to subnets and displays the output on a fixed interval. The utility uses eBPF features to collect and summarize the data to reduce the overhead.

By default, tcpsubnet summarizes traffic for the following subnets:

  • 127.0.0.1/32
  • 10.0.0.0/8
  • 172.16.0.0/12
  • 192.0.2.0/24/16
  • 0.0.0.0/0

Note that the last subnet (0.0.0.0/0) is a catch-all option. The tcpsubnet utility counts all traffic for subnets different than the first four in this catch-all entry.

Follow the procedure to count the traffic for the 192.0.2.0/24 and 198.51.100.0/24 subnets. Traffic to other subnets will be tracked in the 0.0.0.0/0 catch-all subnet entry.

Procedure

  1. Start monitoring the amount of traffic sent to the 192.0.2.0/24, 198.51.100.0/24, and other subnets: 

    # /usr/share/bcc/tools/tcpsubnet 192.0.2.0/24,198.51.100.0/24,0.0.0.0/0
Tracing... Output every 1 secs. Hit Ctrl-C to end
[02/21/20 10:04:50]
192.0.2.0/24           856
198.51.100.0/24       7467
[02/21/20 10:04:51]
192.0.2.0/24          1200
198.51.100.0/24       8763
0.0.0.0/0              673
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This command displays the traffic in bytes for the specified subnets once per second.

  2. Press Ctrl+C to stop the tracing process.

45.10. Displaying the network throughput by IP address and port
Link kopieren

The tcptop utility displays TCP traffic the host sends and receives in kilobytes. The report automatically refreshes and contains only active TCP connections. The utility uses eBPF features and, therefore, has only a very low overhead.

Procedure

  1. To monitor the sent and received traffic, enter: 

    # /usr/share/bcc/tools/tcptop
13:46:29 loadavg: 0.10 0.03 0.01 1/215 3875

PID    COMM         LADDR           RADDR              RX_KB   TX_KB
3853   3853         192.0.2.1:22    192.0.2.165:41838  32     102626
1285   sshd         192.0.2.1:22    192.0.2.45:39240   0           0
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The output of the command includes only active TCP connections. If the local or remote system closes a connection, the connection is no longer visible in the output.

  2. Press Ctrl+C to stop the tracing process.

45.11. Tracing established TCP connections
Link kopieren

The tcptracer utility traces the kernel functions that connect, accept, and close TCP connections. The utility uses eBPF features and, therefore, has a very low overhead.

Procedure

  1. Use the following command to start the tracing process: 

    # /usr/share/bcc/tools/tcptracer
Tracing TCP established connections. Ctrl-C to end.
T  PID    COMM        IP SADDR        DADDR       SPORT  DPORT
A  1088   ns-slapd    4  192.0.2.153  192.0.2.1   0      65535
A  845    sshd        4  192.0.2.1    192.0.2.67  22     42302
X  4502   sshd        4  192.0.2.1    192.0.2.67  22     42302
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    Each time the kernel connects, accepts, or closes a connection, tcptracer displays the details of the connections.

  2. Press Ctrl+C to stop the tracing process.

45.12. Tracing IPv4 and IPv6 listen attempts
Link kopieren

The solisten utility traces all IPv4 and IPv6 listen attempts. It traces the attempts including which ultimately fail or the listening program that does not accept the connection. The utility traces functions that the kernel calls when a program wants to listen for TCP connections.

Procedure

  1. Enter the following command to start the tracing process that displays all listen TCP attempts: 

    # /usr/share/bcc/tools/solisten
PID    COMM           PROTO         BACKLOG     PORT     ADDR
3643   nc             TCPv4         1           4242     0.0.0.0
3659   nc             TCPv6         1           4242     2001:db8:1::1
4221   redis-server   TCPv6         128         6379     ::
4221   redis-server   TCPv4         128         6379     0.0.0.0
....
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  2. Press Ctrl+C to stop the tracing process.

45.13. Summarizing the service time of soft interrupts
Link kopieren

The softirqs utility summarizes the time spent servicing soft interrupts (soft IRQs) and shows this time as either totals or histogram distributions. This utility uses the irq:softirq_enter and irq:softirq_exit kernel tracepoints, which is a stable tracing mechanism.

Procedure

  1. Enter the following command to start the tracing soft irq event time: 

    # /usr/share/bcc/tools/softirqs
Tracing soft irq event time... Hit Ctrl-C to end.
^C
SOFTIRQ          TOTAL_usecs
tasklet                  166
block                   9152
net_rx                 12829
rcu                    53140
sched                 182360
timer                 306256
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  2. Press Ctrl+C to stop the tracing process.

45.14. Summarizing packets size and count on a network interface
Link kopieren

The netqtop utility displays statistics about the attributes of received (RX) and transmitted (TX) packets on each network queue of a particular network interface.

The statistics include:

  • Bytes per second (BPS)
  • Packets per second (PPS)
  • The average packet size
  • Total number of packets

To generate these statistics, netqtop traces the kernel functions that perform events of transmitted packets net_dev_start_xmit and received packets netif_receive_skb.

Procedure

  1. Display the number of packets within the range of bytes size of the time interval of 2 seconds: 

    # /usr/share/bcc/tools/netqtop -n enp1s0 -i 2

Fri Jan 31 18:08:55 2023
TX
 QueueID	avg_size   [0, 64)	[64, 512)  [512, 2K)  [2K, 16K)  [16K, 64K)
 0      	0      	0      	0      	0      	0      	0
 Total  	0      	0      	0      	0      	0      	0

RX
 QueueID	avg_size   [0, 64)	[64, 512)  [512, 2K)  [2K, 16K)  [16K, 64K)
 0      	38.0   	1      	0      	0      	0      	0
 Total  	38.0   	1      	0      	0      	0      	0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fri Jan 31 18:08:57 2023
TX
 QueueID	avg_size   [0, 64)	[64, 512)  [512, 2K)  [2K, 16K)  [16K, 64K)
 0      	0      	0      	0      	0      	0      	0
 Total  	0      	0      	0      	0      	0      	0

RX
 QueueID	avg_size   [0, 64)	[64, 512)  [512, 2K)  [2K, 16K)  [16K, 64K)
 0      	38.0   	1      	0      	0      	0      	0
 Total  	38.0   	1      	0      	0      	0      	0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  2. Press Ctrl+C to stop netqtop.

Network devices usually intercept and read packets that their controller is programmed to receive. You can configure the network devices to accept traffic from all MAC addresses in a virtual switch or at the port group level.

You can use this network mode to:

  • Diagnose network connectivity issues
  • Monitor network activity for security reasons
  • Intercept private data-in-transit or intrusion in the network

You can enable this mode for any kind of network device, except InfiniBand.

46.1. Temporarily configuring a device to accept all traffic
Link kopieren

You can use the ip utility to temporary configure a network device to accept all traffic regardless of the MAC addresses.

Procedure

  1. Optional: Display the network interfaces to identify the one for which you want to receive all traffic: 

    # ip address show
1: enp1s0: <NO-CARRIER,BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel state DOWN group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 98:fa:9b:a4:34:09 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Modify the device to enable or disable this property:

    • To enable the accept-all-mac-addresses mode for enp1s0: 

      # ip link set enp1s0 promisc on
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    • To disable the accept-all-mac-addresses mode for enp1s0: 

      # ip link set enp1s0 promisc off
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Verify that the accept-all-mac-addresses mode is enabled: 

    # ip link show enp1s0
1: enp1s0: <NO-CARRIER,BROADCAST,MULTICAST,PROMISC,UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel state DOWN mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 98:fa:9b:a4:34:09 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The PROMISC flag in the device description indicates that the mode is enabled.

You can use the nmcli utility to permanently configure a network device to accept all traffic regardless of the MAC addresses.

Procedure

  1. Optional: Display the network interfaces to identify the one for which you want to receive all traffic: 

    # ip address show
1: enp1s0: <NO-CARRIER,BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel state DOWN group default qlen 1000
    link/ether 98:fa:9b:a4:34:09 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    You can create a new connection, if you do not have any.

  2. Modify the network device to enable or disable this property.

    • To enable the ethernet.accept-all-mac-addresses mode for enp1s0: 

      # nmcli connection modify enp1s0 ethernet.accept-all-mac-addresses yes
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    • To disable the accept-all-mac-addresses mode for enp1s0: 

      # nmcli connection modify enp1s0 ethernet.accept-all-mac-addresses no
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  3. Apply the changes, reactivate the connection: 

    # nmcli connection up enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Verify that the ethernet.accept-all-mac-addresses mode is enabled: 

    # nmcli connection show enp1s0
...
802-3-ethernet.accept-all-mac-addresses:1     (true)
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The 802-3-ethernet.accept-all-mac-addresses: true indicates that the mode is enabled.

Use the nmstatectl utility to configure a device to accept all traffic regardless of the MAC addresses through the Nmstate API. The Nmstate API ensures that, after setting the configuration, the result matches the configuration file. If anything fails, nmstatectl automatically rolls back the changes to avoid leaving the system in an incorrect state.

Prerequisites

  • The nmstate package is installed.
  • The enp1s0.yml file that you used to configure the device is available.

Procedure

  1. Edit the existing enp1s0.yml file for the enp1s0 connection and add the following content to it: 

    ---
interfaces:
  - name: enp1s0
    type: ethernet
    state: up
    accept -all-mac-address: true
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    These settings configure the enp1s0 device to accept all traffic.

  2. Apply the network settings: 

    # nmstatectl apply ~/enp1s0.yml
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Verify that the 802-3-ethernet.accept-all-mac-addresses mode is enabled: 

    # nmstatectl show enp1s0
interfaces:
  - name: enp1s0
    type: ethernet
    state: up
    accept-all-mac-addresses:     true
...
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The 802-3-ethernet.accept-all-mac-addresses: true indicates that the mode is enabled.

Chapter 47. Mirroring a network interface by using nmcli
Link kopieren

Network administrators can use port mirroring to replicate inbound and outbound network traffic being communicated from one network device to another. Mirroring traffic of an interface can be helpful in the following situations:

  • To debug networking issues and tune the network flow
  • To inspect and analyze the network traffic
  • To detect an intrusion

Prerequisites

  • A network interface to mirror the network traffic to.

Procedure

  1. Add a network connection profile that you want to mirror the network traffic from: 

    # nmcli connection add type ethernet ifname enp1s0 con-name enp1s0 autoconnect no
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Attach a qdisc of type prio to enp1s0 for the egress (outgoing) traffic with the 10: handle: 

    # nmcli connection modify enp1s0 +tc.qdisc "root prio handle 10:"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The qdisc set to prio attached without children allows attaching filters.

  3. Add a qdisc for the ingress traffic, with the ffff: handle: 

    # nmcli connection modify enp1s0 +tc.qdisc "ingress handle ffff:"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Add the following filters to match packets on the ingress and egress qdiscs, and to mirror them to enp7s0: 

    # nmcli connection modify enp1s0 +tc.tfilter "parent ffff: matchall action mirred egress mirror dev enp7s0"

# nmcli connection modify enp1s0 +tc.tfilter "parent 10: matchall action mirred egress mirror dev enp7s0"
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The matchall filter matches all packets, and the mirred action redirects packets to destination.

  5. Activate the connection: 

    # nmcli connection up enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  1. Install the tcpdump utility: 

    # yum install tcpdump
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Display the traffic mirrored on the target device (enp7s0): 

    # tcpdump -i enp7s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Network devices can use the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) to advertise their identity, capabilities, and neighbors in a LAN. The nmstate-autoconf utility can use this information to automatically configure local network interfaces.

Important

The nmstate-autoconf utility is provided as a Technology Preview only. Technology Preview features are not supported with Red Hat production Service Level Agreements (SLAs), might not be functionally complete, and Red Hat does not recommend using them for production. These previews provide early access to upcoming product features, enabling customers to test functionality and provide feedback during the development process.

See Technology Preview Features Support Scope on the Red Hat Customer Portal for information about the support scope for Technology Preview features.

The nmstate-autoconf utility uses LLDP to identify the VLAN settings of interfaces connected to a switch to configure local devices.

This procedure assumes the following scenario and that the switch broadcasts the VLAN settings using LLDP:

  • The enp1s0 and enp2s0 interfaces of the RHEL server are connected to switch ports that are configured with VLAN ID 100 and VLAN name prod-net.
  • The enp3s0 interface of the RHEL server is connected to a switch port that is configured with VLAN ID 200 and VLAN name mgmt-net.

The nmstate-autoconf utility then uses this information to create the following interfaces on the server:

  • bond100 - A bond interface with enp1s0 and enp2s0 as ports.
  • prod-net - A VLAN interface on top of bond100 with VLAN ID 100.
  • mgmt-net - A VLAN interface on top of enp3s0 with VLAN ID 200

If you connect multiple network interfaces to different switch ports for which LLDP broadcasts the same VLAN ID, nmstate-autoconf creates a bond with these interfaces and, additionally, configures the common VLAN ID on top of it.

Prerequisites

  • The nmstate package is installed.
  • LLDP is enabled on the network switch.
  • The Ethernet interfaces are up.

Procedure

  1. Enable LLDP on the Ethernet interfaces:

    1. Create a YAML file, for example ~/enable-lldp.yml, with the following content: 

      interfaces:
  - name: enp1s0
    type: ethernet
    lldp:
      enabled: true
  - name: enp2s0
    type: ethernet
    lldp:
      enabled: true
  - name: enp3s0
    type: ethernet
    lldp:
      enabled: true
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Apply the settings to the system: 

      # nmstatectl apply ~/enable-lldp.yml
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Configure the network interfaces using LLDP:

    1. Optional, start a dry-run to display and verify the YAML configuration that nmstate-autoconf generates: 

      # nmstate-autoconf -d enp1s0,enp2s0,enp3s0
---
interfaces:
- name: prod-net
  type: vlan
  state: up
  vlan:
    base-iface: bond100
    id: 100
- name: mgmt-net
  type: vlan
  state: up
  vlan:
    base-iface: enp3s0
    id: 200
- name: bond100
  type: bond
  state: up
  link-aggregation:
    mode: balance-rr
    port:
    - enp1s0
    - enp2s0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    2. Use nmstate-autoconf to generate the configuration based on information received from LLDP, and apply the settings to the system: 

      # nmstate-autoconf enp1s0,enp2s0,enp3s0
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Next steps

Verification

  • Display the settings of the individual interfaces: 

    # nmstatectl show <interface_name>
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 50. Getting started with DPDK
Link kopieren

The data plane development kit (DPDK) provides libraries and network drivers to accelerate packet processing in user space.

Administrators use DPDK, for example, in virtual machines to use Single Root I/O Virtualization (SR-IOV) to reduce latencies and increase I/O throughput.

Note

Red Hat does not support experimental DPDK APIs.

50.1. Installing the dpdk package
Link kopieren

To use DPDK, install the dpdk package.

Procedure

  • Use the yum utility to install the dpdk package: 

    # yum install dpdk
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Chapter 51. Getting started with TIPC
Link kopieren

Transparent Inter-process Communication (TIPC), which is also known as Cluster Domain Sockets, is an Inter-process Communication (IPC) service for cluster-wide operation.

Applications that are running in a high-available and dynamic cluster environment have special needs. The number of nodes in a cluster can vary, routers can fail, and, due to load balancing considerations, functionality can be moved to different nodes in the cluster. TIPC minimizes the effort by application developers to deal with such situations, and maximizes the chance that they are handled in a correct and optimal way. Additionally, TIPC provides a more efficient and fault-tolerant communication than general protocols, such as TCP.

51.1. The architecture of TIPC
Link kopieren

TIPC is a layer between applications using TIPC and a packet transport service (bearer), and spans the level of transport, network, and signaling link layers. However, TIPC can use a different transport protocol as bearer, so that, for example, a TCP connection can serve as a bearer for a TIPC signaling link.

TIPC supports the following bearers:

  • Ethernet
  • InfiniBand
  • UDP protocol

TIPC provides a reliable transfer of messages between TIPC ports, that are the endpoints of all TIPC communication.

The following is a diagram of the TIPC architecture:

TIPC architectural overview
View larger image
TIPC architectural overview

51.2. Loading the tipc module when the system boots
Link kopieren

Before you can use the TIPC protocol, you must load the tipc kernel module. You can configure Red Hat Enterprise Linux to automatically load this kernel module automatically when the system boots.

Procedure

  1. Create the /etc/modules-load.d/tipc.conf file with the following content: 

    tipc
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Restart the systemd-modules-load service to load the module without rebooting the system: 

    # systemctl start systemd-modules-load
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

Verification

  • Use the following command to verify that RHEL loaded the tipc module: 

    # lsmod | grep tipc
tipc    311296  0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    If the command shows no entry for the tipc module, RHEL failed to load it.

51.3. Creating a TIPC network
Link kopieren

To create a TIPC network, perform this procedure on each host that should join the TIPC network.

Important

The commands configure the TIPC network only temporarily. To permanently configure TIPC on a node, use the commands of this procedure in a script, and configure RHEL to execute that script when the system boots.

Prerequisites

Procedure

  1. Optional: Set a unique node identity, such as a UUID or the node’s host name: 

    # tipc node set identity host_name
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    The identity can be any unique string consisting of a maximum 16 letters and numbers.

    You cannot set or change an identity after this step.

  2. Add a bearer. For example, to use Ethernet as media and enp0s1 device as physical bearer device, enter: 

    # tipc bearer enable media eth device enp1s0
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
  3. Optional: For redundancy and better performance, attach further bearers using the command from the previous step. You can configure up to three bearers, but not more than two on the same media.
  4. Repeat all previous steps on each node that should join the TIPC network.

Verification

  1. Display the link status for cluster members: 

    # tipc link list
broadcast-link: up
5254006b74be:enp1s0-525400df55d1:enp1s0: up
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

    This output indicates that the link between bearer enp1s0 on node 5254006b74be and bearer enp1s0 on node 525400df55d1 is up.

  2. Display the TIPC publishing table: 

    # tipc nametable show
Type       Lower      Upper      Scope    Port       Node
0          1795222054 1795222054 cluster  0          5254006b74be
0          3741353223 3741353223 cluster  0          525400df55d1
1          1          1          node     2399405586 5254006b74be
2          3741353223 3741353223 node     0          5254006b74be
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap
    • The two entries with service type 0 indicate that two nodes are members of this cluster.
    • The entry with service type 1 represents the built-in topology service tracking service.
    • The entry with service type 2 displays the link as seen from the issuing node. The range limit 3741353223 represents the peer endpoint’s address (a unique 32-bit hash value based on the node identity) in decimal format.

Usually, a virtual machine (VM) has only one interface that is configurable by DHCP. However, DHCP cannot configure VMs with multiple network entities, such as interfaces, IP subnets, and IP addresses. Additionally, you cannot apply settings when the VM instance is running. To solve this runtime configuration issue, the nm-cloud-setup utility automatically retrieves configuration information from the metadata server of the cloud service provider and updates the network configuration of the host. The utility automatically picks up multiple network interfaces, multiple IP addresses, or IP subnets on one interface and helps to reconfigure the network of the running VM instance.

52.1. Configuring and pre-deploying nm-cloud-setup
Link kopieren

To enable and configure network interfaces in public clouds, run nm-cloud-setup as a timer and service.

Note

On Red Hat Enterprise Linux On Demand and AWS golden images, nm-cloud-setup is already enabled and no action is required.

Prerequisites

  • A network connection exists.

  • The connection uses DHCP.

    By default, NetworkManager creates a connection profile which uses DHCP. If no profile was created because you set the no-auto-default parameter in /etc/NetworkManager/NetworkManager.conf, create this initial connection manually.

Procedure

  1. Install the nm-cloud-setup package: 

    # yum install NetworkManager-cloud-setup
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  2. Create and run the snap-in file for the nm-cloud-setup service:

    1. Use the following command to start editing the snap-in file: 

      # systemctl edit nm-cloud-setup.service
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      It is important to either start the service explicitly or reboot the system to make configuration settings effective.

    2. Use the systemd snap-in file to configure the cloud provider in nm-cloud-setup. For example, to use Amazon EC2, enter: 

      [Service]
Environment=NM_CLOUD_SETUP_EC2=yes
      Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

      You can set the following environment variables to enable the cloud provide you use:

      • NM_CLOUD_SETUP_ALIYUN for Alibaba Cloud (Aliyun)
      • NM_CLOUD_SETUP_AZURE for Microsoft Azure
      • NM_CLOUD_SETUP_EC2 for Amazon EC2 (AWS)
      • NM_CLOUD_SETUP_GCP for Google Cloud Platform(GCP)
    3. Save the file and quit the editor.

  3. Reload the systemd configuration: 

    # systemctl daemon-reload
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  4. Enable and start the nm-cloud-setup service: 

    # systemctl enable --now nm-cloud-setup.service
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

  5. Enable and start the nm-cloud-setup timer: 

    # systemctl enable --now nm-cloud-setup.timer
    Copy to Clipboard Toggle word wrap

The instance metadata service (IMDS) in Amazon EC2 allows you to manage permissions to access instance metadata of a running Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) EC2 instance. The RHEL EC2 instance uses IMDS version 2 (IMDSv2), a session-oriented method. By using the nm-cloud-setup utility, administrators can reconfigure the network and automatically update the configuration of running RHEL EC2 instances. The nm-cloud-setup utility handles IMDSv2 API calls by using IMDSv2 tokens without any user intervention.

  • IMDS runs on a link-local address 169.254.169.254 for providing access to native applications on a RHEL EC2 instance.
  • After you have specified and configured IMDSv2 for each RHEL EC2 instance for applications and users, you can no longer access IMDSv1.
  • By using IMDSv2, the RHEL EC2 instance maintains metadata without using the IAM role while remaining accessible through the IAM role.
  • When the RHEL EC2 instance boots, the nm-cloud-setup utility automatically runs to fetch the EC2 instance API access token for using the RHEL EC2 instance API.
Note

Use the IMDSv2 token as an HTTP header to check the details of the EC2 environment.

Legal Notice
Link kopieren

Copyright © 2025 Red Hat, Inc.
The text of and illustrations in this document are licensed by Red Hat under a Creative Commons Attribution–Share Alike 3.0 Unported license ("CC-BY-SA"). An explanation of CC-BY-SA is available at http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/. In accordance with CC-BY-SA, if you distribute this document or an adaptation of it, you must provide the URL for the original version.
Red Hat, as the licensor of this document, waives the right to enforce, and agrees not to assert, Section 4d of CC-BY-SA to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law.
Red Hat, Red Hat Enterprise Linux, the Shadowman logo, the Red Hat logo, JBoss, OpenShift, Fedora, the Infinity logo, and RHCE are trademarks of Red Hat, Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
Linux® is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States and other countries.
Java® is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
XFS® is a trademark of Silicon Graphics International Corp. or its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries.
MySQL® is a registered trademark of MySQL AB in the United States, the European Union and other countries.
Node.js® is an official trademark of Joyent. Red Hat is not formally related to or endorsed by the official Joyent Node.js open source or commercial project.
The OpenStack® Word Mark and OpenStack logo are either registered trademarks/service marks or trademarks/service marks of the OpenStack Foundation, in the United States and other countries and are used with the OpenStack Foundation's permission. We are not affiliated with, endorsed or sponsored by the OpenStack Foundation, or the OpenStack community.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Nach oben
Red Hat logoGithubredditYoutubeTwitter

Lernen

Testen, kaufen und verkaufen

Communitys

Über Red Hat Dokumentation

Wir helfen Red Hat Benutzern, mit unseren Produkten und Diensten innovativ zu sein und ihre Ziele zu erreichen – mit Inhalten, denen sie vertrauen können. Entdecken Sie unsere neuesten Updates.

Mehr Inklusion in Open Source

Red Hat hat sich verpflichtet, problematische Sprache in unserem Code, unserer Dokumentation und unseren Web-Eigenschaften zu ersetzen. Weitere Einzelheiten finden Sie in Red Hat Blog.

Über Red Hat

Wir liefern gehärtete Lösungen, die es Unternehmen leichter machen, plattform- und umgebungsübergreifend zu arbeiten, vom zentralen Rechenzentrum bis zum Netzwerkrand.

Theme

© 2025 Red Hat